De musica

Augustine of Hippo · Philosophical Works
1. 1. 1. Magister: Modus, qui pes est?
1. 1. 1. Teacher: The word "modus"—what foot is it?
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Pyrrhichius.
Student: A pyrrhic.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Quot temporum est?
Teacher: How many time-units does it have?
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Duum.
Student: Two.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Bonus, qui pes est?
Teacher: And "bonus"—what foot is it?
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Idem qui et modus.
Student: The same as "modus."
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Hoc est ergo modus, quod bonus.
Teacher: Then "modus" is the same thing as "bonus."
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Non.
Student: No.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Cur ergo idem?
Teacher: Then why the same?
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Quia idem in sono, in significatione aliud.
Student: Because they are the same in sound but different in meaning.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Concedis ergo eumdem sonum esse cum dicimus, modus, et, bonus.
Teacher: So you grant that the sound is the same when we say "modus" and "bonus."
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Litterarum sono ista video discrepare, caetera autem paria esse.
Student: As far as the sound of the letters goes I see that they differ, but in everything else they are equal.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Quid? cum enuntiamus, pone verbum, et pone adverbium; praeter id quod significatio diversa est, nihil tibi videtur sonus distare?
Teacher: Now then, when we pronounce "pone" as a verb and "pone" as an adverb—apart from the difference in meaning, does the sound seem to you to differ at all?
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Distat omnino.
Student: It differs entirely.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Unde distat, cum et iisdem temporibus utrumque, et iisdem litteris constet?
Teacher: Wherein does it differ, since both consist of the same time-units and the same letters?
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Eo distat quod in diversis locis habent acumen.
Student: It differs in this, that they carry the accent on different syllables.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Cuius tandem artis est ista dignoscere?
Teacher: And to what art, in the end, does it belong to discern such things?
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: A grammaticis haec audire soleo, et ibi ea didici; sed utrum hoc eiusdem artis sit proprium, an aliunde usurpatum, nescio.
Student: I am used to hearing these things from the grammarians, and that is where I learned them; but whether this is proper to that same art, or borrowed from elsewhere, I do not know.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Post ista videbimus: nunc illud quaero, utrum si tympanum vel chordam his percuterem tam raptim et velociter quam cum enuntiamus modus, aut bonus; agnosceres et tibi eadem tempora esse, an non.
Teacher: We will look into that later. For now I ask this: if I were to strike a drum or a string as quickly and rapidly as we say "modus" or "bonus," would you recognize that they had the same time-units, or not?
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Agnoscerem.
Student: I would recognize it.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Vocares ergo pedem pyrrhichium.
Teacher: Then you would call it a pyrrhic foot.
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Vocarem.
Student: I would.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Nomen huius pedis a quo, nisi a grammatico, didicisti?
Teacher: And from whom did you learn the name of this foot, if not from the grammarian?
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Fateor.
Student: I admit it.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Ergo de omnibus huiusmodi sonis grammaticus iudicabit; an per teipsum istos pulsus didicisti, sed nomen quod imponeres, a grammatico audieras?
Teacher: So will the grammarian be the judge of all sounds of this kind? Or did you learn these beats by yourself, and merely hear from the grammarian the name to give them?
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: That is so.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Et ausus es nomen quod te grammatica docuit, transferre ad eam rem, quam non pertinere ad grammaticam confiteris?
Teacher: And did you dare to transfer the name that grammar taught you to a thing that you confess does not belong to grammar?
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Video non ob aliud pedi nomen impositum, quam propter temporum dimensionem; quam ubicumque cognovero, eo transferre illud vocabulum cur non audeo? Sed etsi alia vocabula sunt imponenda, cum eiusdem dimensionis soni sunt, sed ad grammaticos tamen non pertinent; quid mihi est de nominibus laborare, cum res aperta sit?
Student: I see that the name was given to the foot for no other reason than the measure of its time-units; so wherever I recognize that measure, why should I not dare to transfer the term to it? Yet even if other names must be given—when sounds have the same measure but do not belong to the grammarians—why should I trouble myself over names, when the thing is plain?
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Nec ego id volo: sed tamen cum videas innumerabilia genera sonorum, in quibus certae dimensiones observari possunt, quae genera fatemur grammaticae disciplinae non esse tribuenda; nonne censes esse aliam aliquam disciplinam, quae quidquid in huiusmodi sit vocibus numerosum artificiosumque, contineat?
Teacher: Nor do I wish that. But still, when you see countless kinds of sounds in which fixed measures can be observed—kinds that, as we admit, are not to be assigned to the discipline of grammar—do you not think there is some other discipline that contains whatever is rhythmical and crafted in sounds of this kind?
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Probabile mihi videtur.
Student: It seems probable to me.
deMus.1.1.1
Magister: Quod eius esse nomen existimas? Nam opinor non tibi novum esse omnipotentiam quamdam canendi Musis solere concedi. Haec est, nisi fallor, illa quae Musica nominatur.
Teacher: What do you suppose its name is? For I think it is not news to you that a certain all-power of song is usually granted to the Muses. This, unless I am mistaken, is what is called music.
deMus.1.1.1
Discipulus: Et ego hanc esse existimo.
Student: I think so too.
deMus.1.1.1
1. 2. 2. Magister: Sed iam placet nobis de nomine minime laborare: modo inquiramus, si videtur, quam diligentissime possumus, omnem huius quaecumque est disciplinae vim atque rationem.
1. 2. 2. Teacher: But now let us decide to trouble ourselves not at all about the name. Let us simply inquire, if you please, as carefully as we can, into the whole power and account of this discipline, whatever it is.
deMus.1.2.2
Discipulus: Inquiramus sane: nam hoc totum quidquid est, multum nosse desidero.
Student: Let us inquire by all means; for I greatly desire to know all of this, whatever it is.
deMus.1.2.2
Magister: Defini ergo musicam.
Teacher: Then define music.
deMus.1.2.2
Discipulus: Non audeo.
Student: I do not dare.
deMus.1.2.2
Magister: Potes saltem definitionem meam probare?
Teacher: Can you at least approve my definition?
deMus.1.2.2
Discipulus: Experibor, si dixeris.
Student: I will try, if you state it.
deMus.1.2.2
Magister: Musica est scientia bene modulandi . An tibi non videtur?
Teacher: Music is the science of measuring well. Does it not seem so to you?
deMus.1.2.2
Discipulus: Videretur fortasse, si mihi liqueret quid sit ipsa modulatio.
Student: It might seem so, perhaps, if it were clear to me what this "measuring" itself is.
deMus.1.2.2
Magister: Numquidnam hoc verbum quod modulari dicitur, aut numquam audisti, aut uspiam nisi in eo quod ad cantandum saltandumve pertineret?
Teacher: This word, "to measure" (modulari)—have you never heard it, or heard it anywhere except in connection with singing or dancing?
deMus.1.2.2
Discipulus: Ita est quidem: sed quia video modulari a modo esse dictum, cum in omnibus bene factis modus servandus sit, et multa etiam in canendo ac saltando quamvis delectent, vilissima sint; volo plenissime accipere quid prorsus sit ipsa modulatio, quo uno pene verbo tantae disciplinae definitio continetur. Non enim tale aliquid hic discendum est, quale quilibet cantores histrionesque noverunt.
Student: That is indeed so. But because I see that "modulari" is derived from "modus" (measure), and that in all well-made things a measure must be kept—while many things in singing and dancing, however much they please, are utterly worthless—I want to grasp most fully what this "measuring" itself really is, since in this almost single word the definition of so great a discipline is contained. For what is to be learned here is not the sort of thing that any singers and stage-players know.
deMus.1.2.2
Magister: Illud superius, quod in omnibus etiam praeter musicam factis modus servandus est, et tamen in musica modulatio dicitur, non te moveat; nisi forte ignoras dictionem oratoris proprie nominari.
Teacher: That earlier point—that a measure must be kept even in things done outside of music, and yet that in music it is called "modulation"—need not trouble you, unless perhaps you are unaware that the delivery of an orator is properly called "diction" (dictio).
deMus.1.2.2
Discipulus: Non ignoro: sed quorsum istuc?
Student: I am aware of it; but where is this leading?
deMus.1.2.2
Magister: Quia et puer tuus quamlibet impolitissimus et rusticissimus, cum vel uno verbo interroganti tibi respondet, fateris eum aliquid dicere?
Teacher: To this: that even your servant, however unpolished and rustic, when he answers you with so much as a single word as you ask him a question—do you grant that he is saying something?
deMus.1.2.2
Discipulus: Fateor.
Student: I grant it.
deMus.1.2.2
Magister: Ergo et ille orator est?
Teacher: Is he, then, an orator?
deMus.1.2.2
Discipulus: Non.
Student: No.
deMus.1.2.2
Magister: Non igitur dictione usus est cum aliquid dixerit, quamvis dictionem a dicendo dictam esse fateamur.
Teacher: Then he did not use "diction" when he said something, although we grant that "diction" is derived from "saying" (dicere).
deMus.1.2.2
Discipulus: Concedo: sed et hoc quo pertineat requiro.
Student: I concede it; but I ask too where this is leading.
deMus.1.2.2
Magister: Ad id scilicet ut intellegas modulationem posse ad solam musicam pertinere, quamvis modus unde flexum verbum est, possit etiam in aliis rebus esse: quemadmodum dictio proprie tribuitur oratoribus, quamvis dicat aliquid omnis qui loquitur, et a dicendo dictio nominata sit.
Teacher: To this, of course: that you may understand that "modulation" can belong to music alone, even though "measure," from which the word is bent, can be present in other things as well—just as "diction" is properly assigned to orators, although everyone who speaks says something, and "diction" is named from "saying."
deMus.1.2.2
Discipulus: Iam intellego.
Student: Now I understand.
deMus.1.2.2
1. 2. 3. Magister: Illud ergo quod abs te postea dictum est, multa esse in canendo et saltando vilia, in quibus si modulationis nomen accipimus, pene divina ista disciplina vilescit; cautissime omnino abs te animadversum est. Itaque discutiamus primum quid sit modulari, deinde quid sit bene modulari: non enim frustra est definitioni additum. Postremo etiam quod ibi scientia posita est, non est contemnendum: nam his tribus, nisi fallor, definitio illa perfecta est.
1. 2. 3. Teacher: Then that point you made afterward—that there are many worthless things in singing and dancing, and that if we take the name of "modulation" to apply to them this almost divine discipline is cheapened—was observed by you very cautiously indeed. And so let us examine first what it is to measure, and then what it is to measure well; for it was not pointlessly added to the definition. Finally, the fact that "science" is set down there must not be slighted either; for by these three terms, unless I am mistaken, that definition is made complete.
deMus.1.2.3
Discipulus: Ita fiat.
Student: Let it be so.
deMus.1.2.3
Magister: Igitur quoniam fatemur modulationem a modo esse nominatam; numquidnam tibi videtur metuendum ne aut excedatur modus, aut non impleatur nisi in rebus quae motu aliquo fiunt? aut si nihil moveatur, possumus formidare ne praeter modum aliquid fiat?
Teacher: So, since we admit that "modulation" is named from "measure," does it seem to you that we need fear lest the measure be either exceeded or not fulfilled, except in things that come about by some motion? Or, if nothing is moved, can we dread that something may be done apart from measure?
deMus.1.2.3
Discipulus: Nullo pacto.
Student: In no way.
deMus.1.2.3
Magister: Ergo modulatio non incongrue dicitur movendi quaedam peritia, vel certe qua fit ut bene aliquid moveatur. Non enim possumus dicere bene moveri aliquid, si modum non servat.
Teacher: Then "modulation" is not unfittingly called a certain skill in moving, or at any rate that by which it comes about that something is moved well. For we cannot say that anything is moved well if it does not keep a measure.
deMus.1.2.3
Discipulus: Non possumus quidem: sed necesse erit rursus istam modulationem in omnibus bene factis intellegere. Nihil quippe nisi bene movendo, bene fieri video.
Student: We cannot, indeed; but then we will be forced again to understand this "modulation" as present in all well-made things. For I see that nothing is well done except by moving well.
deMus.1.2.3
Magister: Quid si forte ista omnia per musicam fiant, quamvis modulationis nomen in cuiuscemodi organis magis tritum sit, nec immerito? Nam credo videri tibi aliud esse tornatum aliquid ligneum, vel argenteum, vel cuiusce materiae; aliud autem ipsum motum artificis, cum illa tornantur.
Teacher: What if perhaps all these things come about through music, even though the name of "modulation" is more in use—and not undeservedly—in instruments of every kind? For I believe it seems to you that one thing is some object turned on a lathe, of wood or silver or whatever material, and another the very motion of the craftsman when those things are being turned.
deMus.1.2.3
Discipulus: Assentior multum differre.
Student: I agree that they differ greatly.
deMus.1.2.3
Magister: Numquidnam ergo ipse motus propter se appetitur, et non propter id quod vult esse tornatum?
Teacher: So is the motion itself sought for its own sake, and not for the sake of the thing that is to be turned on the lathe?
deMus.1.2.3
Discipulus: Manifestum est.
Student: That is clear.
deMus.1.2.3
Magister: Quid? si membra non ob aliud moveret, nisi ut pulchre ac decore moverentur, eum facere aliud nisi saltare diceremus?
Teacher: Again: if someone moved his limbs for no other reason than that they might be moved beautifully and gracefully, would we say he was doing anything but dancing?
deMus.1.2.3
Discipulus: Ita videtur.
Student: So it seems.
deMus.1.2.3
Magister: Quando ergo censes aliquam rem praestare et quasi dominari? cum propter seipsam, an cum propter aliud appetitur?
Teacher: When, then, do you judge that some thing excels and, as it were, holds the mastery—when it is sought for its own sake, or when for the sake of something else?
deMus.1.2.3
Discipulus: Quis negat cum propter seipsam?
Student: Who denies that it is when it is sought for its own sake?
deMus.1.2.3
Magister: Repete nunc illud superius quod de modulatione diximus: nam ita eam posueramus, quasi quamdam movendi esse peritiam, et vide ubi magis habere sedem debeat hoc nomen: in eo motu qui velut liber est, id est propter se ipse appetitur, et per se ipse delectat; an in eo qui servit quodammodo: nam quasi serviunt omnia quae non sibi sunt, sed ad aliquid aliud referuntur.
Teacher: Now take up again what we said earlier about modulation; for we had set it down as a kind of skill in moving. See where this name ought rather to have its seat: in that motion which is, as it were, free—that is, sought for its own sake and pleasing of itself—or in that which is in a way servile. For all things that do not exist for themselves but are referred to something else are, as it were, servile.
deMus.1.2.3
Discipulus: In eo scilicet qui propter se appetitur.
Student: In that one, of course, which is sought for its own sake.
deMus.1.2.3
Magister: Ergo scientiam modulandi iam probabile est esse scientiam bene movendi; ita ut motus per se ipse appetatur, atque ob hoc per se ipse delectet.
Teacher: Then it is now probable that the science of measuring is the science of moving well, in such a way that the motion is sought for its own sake and on that account pleases of itself.
deMus.1.2.3
Discipulus: Probabile sane.
Student: Probable indeed.
deMus.1.2.3
1. 3. 4. Magister: Cur ergo additum est, bene; cum iam ipsa modulatio nisi bene moveatur, esse non possit?
1. 3. 4. Teacher: Then why was "well" added, since modulation itself cannot exist unless something is moved well?
deMus.1.3.4
Discipulus: Nescio, et quemadmodum mihi ereptum sit ignoro: nam hoc requirendum animo haeserat.
Student: I do not know, and I cannot tell how it slipped away from me; for this question had stuck in my mind as something to be asked.
deMus.1.3.4
Magister: Poterat omnino nulla de hoc verbo controversia fieri, ut iam musicam sublato eo quod positum est, bene, tantum scientiam modulandi definiremus.
Teacher: There could be no controversy at all about this word, so that, removing the "well" that was set down, we would define music simply as the science of measuring.
deMus.1.3.4
Discipulus: Quis enim ferat, si enodare totum ita velis?
Student: Who indeed would put up with it, if you wanted to unravel the whole thing that way?
deMus.1.3.4
Magister: Musica est scientia bene movendi. Sed quia bene moveri iam dici potest, quidquid numerose servatis temporum atque intervallorum dimensionibus movetur (iam enim delectat, et ob hoc modulatio non incongrue iam vocatur); fieri autem potest, ut ista numerositas atque dimensio delectet, quando non opus est; ut si quis suavissime canens, et pulchre saltans, velit eo ipso lascivire, cum res severitatem desiderat: non bene utique numerosa modulatione utitur; id est ea motione quae iam bona, ex eo quia numerosa est, dici potest, male ille, id est incongruenter utitur. Unde aliud est modulari, aliud bene modulari. Nam modulatio ad quemvis cantorem, tantum qui non erret in illis dimensionibus vocum ac sonorum; bona vero modulatio ad hanc liberalem disciplinam, id est ad musicam, pertinere arbitranda est. Quod si nec illa bona tibi motio videtur, ex eo quia inepta est, quamvis artificiose numerosam esse fateare; teneamus illud nostrum, quod ubique servandum est, ne certamen verbi, re satis elucente, nos torqueat; nihilque curemus, utrum musica modulandi, an bene modulandi scientia describatur.
Teacher: Music is the science of moving well. But because anything can already be said to be moved well that is moved rhythmically, keeping the measures of time-units and intervals (for it already pleases, and on this account is now not unfittingly called modulation), it can happen that this rhythm and measure pleases when it ought not—as when someone, singing most sweetly and dancing beautifully, wants for that very reason to be wanton when the matter calls for seriousness. He certainly is not using rhythmical modulation well; that is, he is using badly, that is unfittingly, the motion that can already be called good because it is rhythmical. Hence it is one thing to measure, another to measure well. For modulation is to be reckoned to belong to any singer who only does not err in those measures of voice and sound, but good modulation belongs to this liberal discipline, that is, to music. But if even that motion does not seem good to you, because it is inept—though you admit it is artfully rhythmical—let us hold to that principle of ours, to be kept everywhere, that a quarrel over a word may not torment us when the thing is clear enough; and let us not care at all whether music is described as the science of measuring or of measuring well.
deMus.1.3.4
Discipulus: Amo quidem rixas verborum praeterire atque contemnere, non tamen mihi displicet ista distinctio.
Student: I do indeed love to pass over and despise quarrels of words; yet this distinction does not displease me.
deMus.1.3.4
1. 4. 5. Magister: Restat ut quaeramus cur sit in definitione scientia.
1. 4. 5. Teacher: It remains for us to ask why "science" is in the definition.
deMus.1.4.5
Discipulus: Ita fiat: nam hoc flagitare ordinem memini.
Student: Let it be so; for I remember that the order demands this.
deMus.1.4.5
Magister: Responde igitur, utrum tibi videatur bene modulari vocem luscinia verna parte anni: nam et numerosus est et suavissimus ille cantus, et, nisi fallor, tempori congruit.
Teacher: Answer, then: does it seem to you that the nightingale measures its voice well in the spring part of the year? For that song is both rhythmical and most sweet, and, unless I am mistaken, it suits the season.
deMus.1.4.5
Discipulus: Videtur omnino.
Student: So it certainly seems.
deMus.1.4.5
Magister: Numquidnam liberalis huius disciplinae perita est?
Teacher: Is it skilled in this liberal discipline?
deMus.1.4.5
Discipulus: Non.
Student: No.
deMus.1.4.5
Magister: Vides igitur nomen scientiae definitioni pernecessarium.
Teacher: You see, then, that the word "science" is altogether necessary to the definition.
deMus.1.4.5
Discipulus: Video prorsus.
Student: I see it plainly.
deMus.1.4.5
Magister: Dic mihi ergo, quaeso te; nonne tales tibi omnes videntur, qualis illa luscinia est, qui sensu quodam ducti bene canunt, hoc est numerose id faciunt ac suaviter, quamvis interrogati de ipsis numeris, vel de intervallis acutarum graviumque vocum, respondere non possint?
Teacher: Tell me, then, I beg you: do not all those seem to you like that nightingale who, led by a kind of instinct, sing well—that is, do so rhythmically and sweetly—even though, when questioned about the numbers themselves, or about the intervals of high and low notes, they cannot answer?
deMus.1.4.5
Discipulus: Simillimos eos puto.
Student: I think they are very much alike.
deMus.1.4.5
Magister: Quid? ii qui illos sine ista scientia libenter audiunt; cum videamus elephantos, ursos, aliaque nonnulla genera bestiarum ad cantus moveri, avesque ipsas delectari suis vocibus (non enim nullo extra proposito commodo tam impense id agerent sine quadam libidine); nonne pecoribus comparandi sunt?
Teacher: And what of those who gladly listen to such singers without that science? Since we see elephants, bears, and several other kinds of beasts moved by song, and the very birds delighting in their own voices (for they would not do this so intently, without any external advantage in view, were there not some pleasure in it)—are they not to be compared to cattle?
deMus.1.4.5
Discipulus: Censeo: sed pene in omne genus humanum tendit haec contumelia.
Student: I think so; but this reproach reaches almost the whole human race.
deMus.1.4.5
Magister: Non est quod putas. Nam magni viri, etsi musicam nesciunt, aut congruere plebi volunt, quae non multum a pecoribus distat, et cuius ingens est numerus, quod modestissime ac prudentissime faciunt (sed de hoc nunc disserendi locus non est); aut post magnas curas relaxandi ac reparandi animi gratia moderatissime ab iis aliquid voluptatis assumitur. Quam interdum sic capere modestissimum est; ab ea vero capi vel interdum, turpe atque indecorum est.
Teacher: It is not as you think. For great men, even if they do not know music, either wish to accommodate the common people, who differ little from cattle and whose number is enormous—which they do most modestly and prudently (but this is not the place to discuss it now)—or, after great cares, for the sake of relaxing and restoring the mind, take some pleasure from these things most temperately. To enjoy such pleasure now and then is most modest; but to be captivated by it, even now and then, is base and unseemly.
deMus.1.4.5
1. 4. 6. Discipulus: Non.
1. 4. 6. Student: No.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Quid igitur distant?
Teacher: How, then, do they differ?
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Quod in istis artem quamdam esse video, in illa vero solam naturam.
Student: In that in these people I see there is a certain art, but in the nightingale only nature.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Verisimile dicis; sed ars tibi videtur ista esse dicenda, etiamsi quadam imitatione id faciunt?
Teacher: What you say is verisimilar; but does it seem to you that this is to be called art, even if they do it by a kind of imitation?
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Cur non? Nam video tantum valere in artibus imitationem, ut, ea sublata, omnes pene perimantur. Praebent enim se magistri ad imitandum, et hoc ipsum est quod vocant docere.
Student: Why not? For I see that imitation is so important in the arts that, if it were removed, almost all of them would perish. For teachers offer themselves to be imitated, and this very thing is what they call teaching.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Videtur tibi ars ratio esse quaedam, et ii qui arte utuntur, ratione uti: an aliter putas?
Teacher: Does it seem to you that art is a kind of reason, and that those who use art use reason? Or do you think otherwise?
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Videtur.
Student: It seems so.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Quisquis igitur ratione uti non potest, arte non utitur.
Teacher: Whoever, then, cannot use reason does not use art.
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Et hoc concedo.
Student: This too I concede.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Censesne muta animalia, quae etiam irrationalia dicuntur, uti posse ratione?
Teacher: Do you think dumb animals, which are also called irrational, can use reason?
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Nullo modo.
Student: In no way.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Aut igitur picas et psittacos et corvos rationalia esse dicturus es animalia, aut imitationem nomine artis temere vocasti. Videmus enim has aves et multa canere ac sonare quodam humano usu, et nonnisi imitando facere: nisi tu aliter credis.
Teacher: Then either you will say that magpies, parrots, and crows are rational animals, or you have rashly called imitation by the name of art. For we see these birds sing and utter many things after a human fashion, and do so only by imitating—unless you believe otherwise.
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Quomodo hoc confeceris, et quantum contra responsionem meam valeat, nondum plane intellego.
Student: How you have brought this about, and how far it tells against my answer, I do not yet plainly understand.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Quaesiveram ex te, utrum citharistas et tibicines, et huiusmodi aliud genus hominum, artem diceres habere, etiamsi id quod in canendo faciunt, imitatione assecuti sunt. Dixisti esse artem, tantumque id valere affirmasti, ut omnes pene tibi artes periclitari viderentur imitatione sublata. Ex quo iam colligi potest, omnem qui imitando assequitur aliquid, arte uti; etiamsi forte non omnis qui arte utitur, imitando eam perceperit. At si omnis imitatio ars est, et ars omnis ratio; omnis imitatio ratio: ratione autem non utitur irrationale animal; non igitur habet artem: habet autem imitationem; non est igitur ars imitatio.
Teacher: I had asked you whether you would say that lyre-players and flute-players, and other men of this kind, have an art, even if what they do in playing they attained by imitation. You said it was an art, and you affirmed that imitation is so important that, if it were removed, almost all the arts seemed to you to be in peril. From this it can now be gathered that everyone who attains something by imitating uses an art—even if perhaps not everyone who uses an art has learned it by imitating. But if all imitation is art, and all art is reason, then all imitation is reason. Yet an irrational animal does not use reason; therefore it does not have art. But it has imitation; therefore imitation is not art.
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Ego multas artes imitatione constare dixi, non ipsam imitationem artem vocavi.
Student: I said that many arts consist of imitation; I did not call imitation itself an art.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Quae igitur artes imitatione constant, non eas censes ratione constare?
Teacher: The arts, then, that consist of imitation—do you not judge that they consist of reason?
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Imo utroque puto eas constare.
Student: On the contrary, I think they consist of both.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Nihil repugno, sed scientiam in quo ponis; in ratione, an in imitatione?
Teacher: I do not object; but in which do you place science—in reason, or in imitation?
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Et hoc in utroque.
Student: This too in both.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Ergo scientiam illis avibus dabis, quibus imitationem non adimis.
Teacher: Then you will grant science to those birds from which you do not withhold imitation.
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Non dabo: ita enim dixi in utroque esse scientiam, ut in sola imitatione esse non possit.
Student: I will not grant it; for I said that science is in both in such a way that it cannot be in imitation alone.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Quid? in sola ratione videtur tibi esse posse?
Teacher: Well then, does it seem to you that it can be in reason alone?
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Videtur.
Student: It seems so.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Aliud igitur putas esse artem, aliud scientiam. Siquidem scientia et in sola ratione esse potest, ars autem rationi iungit imitationem.
Teacher: Then you think that art is one thing and science another, since science can be in reason alone, but art joins imitation to reason.
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Non video esse consequens. Non enim omnes, sed multas artes dixeram, simul ratione atque imitatione constare.
Student: I do not see that this follows. For I had said that not all the arts, but many, consist of reason and imitation together.
deMus.1.4.6
Magister: Quid? scientiam vocabisne etiam illam, quae his duobus simul constat; an ei solam partem rationis attribues?
Teacher: Well then, will you also call "science" that which consists of these two together, or will you attribute to it only the part that is reason?
deMus.1.4.6
Discipulus: Quid enim me prohibet vocare scientiam, cum rationi adiungitur imitatio?
Student: For what prevents me from calling it science, when imitation is joined to reason?
deMus.1.4.6
1. 4. 7. Magister: Quoniam nunc agimus de citharista et tibicine, id est de musicis rebus; volo mihi dicas, utrum corpori tribuendum sit, id est obtemperationi cuidam corporis, si quid isti homines imitatione faciunt.
1. 4. 7. Teacher: Since we are now treating of the lyre-player and the flute-player, that is, of musical matters, I want you to tell me whether what these men do by imitation is to be attributed to the body—that is, to a certain compliance of the body.
deMus.1.4.7
Discipulus: Ego istam et animo simul et corpori tribuendam puto: quamquam idipsum verbum satis proprie abs te positum est, quod obtemperationem corporis appellasti: non enim obtemperare nisi animo potest.
Student: I think it is to be attributed to mind and body together—though the very word you used is set down quite properly, when you called it a compliance of the body; for the body can comply with nothing but the mind.
deMus.1.4.7
Magister: Video te cautissime imitationem non soli corpori voluisse concedere. Sed numquid scientiam negabis ad solum animum pertinere?
Teacher: I see that you very cautiously refused to grant imitation to the body alone. But will you deny that science belongs to the mind alone?
deMus.1.4.7
Discipulus: Quis hoc negaverit?
Student: Who would deny it?
deMus.1.4.7
Magister: Nullo modo igitur scientiam in sonis nervorum et tibiarum, simul et rationi et imitationi tribuere sineris. Illa enim imitatio non est, ut confessus es, sine corpore; scientiam vero solius animi esse dixisti.
Teacher: Then in no way will you be allowed to attribute the science in the sounds of strings and flutes to reason and imitation together. For that imitation, as you confessed, is not without the body, whereas you said that science belongs to the mind alone.
deMus.1.4.7
Discipulus: Ex iis quidem quae tibi concessi, fateor hoc esse confectum: sed quid ad rem? Habebit enim et tibicen scientiam in animo. Neque enim cum ei accedit imitatio, quam sine corpore dedi esse non posse, adimet illud quod animo amplectitur.
Student: From what I have conceded to you, I admit that this is established; but what of it? For the flute-player too will have science in his mind. For when imitation, which I granted cannot be without the body, is added to him, it will not take away what he embraces with his mind.
deMus.1.4.7
Magister: Non adimet quidem: nec ego affirmo eos, a quibus organa ista tractantur, omnes carere scientia, sed non habere omnes dico. Istam enim ad hoc volvimus quaestionem, ut intellegamus, si possumus, quam recte sit scientia in illa definitione musicae posita; quam si omnes tibicines et fidicines, et id genus alii quilibet habent, nihil ista disciplina puto esse vilius, nihil abiectius.
Teacher: It will not take it away, indeed; nor do I affirm that all who handle these instruments lack science, but I say that not all have it. For we have turned this question over in order to understand, if we can, how rightly science is set in that definition of music; and if all flute-players and lyre-players, and any others of that kind, have it, then I think nothing is cheaper than this discipline, nothing more abject.
deMus.1.4.7
1. 4. 8. Discipulus: Quidni dederim?
1. 4. 8. Student: Why should I not grant it?
deMus.1.4.8
Magister: Quid? sensum aurium animone, an corpori, an utrique concedis?
Teacher: Now then: do you grant the sense of hearing to the mind, to the body, or to both?
deMus.1.4.8
Discipulus: Utrique.
Student: To both.
deMus.1.4.8
Magister: Quid memoriam?
Teacher: And memory?
deMus.1.4.8
Discipulus: Animo puto esse tribuendam. Non enim si per sensus percipimus aliquid quod memoriae commendamus, ideo in corpore memoria esse putanda est.
Student: I think it is to be attributed to the mind. For even if we perceive through the senses something that we commit to memory, memory is not on that account to be thought to be in the body.
deMus.1.4.8
Magister: Magna fortasse ista quaestio est, neque huic opportuna sermoni. Sed quod proposito sat est, puto te negare non posse, bestias habere memoriam. Nam et nidos post annum revisunt hirundines, et de capellis verissime dictum est: Atque ipsae memores redeunt in tecta [capellae]. Et canis heroem dominum, iam suis hominibus oblitum recognovisse praedicatur . Et innumerabilia, si velimus, animadvertere possumus, quibus id quod dico manifestum est.
Teacher: This is perhaps a great question, and not suited to the present discussion. But what is enough for our purpose is this: I think you cannot deny that beasts have memory. For swallows return to their nests after a year, and of the she-goats it was most truly said, and the she-goats themselves, remembering, return to their stalls. And the dog is recorded to have recognized its hero-master when his own household had already forgotten him. And we could note countless instances, if we wished, by which what I say is plain.
deMus.1.4.8
Discipulus: Nec ego istud nego, et quid te adiuvet, vehementer exspecto.
Student: I do not deny it either, and I am keenly waiting to see how it helps you.
deMus.1.4.8
Magister: Quid putas, nisi quod scientiam qui soli animo tribuit, eamque omnibus irrationalibus animantibus adimit, neque in sensu eam, neque in memoria (nam illud non est sine corpore, et utrumque etiam in bestia est), sed in solo intellectu collocavit?
Teacher: In nothing else than this: that whoever attributes science to the mind alone, and withholds it from all irrational animals, has placed it neither in sense nor in memory (for the one is not without the body, and both are present even in a beast), but in the understanding alone.
deMus.1.4.8
Discipulus: Et hoc exspecto quid te adiuvet.
Student: This too I wait to see how it helps you.
deMus.1.4.8
Magister: Nihil aliud, nisi omnes qui sensum sequuntur, et quod in eo delectat, memoriae commendant, atque secundum id corpus moventes, vim quamdam imitationis adiungunt; non eos habere scientiam, quamvis perite ac docte multa facere videantur, si rem ipsam quam profitentur aut exhibent, intellectus puritate ac veritate non teneant. At si tales esse istos theatricos operarios ratio demonstraverit; nihil erit, ut opinor, cur dubites eis negare scientiam, et ob hoc musicam, quae scientia modulandi est, nequaquam concedere.
Teacher: In nothing else than this: that all who follow the senses, and commit to memory what pleases in them, and, moving the body accordingly, add a certain power of imitation, do not have science—however skillfully and learnedly they seem to do many things—if they do not hold the very thing they profess or display in the purity and truth of the understanding. But if reason shows that these stage-workers are of this kind, there will be, I think, no reason for you to hesitate to deny them science, and on this account by no means to grant them music, which is the science of measuring.
deMus.1.4.8
Discipulus: Explica hoc; videamus quale sit.
Student: Unfold this; let us see what sort of thing it is.
deMus.1.4.8
1. 4. 9. Magister: Mobilitatem digitorum celeriorem vel pigriorem credo te non scientiae, sed usui dare.
1. 4. 9. Teacher: The quicker or slower nimbleness of the fingers, I believe, you would assign not to science but to practice.
deMus.1.4.9
Discipulus: Cur ita credis id?
Student: Why do you believe that?
deMus.1.4.9
Magister: Quia superius soli animo scientiam tribuebas, hoc autem quamquam imperante animo tamen esse corporis vides.
Teacher: Because earlier you attributed science to the mind alone, whereas this, though commanded by the mind, you see belongs nevertheless to the body.
deMus.1.4.9
Discipulus: Sed cum sciens animus hoc imperat corpori, magis hoc scienti animo, quam servientibus membris tribuendum puto.
Student: But since it is the knowing mind that commands this of the body, I think it should be attributed rather to the knowing mind than to the serving limbs.
deMus.1.4.9
Magister: Nonne censes posse fieri ut unus alium scientia praecedat, cum ille imperitior multo facilius et expeditius digitos moveat?
Teacher: Do you not judge that it can happen that one man surpasses another in science, while that less skilled man moves his fingers far more easily and readily?
deMus.1.4.9
Discipulus: Censeo.
Student: I do.
deMus.1.4.9
Magister: At si motus celer et expeditior digitorum scientiae tribuendus esset, tanto in eo quisque excelleret, quanto esset scientior.
Teacher: But if the quick and ready motion of the fingers had to be attributed to science, each man would excel in it just so far as he was more knowing.
deMus.1.4.9
Discipulus: Concedo.
Student: I concede it.
deMus.1.4.9
Magister: Attende etiam istud. Nam opinor nonnumquam te animadvertisse fabros, vel huiusmodi opifices, ascia sive securi eumdem locum feriendo repetere, et non alio quam eo quo intendit animus ictum perducere; quod nos tentantes cum assequi nequimus, ab eis saepe irridemur.
Teacher: Note this too. For I suppose you have sometimes observed carpenters, or workmen of that kind, striking the same spot again and again with an adze or an axe, and bringing the blow nowhere but where the mind intends; and when we try this and cannot manage it, they often laugh at us.
deMus.1.4.9
Discipulus: Ita est ut dicis.
Student: It is as you say.
deMus.1.4.9
Magister: Ergo cum id nos facere non valemus, numquid ignoramus quid feriri debeat, vel quantum debeat amputari?
Teacher: So, when we cannot do this, are we ignorant of what ought to be struck, or how much ought to be cut away?
deMus.1.4.9
Discipulus: Saepe ignoramus, saepe scimus.
Student: Often we are ignorant of it, often we know it.
deMus.1.4.9
Magister: Fac ergo aliquem nosse omnia, quae fabri facere debeant, et perfecte nosse, minus tamen valere in opere; sed eisdem ipsis qui facillime operantur, multa dictare solertius quam illi per se iudicare possent; an id usu evenire negas?
Teacher: Suppose, then, that someone knows everything carpenters ought to do, and knows it perfectly, yet has less skill in the work itself, but can dictate many things to those very men who work most easily, more shrewdly than they could judge by themselves—do you deny that this happens by practice?
deMus.1.4.9
Discipulus: Non nego.
Student: I do not deny it.
deMus.1.4.9
Magister: Non igitur solum movendi celeritas atque facilitas, sed etiam motionis modus ipse in membris, usui potius quam scientiae tribuendus est. Nam si aliter esset, eo quisque manibus melius uteretur quo esset peritior: quod licet ad tibias citharasve referamus, ne quod ibi digiti atque articuli faciunt, quia difficile nobis est, scientia potius quam usu et sedula imitatione ac meditatione fieri putemus.
Teacher: Then not only the speed and ease of moving, but even the very manner of motion in the limbs, is to be attributed to practice rather than to science. For if it were otherwise, each man would use his hands the better the more skilled he was—a thing we may refer to flutes and lyres as well, lest we suppose that what the fingers and joints do there, because it is difficult for us, comes about by science rather than by practice and diligent imitation and exercise.
deMus.1.4.9
Discipulus: Non queo resistere; nam et medicos audire soleo doctissimos viros, saepe in secandis, vel quoquo modo comprimendis membris, in eo quod manu ac ferro fiat, ab imperitioribus antecedi: quod genus curandi chirurgiam nominant, quo vocabulo satis significatur operaria quaedam in manibus medendi consuetudo. Perge itaque ad caetera, et iam istam confice quaestionem.
Student: I cannot resist; for I too am accustomed to hear that physicians, most learned men, are often surpassed by the less skilled in cutting, or in some way compressing, limbs—in what is done by hand and knife. This kind of treatment they call surgery, a word that signifies well enough a certain manual, workmanlike practice of healing. Go on, then, to the rest, and now finish this question.
deMus.1.4.9
1. 5. 10. Magister: Illud restat, ut opinor, ut inveniamus, si possumus, has ipsas artes quae nobis per manus placent ut illius usus potentes essent, non continuo scientiam, sed sensum ac memoriam secutas: ne forte mihi dicas fieri quidem posse, ut scientia sine usu sit, et maior plerumque quam est in eis qui usu excellunt; sed tamen etiam illos ad usum tantum non potuisse sine ulla scientia pervenire.
1. 5. 10. Teacher: This remains, I think: that we find, if we can, that these very arts which please us through the hands—so that they were masters of that practice—followed not science directly, but sense and memory. So you may not perhaps tell me that it can indeed happen that science is present without practice, and often greater than it is in those who excel in practice; but that even those men could not have come merely to that practice without any science.
deMus.1.5.10
Discipulus: Aggredere: nam ita deberi manifestum est.
Student: Proceed; for it is clear that this is owed.
deMus.1.5.10
Magister: Numquamne huiusmodi histriones audisti studiosius?
Teacher: Have you never listened to stage-players of this kind rather attentively?
deMus.1.5.10
Discipulus: Plus fortasse quam vellem.
Student: More, perhaps, than I would wish.
deMus.1.5.10
Magister: Unde fieri putas, ut imperita multitudo explodat saepe tibicinem nugatorios sonos efferentem; rursumque plaudat bene canenti, et prorsus quanto suavius canitur, tanto amplius et studiosius moveatur? Numquidnam id a vulgo per artem musicam fieri credendum est?
Teacher: How do you think it comes about that the unskilled crowd often hisses a flute-player who puts forth trifling sounds, and again applauds one who plays well—and indeed is moved the more, and the more eagerly, the more sweetly the playing is done? Must we believe that the common people do this through the art of music?
deMus.1.5.10
Discipulus: Non.
Student: No.
deMus.1.5.10
Magister: Quid igitur?
Teacher: How then?
deMus.1.5.10
Discipulus: Natura id fieri puto, quae omnibus dedit sensum audiendi, quo ista iudicantur.
Student: I think it comes about by nature, which has given to all the sense of hearing by which these things are judged.
deMus.1.5.10
Magister: Recte putas. Sed iam etiam illud vide, utrum et tibicen ipse hoc sensu praeditus sit. Quod si ita est, potest eius sequens iudicium movere digitos cum tibias inflaverit, et quod satis commode pro arbitrio sonuerit, id notare ac mandare memoriae, atque id repetendo consuefacere digitos eo ferri sine ulla trepidatione et errore, sive ab alio accipiat id quod cantet, sive ipse inveniat, illa de qua dictum est ducente atque approbante natura. Itaque cum sensum memoria, et articuli memoriam sequuntur, usu iam edomiti atque praeparati; canit cum vult tanto melius atque iucundius, quanto illis omnibus praestat quae superius ratio docuit cum bestiis nos habere communia, appetitum scilicet imitandi, sensum atque memoriam. Numquid habes adversum ista quod dicas?
Teacher: You think rightly. But now see this too: whether the flute-player himself is also endowed with this sense. If so, his judgment, following it, can move his fingers when he has breathed into the flute, and note whatever has sounded conveniently enough to his liking and commit it to memory, and by repeating it accustom his fingers to be carried there without any trembling or error—whether he receives from another what he is to play, or finds it himself, with nature, of which we have spoken, leading and approving. And so, when memory follows sense, and the joints follow memory, now tamed and prepared by practice, he plays when he wishes the better and more pleasantly the more he surpasses in all those things which reason taught us above we have in common with beasts: namely the appetite for imitating, sense, and memory. Have you anything to say against this?
deMus.1.5.10
Discipulus: Ego vero nihil habeo. Iam audire cupio cuiusmodi sit illa disciplina, quam profecto a cognitione vilissimorum animorum video subtilissime vindicatam.
Student: I have nothing. Now I desire to hear what sort of discipline that is which I see has been most subtly vindicated from the knowledge of the basest minds.
deMus.1.5.10
1. 6. 11. Magister: Nondum est satis quod factum est, nec ad eius explicationem transire nos sinam, nisi quemadmodum constitit inter nos posse histriones sine ista scientia satisfacere voluptati aurium popularium; ita etiam nullo modo esse posse histriones musicae studiosos peritosque constiterit.
1. 6. 11. Teacher: What has been done is not yet enough, and I will not let us pass on to its explanation, unless—just as we have agreed that stage-players can satisfy the pleasure of popular ears without this science—it is likewise established that there can in no way be stage-players who are students of music and skilled in it.
deMus.1.6.11
Discipulus: Mirum si hoc effeceris.
Student: It would be wonderful if you brought this about.
deMus.1.6.11
Magister: Facile id quidem, sed attentiore te mihi opus est.
Teacher: Easily indeed; but I need you to be more attentive.
deMus.1.6.11
Discipulus: Numquam equidem, quod sciam, remissior in audiendo fui, ab usque sermo iste sumpsit exordium: sed nunc me, fateor, multo erectiorem reddidisti.
Student: For my part I have never, so far as I know, been more remiss in listening since this conversation took its start; but now, I admit, you have made me much more alert.
deMus.1.6.11
Magister: Gratum habeo, quamquam tibi te commodes magis. Itaque responde, si placet, utrum tibi videatur scire quid sit aureus solidus, qui eum aequo pretio vendere cupiens, decem nummos eum valere putaverit?
Teacher: I am grateful—though you do yourself the greater favor. So answer, if you please: does it seem to you that a man knows what a gold solidus is, if, wishing to sell it at a fair price, he reckons it to be worth ten coins?
deMus.1.6.11
Discipulus: Cui hoc videatur?
Student: To whom would it seem so?
deMus.1.6.11
Magister: Nunc age, dic mihi, quid carius habendum sit; quod nostra intellegentia continetur, an quod nobis fortuito imperitorum iudicio tribuitur.
Teacher: Now come, tell me, which is to be held the more precious: what is contained in our own understanding, or what is granted to us by chance through the judgment of the unskilled?
deMus.1.6.11
Discipulus: Nulli dubium est, longe illud primum praestare caeteris omnibus, quae ne nostra quidem putanda sunt.
Student: There is no doubt for anyone that the former far excels all the rest—things which are not even to be thought our own.
deMus.1.6.11
Magister: Num ergo negas omnem scientiam intellegentia contineri?
Teacher: Then do you deny that all science is contained in the understanding?
deMus.1.6.11
Discipulus: Quis negat?
Student: Who denies it?
deMus.1.6.11
Magister: Et musica igitur ibi est.
Teacher: And so music too is there.
deMus.1.6.11
Discipulus: Video ex eius definitione id esse consequens.
Student: I see that this follows from its definition.
deMus.1.6.11
Magister: Quid? plausus populi et omnia illa theatrica praemia, nonne tibi ex eo genere videntur, quod in potestate fortunae et imperitorum iudicio positum est?
Teacher: And the applause of the people and all those theatrical rewards—do they not seem to you to be of that kind which is set in the power of fortune and the judgment of the unskilled?
deMus.1.6.11
Discipulus: Nihil magis arbitror esse fortuitum obnoxiumque casibus et plebeiae dominationi nutibusque subiectum, quam illa sunt omnia.
Student: I judge that nothing is more fortuitous and exposed to chance, and more subject to the dominion and whims of the mob, than all those things.
deMus.1.6.11
Magister: Hoccine igitur pretio cantus suos venderent histriones, si musicam scirent?
Teacher: Then would stage-players sell their songs at this price, if they knew music?
deMus.1.6.11
Discipulus: Non parum quidem hac conclusione commoveor, sed nonnihil habeo quod contradicam. Nam ille venditor solidi cum isto comparandus non videtur: non enim accepto plausu aut qualibet sibi largita pecunia scientiam, si quam forte habet qua populum delectavit, amittit; sed onustior nummo, et laude hominum laetior, cum eadem disciplina incolumi atque integra domum discedit: stultus autem esset, si commoda illa contemneret, quae non adeptus multo esset ignobilior atque pauperior; adeptus autem nihilo esset indoctior.
Student: I am moved not a little by this conclusion, but I have something to object. For that seller of the solidus does not seem comparable to the player; for the player, on receiving applause or whatever money is lavished on him, does not lose the science—if he happens to have any—by which he delighted the people, but goes home heavier by a coin and gladder for men's praise, with that same discipline safe and whole. He would be a fool, indeed, to despise those advantages, without which he would be much more obscure and poorer, while having gained them he would be no less learned.
deMus.1.6.11
1. 6. 12. Magister: Vide ergo utrum vel isto conficiamus quod volumus. Nam credo videri tibi multo esse praestantius, id propter quod aliquid facimus, quam idipsum quod facimus.
1. 6. 12. Teacher: See, then, whether by this very point we establish what we want. For I believe it seems to you that the thing for the sake of which we do something is much more excellent than the very thing we do.
deMus.1.6.12
Discipulus: Manifestum est.
Student: That is clear.
deMus.1.6.12
Magister: Qui ergo cantat vel cantare discit, non ob aliud nisi ut laudetur a populo, vel omnino abs quovis homine, nonne iudicat meliorem laudem illam esse quam cantum?
Teacher: He, then, who sings or learns to sing for no other reason than to be praised by the people, or by any man at all—does he not judge that the praise is better than the song?
deMus.1.6.12
Discipulus: Negare non possum.
Student: I cannot deny it.
deMus.1.6.12
Magister: Quid? ille qui male de aliqua re iudicat, videtur tibi eam scire?
Teacher: And the man who judges badly about some thing—does he seem to you to know it?
deMus.1.6.12
Discipulus: Nullo modo, nisi forte quoquo modo corruptus.
Student: In no way, unless perhaps he is in some way corrupted.
deMus.1.6.12
Magister: Ergo qui vere putat melius esse aliquid quod deterius est, nullo dubitante scientia eius caret.
Teacher: Then he who truly thinks that something better which is worse, beyond all doubt lacks science of it.
deMus.1.6.12
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: That is so.
deMus.1.6.12
Magister: Quando igitur mihi vel persuaseris vel ostenderis quemlibet histrionum non ideo illam, si quam habet facultatem, vel assecutum esse vel exhibere ut populo placeat propter quaestum aut famam; concedam posse quemquam et musicae habere scientiam, et esse histrionem. Si autem perprobabile est, neminem esse histrionum qui non sibi professionis finem in pecunia seu gloria constituat ac proponat, fateare necesse est aut musicam nescire histriones, aut magis expetendam esse ab aliis laudem, vel quaeque alia fortuita commoda, quam a nobismetipsis intellegentiam. [Et quia ab aliis expetunt laudem et commoda et a nobis intellegentiam non expetunt, cum praeiudicant id quod vilius est, eo quod est carius, constat quia eius scientiam non habent].
Teacher: When, therefore, you have either persuaded me or shown me that any stage-player has gained or displays whatever ability he has, not in order to please the people for the sake of gain or fame, I will grant that someone can both have the science of music and be a stage-player. But if it is most probable that there is no stage-player who does not set and propose to himself the end of his profession in money or glory, you must admit either that stage-players do not know music, or that praise—and whatever other fortuitous advantages there are—is more to be sought from others than understanding from ourselves. [And because they seek praise and advantages from others and do not seek understanding from us, since they prefer what is cheaper to what is more precious, it is clear that they do not have the science of it.]
deMus.1.6.12
Discipulus: Video me, qui superiora concesserim, etiam istis cedere debere. Non enim mihi ullo modo videri potest de scena inveniri posse talem virum, qui artem suam propter seipsam, non propter extra posita commoda diligat; cum de gymnasio vix talis inveniatur: quamquam si quis existit, vel exstiterit, non eo contemnendi musici, sed honorandi aliquando histriones possint videri. Quamobrem explica iam, si placet, tantam istam, quae iam vilis mihi videri non potest, disciplinam.
Student: I see that, having conceded the earlier points, I must yield to these as well. For it can in no way seem to me that such a man could be found on the stage—one who loves his art for its own sake and not for advantages laid up outside it—when scarcely such a man is found in the gymnasium; although, if any such person exists or has existed, then it is not that the musicians are to be despised, but that the stage-players might sometimes seem worthy of honor. So now, if you please, unfold this great discipline, which can no longer seem cheap to me.
deMus.1.6.12
1. 7. 13. Magister: Faciam, imo tu facies. Nam ego nihil aliud quam rogabo te ac percontabor: tu vero totum hoc quidquid est, et quod nunc nesciens quaerere videris, respondendo explicabis. Itaque iam ex te quaero, utrum quisquam possit, et diu et velociter currere.
1. 7. 13. Teacher: I will do it—or rather you will do it. For I will do nothing but ask and question you; and you, by answering, will unfold this whole thing, whatever it is, which you now seem to seek without knowing it. So now I ask you: can anyone run both for a long time and swiftly?
deMus.1.7.13
Discipulus: Potest.
Student: He can.
deMus.1.7.13
Magister: Quid, tarde et velociter?
Teacher: And both slowly and swiftly?
deMus.1.7.13
Discipulus: Nullo modo.
Student: In no way.
deMus.1.7.13
Magister: Aliud ergo est diu, aliud tarde.
Teacher: Then "long" is one thing, "slow" another.
deMus.1.7.13
Discipulus: Aliud omnino.
Student: Quite another.
deMus.1.7.13
Magister: Item quaero, quid putes diuturnitati esse contrarium, sicuti est tarditati velocitas.
Teacher: Likewise I ask what you think is contrary to length of time, as swiftness is to slowness.
deMus.1.7.13
Discipulus: Non mihi occurrit usitatum nomen. Itaque diuturno nihil video quod opponam, nisi non diuturnum, ut ei quod dicitur, diu, contrarium sit non diu, quia et velociter si nollem dicere, et pro eo non tarde dicerem, nihil aliud significaretur.
Student: No customary word comes to me. So I see nothing to set against "long-lasting" except "not long-lasting," so that the contrary of what is called "long" is "not long"—since if I were unwilling to say "swiftly," and said "not slowly" instead, nothing else would be meant.
deMus.1.7.13
Magister: Verum dicis. Nihil enim deperit, cum ita loquimur, veritati. Nam et mihi si est hoc nomen, quod tibi non occurrisse dicis, aut ignoratur a me, aut in praesentia non venit in mentem. Quamobrem sic agamus, ut haec bina contraria appellemus hoc modo, diu et non diu, tarde et velociter. Ac primum de diuturno et non diuturno disseramus, si placet.
Teacher: You speak truly. For nothing of the truth is lost when we speak this way. For even if there is such a word as you say did not come to you, either it is unknown to me, or it does not come to mind at present. So let us proceed by calling these two pairs of contraries in this way: "long" and "not long," "slow" and "swift." And first let us discuss the long-lasting and the not-long-lasting, if you please.
deMus.1.7.13
Discipulus: Ita fiat.
Student: Let it be so.
deMus.1.7.13
1. 8. 14. Magister: Manifestumne tibi est, id dici diu fieri quod per longum, id autem non diu quod per breve tempus fit?
1. 8. 14. Teacher: Is it clear to you that what is done over a long time is said to be done "long," and what is done over a short time "not long"?
deMus.1.8.14
Discipulus: Manifestum.
Student: Clear.
deMus.1.8.14
Magister: Motus igitur qui fit, verbi gratia, duabus horis, nonne ad eum qui una hora fit, duplum habet temporis?
Teacher: A motion, then, that is done, for example, in two hours—does it not have twice the time of one that is done in a single hour?
deMus.1.8.14
Discipulus: Quis hinc dubitaverit?
Student: Who would doubt this?
deMus.1.8.14
Magister: Recipit ergo id quod diu vel non diu dicimus dimensiones huiusmodi et numeros, ut alius motus ad alium, tamquam duo ad unum sit; id est ut bis tantum habeat alius quantum semel: alius item ad alium tamquam tria ad duo, id est ut tantas tres partes temporis habeat, quantas alius duas: atque ita per caeteros numeros licet currere, ut non sint spatia indefinita et indeterminata, sed habeant ad se duo motus aliquem numerum; aut eumdem, velut unum ad unum, ad duo duo, ad tria tria, quatuor ad quatuor: aut non eumdem, ut unum ad duo, duo ad tria, tria ad quatuor; aut unum ad tria, duo ad sex, et quidquid potest aliquid ad sese dimensionis obtinere.
Teacher: Then what we call "long" or "not long" admits of measures and numbers of this kind, so that one motion is to another as two to one—that is, so that one has twice as much as the other has once; another likewise to another as three to two, that is, so that it has three parts of time for the other's two. And so one may run through the remaining numbers, so that the spans are not indefinite and undetermined, but two motions hold to each other some number: either the same, as one to one, two to two, three to three, four to four; or not the same, as one to two, two to three, three to four; or one to three, two to six, and whatever measure anything can hold to itself.
deMus.1.8.14
Discipulus: Planius ista quaeso.
Student: Make this plainer, I beg.
deMus.1.8.14
Magister: Revertere ergo ad illas horas, et quod satis putabam dictum, cum de una hora et de duabus dixissem, per omnia considera. Certe enim non negas posse fieri aliquem motum tempore unius horae, et alium duarum.
Teacher: Return, then, to those hours, and what I thought was said enough when I had spoken of one hour and of two, consider it throughout. For surely you do not deny that some motion can be made in the time of one hour, and another in two.
deMus.1.8.14
Discipulus: Verum est.
Student: It is true.
deMus.1.8.14
Magister: Quid? alium duarum, alium trium non fateris?
Teacher: And do you not admit that one is of two hours, another of three?
deMus.1.8.14
Discipulus: Fateor.
Student: I admit it.
deMus.1.8.14
Magister: Et alium tribus horis fieri, alium quatuor; rursus alium una, alium tribus; aut alium duabus, alium sex, nonne manifestum est?
Teacher: And is it not clear that one is made in three hours, another in four; and again one in one, another in three; or one in two, another in six?
deMus.1.8.14
Discipulus: Manifestum.
Student: It is clear.
deMus.1.8.14
Magister: Cur ergo et illud non manifestum sit? Nam hoc dicebam cum duos motus habere ad se posse aliquem numerum dicerem, velut unum ad duo, duo ad tria, tria ad quatuor; unum ad tria, duo ad sex, et si quos alios recensere volueris. His enim cognitis, est et potestatis persequi caetera, sive septem ad decem, sive quinque ad octo, et quidquid omnino est in duobus motibus ita partes dimensas habentibus ad invicem, ut possint dici tot ad tot; sive aequales numeri sint, sive alius maior, alius minor.
Teacher: Then why should that other point not also be clear? For this is what I was saying when I said that two motions can hold to each other some number, as one to two, two to three, three to four; one to three, two to six, and any others you may wish to count. For once these are known, it is within one's power to pursue the rest, whether seven to ten, or five to eight, and whatever there is at all in two motions having their parts measured against each other in such a way that they can be said to be so-many to so-many—whether the numbers are equal, or one greater and the other less.
deMus.1.8.14
Discipulus: Iam intellego, et fieri posse concedo.
Student: Now I understand, and I concede that it can be so.
deMus.1.8.14
1. 9. 15. Magister: Illud etiam, ut opinor, intellegis, omnem mensuram et modum immoderationi et infinitati recte anteponi.
1. 9. 15. Teacher: This too, I think, you understand: that every measure and limit is rightly to be preferred to immoderateness and the infinite.
deMus.1.9.15
Discipulus: Manifestissimum est.
Student: It is most clear.
deMus.1.9.15
Magister: Duo igitur motus qui ad sese, ut dictum est, habent aliquam numerosam dimensionem, iis qui eam non habent anteponendi sunt.
Teacher: Two motions, then, which hold to each other, as has been said, some numerical measure, are to be preferred to those which do not have it.
deMus.1.9.15
Discipulus: Et hoc manifestum est atque consequens: illos enim certus quidam modus, atque mensura quae in numeris est, sibimet copulat; qua qui carent, non utique sibi aliqua ratione iunguntur.
Student: This too is clear and follows; for those motions a certain fixed limit, and the measure that is in numbers, joins to each other—whereas those that lack it are surely not joined to each other by any rational principle.
deMus.1.9.15
Magister: Appellemus ergo, si placet, illos qui inter se dimensi sunt, rationabiles; illos autem qui ea dimensione carent, irrationabiles.
Teacher: Let us call, then, if you please, those that are measured against each other "rational," and those that lack that measure "irrational."
deMus.1.9.15
Discipulus: Placet vero.
Student: I agree.
deMus.1.9.15
Magister: Iam illud attende, utrum tibi videatur maior concordia in motibus rationabilibus eorum qui aequales sunt inter se, quam eorum qui sunt inaequales.
Teacher: Now consider this: whether there seems to you to be greater concord among rational motions in those that are equal to each other than in those that are unequal.
deMus.1.9.15
Discipulus: Cui hoc non videatur?
Student: To whom would it not seem so?
deMus.1.9.15
Magister: Porro inaequalium, nonne alii sunt in quibus possumus dicere, quota parte sua maior aut coaequetur minori, aut eum excedat, ut duo et quatuor, vel sex et octo; alii autem in quibus non idem dici potest, sicut in his numeris, tria et decem, vel quatuor et undecim? Cernis profecto in illis duobus numeris superioribus dimidia parte maiorem minori coaequari; in iis rursum quos posterius dixi, minorem a maiore quarta parte maioris excedi: in his autem aliis, quales sunt tria et decem, vel quatuor et undecim, videmus quidem nonnullam convenientiam, quia partes ad se habent, de quibus dici possit, tot ad tot; sed numquid talem, qualis est in superioribus? Nam neque quota parte minori maior aequetur, neque quota parte minorem maior excedat, dici ullo modo potest. Nam neque tria quota pars sit denarii numeri, neque quatuor quota pars sit undenarii, dixerit quispiam. Cum autem dico ut consideres quota sit pars, liquidam dico, et sine ullo additamento; sicuti est dimidia, tertia, quarta, quinta, sexta, et deinceps; non ut trientes et semiunciae, et hoc genus praecisionum aliquid addatur.
Teacher: Further, among unequal motions, are there not some in which we can say by what fraction of itself the greater either equals the lesser or exceeds it—as two and four, or six and eight—and others in which the same cannot be said, as in these numbers, three and ten, or four and eleven? You surely see that in those two former numbers the greater equals the lesser by half of itself; in those again that I named afterward, the lesser is exceeded by the greater by a fourth part of the greater; but in these others, such as three and ten, or four and eleven, we do see some agreement, because they have parts of which it can be said "so-many to so-many"—but is it such as is in the former? For one cannot say in any way by what fraction the greater equals the lesser, nor by what fraction the greater exceeds the lesser. For no one could say what fraction of ten three is, nor what fraction of eleven four is. And when I tell you to consider what fraction it is, I mean a clean fraction, without any addition—such as a half, a third, a fourth, a fifth, a sixth, and so on; not so that thirds-of-an-ounce, half-ounces, and that kind of fractional cut be added.
deMus.1.9.15
Discipulus: Iam intellego.
Student: Now I understand.
deMus.1.9.15
1. 9. 16. Magister: Ergo ex his inaequalibus motibus rationabilibus, quoniam duo genera subiectis etiam numerorum exemplis proposui, quos quibus anteponendos arbitraris? illosne in quibus illa quota pars dici potest, an in quibus non potest?
1. 9. 16. Teacher: Then, of these unequal rational motions—since I have set forth two kinds, with numerical examples added—which do you judge are to be preferred to which: those in which that clean fraction can be named, or those in which it cannot?
deMus.1.9.16
Discipulus: Illos mihi ratio videtur anteponendos iubere, in quibus potest dici, ut demonstratum est, quota parte sui maior aut coaequetur minori, aut eum excedat, iis in quibus idem non evenit.
Student: Reason seems to me to command that those be preferred in which it can be said, as was shown, by what fraction of itself the greater either equals the lesser or exceeds it, to those in which the same does not happen.
deMus.1.9.16
Magister: Recte. Sed visne etiam his nomina imponamus, ut cum eos deinceps commemorare necesse fuerit, expeditius loquamur?
Teacher: Rightly. But do you also wish us to give these names, so that when it is afterward necessary to mention them we may speak more readily?
deMus.1.9.16
Discipulus: Volo sane.
Student: I do indeed wish it.
deMus.1.9.16
Magister: Appellemus ergo istos quos praeponimus, connumeratos; illos autem quibus hos praeponimus, dinumeratos: propterea quia isti superiores non solum singuli numerantur, sed etiam ea parte qua maior minori aequatur vel eum excedit, se metiuntur et numerant; illi autem posteriores singillatim tantummodo ad se numerantur, ea vero parte qua vel aequatur minori maior, vel excedit non se metiuntur et numerant. Non enim potest in eis dici, aut quoties habeat minorem maior; aut illud quo excedit maior minorem quoties habeat et maior et minor.
Teacher: Let us then call those we prefer "co-numbered" (connumerati), and those to which we prefer them "out-numbered" (dinumerati): because the former not only are counted singly, but also measure and count themselves by that part by which the greater equals the lesser or exceeds it; whereas the latter are merely counted against each other one by one, but by that part by which the greater equals or exceeds the lesser they do not measure and count themselves. For in them one cannot say either how many times the greater contains the lesser, or how many times both the greater and the lesser contain that by which the greater exceeds the lesser.
deMus.1.9.16
Discipulus: Accipio et ista vocabula, et quantum valeo, faciam ut meminerim.
Student: I accept these terms too, and, as far as I can, I will see that I remember them.
deMus.1.9.16
1. 10. 17. Magister: Age nunc videamus connumeratorum quae possit esse partitio: namque arbitror eam esse perspicuam. Unum enim genus est connumeratorum, in quo minor numerus metitur maiorem; id est aliquoties eum habet maior sicut numeros duo et quatuor esse diximus: videmus enim duo a quatuor bis haberi; quae ter haberentur, si non quatuor, sed sex ad duo poneremus; quater autem, si octo; quinquies, si decem. Aliud genus est, in quo ea pars qua excedit maior minorem, ambos metitur; id est aliquoties habent eam et maior et minor, quod in illis numeris iam perspeximus, sex et octo. Nam pars illa qua exceditur minor, duo sunt, quos vides esse in octonario numero quater, in senario ter: quare hos quoque motus de quibus agitur, et numeros per quos illustratur quod in motibus discere volumus, notemus atque signemus vocabulis. Nam eorum distinctio iamdudum, nisi fallor, apparet. Quocirca, si tibi iam videtur, illi ubi multiplicato minore fit maior, vocentur complicati; illi autem sesquati, veteri iam nomine. Nam sesque appellatur, ubi duo numeri ad se ea ratione affecti sunt, ut tot partes habeat ad minorem maior, quota parte sui eum praecedit: nam si est tria ad duo, tertia parte sui praecedit maior minorem; si quatuor ad tria, quarta; si quinque ad quatuor, quinta, atque ita deinceps: eadem ratio est, et in sex ad quatuor, octo ad sex, decem ad octo; et inde licet hanc rationem et in consequentibus et in maioribus numeris animadvertere atque explorare. Nominis autem huius originem non facile dixerim: nisi forte sesque quasi se absque dictum, id est absque se, quia quinque ad quatuor, absque quinta parte sua maior hoc est quod minor. Quibus de rebus quaero quid tibi videatur.
1. 10. 17. Teacher: Come now, let us see what division can be made of the co-numbered; for I judge it is evident. There is one kind of co-numbered in which the lesser number measures the greater—that is, the greater contains it some number of times, as we said the numbers two and four are: for we see that two is contained in four twice; it would be contained three times if we set against two not four but six, four times if eight, five times if ten. There is another kind, in which that part by which the greater exceeds the lesser measures both—that is, both the greater and the lesser contain it some number of times, which we have already seen in those numbers six and eight. For that part by which the lesser is exceeded is two, which you see is in the number eight four times, in the number six three times. So let us mark these motions too, which we are treating, and the numbers by which what we wish to learn in motions is illustrated, and signify them by names. For their distinction has already, unless I am mistaken, become apparent. Therefore, if it now seems good to you, let those in which the greater is made by multiplying the lesser be called "multiplied" (complicati); but the others, by an old name now, "sesquate" (sesquati). For it is called "sesqui" where two numbers are so related to each other that the greater has toward the lesser as many parts as the fraction of itself by which it goes beyond it: for if it is three to two, the greater goes beyond the lesser by a third of itself; if four to three, by a fourth; if five to four, by a fifth, and so on. The same principle holds in six to four, eight to six, ten to eight; and from there one may observe and explore this principle both in the following and in the larger numbers. The origin of this name I could not easily state—unless perhaps "sesqui" is said as though "se absque," that is, "apart from itself," because five to four is, apart from its fifth part, what the lesser is. On these matters I ask what seems to you.
deMus.1.10.17
Discipulus: Mihi vero et illa ratio dimensionum atque numerorum videtur verissima; et vocabula quae abs te imposita sunt, congrua mihi videntur commemorandis eis rebus quas intelleximus: et huius origo nominis quam nunc explicasti, non est absurda, etiamsi forte non ea sit quam secutus est qui hoc nomen instituit.
Student: To me both that account of the measures and numbers seems most true, and the terms you have given seem to me fitting for recalling the things we have understood; and the origin of this name that you have now explained is not absurd, even if perhaps it was not the one that he followed who established the name.
deMus.1.10.17
1. 11. 18. Magister: Probo et accipio sententiam tuam: sed videsne omnes istos rationabiles motus, id est qui ad sese habent aliquam numerorum dimensionem, in infinitum posse per numeros pergere, nisi rursus eos certa ratio coercuerit, et ad quemdam modum formamque revocaverit? Nam ut primo de ipsis aequalibus dicam; unum ad unum, duo ad duo, tria ad tria, quatuor ad quatuor, ac deinceps si persequar, quis finis erit, cum ipsius numeri finis nullus sit? Namque ista vis numero inest, ut omnis dictus finitus sit, non dictus autem infinitus. Et quod aequalibus evenit, hoc etiam inaequalibus evenire potes animadvertere, sive complicatis, sive sesquatis, sive connumeratis, sive dinumeratis. Si enim unum ad duo constituas, et in ea multiplicatione permanere velis, dicendo unum ad tria, unum ad quatuor, unum ad quinque, et deinceps; non erit finis: sive sola dupla, ut unum ad duo, duo ad quatuor, quatuor ad octo, octo ad sexdecim, et deinde; hic quoque nullus est finis: ita et tripla sola et quadrupla sola, et quidquid horum tentare volueris, in infinitum progrediuntur. Ita etiam sesquati: nam duo ad tria, tria ad quatuor, quatuor ad quinque cum dicimus; vides nihil prohibere caetera persequi, nullo resistente fine: sive isto modo velis in eodem genere perseverans, ut duo ad tria, quatuor ad sex, sex ad novem, octo ad duodecim, decem ad quindecim, et deinceps; sive in hoc genere, sive in caeteris, nullus finis occurrit. Quid opus est de dinumeratis iam dicere, cum ex iis quae iam dicta sunt quivis intellegere possit, in iis quoque gradatim surgentibus nullum esse finem? An tibi non videtur?
1. 11. 18. Teacher: I approve and accept your view. But do you see that all these rational motions—that is, those that hold to each other some numerical measure—can go on through numbers to infinity, unless again a fixed principle restrains them and recalls them to a certain measure and form? For, to speak first of the equal ones themselves: one to one, two to two, three to three, four to four, and so on if I pursue it—what end will there be, since there is no end of number itself? For this power is in number, that every number named is finite, but unnamed it is infinite. And what happens with equal motions you can observe happening with unequal ones too, whether multiplied, or sesquate, or co-numbered, or out-numbered. For if you set one to two, and wish to remain in that multiplication, saying one to three, one to four, one to five, and so on, there will be no end; or if doubles alone, as one to two, two to four, four to eight, eight to sixteen, and so on, here too there is no end; and so triples alone, and quadruples alone, and whatever of these you wish to try, go on to infinity. So too the sesquate: for when we say two to three, three to four, four to five, you see nothing prevents pursuing the rest, with no end resisting—whether you wish to persevere in the same kind in this way, as two to three, four to six, six to nine, eight to twelve, ten to fifteen, and so on; in this kind, or in the others, no end occurs. What need is there now to speak of the out-numbered, when from what has already been said anyone can understand that in these too, rising step by step, there is no end? Or does it not seem so to you?
deMus.1.11.18
1. 11. 19. Discipulus: Quid hoc vero verius dici potest? Sed iam illam rationem quae istam infinitatem revocat ad certum modum formamque praescribit quam excedere non oporteat, avidissime cognoscere exspecto.
1. 11. 19. Student: What could be said truer than this? But now I most eagerly await to learn that principle which recalls this infinity to a fixed measure and prescribes a form that ought not to be exceeded.
deMus.1.11.19
Magister: Hanc quoque, ut alia, temetipsum nosse cognosces, cum me interrogante vera responderis. Nam primo abs te quaero, quoniam de numerosis motibus agimus, utrum ipsos debeamus consulere numeros, ut quas nobis leges certas fixasque monstraverint, eas in illis motibus animadvertendas observandasque iudicemus.
Teacher: This too, like the rest, you will recognize that you yourself know, when you have answered truly to my questions. For first I ask you—since we are treating of rhythmical motions—whether we ought to consult the numbers themselves, so that whatever fixed and settled laws they show us, we may judge that these are to be observed and watched for in those motions.
deMus.1.11.19
Discipulus: Placet vero: non enim quidquam ordinatius fieri posse arbitror.
Student: I agree indeed; for I think nothing can be done more orderly.
deMus.1.11.19
Magister: Ergo ab ipso, si videtur, principio numerorum capiamus considerationis huius exordium et videamus, quantum pro viribus mentis nostrae talia valemus intueri, quaenam sit ratio, ut quamvis per infinitum, ut dictum est, numerus progrediatur, articulos quosdam homines in numerando fecerint; a quibus ad unum rursus redeant, quod est principium numerorum. In numerando enim progredimur ab uno usque ad decem, atque inde ad unum revertimur: ac si denariam complicationem persequi velis, ut hoc modo progrediaris, decem, viginti, triginta, quadraginta; usque ad centum est progressio: si centenariam, centum, ducenta, trecenta, quadringenta; in mille est articulus a quo redeatur. Quid iam opus est ultra quaerere? Vides certe quos articulos dicam, quorum prima regula denario numero praescribitur. Nam ut decem, decies habent unum; ita centum, decies habent eosdem decem; et mille, decies habent centum; et ita deinceps quousque libitum est progredi, ibit in huiuscemodi quasi articulis, quod in denario numero praefinitum est. An aliquid horum non intellegis?
Teacher: Then let us take the start of this consideration, if you please, from the very beginning of numbers, and see—as far as the strength of our mind allows us to behold such things—what the principle is by which, although number proceeds through the infinite, as has been said, men have nevertheless made certain joints in counting, from which they return again to one, which is the beginning of numbers. For in counting we proceed from one up to ten, and from there return to one; and if you wish to pursue the multiplication by ten, so as to proceed in this way—ten, twenty, thirty, forty—the progression goes up to a hundred; if by the hundred—a hundred, two hundred, three hundred, four hundred—the joint at which one turns back is a thousand. What need is there now to seek further? You surely see what joints I mean, whose first rule is prescribed by the number ten. For as ten has one ten times, so a hundred has those same ten ten times, and a thousand has a hundred ten times; and so on, as far as one pleases to proceed, it will go in joints of this kind, as was predetermined in the number ten. Or do you not understand some of this?
deMus.1.11.19
Discipulus: Manifestissima sunt omnia, et verissima.
Student: All is most clear, and most true.
deMus.1.11.19
1. 12. 20. Magister: Hoc ergo quantum diligenter possumus perscrutemur, quaenam sit ratio ut ab uno usque ad decem progressus, et inde rursus ad unum reditus fiat. Unde abs te quaero, utrum quod vocamus principium, possit omnino nisi alicuius esse principium.
1. 12. 20. Teacher: Let us then examine, as carefully as we can, what the principle is by which the progression from one up to ten, and from there the return again to one, comes about. So I ask you whether what we call a beginning can be the beginning of anything at all except of something.
deMus.1.12.20
Discipulus: Nullo modo potest.
Student: In no way can it.
deMus.1.12.20
Magister: Item quod dicimus finem, potestne nisi alicuius rei finis esse?
Teacher: Likewise, what we call an end—can it be the end of anything except of something?
deMus.1.12.20
Discipulus: Etiam id non potest.
Student: This too it cannot.
deMus.1.12.20
Magister: Quid? a principio ad finem num putas perveniri posse, nisi per aliquod medium?
Teacher: And do you think one can come from a beginning to an end except through some middle?
deMus.1.12.20
Discipulus: Non puto.
Student: I do not think so.
deMus.1.12.20
Magister: Ergo ut totum aliquid sit, principio et medio et fine constat.
Teacher: So, for anything to be a whole, it consists of a beginning, a middle, and an end.
deMus.1.12.20
Discipulus: Ita videtur.
Student: So it seems.
deMus.1.12.20
Magister: Dic itaque nunc, principium, medium et finis, quo numero tibi contineri videantur.
Teacher: Tell me now, then, by what number a beginning, a middle, and an end seem to you to be contained.
deMus.1.12.20
Discipulus: Arbitror ternarium numerum te velle ut respondeam: tria enim quaedam sunt, de quibus quaeris.
Student: I judge that you want me to answer "three"; for there are three things you ask about.
deMus.1.12.20
Magister: Recte arbitraris. Quare in ternario numero quamdam esse perfectionem vides, quia totus est: habet enim principium, medium et finem.
Teacher: You judge rightly. So you see that there is a certain perfection in the number three, because it is whole; for it has a beginning, a middle, and an end.
deMus.1.12.20
Discipulus: Video plane.
Student: I see it plainly.
deMus.1.12.20
Magister: Quid? illud nonne ab ineunte pueritia didicimus, omnem numerum aut parem esse, aut imparem?
Teacher: And did we not learn from earliest childhood that every number is either even or odd?
deMus.1.12.20
Discipulus: Verum dicis.
Student: You speak truly.
deMus.1.12.20
Magister: Recordare ergo et dic mihi, quem soleamus dicere parem, quem imparem numerum.
Teacher: Recall, then, and tell me which we are accustomed to call an even number, and which an odd one.
deMus.1.12.20
Discipulus: Ille qui potest in duas partes aequales dividi, par; qui autem non potest, impar vocatur.
Student: The one that can be divided into two equal parts is called even; the one that cannot, odd.
deMus.1.12.20
1. 12. 21. Magister: Rem tenes. Cum igitur ternarius primus sit totus impar; et principio enim, et medio, et fine constat, ut dictum est; nonne oportet etiam parem esse totum atque perfectum, ut in eo etiam principium, medium, finisque inveniatur?
1. 12. 21. Teacher: You have it. Since, then, three is the first whole odd number—for it consists, as was said, of a beginning, a middle, and an end—must there not also be an even number that is whole and perfect, in which likewise a beginning, a middle, and an end are found?
deMus.1.12.21
Discipulus: Oportet sane.
Student: There must be indeed.
deMus.1.12.21
Magister: At iste quisquis est, non potest habere individuum medium sicut impar: si enim haberet, non posset in duas aequales partes dividi, quod esse proprium paris numeri diximus. Individuum autem medium est unum, dividuum duo. Medium autem est in numeris, a quo ambo latera sibimet sunt aequalia. An aliquid obscure dictum est, minusque assequeris?
Teacher: But this number, whatever it is, cannot have an indivisible middle as the odd number has; for if it had, it could not be divided into two equal parts, which we said is proper to an even number. Now an indivisible middle is one, a divisible middle is two. And the middle in numbers is that from which both sides are equal to each other. Or has something been said obscurely, and you do not quite follow?
deMus.1.12.21
Discipulus: Imo mihi et haec manifesta sunt, et dum quaero totum numerum parem, quaternarius primus occurrit. Nam in duobus quomodo possunt tria illa inveniri, per quae totus est numerus, id est principium, medium et finis?
Student: On the contrary, these things too are clear to me; and as I seek a whole even number, four occurs to me first. For in two, how can those three things be found by which a number is whole—that is, a beginning, a middle, and an end?
deMus.1.12.21
Magister: Idipsum omnino abs te responsum est quod volebam, et quod ipsa ratio cogit fateri. Repete itaque ab ipso uno tractationem, atque considera; videbis profecto ideo unum non habere medium et finem, quia tantum principium est; vel ideo esse principium, quia medio et fine caret.
Teacher: You have answered the very thing I wished, and what reason itself compels us to admit. So take up the treatment again from one itself, and consider; you will surely see that one has no middle and end precisely because it is only a beginning—or rather that it is a beginning because it lacks a middle and an end.
deMus.1.12.21
Discipulus: Manifestum est.
Student: It is clear.
deMus.1.12.21
Magister: Quid ergo dicemus de duobus? Num possumus in eis intellegere principium et medium, cum medium esse non possit, nisi ubi finis est; aut principium et finem, cum ad finem nisi per medium non queat perveniri?
Teacher: What, then, shall we say of two? Can we understand in it a beginning and a middle, since there cannot be a middle except where there is an end? Or a beginning and an end, since one cannot come to an end except through a middle?
deMus.1.12.21
Discipulus: Urget ratio confiteri; et quid de hoc numero respondeam, prorsus incertus sum.
Student: Reason presses me to confess it; and what to answer about this number I am quite uncertain.
deMus.1.12.21
Magister: Vide ne iste quoque numerus possit principium esse numerorum. Nam si medio caret et fine, quod, ut dixisti, cogit ratio confiteri; quid restat, nisi ut sit hoc quoque principium? An dubitas duo principia constituere?
Teacher: See whether this number too may be a beginning of numbers. For if it lacks a middle and an end—which, as you said, reason compels us to confess—what remains but that this too is a beginning? Or do you hesitate to set up two beginnings?
deMus.1.12.21
Discipulus: Vehementer dubito.
Student: I hesitate strongly.
deMus.1.12.21
Magister: Bene faceres, si ex adverso sibi constituerentur duo principia: nunc autem hoc alterum principium de illo primo est, ut illud a nullo sit, hoc vero ab illo: unum enim et unum duo sunt, et principia ita sunt ambo, ut omnes numeri quidem ab uno sint; sed quia per complicationem atque adiunctionem quamdam fiunt, origo autem complicationis et adiunctionis duali numero recte tribuitur: fit ut illud primum principium a quo numeri omnes; hoc autem alterum per quod numeri omnes, esse inveniantur. Nisi quid habes adversum ista quod disseras.
Teacher: You would do well, if the two beginnings were set up over against each other; but as it is, this second beginning derives from that first one, so that the first is from nothing, while this is from the first. For one and one are two, and both are beginnings in this way: that all numbers indeed are from one, but because they come about through a kind of multiplication and joining, while the origin of multiplication and joining is rightly attributed to the number two—so it comes about that the first is found to be that beginning from which all numbers are, and the second that through which all numbers are. Unless you have something to argue against this.
deMus.1.12.21
Discipulus: Ego vero nihil, et sine admiratione ista non cogito; quamvis ea, interrogatus abs te, ipse respondeam.
Student: I have nothing; and I do not think on these things without wonder, although it is I who answer them when questioned by you.
deMus.1.12.21
1. 12. 22. Magister: Subtilius ista quaeruntur atque abstrusius in ea disciplina quae est de numeris: hic autem nos ad institutum opus quanto citius possumus, redeamus. Quocirca quaero, uni duo iuncta quid faciunt?
1. 12. 22. Teacher: These things are inquired into more subtly and more deeply in the discipline that concerns numbers; but here let us return, as quickly as we can, to the work we set out to do. So I ask: two joined to one, what do they make?
deMus.1.12.22
Discipulus: Tria.
Student: Three.
deMus.1.12.22
Magister: Ergo haec duo principia numerorum sibimet copulata, totum numerum faciunt atque perfectum.
Teacher: Then these two beginnings of numbers, joined to each other, make a number that is whole and perfect.
deMus.1.12.22
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: That is so.
deMus.1.12.22
Magister: Quid? in numerando post unum et duo quem numerum ponimus?
Teacher: And what number do we set down in counting after one and two?
deMus.1.12.22
Discipulus: Eadem tria.
Student: That same three.
deMus.1.12.22
Magister: Idem igitur numerus, qui fit ex uno et duobus, post utrumque in ordine collocatur, ita ut nullus alius interponi queat.
Teacher: The same number, then, which is made from one and two, is placed after both in order, so that no other can be set between.
deMus.1.12.22
Discipulus: Ita video.
Student: So I see.
deMus.1.12.22
Magister: Atqui et illud videas oportet, in nullis reliquis numeris id posse contingere, ut cum duos quoslibet sibimet in numerandi ordine copulatos notaveris, consequatur eos ille qui ex ambobus conficitur, nullo interposito.
Teacher: But you ought also to see that this can happen with none of the remaining numbers: that when you have marked any two numbers joined to each other in the order of counting, the one made from both should follow them with nothing set between.
deMus.1.12.22
Discipulus: Id quoque video: nam duo et tria, qui sibi numeri copulati sunt, in summa quinque faciunt: non autem quinque continuatim sequuntur, sed quatuor. Rursus tria et quatuor septem conficiunt: inter quatuor autem ac septem, quinque atque sex ordinati sunt. Et quanto progredi voluero, tanto plures interponuntur.
Student: I see this too: for two and three, which are numbers joined to each other, make five in sum; yet five does not follow immediately, but four. Again, three and four make seven; but between four and seven, five and six are set in order. And the further I wish to go, the more are set between.
deMus.1.12.22
Magister: Magna haec ergo concordia est in prioribus tribus numeris: unum enim et duo et tria dicimus, quibus nihil interponi potest: unum autem et duo, ipsa sunt tria.
Teacher: Great, then, is this concord in the first three numbers: for we say one, two, and three, between which nothing can be set; and one and two are themselves three.
deMus.1.12.22
Discipulus: Magna prorsus.
Student: Great indeed.
deMus.1.12.22
Magister: Quid? illud nullane consideratione dignum putas, quod ista concordia quanto est arctior atque coniunctior, tanto magis in unitatem quamdam tendit, et unum quiddam de pluribus efficit?
Teacher: And do you think this worthy of no consideration: that the tighter and closer this concord is, the more it tends toward a certain unity, and makes some one thing out of many?
deMus.1.12.22
Discipulus: Imo maxima, et nescio quomodo, et miror, et amo istam quam commendas unitatem.
Student: On the contrary, of the greatest; and somehow I both wonder at and love this unity that you commend.
deMus.1.12.22
Magister: Multum probo; sed certe quaelibet rerum copulatio atque connexio tunc maxime unum quiddam efficit, cum et media extremis, et mediis extrema consentiunt.
Teacher: I much approve; but surely any coupling and connection of things makes some one thing most of all when both the middle agrees with the extremes and the extremes with the middle.
deMus.1.12.22
Discipulus: Ita certe oportet.
Student: So it must certainly be.
deMus.1.12.22
1. 12. 23. Magister: Attende igitur ut hoc in ista connexione videamus. Nam cum unum, duo, tria dicimus, nonne quanto unum a duobus, tanto duo a tribus superantur?
1. 12. 23. Teacher: Attend, then, so that we may see this in that connection. For when we say one, two, three, is not one surpassed by two by just as much as two is surpassed by three?
deMus.1.12.23
Discipulus: Verissimum est.
Student: It is most true.
deMus.1.12.23
Magister: Dic iam nunc mihi, in ista collatione quoties unum nominaverim.
Teacher: Tell me now, in this comparison, how many times have I named one?
deMus.1.12.23
Discipulus: Semel.
Student: Once.
deMus.1.12.23
Magister: Tria quoties?
Teacher: Three, how many times?
deMus.1.12.23
Discipulus: Semel.
Student: Once.
deMus.1.12.23
Magister: Quid, duo?
Teacher: And two?
deMus.1.12.23
Discipulus: Bis.
Student: Twice.
deMus.1.12.23
Magister: Semel ergo, et bis, et semel, quoties fit in summa?
Teacher: Once, then, and twice, and once—how many does that make in sum?
deMus.1.12.23
Discipulus: Quater.
Student: Four.
deMus.1.12.23
Magister: Recte igitur istos tres quaternarius numerus sequitur; ei quippe tribuitur ista proportione collatio. Quae quantum valeat, eo iam assuesce cognoscere, quod illa unitas quam te amare dixisti, in rebus ordinatis hac una effici potest, cuius graecum nomen est, nostri quidam proportionem vocaverunt, quo nomine utamur, si placet: non enim libenter, nisi necessitate, graeca vocabula in latino sermone usurpaverim.
Teacher: Rightly, then, does the number four follow those three; for to it is assigned this comparison by such proportion. How much this proportion is worth, you may begin to learn from this: that the unity which you said you love can, in ordered things, be brought about by this one thing, whose Greek name is "analogia"; some of our writers have called it "proportion" (proportio)—let us use that word, if you please, for I would not willingly, except by necessity, use Greek terms in Latin speech.
deMus.1.12.23
Discipulus: Mihi vero placet; sed perge quo intenderas.
Student: It pleases me indeed; but go on where you had intended.
deMus.1.12.23
Magister: Faciam. Nam quid sit proportio, quantumque in rebus iuris habeat, et suo loco in hac disciplina diligentius requiremus; et quanto in eruditione promotior eris, tanto eius vim melius naturamque cognosces. Sed vides certe, quod in praesentia satis est, tres illos numeros, quorum mirabare concordiam, sibimet in eadem connexione nisi per quaternarium numerum non potuisse conferri. Quamobrem post illos se ordinari, sic ut illa concordia cum his arctiore copuletur, quantum intellegis iure impetravit; ut iam non unum, duo, tria tantum; sed unum, duo, tria, quatuor, sit amicissime copulata progressio numerorum.
Teacher: I will. For what proportion is, and how much authority it has in things, we will inquire more carefully in its place in this discipline; and the further advanced you are in learning, the better you will know its power and nature. But you surely see—which for the present is enough—that those three numbers, whose concord you wondered at, could not be brought together in that same connection except through the number four. Therefore, that it should be set in order after them, so that that concord may be coupled more closely with these, you understand, has rightly been won; so that now there is not merely one, two, three, but one, two, three, four—a most amicably coupled progression of numbers.
deMus.1.12.23
Discipulus: Omnino assentior.
Student: I agree entirely.
deMus.1.12.23
1. 12. 24. Magister: At caetera intuere, ne arbitreris nihil habere proprium quaternarium numerum, quo reliqui omnes numeri careant, quod valeat ad istam connexionem de qua loquor, ut ab uno usque ad quatuor certus sit numerus, et pulcherrimus progrediendi modus. Convenerat quippe inter nos superius, tunc ex pluribus unum aliquid maxime fieri, cum extremis media, et mediis extrema consentiunt.
1. 12. 24. Teacher: But look at the rest, lest you suppose that the number four has nothing of its own, lacking to all the remaining numbers, that avails for this connection of which I speak—so that from one up to four there is a fixed number and a most beautiful manner of proceeding. For we had agreed earlier that one thing is made most of all from many when the middle agrees with the extremes and the extremes with the middle.
deMus.1.12.24
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: That is so.
deMus.1.12.24
Magister: Cum ergo collocamus unum et duo et tria, dic quae sint extrema, quod medium.
Teacher: When, then, we set down one and two and three, tell me what are the extremes and what is the middle.
deMus.1.12.24
Discipulus: Unum et tria extrema video, duo medium.
Student: I see that one and three are the extremes, two the middle.
deMus.1.12.24
Magister: Responde nunc, ex uno et tribus quid conficiatur.
Teacher: Now answer: what is made from one and three?
deMus.1.12.24
Discipulus: Quatuor.
Student: Four.
deMus.1.12.24
Magister: Quid? duo qui unus in medio numerus est, num potest nisi sibi conferri? Quamobrem dic etiam duo bis quid conficiant.
Teacher: And two, which is the single number in the middle—can it be compared except with itself? So tell me also what two twice makes.
deMus.1.12.24
Discipulus: Quatuor.
Student: Four.
deMus.1.12.24
Magister: Ita ergo medium extremis, et medio extrema consentiunt. Quamobrem sicut excellit in tribus, quod post unum et duo collocantur, cum ex uno et duobus constent; sic excellit in quatuor, quod post unum et duo et tria numerantur, cum constent ex uno et tribus, vel bis duobus: quae extremorum cum medio, et medii cum extremis, in illa quae graece dicitur, proportione consensio est. Quod utrum intellexeris pande.
Teacher: So the middle agrees with the extremes, and the extremes with the middle. Therefore, just as three excels in this, that it is set after one and two, while consisting of one and two, so four excels in this, that it is counted after one and two and three, while consisting of one and three, or twice two: which is the agreement of the extremes with the middle, and of the middle with the extremes, in that which in Greek is called "proportion." Show whether you have understood this.
deMus.1.12.24
Discipulus: Satis intellego.
Student: I understand well enough.
deMus.1.12.24
1. 12. 25. Magister: Tenta ergo in reliquis numeris, utrumne inveniatur quod quaternarii numeri proprium esse diximus.
1. 12. 25. Teacher: Try it, then, in the remaining numbers, whether what we said is proper to the number four is found there.
deMus.1.12.25
Discipulus: Faciam. Nam si constituamus duo, tria, quatuor, extrema collata fiunt sex; hoc facit et medium sibi collatum: nec tamen sex, sed quinque consequuntur. Rursus tria, quatuor et quinque constituo; extrema octo faciunt, medium quoque bis ductum: at inter quinque et octo, non iam unum, sed duos, senarium scilicet et septenarium numeros interpositos video. Atque illa ratione quantum progredior, tanto haec fiunt intervalla maiora.
Student: I will. For if we set down two, three, four, the extremes compared make six; the middle compared with itself makes the same; yet not six, but five follows. Again I set down three, four, and five; the extremes make eight, and the middle taken twice as well; but between five and eight I see not one number now, but two—six and seven—set between. And by that same reckoning, the further I go, the larger these intervals become.
deMus.1.12.25
Magister: Video te intellexisse, et omnino scire quod dictum est: sed iam ne immoremur, animadvertis certe ab uno usque ad quatuor iustissimam fieri progressionem; sive propter imparem ac parem numerum, quoniam primus impar totus tria, et primus par totus quatuor, de qua re paulo ante tractatum est; sive quia unum et duo principia sunt, et quasi semina numerorum, e quibus ternarius conficitur, ut sint iam tres numeri; qui sibi dum proportione conferuntur, quaternarius elucescit et gignitur, et propterea eis iure coniungitur, ut usque ad illum fiat ea, quam quaerimus moderata progressio.
Teacher: I see that you have understood, and altogether know what has been said. But now, lest we linger, you surely observe that from one up to four a most just progression is made—whether because of the odd and the even number, since the first whole odd number is three and the first whole even number is four, as was treated a little before; or because one and two are beginnings, and as it were the seeds of numbers, from which three is made, so that there are now three numbers, which, when compared to one another in proportion, cause four to shine forth and be begotten, and is therefore rightly joined to them, so that up to it there is made that moderate progression which we seek.
deMus.1.12.25
Discipulus: Intellego.
Student: I understand.
deMus.1.12.25
1. 12. 26. Magister: Bene sane. Sed meministine tandem quid institueramus inquirere? Nam, ut opinor, propositum erat, si quomodo invenire possemus, cum in illa infinitate numerorum certi articuli essent numerantibus constituti, quid esset causae cur ipse primus articulus in denario numero esset, qui per omnes caeteros valet plurimum; id est, cur ab uno usque ad decem progressi numerantes rursum ad unum remearent?
1. 12. 26. Teacher: Well indeed. But do you remember at last what we had set out to inquire? For, I think, the question proposed was whether we could somehow find—since, in that infinity of numbers, fixed joints were established for those who count—what the cause was that the very first joint was in the number ten, which has the greatest force through all the rest; that is, why those who count, having proceeded from one up to ten, return again to one.
deMus.1.12.26
Discipulus: Recordor plane quaestionis huius causa nos tantum circumisse: sed quid effecerimus quod ad eam solvendam pertineat, non invenio. Siquidem illa omnis nostra ratiocinatio ad id conclusa est, ut non usque ad denarium, sed usque ad quaternarium numerum sit iusta et moderata progressio.
Student: I clearly recall that for the sake of this question we have gone about so much; but what we have accomplished that bears on solving it, I do not find. For all that reasoning of ours was concluded to this: that the just and moderate progression is not up to ten, but up to four.
deMus.1.12.26
Magister: Tunc igitur non vides, ex uno et duobus, et tribus et quatuor quae summa conficiatur?
Teacher: Then do you not see what sum is made from one and two and three and four?
deMus.1.12.26
Discipulus: Video iam, video, et miror omnia, et ortam quaestionem solutam esse confiteor: unum enim et duo et tria et quatuor simul decem sunt.
Student: Now I see, I see, and I wonder at it all, and I confess that the question that arose has been solved: for one and two and three and four together are ten.
deMus.1.12.26
Magister: Ergo istos quatuor primos numeros, seriemque et connexionem eorum honorabilius haberi, quam caetera, in numeris convenit.
Teacher: Then it is fitting that those four first numbers, and their series and connection, be held more honorable than the rest among numbers.
deMus.1.12.26
1. 13. 27. Discipulus: Nullo modo possum.
1. 13. 27. Student: I can in no way deny it.
deMus.1.13.27
Magister: Quid, si quispiam numerose plaudat, ita ut unus sonitus simplum, alter duplum temporis teneat, quos iambos pedes vocant, eosque continuet atque contexat; alius autem ad eumdem sonum saltet, secundum ea scilicet tempora movens membra? nonne aut etiam dicas ipsum modulum temporum, id est quod simplum ad duplum spatia in motibus alternent, sive in illo plausu qui auditur, sive in illa saltatione quae cernitur; aut saltem delecteris numerositate quam sentias, tametsi non possis numeros eius dimensionis edicere?
Teacher: What if someone were to clap rhythmically, so that one beat holds a single time-unit and another a double—the feet they call iambs—and were to continue and weave them together; while another danced to the same beat, moving his limbs according to those time-units? Would you not either even state the very measure of the time-units—that is, that in the motions the spans of single and double alternate, whether in that clapping which is heard or in that dancing which is seen—or at least take pleasure in the rhythm that you feel, even if you could not state the numbers of its measure?
deMus.1.13.27
Discipulus: Ita vero est, ut dicis: nam et illi qui hos numeros noverunt, sentiunt eos in plausu atque saltatione, quique sint facile dicunt; et qui eos non noverunt nec possunt dicere, non negant tamen ex his se voluptate aliqua perfrui.
Student: It is indeed as you say: for those who know these numbers feel them in the clapping and dancing, and readily say which they are; and those who do not know them and cannot name them do not deny, all the same, that they enjoy some pleasure from them.
deMus.1.13.27
1. 13. 28. Magister: Cum igitur ad ipsam rationem disciplinae huius, siquidem scientia est bene modulandi, non possit negari omnes pertinere motus qui bene modulati sunt, et eos potissimum qui non referuntur ad aliud aliquid, sed in seipsis finem decoris delectationisve conservant; hi tamen motus, ut nunc a me rogatus recte vereque dixisti, si longo spatio temporis fiant, inque ipsa dimensione quae decora est, horam vel etiam maius tempus obtineant, non possunt congruere nostris sensibus [Licet aliquanto idem pes in canendo, servata collationis ratione, alias longioribus, alias brevioribus possit fieri sonis]. Quamobrem cum procedens quodammodo de secretissimis penetralibus musica, in nostris etiam sensibus, vel his rebus quae a nobis sentiuntur, vestigia quaedam posuerit; nonne oportet eadem vestigia prius persequi, ut commodius ad ipsa si potuerimus, quae dixi penetralia, sine ullo errore ducamur?
1. 13. 28. Teacher: Since, then, it cannot be denied that to the very principle of this discipline—if indeed it is the science of measuring well—all motions belong that are well measured, and especially those that are not referred to anything else but keep in themselves the end of their beauty or delight; yet these motions, as you have now rightly and truly said in answer to me, if they are made over a long span of time, and in that very measure which is beautiful take up an hour or even more, cannot suit our senses. [Although the same foot in singing, the principle of comparison being kept, can sometimes be made with longer, sometimes with shorter, sounds.] Therefore, since music, proceeding in a way from its most hidden inner shrine, has placed certain traces even in our senses, or in the things that are perceived by us, must we not first pursue those very traces, so that we may be led more conveniently, if we can, and without any error, to that inner shrine of which I spoke?
deMus.1.13.28
Discipulus: Oportet vero, et hoc iamiamque ut faciamus, efflagito.
Student: We must indeed; and I beg that we do so right now.
deMus.1.13.28
Magister: Omittamus ergo illas ultra capacitatem sensus nostri porrectas temporum metas, et de his brevibus intervallorum spatiis, quae in cantando saltandoque nos mulcent, quantum ratio nos duxerit, disseramus. Nisi tu forte aliter putas illa vestigia indagari posse, quae in nostris sensibus, hisque rebus quas valemus sentire, hanc disciplinam posuisse praedictum est.
Teacher: Let us, then, leave aside those bounds of time stretched beyond the capacity of our sense, and discuss, as far as reason leads us, these short spans of intervals that charm us in singing and dancing. Unless perhaps you think those traces can be tracked in some other way, which, as has been said, this discipline has placed in our senses and in the things we are able to perceive.
deMus.1.13.28
Discipulus: Nullo modo aliter puto.
Student: I think there is no other way at all.
deMus.1.13.28
2. 1. 1. Magister: Attende igitur diligenter, et nunc demum accipe quasi alterum nostrae disputationis exordium. Ac primum responde, utrum bene didiceris eam quam grammatici docent, syllabarum brevium longarumque distantiam; an vero sive ista noris sive ignores, malis ut ita quaeramus, quasi omnino rudes harum rerum simus, ut ad omnia nos ratio potius perducat, quam inveterata consuetudo, aut praeiudicata cogat auctoritas.
2. 1. 1. Teacher: Attend carefully, then, and now at last receive, as it were, another beginning of our discussion. And first answer: whether you have learned well the distinction of short and long syllables that the grammarians teach; or whether—whether you know it or not—you would rather have us inquire as though we were wholly unschooled in these matters, so that reason may lead us to everything, rather than ingrained habit or prejudged authority compel us.
deMus.2.1.1
Discipulus: Ita plane malle me, non modo ipsa ratio, sed istarum etiam syllabarum imperitia (quid enim fateri dubitem?) impellit.
Student: I am clearly driven to prefer that, not only by reason itself, but also by my own inexperience in these syllables—for why should I hesitate to admit it?
deMus.2.1.1
Magister: Age iam, saltem illud eloquere, utrum tu ipse per te numquam animadverteris in locutione nostra alias syllabas raptim et minime diu, alias autem productius et diutius enuntiari.
Teacher: Come now, at least say this: whether you yourself have never on your own noticed that in our speech some syllables are uttered rapidly and very briefly, others more drawn out and at greater length.
deMus.2.1.1
Discipulus: Negare non possum non me ad ista etiam surdum fuisse.
Student: I cannot deny that I have not been deaf even to this.
deMus.2.1.1
Magister: Atqui scias velim totam illam scientiam, quae grammatica graece, latine autem litteratura nominatur, historiae custodiam profiteri, vel solam, ut subtilior docet ratio; vel maxime, ut etiam pinguia corda concedunt. Itaque verbi gratia cum dixeris, cano, vel in versu forte posueris, ita ut vel tu pronuntians producas huius verbi syllabam primam, vel in versu eo loco ponas, ubi esse productam oportebat; reprehendet grammaticus, custos ille videlicet historiae, nihil aliud asserens cur hunc corripi oporteat, nisi quod hi qui ante nos fuerunt, et quorum libri exstant tractanturque a grammaticis, ea correpta, non producta usi fuerint. Quare hic quidquid valet, auctoritas valet. At vero musicae ratio, ad quam dimensio ipsa vocum rationabilis et numerositas pertinet, non curat nisi ut corripiatur vel producatur syllaba, quae illo vel illo loco est secundum rationem mensurarum suarum. Nam si eo loco ubi duas longas syllabas poni decet, hoc verbum posueris, et primam quae brevis est, pronuntiatione longam feceris, nihil musica omnino succenset: tempora enim vocum ea pervenere ad aures, quae illi numero debita fuerunt. Grammaticus autem iubet emendari, et illud te verbum ponere cuius prima syllaba producenda sit, secundum maiorum, ut dictum est, auctoritatem, quorum scripta custodit.
Teacher: Now I would have you know that the whole of that knowledge which in Greek is called "grammar" and in Latin "literature" professes to be the guardian of records—either that alone, as the subtler reasoning teaches, or chiefly so, as even dull minds grant. So, for example, when you say "cano," or perhaps place it in a verse in such a way that you either lengthen the first syllable of this word in pronouncing it, or set it in a place in the verse where it ought to have been lengthened, the grammarian—that guardian of records, of course—will censure you, asserting no other reason why it ought to be shortened than that those who lived before us, whose books survive and are studied by the grammarians, used it short and not long. Here, then, whatever has force, the force of authority has. But the principle of music, to which the rational measuring of sounds and their rhythm belongs, does not care, except that a syllable that is in this or that place be shortened or lengthened according to the principle of its own measures. For if you set this word in the place where it is fitting to put two long syllables, and make the first, which is short, long in pronunciation, music takes no offense at all; for the time-units of the sounds that reached the ears were those that were owed to that rhythm. But the grammarian bids it be corrected, and bids you set there a word whose first syllable should be lengthened, according to the authority of our forebears, as was said, whose writings he guards.
deMus.2.1.1
2. 2. 2. Discipulus: Prorsus saepissime, ita ut numquam fere sine delectatione versum audierim.
2. 2. 2. Student: Very often indeed, so much so that I have almost never heard a verse without delight.
deMus.2.2.2
Magister: Si quis ergo in versu, quo audito delectaris, eo loco quo ratio eiusdem versus non postulat, vel producat syllabas, vel corripiat, num eodem modo delectari potes?
Teacher: If, then, someone, in a verse you delight to hear, were to lengthen or shorten syllables in a place where the principle of that same verse does not require it, could you be delighted in the same way?
deMus.2.2.2
Discipulus: Imo audire hoc sine offensione non possum.
Student: On the contrary, I cannot hear this without offense.
deMus.2.2.2
Magister: Nullo modo igitur dubium est, quin te in sono quo te delectari dicis, dimensio quaedam numerorum delectet, qua perturbata delectatio illa exhiberi auribus non potest.
Teacher: There is, then, no doubt at all that, in the sound by which you say you are delighted, it is a certain measuring of numbers that delights you, and that, when this is disturbed, that delight cannot be presented to the ears.
deMus.2.2.2
Discipulus: Manifestum est.
Student: It is manifest.
deMus.2.2.2
Magister: Dic mihi deinceps quod ad sonum versus attinet, quid intersit, utrum dicam: Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primus ab oris : an qui primis ab oris.
Teacher: Tell me next, as far as the sound of the verse is concerned, what difference it makes whether I say Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primus ab oris or qui primis ab oris.
deMus.2.2.2
Discipulus: Mihi vero utrumque, quantum ad illam dimensionem pertinet, idem sonat.
Student: To me, indeed, both sound the same, as far as that measuring is concerned.
deMus.2.2.2
Magister: At hoc mea pronuntiatione factum est, cum eo scilicet vitio quod barbarismum grammatici vocant: nam primus, longa est et brevis syllaba; primis autem, ambae producendae sunt: sed ego ultimam earum corripui; ita nihil fraudis passae sunt aures tuae. Quamobrem illud etiam atque etiam tentandum est, utrum me pronuntiante sentias, quid sit in syllabis diu et non diu, ut nostra disputatio, me interrogante ac te respondente, sicut instituimus, possit procedere. Itaque iam eumdem versum in quo barbarismum feceram, repetam, et illam syllabam quam, ne tuae aures offenderentur, corripui, producam, ut grammatici iubent: tu mihi renuntiato, utrum illa versus dimensio sensum tuum eadem afficiat voluptate: sic enim pronuntiem: Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primis ab oris.
Teacher: But this came about by my pronunciation, with that fault, of course, which the grammarians call a barbarism. For "primus" is a long and a short syllable, whereas in "primis" both must be lengthened; but I shortened the last of them, so that your ears suffered no deception. Therefore it must be tried again and again, whether you can perceive, as I pronounce, what "long" and "not long" in syllables is, so that our discussion may proceed, by my asking and your answering, as we have set out. So now I will repeat the same verse in which I made the barbarism, and that syllable which I shortened—lest your ears be offended—I will lengthen, as the grammarians bid; and you report back to me whether that measuring of the verse affects your sense with the same pleasure. Thus let me pronounce it: Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primis ab oris.
deMus.2.2.2
Discipulus: Nunc vero negare non possum, nescio qua soni deformitate me offensum.
Student: Now indeed I cannot deny that I was offended by some misshapenness of sound, I know not what.
deMus.2.2.2
Magister: Non iniuria: quamquam enim barbarismus factus non sit, id tamen vitium factum est, quod et grammatica reprehendat et musica: grammatica, quia id verbum, cuius novissima syllaba producenda est, eo loco positum est ubi corripienda poni debuit; musica vero tantummodo quia producta quaelibet vox est eo loco, quo corripi oportebat, et tempus debitum quod numerosa dimensio postulabat, redditum non est. Quocirca si iam satis discernis quid sensus, quid auctoritas postulet, sequitur ut videamus, ille ipse sensus cur alias delectetur in sonis vel productis vel correptis, alias offendatur: id est enim quod ad diu, et non diu pertinet. Quam partem nos explicandam suscepisse credo quod memineris.
Teacher: Not without reason; for although no barbarism has been made, yet that fault has been made which both grammar and music censure: grammar, because that word, whose last syllable must be lengthened, was set in a place where one to be shortened ought to have been put; but music, only because some sound was lengthened in a place where it ought to have been shortened, and the time-unit owed, which the rhythmical measuring demanded, was not rendered. Therefore, if you now discern well enough what sense demands and what authority demands, it follows that we see why that very sense is sometimes delighted in sounds, whether lengthened or shortened, and sometimes offended; for this is what pertains to "long" and "not long." This is the part, I believe you remember, that we undertook to explain.
deMus.2.2.2
Discipulus: Ego vero et illud discrevi, et hoc memini, et ea quae sequuntur intentissime exspecto.
Student: I have both discerned that and I remember this, and I await most attentively what follows.
deMus.2.2.2
2. 3. 3. Magister: Quae putas, nisi ut incipiamus sibimet syllabas comparare, et videre quos numeros ad sese habeant; sicut de motibus iam inter nos tam longa superius ratione tractatum est? In motu est enim etiam omne quod sonat; et syllabae utique sonant: an quidquam horum negari potest?
2. 3. 3. Teacher: What do you think follows, except that we begin to compare syllables with one another, and see what numbers they have toward each other—just as we treated of motions above, between us, at such length? For everything that sounds is also in motion; and syllables certainly sound. Or can any of this be denied?
deMus.2.3.3
Discipulus: Nullo modo.
Student: In no way.
deMus.2.3.3
Magister: Cum ergo inter se syllabae conferuntur, motus quidam inter se conferuntur, in quibus possint numeri quidam temporis mensura diuturnitatis inquiri.
Teacher: When, then, syllables are compared with one another, certain motions are compared with one another, in which certain numbers can be sought by the measure of their length of time.
deMus.2.3.3
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: That is so.
deMus.2.3.3
Magister: Num igitur potest sibi una syllaba comparari? Nam omnem comparationem, nisi tu aliud putes, singularitas fugit.
Teacher: Can one syllable, then, be compared with itself? For singleness, unless you think otherwise, escapes all comparison.
deMus.2.3.3
Discipulus: Nihil puto aliud.
Student: I think nothing otherwise.
deMus.2.3.3
Magister: Quid? una uni, aut una vel duae duabus vel tribus, et deinceps in pluribus, quin possint sibimet conferri, num negas?
Teacher: But do you deny that one can be compared with one, or one or two with two or three, and so on with more?
deMus.2.3.3
Discipulus: Quis hoc negaverit?
Student: Who would deny this?
deMus.2.3.3
Magister: Rursus hoc vide, quamlibet syllabam brevem minimeque diu pronuntiatam, et mox ut eruperit desinentem, occupare tamen in tempore aliquid spatii, et habere quamdam morulam suam.
Teacher: See this again: that any short syllable, pronounced briefly and for the least time, and ending as soon as it has burst forth, nevertheless takes up some span of time, and has a certain little duration of its own.
deMus.2.3.3
Discipulus: Video necesse esse quod dicis.
Student: I see that what you say is necessary.
deMus.2.3.3
Magister: Dic nunc, unde numerum exordiamur.
Teacher: Tell me now, from what shall we begin number?
deMus.2.3.3
Discipulus: Ab uno scilicet.
Student: From one, of course.
deMus.2.3.3
Magister: Non absurde igitur hoc in tempore quasi minimum spatii, quod brevis obtinet syllaba, unum tempus veteres vocaverunt: a brevi enim ad longam progredimur.
Teacher: Not absurdly, then, did the ancients call this least span of time, which a short syllable takes up, one time-unit; for we proceed from the short to the long.
deMus.2.3.3
Discipulus: Verum est.
Student: It is true.
deMus.2.3.3
Magister: Sequitur iam, ut illud quoque animadvertas, quoniam ut in numeris ab uno ad duo est prima progressio; ita in syllabis, qua scilicet a brevi ad longam progredimur, longam duplum temporis habere debere: ac per hoc si spatium quod brevis occupat, recte unum tempus vocatur; spatium item quod longa occupat, recte duo tempora nominari.
Teacher: It follows now that you notice this too: since, as in numbers the first progression is from one to two, so in syllables, by which we proceed from the short to the long, the long ought to have double the time-units; and through this, if the span the short takes up is rightly called one time-unit, then the span the long takes up is rightly named two time-units.
deMus.2.3.3
Discipulus: Recte prorsus: nam id rationem postulare consentio.
Student: Quite rightly; for I agree that reason demands this.
deMus.2.3.3
2. 4. 4. Magister: Age, nunc collationes ipsas videamus: nam una brevis syllaba ad unam brevem syllabam quaero quam rationem tibi habere videatur, vel hi motus inter se quid vocentur. Meministi enim, nisi fallor, in superiore sermone nos omnibus motibus, qui inter se aliqua numerositate conveniunt, imposuisse vocabula.
2. 4. 4. Teacher: Come, now let us look at the comparisons themselves; for I ask what relation one short syllable seems to you to have to one short syllable, or what these motions are called among themselves. For you remember, unless I am mistaken, that in the earlier discussion we gave names to all motions that agree with one another by some rhythm.
deMus.2.4.4
Discipulus: Aequales eos memini nominatos: tantumdem enim ad sese habent temporis.
Student: I remember that they were named equal; for they have the same amount of time to each other.
deMus.2.4.4
Magister: Sed istam collationem syllabarum qua sibi iam conferuntur ut habeant ad se aliquos numeros, num censes sine vocabulo esse relinquendam?
Teacher: But this comparison of syllables, by which they are now compared so as to have some numbers toward each other—do you think it is to be left without a name?
deMus.2.4.4
Discipulus: Non puto.
Student: I do not think so.
deMus.2.4.4
Magister: Atqui scias, veteres pedem nuncupasse talem collationem sonorum. Sed quousque pedem progredi ratio sinat, diligenter advertendum est. Quamobrem iam dic etiam, brevis et longa syllaba qua sibi ratione conferuntur?
Teacher: Now know that the ancients called such a comparison of sounds a "foot." But how far reason allows the foot to proceed must be carefully observed. So tell me also: by what relation are a short and a long syllable compared to each other?
deMus.2.4.4
Discipulus: Opinor, ex illo genere numerorum, quos complicatos vocavimus, istam collationem manare: siquidem in ea simplum ad duplum collatum esse video, id est unum tempus brevis syllabae ad duo tempora longae syllabae.
Student: I think this comparison flows from that kind of numbers which we called "multiplied"; for in it I see that single is compared to double—that is, the one time-unit of the short syllable to the two time-units of the long syllable.
deMus.2.4.4
Magister: Quid si ita ordinentur, ut prius longa, deinde brevis syllaba pronuntietur? num quia ordo mutatus est, ideo complicatorum numerorum ratio non manet? Nam ut in illo pede simplum ad duplum, ita in isto duplum ad simplum invenitur.
Teacher: What if they are so ordered that the long is pronounced first, then the short? Does the principle of multiplied numbers not remain, just because the order has been changed? For as in that foot single is found toward double, so in this double toward single.
deMus.2.4.4
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: That is so.
deMus.2.4.4
Magister: Quid? in pede duarum longarum, nonne duo tempora duobus temporibus conferuntur?
Teacher: And in a foot of two longs, are not two time-units compared with two time-units?
deMus.2.4.4
Discipulus: Manifestum est.
Student: It is manifest.
deMus.2.4.4
Magister: Ex qua ergo ratione ducitur ista collatio?
Teacher: From what principle, then, is this comparison drawn?
deMus.2.4.4
Discipulus: Ex eorum scilicet qui aequales appellati sunt.
Student: From that of those called equal, of course.
deMus.2.4.4
2. 4. 5. Magister: Age, nunc dic mihi, ex quo a duabus brevibus orsi ad duas syllabas longas pervenimus, quot pedum collationes tractaverimus.
2. 4. 5. Teacher: Come, now tell me: from when we began with two shorts to when we arrived at two long syllables, how many comparisons of feet have we treated?
deMus.2.4.5
Discipulus: Quatuor: nam primo de duabus brevibus dictum est, secundo de brevi et longa, tertio de longa et brevi, quarto de duabus longis.
Student: Four: for first it was spoken of two shorts, second of a short and a long, third of a long and a short, fourth of two longs.
deMus.2.4.5
Magister: Num possunt esse plures quam quatuor, cum duae syllabae sibimet conferuntur?
Teacher: Can there be more than four, when two syllables are compared with each other?
deMus.2.4.5
Discipulus: Nullo modo: nam cum syllabae hunc modum acceperint, ut brevis unum tempus, longa duo habeat, cumque syllaba omnis aut brevis aut longa sit; quo pacto sibi possunt duae syllabae comparari atque copulari ut pedem faciant, nisi aut brevis et brevis sit, aut brevis et longa, aut longa et brevis, aut longa et longa?
Student: In no way; for since the syllables have received this measure, that a short has one time-unit and a long two, and since every syllable is either short or long, in what way can two syllables be compared and coupled to make a foot, except as either short and short, or short and long, or long and short, or long and long?
deMus.2.4.5
Magister: Dic etiam quot habeat tempora binarum syllabarum minimus pes, quot item maximus.
Teacher: Tell me also how many time-units the smallest foot of two syllables has, and how many the largest.
deMus.2.4.5
Discipulus: Duo ille, iste quatuor.
Student: The former two, the latter four.
deMus.2.4.5
Magister: Videsne ut progressio nisi usque ad quaternarium numerum fieri non potuerit, sive in pedibus, sive in temporibus?
Teacher: Do you see that the progression could be made only up to the number four, whether in feet or in time-units?
deMus.2.4.5
Discipulus: Video plane, et recordor rationem progressionis in numeris, atque illam vim hic etiam inesse sentio cum magna animi voluptate.
Student: I see it plainly, and I recall the principle of progression in numbers, and I feel that this same power is present here too, with great pleasure of mind.
deMus.2.4.5
Magister: Nonne ergo censes, cum pedes syllabis constent, id est distinctis et quasi articulatis motibus qui sunt in sonis, syllabae autem tendantur temporibus, oportere fieri etiam usque ad quatuor syllabas progressionem pedis, sicut iam factam usque ad quaternarium numerum, et ipsorum pedum et temporum cernis?
Teacher: Do you not then judge that, since feet consist of syllables—that is, of distinct and, as it were, articulated motions that are in sounds, while syllables are stretched out by time-units—the progression of the foot too ought to go up to four syllables, just as you see it has already been made up to the number four, both in the feet themselves and in their time-units?
deMus.2.4.5
Discipulus: Ita plane ut dicis sentio, et hoc videri perfectae rationi cognosco, et debitum flagito.
Student: I feel exactly as you say, and I recognize that this seems to belong to a perfect principle, and I demand it as owed.
deMus.2.4.5
2. 5. 6. Magister: Age nunc ergo prius, ut ordo ipse postulat, ternarum syllabarum pedes quot esse possint, videamus, sicut binarum quatuor esse comperimus.
2. 5. 6. Teacher: Come now, then, first, as the order itself demands, let us see how many feet of three syllables there can be, just as we found there are four of two.
deMus.2.5.6
Discipulus: Ita fiat.
Student: Let it be so.
deMus.2.5.6
Magister: Meministi ab una brevi syllaba, id est unius temporis istam nos inchoasse rationem, et cur ita oporteret satis intellexisse.
Teacher: You remember that we began this account from a single short syllable, that is, of one time-unit, and understood well enough why it had to be so.
deMus.2.5.6
Discipulus: Memini ab illa lege numerandi, qua ab uno incipimus, quod principium numerorum est, placuisse nobis non oportere discedere.
Student: I remember that, by that law of counting by which we begin from one, which is the beginning of numbers, it seemed good to us that we ought not to depart from it.
deMus.2.5.6
Magister: Cum igitur in pedibus binarum syllabarum ille sit primus qui duabus brevibus constat (cogebat enim ratio uni tempori prius unum tempus iungi quam duo); quem tandem arbitraris in pedibus ternarum syllabarum primum esse debere?
Teacher: Since, then, among feet of two syllables the first is the one that consists of two shorts (for reason compelled that one time-unit be joined to one time-unit before two), which, in the end, do you judge ought to be the first among feet of three syllables?
deMus.2.5.6
Discipulus: Quem, nisi eum qui a tribus brevibus confit?
Student: Which, except the one made of three shorts?
deMus.2.5.6
Magister: Et iste quot temporum est?
Teacher: And how many time-units does this have?
deMus.2.5.6
Discipulus: Trium scilicet.
Student: Three, of course.
deMus.2.5.6
Magister: Quomodo ergo huius partes sibi conferuntur? Nam omnem pedem propter illam numerorum collationem duas habere partes, quae sibimet aliqua ratione conferantur, necesse est, idque superius egisse nos memini: sed numquid possumus hunc trium brevium syllabarum pedem in duas aequales partes dividere?
Teacher: How, then, are its parts compared with each other? For every foot, because of that comparison of numbers, must necessarily have two parts that are compared with each other by some principle—I remember we treated this above; but can we divide this foot of three short syllables into two equal parts?
deMus.2.5.6
Discipulus: Nullo modo.
Student: In no way.
deMus.2.5.6
Magister: Quomodo ergo dividitur?
Teacher: How, then, is it divided?
deMus.2.5.6
Discipulus: Nihil aliud video, nisi ut prima pars habeat unam syllabam, secunda duas; aut prima duas, secunda unam.
Student: I see nothing else but that the first part has one syllable, the second two; or the first two, the second one.
deMus.2.5.6
Magister: Dic etiam hoc de qua regula numerorum sit?
Teacher: Tell me also from what rule of numbers this is.
deMus.2.5.6
Discipulus: De complicatorum genere esse cognosco.
Student: I recognize that it is from the kind of the multiplied.
deMus.2.5.6
2. 5. 7. Magister: Age, nunc illud attende, tres syllabae in quibus est una longa, caeterae breves, quoties variari possint, id est quot pedes facere; et responde, si inveneris.
2. 5. 7. Teacher: Come, now attend to this: three syllables in which one is long and the rest short—how many ways can they be varied, that is, how many feet can they make? Answer, if you have found out.
deMus.2.5.7
Discipulus: Unum pedem video esse, qui longa et duabus brevibus constet; aliud non intellego.
Student: I see there is one foot that consists of a long and two shorts; I understand no other.
deMus.2.5.7
Magister: Idemne solus tibi videtur habere unam in tribus longam, qui eam primo habet loco?
Teacher: Does only that one seem to you to have a single long among three, which has it in the first place?
deMus.2.5.7
Discipulus: Nullo pacto istud putaverim, cum possint duae breves priores esse, longa ultima.
Student: I would in no way think that, since the two shorts can come first and the long last.
deMus.2.5.7
Magister: Considera utrum sit aliquid tertium.
Teacher: Consider whether there is a third.
deMus.2.5.7
Discipulus: Est plane: nam haec longa etiam in medio duarum brevium collocari potest.
Student: There is plainly: for this long can also be set in the middle of the two shorts.
deMus.2.5.7
Magister: Vide etiamne sit aliquid quartum.
Teacher: See whether there is also a fourth.
deMus.2.5.7
Discipulus: Omnino non potest.
Student: There cannot be at all.
deMus.2.5.7
Magister: Potesne iam respondere, tres syllabae habentes in se unam longam et duas breves, quoties variari possint, id est quot pedes facere?
Teacher: Can you now answer how many ways three syllables having in them one long and two shorts can be varied—that is, how many feet they can make?
deMus.2.5.7
Discipulus: Possum sane: nam ter sunt variatae, et tres fecerunt pedes.
Student: I can indeed: for they were varied three times, and made three feet.
deMus.2.5.7
Magister: Quid? isti tres pedes quomodo sint ordinandi iamne ipse colligis, an ad hoc etiam minutatim es perducendus?
Teacher: And these three feet—how they are to be ordered, do you now gather for yourself, or must you be led to this too, bit by bit?
deMus.2.5.7
Discipulus: Displicet enim tibi ordo ille quo ipsam varietatem comperi? nam primo adverti unam longam et duas breves, deinde duas breves et unam longam, postremo brevem et longam et brevem.
Student: Does the order in which I discovered the variation itself displease you? For first I noted one long and two shorts, then two shorts and one long, last a short and a long and a short.
deMus.2.5.7
Magister: Itane vero tibi non displiceat qui sic ordinat, ut a primo ad tertium veniat, a tertio ad secundum; ac non potius a primo ad secundum, et deinde ad tertium?
Teacher: Would it not displease you, indeed, that someone orders things so as to go from the first to the third, from the third to the second, rather than from the first to the second and then to the third?
deMus.2.5.7
Discipulus: Displicet prorsus: sed quid hic tandem tale advertisti, rogo?
Student: It displeases me utterly; but what such thing have you noticed here, I ask?
deMus.2.5.7
Magister: Cum ideo in hac tripartita differentia illum pedem primum posueris, qui primo loco habet longam, quia sensisti unitatem ipsam longae syllabae principatum tenere (siquidem ipsa ibi una est), et propterea eam debere ordinem gignere, ut ille sit primus pes ubi prima ipsa est: simul etiam videre debuisti eum esse secundum ubi ipsa secunda est, eum tertium ubi eadem tertia est. An adhuc in illa sententia manendum putas?
Teacher: Since you set first, in this threefold difference, that foot which has the long in the first place, because you sensed that the unity of the long syllable holds the primacy (for it alone is there single), and that on this account it ought to generate the order, so that the first foot is where it is first—you ought at the same time to have seen that it is second where it is second, and third where it is third. Or do you think you must still abide by that earlier view?
deMus.2.5.7
Discipulus: Imo eam sine dubitatione condemno: hunc enim esse meliorem ordinem, vel potius hunc esse ordinem, quis non assentiatur?
Student: On the contrary, I condemn it without hesitation; for that this is the better order—or rather that this is the order—who would not agree?
deMus.2.5.7
Magister: Nunc ergo dic qua numerorum regula isti quoque dividantur pedes, eorumque sibi partes conferantur.
Teacher: Now then tell me by what rule of numbers these feet too are divided, and their parts compared with each other.
deMus.2.5.7
Discipulus: Primum et postremum aequali regula dividi video, quia et ille in longam et duas breves et iste in duas breves et longam dividi potest, ut singulae partes habeant bina tempora, et ob hoc sint aequales. In secundo autem quoniam mediam habet longam syllabam, sive priori sive posteriori parti tribuatur, aut in tria et unum, aut in unum et tria tempora dividitur: ac per hoc in eius divisione complicatorum numerorum ratio valet.
Student: I see that the first and the last are divided by an equal rule, because the one can be divided into a long and two shorts, the other into two shorts and a long, so that each part has two time-units, and on this account they are equal. But in the second, since it has the long syllable in the middle, whether it is assigned to the prior or the latter part, it is divided either into three and one, or into one and three time-units; and through this, in its division the principle of the multiplied numbers holds.
deMus.2.5.7
2. 5. 8. Magister: Volo mihi iam dicas per te ipse si potes, post istos qui a nobis tractati sunt, quos pedes ordinandos putes. Tractati enim sunt primo binarum syllabarum quatuor, quorum ordo ductus est a numerorum ordine, ut a brevibus syllabis ordiremur. Deinde iam productiores ternarum syllabarum pedes tractandos suscepimus, et quod facile erat ex superiore ratione, a tribus brevibus orsi sumus. Quid deinde sequebatur, nisi ut una longa cum duabus brevibus quot formas ederet videremus? Visum est; et tres pedes post illum primum, ita ut oportebat, ordinati sunt. Qui deinceps consequantur nonne per teipsum videre iam debes, ne omnia minutissimis interrogatiunculis eruamus?
2. 5. 8. Teacher: I want you now to tell me by yourself, if you can, after those we have treated, which feet you think are to be ordered next. For first the four of two syllables were treated, whose order was drawn from the order of numbers, so that we began with short syllables. Then we undertook to treat the longer feet of three syllables, and, since it was easy from the earlier principle, we began with three shorts. What followed next, but that we should see how many forms one long with two shorts produces? It was seen; and three feet after that first were ordered, as had to be. Which follow next, ought you not now to see for yourself, lest we dig out everything by tiny little questions?
deMus.2.5.8
Discipulus: Recte dicis: nam quis non videat eos iam sequi, in quibus una brevis sit, caeterae longae: cui brevi, quia una est, cum superiore ratione principatus tribuatur, primus erit profecto in his ubi prima est, secundus ubi secunda, tertius ubi tertia, quae etiam ultima est.
Student: You say rightly; for who would not see that those now follow in which there is one short and the rest long? To which short, because it is single, since by the earlier principle primacy is assigned to it, the first will certainly be where it is first, the second where it is second, the third where it is third, which is also the last.
deMus.2.5.8
Magister: Cernis, ut opinor, quibus etiam rationibus dividantur, ut sibi eorum partes conferri queant.
Teacher: You discern, I think, by what principles too they are divided, so that their parts can be compared with each other.
deMus.2.5.8
Discipulus: Cerno prorsus: nam ille qui ex una brevi et duabus longis constat, dividi non potest, nisi ita ut prior pars habeat tria tempora, quae continet brevem et longam; posterior duo, quae uni longae insunt. Hic autem tertius in eo quidem priori par est, quod unam patitur divisionem; in eo autem dissimilis, quod cum ille in tria et duo, iste in duo et tria tempora secatur. Nam longa syllaba, quae primam tenet partem, duobus temporibus tenditur: restat longa et brevis, quod est trium temporum spatium. At vero medius qui habet brevem syllabam mediam, geminam potest partitionem pati, quia eadem brevis et priori et posteriori parti tribui potest: idcirco aut in duo et tria, aut in tria et duo dividitur tempora: quamobrem sesquatorum numerorum ratio tres istos possidet pedes.
Student: I discern it plainly: for the one that consists of one short and two longs cannot be divided except so that the prior part has three time-units, which contains a short and a long, and the latter two, which are in one long. But this third is in one respect equal to that prior one, in that it admits a single division; in another, unlike, because while that one is cut into three and two, this is cut into two and three time-units. For the long syllable, which holds the first part, is stretched over two time-units; there remain a long and a short, which is a span of three time-units. But the middle one, which has the short syllable in the middle, can admit a twofold division, because that same short can be assigned to either the prior or the latter part; therefore it is divided either into two and three, or into three and two, time-units. Thus the principle of the sesquate numbers possesses these three feet.
deMus.2.5.8
Magister: Omnesne iam trium syllabarum pedes consideravimus, an aliquid restat?
Teacher: Have we now considered all the feet of three syllables, or does something remain?
deMus.2.5.8
Discipulus: Unum reliquum video, qui ex tribus longis constat.
Student: I see one remaining, which consists of three longs.
deMus.2.5.8
Magister: Tracta ergo etiam huius divisionem.
Teacher: Treat, then, its division too.
deMus.2.5.8
Discipulus: Una syllaba et duae, aut duae atque una huius divisio est; tempora scilicet duo et quatuor, aut quatuor et duo: quare complicatorum numerorum ratione istius pedis sibi partes conferuntur.
Student: Its division is one syllable and two, or two and one—that is, two and four time-units, or four and two; so by the principle of the multiplied numbers the parts of this foot are compared with each other.
deMus.2.5.8
2. 6. 9. Magister: Nunc quaternarum syllabarum pedes consequenter atque ordine videamus, et ipse iam dic quem horum primum esse oporteat, addita etiam ratione divisionis eius.
2. 6. 9. Teacher: Now let us see, in due sequence and order, the feet of four syllables, and tell me yourself which of these ought to be first, adding also the principle of its division.
deMus.2.6.9
Discipulus: Scilicet quatuor brevium, qui dividitur in duas binarum syllabarum partes, aequalium ratione numerorum duo et duo tempora possidentes.
Student: That of four shorts, of course, which is divided into two parts of two syllables, holding two and two time-units by the principle of equal numbers.
deMus.2.6.9
Magister: Tenes; iam itaque perge ipse, et persequere caetera. Nihil enim opus esse iam puto te per singula interrogari, cum sit una ratio demendi deinceps breves syllabas, et pro his longas subiciendi, donec ad omnes longas veniatur; et cum demuntur breves, longaeque subduntur, quas varietates faciant, et quot pedes gignant, considerandi; ea scilicet syllaba principatum ordinis retinente, quae una fuerit inter caeteras vel longa vel brevis: in his enim omnibus iam superius es exercitatus. Ubi autem duae breves sunt et duae longae, quod in praecedentibus non erat, quas censes principatum habere debere?
Teacher: You have it; so now proceed yourself, and pursue the rest. For I think there is now no need for you to be questioned point by point, since there is one principle for removing the short syllables in turn and putting longs in their place, until one comes to all longs; and for considering, when the shorts are removed and longs substituted, what variations they make and how many feet they produce—that syllable, of course, retaining the primacy of order which is single among the rest, whether long or short; for in all these you have already been exercised above. But where there are two shorts and two longs, which was not the case in the preceding, which do you judge ought to have the primacy?
deMus.2.6.9
Discipulus: Iam hoc quoque manifestum est de superioribus. Siquidem magis tenet unitatem brevis syllaba quae unum habet tempus, quam longa quae duo. Et propterea in omni capite atque principio eum pedem constituimus qui ex brevibus constat.
Student: This too is now clear from the earlier cases. For the short syllable, which has one time-unit, holds unity more than the long, which has two. And therefore at every head and beginning we set the foot that consists of shorts.
deMus.2.6.9
2. 6. 10. Magister: Nihil igitur te impedit, quin omnes istos persequaris pedes audiente ac iudicante me, non interrogante.
2. 6. 10. Teacher: Nothing, then, prevents you from pursuing all these feet, with me listening and judging, not questioning.
deMus.2.6.10
Discipulus: Faciam si potero: nam primo de quatuor brevibus primi pedis, brevis una detrahenda est, et pro ea longa ponenda in primo loco propter unitatis dignitatem. Hic autem pes dividitur bis: aut in longam et tres breves; aut in longam et brevem, et duas breves; id est aut in duo et tria; aut in tria, et duo tempora. Secundo autem loco posita longa facit alium pedem, qui uno modo recte dividitur, in tria scilicet et duo tempora, ut prior pars teneat brevem et longam, posterior duas breves. Porro tertio loco constituta longa facit eum pedem, qui rursus uno modo rite dividitur; sed ita ut prior pars habeat duo tempora in duabus brevibus syllabis, posterior tria in longa et brevi. Quartum pedem facit longa ultima, qui duobus modis dividitur, ut ille ubi prima est: nam vel in duas breves, et brevem ac longam; vel in tres breves, et longam partiri eum licet; in duo scilicet, et tria; aut in tria, et duo tempora. Omnes autem isti quatuor pedes, ubi cum tribus brevibus varie longa collocatur, sesquatorum numerorum ratione partes suas ad se collatas habent.
Student: I will, if I can. For first, from the four shorts of the first foot, one short must be taken away, and in its place a long set in the first place, because of the dignity of unity. This foot is divided in two ways: either into a long and three shorts, or into a long and a short, and two shorts—that is, either into two and three, or into three and two, time-units. A long set in the second place makes another foot, which is rightly divided in one way—namely into three and two time-units, so that the prior part holds a short and a long, the latter two shorts. Further, a long set in the third place makes that foot which again is rightly divided in one way, but so that the prior part has two time-units in two short syllables, the latter three in a long and a short. A final long makes the fourth foot, which is divided in two ways, like the one where it is first: for it can be divided either into two shorts and a short and a long, or into three shorts and a long—that is, into two and three, or into three and two, time-units. But all these four feet, where a long is set variously with three shorts, have their parts compared with each other by the principle of the sesquate numbers.
deMus.2.6.10
2. 6. 11. Sequitur ut de quatuor brevibus duabus detractis, pro his duas longas subiciamus, videamusque quot formas ac pedes cum breves ac longae binae sint, possint edere. Primo igitur video duas breves et duas longas esse ponendas, quod a brevibus rectius exordium sit. Hic autem pes habet duplicem divisionem: aut enim in duo et quatuor, aut in quatuor et duo dividitur tempora; ut aut duae breves priorem partem teneant, et posteriorem duae longae; aut ut priorem duae breves et longa, posteriorem autem longa quae reliqua est. Fit alius pes, cum duae istae breves quas in capite posueramus, ita ut ordo ipse postulat, in medio fuerint collocatae, et est huius pedis divisio in tria et tria tempora: nam priorem partem occupant longa et brevis, posteriorem brevis et longa. Cum autem ponuntur in ultimo, nam hoc sequitur, faciunt pedem geminae divisionis, cuius aut prior pars habeat duo tempora in una longa, posterior quatuor in longa et duabus brevibus; aut prior quatuor in duabus longis, posterior in duabus brevibus duo. Horum autem trium pedum partes, quod ad primum et tertium attinet, complicatorum numerorum ratione sibi comparantur; medius aequales eas habet.
2. 6. 11. It follows that, two shorts being taken away from the four shorts, we substitute two longs for them, and see how many forms and feet they can produce when the shorts and longs are each two. First, then, I see that two shorts and two longs are to be set down, because the beginning is more rightly from shorts. This foot has a twofold division: for it is divided either into two and four, or into four and two, time-units; so that either the two shorts hold the prior part and the two longs the latter, or two shorts and a long the prior, and the remaining long the latter. Another foot is made when those two shorts that we had set at the head are placed in the middle, as the order itself demands; and this foot's division is into three and three time-units: for a long and a short occupy the prior part, a short and a long the latter. But when they are placed at the end—for this follows—they make a foot of twofold division, whose prior part either has two time-units in one long and the latter four in a long and two shorts, or the prior four in two longs and the latter two in two shorts. The parts of these three feet, as concerns the first and third, are compared by the principle of the multiplied numbers; the middle has them equal.
deMus.2.6.11
2. 6. 12. Iam deinceps istae duae breves quae coniunctae ponebantur, disiunctae ponendae sunt: quarum minima disiunctio est, a qua etiam incipiendum, ut unam syllabam longam inter se habeant; maxima, ut duas. Sed cum una est inter eas, duobus modis fit, et duo pedes gignuntur. Prior autem est horum modorum, ut in capite brevis sit, deinde longa; inde brevis, et longa quae reliqua est. Alter modus est, ut in secundo et in ultimo sint breves, in primo et tertio loco longae: ita erit longa et brevis, et longa et brevis. Maxima vero illa disiunctio est, cum duae longae in medio sunt, brevium autem una in primo, altera in extremo loco. Et dividuntur ii tres pedes, in quibus breves disiunctae ponuntur, in tria et tria tempora, id est primus horum in brevem et longam, et brevem ac longam: secundus in longam ac brevem, et longam ac brevem: tertius in brevem ac longam, et longam ac brevem. Ita fiunt sex pedes duabus brevibus et duabus longis syllabis varie inter se, quoad possunt, locatis.
2. 6. 12. Now next, those two shorts that were set joined together must be set apart: the smallest separation of them, from which we must also begin, is that they have one long syllable between them; the largest, that they have two. But when there is one between them, it happens in two ways, and two feet are produced. The prior of these ways is that there is a short at the head, then a long, then a short, and the long that remains. The other way is that the shorts are in the second and last places, and the longs in the first and third places: thus there will be a long and a short, and a long and a short. But that largest separation is when the two longs are in the middle, and one of the shorts is in the first, the other in the last place. And these three feet, in which the shorts are set apart, are divided into three and three time-units—that is, the first of them into a short and a long, and a short and a long; the second into a long and a short, and a long and a short; the third into a short and a long, and a long and a short. Thus there come about six feet, with two short and two long syllables set variously among themselves, as far as they can be.
deMus.2.6.12
2. 6. 13. Restat ut de quatuor brevibus detrahantur tres, et pro his tres longae constituantur: erit una brevis; et quia una brevis in capite, quam tres longae consequentur, facit alium pedem, secundo loco posita secundum, tertium tertio, quartum quarto. Quorum quatuor, duo primi in tria et quatuor tempora dividuntur, duo autem posteriores in quatuor et tria, et omnes sesquatorum ratione numerorum partes sibi collatas habent: nam prior pars primi est brevis et longa, tenens tria tempora; posterior duae longae in quatuor temporibus. Secundi prior pars est longa et brevis, ergo tria tempora; posterior duae longae, quatuor tempora. Tertius priorem partem habet in duabus longis, quatuor temporibus; posteriorem eius partem brevis et longa obtinet, id est tria tempora. Quarti priorem partem similiter faciunt duae longae, quatuor temporum; et posteriorem longa et brevis, tribus temporibus. Reliquus pes est quatuor syllabarum, ubi omnes auferuntur breves, ut quatuor longis pes constet. Hic in duas et duas longas secundum aequales numeros, id est in quatuor et quatuor videlicet dividitur tempora. Habes quod per meipsum explicari voluisti: perge iam rogando persequi caetera.
2. 6. 13. It remains that, of the four shorts, three be taken away, and three longs set in their place: there will be one short; and because one short at the head, which three longs follow, makes one foot, set in the second place it makes the second, in the third the third, in the fourth the fourth. Of these four, the first two are divided into three and four time-units, the latter two into four and three, and all have their parts compared by the principle of the sesquate numbers. For the prior part of the first is a short and a long, holding three time-units; the latter, two longs in four time-units. The prior part of the second is a long and a short, hence three time-units; the latter, two longs, four time-units. The third has its prior part in two longs, four time-units; its latter part a short and a long hold, that is, three time-units. The fourth's prior part two longs likewise make, of four time-units; and the latter a long and a short, of three time-units. The remaining foot is of four syllables, where all the shorts are removed, so that the foot consists of four longs. This is divided into two and two longs according to the equal numbers, that is, into four and four time-units. You have what you wished to have unfolded by me; go on now to pursue the rest by asking.
deMus.2.6.13
2. 7. 14. Magister: Faciam: sed satisne considerasti progressionem istam usque ad quaternarium numerum, quae in ipsis numeris demonstrata est, quantum in his etiam pedibus valet?
2. 7. 14. Teacher: I will; but have you considered enough how far that progression up to the number four, which was demonstrated in the numbers themselves, holds also in these feet?
deMus.2.7.14
Discipulus: Ita sane in his ut in illis hanc progrediendi rationem probo.
Student: I approve this principle of proceeding in these just as in those.
deMus.2.7.14
Magister: Quid illud? nonne ut contextis syllabis pedes facti sunt, ita etiam contextis pedibus aliquid fieri posse existimandum est, quod iam neque syllabae neque pedis nomine censeatur?
Teacher: And this: as feet were made by weaving syllables together, so must we judge that by weaving feet together something can be made that is no longer reckoned by the name of syllable or of foot?
deMus.2.7.14
Discipulus: Omnino existimo.
Student: I judge so entirely.
deMus.2.7.14
Magister: Quid tandem id putas esse?
Teacher: What, in the end, do you think this is?
deMus.2.7.14
Discipulus: Versum arbitror.
Student: I judge it is a verse.
deMus.2.7.14
Magister: Quid si perpetuo contexere quispiam pedes aliquos velit, ita ut eis modum ac finem non imponat, nisi aut defectus vocis, aut aliquis alius casus interpellans, aut temporis ratio ad aliud aliquid transeundi? etiamne versus a te nominabitur, habens vel viginti vel triginta vel centum etiam sive amplius pedes, ut voluerit ac potuerit ille qui eos quamlibet longa perpetuitate contexit?
Teacher: What if someone wished to weave certain feet together endlessly, putting no measure and end to them, except either failure of voice, or some other interrupting chance, or the need of time to pass to something else? Will you still name it a verse, having twenty or thirty or even a hundred or more feet, as he wished and was able who wove them together in however long a continuation?
deMus.2.7.14
Discipulus: Non ita est: neque enim aut ubi pedes quoslibet quibuslibet permixtos animadvertero, aut per infinitam longitudinem multos connexos, versum appellabo; sed et genus et numerum pedum, id est qui et quot pedes versum conficiant aliqua disciplina consequi, et ex ea iudicare potero, utrum versus aures meas pepulerit.
Student: It is not so; for I will not call it a verse either when I notice any feet mixed with any others, or many connected through an infinite length; but I will be able, by some discipline, to grasp both the kind and the number of feet—that is, which and how many feet make up a verse—and from it to judge whether a verse has struck my ears.
deMus.2.7.14
Magister: At haec quaecumque est disciplina, versibus regulam et modum non utique ut libitum est, sed aliqua ratione constituit.
Teacher: But this discipline, whatever it is, establishes the rule and measure for verses not just as it pleases, but by some principle.
deMus.2.7.14
Discipulus: Non enim aliter, siquidem disciplina est, aut oportebat, aut poterat.
Student: It neither ought nor could be otherwise, if indeed it is a discipline.
deMus.2.7.14
Magister: Hanc ergo rationem investigemus, et assequamur, si placet: nam si auctoritatem solam intueamur, is erit versus, quem versum dici voluit Asclepiades nescio qui, aut Archilochus, poetae scilicet veteres, aut Sappho poetria, et caeteri, quorum etiam nominibus versuum genera vocantur, quae primi animadvertentes cecinerunt. Nam et Asclepiadaeus versus dicitur, et Archilochius et Sapphicus, et alia sexcenta auctorum vocabula Graeci versibus diversi generis indiderunt. Ex quo non absurde cuipiam videri potest, quod si quis ut volet, pedes quot volet, et quos volet ordinaverit, quia nemo ante ipsum hunc ordinem ac mensuram pedibus constituerit, recte ac iure conditor novi generis versuum propagatorque dicetur. Aut si haec licentia intercluditur homini, cum conquestione quaerendum est quid tandem illi meruerunt, si nullam rationem secuti, connexionem pedum quos illis connectere placuit, versum appellari haberique fecerunt. An tibi aliter videtur?
Teacher: Let us investigate this principle, then, and attain it, if you please. For if we look only to authority, that will be a verse which some Asclepiades, I know not who, or Archilochus—ancient poets, of course—or the poetess Sappho, and the rest, by whose very names the kinds of verses are called, wished to be called a verse, who first observed and sang them. For there is the Asclepiadean verse, and the Archilochian, and the Sapphic, and the Greeks gave six hundred other authors' names to verses of different kinds. From which it can not absurdly seem to someone that, if anyone arranges as he wishes, as many feet as he wishes, and which he wishes, then—because no one before him established this order and measure for the feet—he will rightly and justly be called the founder and propagator of a new kind of verse. Or, if this license is shut off from a man, we must ask with complaint what those others, after all, did to deserve it, if, following no principle, they made the connection of feet that they pleased to connect be called and held a verse. Or does it seem otherwise to you?
deMus.2.7.14
Discipulus: Ita vero est ut dicis, et prorsus assentior, ratione potius quam auctoritate versum esse generatum, quam peto iamiamque videamus.
Student: It is indeed as you say, and I agree entirely that a verse is generated by reason rather than by authority—which I ask that we now examine right away.
deMus.2.7.14
2. 8. 15. Magister: Videamus ergo qui pedes sibimet copulandi sint, deinde quid his copulatis fiat (non enim versus fit solus); postremo de versus tota ratione tractabimus. Sed num censes commode ista nos posse persequi, nisi pedum nomina teneamus? Quamquam hoc ordine a nobis digesti sunt, ut possint ipsius sui ordinis nominibus nuncupari: dici enim potest, primus, secundus, tertius, atque hoc modo caeteri. Sed quia non sunt contemnenda vetusta vocabula, nec facile a consuetudine recedendum, nisi quae rationi adversatur; utendum est his nominibus pedum quae Graeci instituerunt, et nostri iam utuntur pro latinis: quae plane ita usurpemus, ut non quaeramus origines nominum. Multum enim habet ista res loquacitatis, utilitatis parum. Neque enim eo minus utiliter in loquendo appellas panem, lignum, lapidem, quod nescis cur haec ita sint appellata.
2. 8. 15. Teacher: Let us see, then, which feet are to be coupled to each other; next, what is made from these coupled (for a verse is not made by itself); finally, we will treat the whole principle of the verse. But do you think we can pursue these conveniently unless we hold the names of the feet? Although they have been arranged by us in such an order that they could be named by the names of their own order—for one can say the first, the second, the third, and so on for the rest. But because old terms are not to be despised, nor should we easily depart from custom, except where it opposes reason, we must use those names of the feet which the Greeks established, and which our own people now use in place of Latin ones: which let us so adopt that we do not seek the origins of the names. For that matter holds much talk and little usefulness. For you call bread, wood, and stone no less usefully in speaking because you do not know why these were so named.
deMus.2.8.15
Discipulus: Ita prorsus, ut dicis, sentio.
Student: I feel exactly as you say.
deMus.2.8.15
Magister: Primus pes vocatur Pyrrhichius, ex duabus brevibus, temporum duum, ut fuga. Secundus, Iambus, ex brevi et longa, ut parens, temporum trium. Tertius, Trochaeus, vel Chorius, ex longa et brevi, ut meta, temporum trium. Quartus, Spondeus, ex duabus longis, ut aestas, temporum quatuor. Quintus, Tribrachus, ex tribus brevibus, ut macula, temporum trium. Sextus, Dactylus, ex longa et duabus brevibus, ut Maenalus, temporum quatuor. Septimus, Amphibrachus, ex brevi et longa et brevi, ut carina, temporum quatuor. Octavus, Anapaestus, ex duabus brevibus et longa, ut Erato, temporum quatuor. Nonus, Bacchius, ex brevi et duabus longis, ut Achates, temporum quinque. Decimus, Creticus vel Amphimacrus, ex longa et brevi et longa, ut insulae, temporum quinque. Undecimus, Palimbacchius, ex duabus longis et brevi, ut natura, temporum quinque. Duodecimus, Molossus, ex tribus longis, ut Aeneas, temporum sex. Decimus tertius, Proceleumaticus, ex quatuor brevibus, ut avicula, temporum quatuor. Decimus quartus, Paeon primus, ex prima longa et tribus brevibus, ut legitimus, temporum quinque. Decimus quintus, Paeon secundus, ex secunda longa et tribus brevibus, ut colonia, temporum quinque. Decimus sextus, Paeon tertius, ex tertia longa et tribus brevibus, ut Menedemus, temporum quinque. Decimus septimus, Paeon quartus, ex quarta longa et tribus brevibus, ut celeritas, temporum quinque. Decimus octavus, Ionicus a minore, ex duabus brevibus et duabus longis, ut Diomedes, temporum sex. Decimus nonus, Choriambus, ex longa et duabus brevibus et longa, ut armipotens, temporum sex. Vigesimus, Ionicus a maiore, ex duabus longis et duabus brevibus, ut Iunonius, temporum sex. Vigesimus primus, Diiambus, ex brevi et longa, et brevi et longa, ut propinquitas, temporum sex. Vigesimus secundus, Dichorius vel Ditrochaeus, ex longa et brevi, et longa et brevi, ut cantilena temporum sex. Vigesimus tertius, Antispastus, ex brevi et duabus longis et brevi, ut Saloninus, temporum sex. Vigesimus quartus, Epitritus primus, ex prima brevi et tribus longis, ut sacerdotes, temporum septem. Vigesimus quintus, Epitritus secundus, ex secunda brevi et tribus longis, ut conditores, temporum septem. Vigesimus sextus, Epitritus tertius, ex tertia brevi et tribus longis, ut Demosthenes, temporum septem. Vigesimus septimus, Epitritus quartus, ex quarta brevi et tribus longis, ut Fescenninus, temporum septem. Vigesimus octavus, Dispondeus, ex quatuor longis, ut oratores, temporum octo.
Teacher: The first foot is called the pyrrhic, of two shorts, of two time-units, as fuga. The second, the iamb, of a short and a long, as parens, of three time-units. The third, the trochee, also called the choree, of a long and a short, as meta, of three time-units. The fourth, the spondee, of two longs, as aestas, of four time-units. The fifth, the tribrach, of three shorts, as macula, of three time-units. The sixth, the dactyl, of a long and two shorts, as Maenalus, of four time-units. The seventh, the amphibrach, of a short and a long and a short, as carina, of four time-units. The eighth, the anapest, of two shorts and a long, as Erato, of four time-units. The ninth, the bacchius, of a short and two longs, as Achates, of five time-units. The tenth, the cretic, or amphimacer, of a long and a short and a long, as insulae, of five time-units. The eleventh, the palimbacchius, of two longs and a short, as natura, of five time-units. The twelfth, the molossus, of three longs, as Aeneas, of six time-units. The thirteenth, the proceleusmatic, of four shorts, as avicula, of four time-units. The fourteenth, the first paeon, of a first long and three shorts, as legitimus, of five time-units. The fifteenth, the second paeon, of a second long and three shorts, as colonia, of five time-units. The sixteenth, the third paeon, of a third long and three shorts, as Menedemus, of five time-units. The seventeenth, the fourth paeon, of a fourth long and three shorts, as celeritas, of five time-units. The eighteenth, the ionic from the lesser, of two shorts and two longs, as Diomedes, of six time-units. The nineteenth, the choriamb, of a long and two shorts and a long, as armipotens, of six time-units. The twentieth, the ionic from the greater, of two longs and two shorts, as Iunonius, of six time-units. The twenty-first, the diiamb, of a short and a long, and a short and a long, as propinquitas, of six time-units. The twenty-second, the dichoree, or ditrochee, of a long and a short, and a long and a short, as cantilena, of six time-units. The twenty-third, the antispast, of a short and two longs and a short, as Saloninus, of six time-units. The twenty-fourth, the first epitrite, of a first short and three longs, as sacerdotes, of seven time-units. The twenty-fifth, the second epitrite, of a second short and three longs, as conditores, of seven time-units. The twenty-sixth, the third epitrite, of a third short and three longs, as Demosthenes, of seven time-units. The twenty-seventh, the fourth epitrite, of a fourth short and three longs, as Fescenninus, of seven time-units. The twenty-eighth, the dispondee, of four longs, as oratores, of eight time-units.
deMus.2.8.15
2. 9. 16. Discipulus: Habeo ista. Nunc dissere, qui sibi pedes copulentur.
2. 9. 16. Student: I have these. Now discuss which feet are coupled to each other.
deMus.2.9.16
Magister: Iudicabis hoc facile, si aequalitatem ac similitudinem inaequalitati ac dissimilitudini praestantiorem esse iudicas.
Teacher: You will judge this easily, if you judge equality and likeness to be more excellent than inequality and unlikeness.
deMus.2.9.16
Discipulus: Neminem esse arbitror, qui non ita iudicet.
Student: I think there is no one who does not so judge.
deMus.2.9.16
Magister: Hanc ergo prius maxime in contexendis pedibus sequi oportet, nec ab ea omnino deviandum, nisi cum aliqua causa iustissima est.
Teacher: This principle, then, must be followed first and above all in weaving feet together, and one must not deviate from it at all, except when there is some most just cause.
deMus.2.9.16
Discipulus: Assentior.
Student: I agree.
deMus.2.9.16
Magister: Non igitur dubitabis pyrrhichios sibimet pedes contexere, nec iambos, nec trochaeos qui etiam chorii nominantur, nec spondeos; atque ita caeteros sui generis profecto sibimet sine ulla dubitatione copulabis: est enim summa aequalitas cum eiusdem generis et nominis pedes sese consequuntur. An tibi non videtur?
Teacher: You will not hesitate, then, to weave pyrrhic feet together with each other, nor iambs, nor trochees (which are also called chorees), nor spondees; and so you will surely couple the rest of their own kind to each other without any hesitation: for there is the highest equality when feet of the same kind and name follow one another. Or does it not seem so to you?
deMus.2.9.16
Discipulus: Nullo modo mihi aliter videri potest.
Student: It can in no way seem otherwise to me.
deMus.2.9.16
Magister: Quid? illud nonne approbas, alios aliis pedes aequalitate servata esse miscendos? Quid enim auribus potest iucundius esse, quam cum et varietate mulcentur, nec aequalitate fraudantur?
Teacher: And do you not approve this: that some feet are to be mixed with others, equality being kept? For what can be more pleasant to the ears than when they are both charmed by variety and not cheated of equality?
deMus.2.9.16
Discipulus: Satis probo.
Student: I approve well enough.
deMus.2.9.16
Magister: Num censes alios aequales habendos pedes, nisi qui eiusdem mensurae sunt?
Teacher: Do you think any feet are to be held equal except those that are of the same measure?
deMus.2.9.16
Discipulus: Ita existimo.
Student: I think so.
deMus.2.9.16
Magister: Quid? eiusdem mensurae putandine sunt, nisi qui temporis tantumdem occupant?
Teacher: And are they to be thought of the same measure except those that take up the same amount of time?
deMus.2.9.16
Discipulus: Verum est.
Student: It is true.
deMus.2.9.16
Magister: Quos ergo inveneris pedes totidem temporum, sine aurium offensione contexes.
Teacher: The feet, then, that you find of the same number of time-units, you will weave together without offense to the ears.
deMus.2.9.16
Discipulus: Video esse consequens.
Student: I see that it follows.
deMus.2.9.16
2. 10. 17. Magister: Recte quidem: sed adhuc nonnihil quaestionis res habet. Nam cum Amphibrachus pes quatuor sit temporum, negant eum quidam posse misceri, vel dactylis vel anapaestis vel spondeis vel proceleumaticis: nam hi sunt omnes quaternorum temporum pedes: et non solum istis eum negant posse misceri, sed nec ex ipso solo repetito et sibimet connexo, recte et quasi legitime procedere numerum putant. Quorum opinionem considerare nos oportet, ne quid habeat rationis, quod sequi et approbare conveniat.
2. 10. 17. Teacher: Rightly indeed; but the matter still holds some question. For although the amphibrach is a foot of four time-units, some deny that it can be mixed with dactyls, or anapests, or spondees, or proceleusmatics—for these are all feet of four time-units; and not only do they deny that it can be mixed with these, but they think that even from itself alone, repeated and connected to itself, the rhythm does not proceed rightly and, as it were, lawfully. Their opinion we ought to consider, lest it have some reason that it would be fitting to follow and approve.
deMus.2.10.17
Discipulus: Cupio atque aveo prorsus audire quid afferant. Non enim parum me movet, cum duodetriginta pedes sint, quos ratio persecuta est, hunc solum excludi a continuatione numerorum, cum tantum spatii teneat in tempore quantum dactylus et alii quos pares enumerasti, quos connectere nemo prohibetur.
Student: I desire and am altogether eager to hear what they bring forward. For it moves me not a little that, when there are twenty-eight feet that reason has pursued, this one alone should be excluded from the continuation of rhythms, though it holds as much span in time as the dactyl and the others you enumerated as equal, which no one is forbidden to connect.
deMus.2.10.17
Magister: Atqui opus est, ut hoc dispicere valeas, considerare caeteros pedes, quemadmodum sibimet eorum partes conferantur: ita enim videbis huic uni quiddam accidere novum ac singulare, ut non frustra minime adhibendus ad numeros iudicatus sit.
Teacher: But, that you may be able to discern this, you must consider the other feet, how their parts are compared with one another; for thus you will see that something new and singular happens to this one alone, so that it has not been judged unfit for rhythms without cause.
deMus.2.10.17
2. 10. 18. Discipulus: Video primum pyrrhichium tantum habere in levatione quantum in positione. Spondeus quoque, dactylus, anapaestus, proceleumaticus, choriambus, diiambus, dichorius, antispastus, dispondeus, eadem ratione dividuntur: nam tantumdem temporis in his ponit plausus, quantum levat. Video secundum, iambum simpli et dupli habere rationem; quam rationem cerno et in chorio et in tribracho et in molosso, et in utroque ionico. Iam huius amphibrachi levatio et positio (nam ipsa mihi ex ordine occurrit, cui pares caeteros quaeram), simpli et tripli ratione constat. Sed non invenio prorsus alium deinceps, cuius sibi partes tanto intervallo conferantur. Nam cum eos considero in quibus una brevis est et duae longae, id est bacchium, creticum et palimbacchium, sesquialteri numeri ratione levationem ac positionem in his fieri video. Eadem ratio est et in iis quatuor, in quibus una longa est et tres breves, qui quatuor paeones ex ordine nominantur. Reliqui sunt quatuor epitriti similiter ex ordine nuncupati, quorum levationem ac positionem sesquitertius numerus continet.
2. 10. 18. Student: I see, first, that the pyrrhic has as much in the raising as in the setting-down. The spondee too, the dactyl, the anapest, the proceleusmatic, the choriamb, the diiamb, the dichoree, the antispast, the dispondee, are divided by the same principle: for in these the beat sets down as much time as it raises. I see, second, that the iamb has the principle of single and double—a principle I discern also in the choree, the tribrach, the molossus, and in each ionic. Now this amphibrach's raising and setting-down (for it itself occurs to me in order, for which I seek the others as equal) consists of the principle of single and triple. But I find no other at all following whose parts are compared with each other by so great an interval. For when I consider those in which there is one short and two longs—that is, the bacchius, the cretic, and the palimbacchius—I see the raising and setting-down in these made by the principle of the sesquialter number. The same principle is in those four in which there is one long and three shorts, which are named in order the four paeons. There remain the four epitrites, likewise named in order, whose raising and setting-down the sesquitertian number contains.
deMus.2.10.18
2. 10. 19. Magister: Num igitur parum tibi iusta causa videtur esse, cur iste pes ad seriem numerosam vocum non admittatur, quod solius partes tam longe a se differant, ut una simpla sit, alia tripla? Vicinitas enim quaedam partium tanto est approbatione dignior, quanto est proxima aequalitati. Itaque in illa regula numerorum cum ab uno usque ad quatuor progredimur, nihil unicuique est seipso propinquius. Quare illud in primis approbandum est in pedibus, cum tantumdem habent partes ad invicem; deinde copulatio simpli et dupli eminet in uno et duobus; sesquialtera vero copulatio in duobus et tribus apparet; iam sesquitertia, tribus et quatuor. Simplum vero et triplum quamquam complicatorum numerorum lege teneatur, non tamen in ordine illo sibimet cohaeret: non enim post unum tria numeramus, sed ab uno ad ternarium numerum binario interposito pervenitur. Haec ratio est qua excludendus iudicatur amphibrachus pes ab ea copulatione de qua quaerimus, quae si abs te probatur, caetera videamus.
2. 10. 19. Teacher: Does the cause then seem to you too little just, why this foot is not admitted to the rhythmical series of sounds—namely that the parts of it alone differ so far from each other that one is single, the other triple? For a certain nearness of parts is the more worthy of approval the closer it is to equality. And so, in that rule of numbers, when we proceed from one up to four, nothing is nearer to each than itself. Therefore that is to be approved first of all in feet, when their parts have the same amount with one another; next, the coupling of single and double stands out in one and two; the sesquialter coupling appears in two and three; the sesquitertian, now, in three and four. But single and triple, although held by the law of the multiplied numbers, do not yet cohere with each other in that order: for we do not count three after one, but one comes to three with two set between. This is the principle by which the amphibrach foot is judged to be excluded from that coupling of which we are inquiring—which, if it is approved by you, let us see the rest.
deMus.2.10.19
Discipulus: Probatur sane nam manifestissima atque certissima est.
Student: It is approved indeed, for it is most manifest and most certain.
deMus.2.10.19
2. 11. 20. Magister: Cum ergo placeat, quoquo modo se in syllabis habeant, tamen si eiusdem spatii sint in tempore, recte sibi et sine detrimento aequalitatis pedes posse misceri, excepto duntaxat amphibracho; quaeri non immerito potest, utrum recte misceantur, qui quamquam sint aequales tempore, non eadem tamen percussione concordant, quae levatione ac positione partes pedis sibimet confert. Nam dactylus et anapaestus et spondeus non solum aequalium temporum sunt, sed etiam percutiuntur aequaliter: in omnibus enim tantum levatio, quantum positio sibi vindicat. Itaque hi sibi miscentur iustius quam quilibet ionicus caeteris sex temporum pedibus. Uterque quippe ionicus ad simplum et duplum percutitur, duo scilicet tempora quatuor temporibus conferens. His molossus etiam in hac re congruit. Caeteri vero ad tantumdem; nam in his levationi ac positioni terna tempora tribuuntur. Ergo tametsi omnes legitime feriantur; nam et illi tres simpli et dupli ratione, et alii quatuor aequis partibus feriuntur; tamen quia plausum inaequalem facit ista permixtio, haud scio an iure repudietur: nisi quid habes ad haec.
2. 11. 20. Teacher: Since, then, it pleases us that, however they stand in their syllables, yet if they are of the same span in time, feet can rightly and without loss of equality be mixed together—except only the amphibrach—it can not unreasonably be asked whether those are rightly mixed which, though they are equal in time, do not nevertheless agree in the same beat that compares the parts of a foot with each other by raising and setting-down. For the dactyl, the anapest, and the spondee are not only of equal time-units, but are also beaten equally: for in all of them the raising claims for itself as much as the setting-down. And so these are mixed with one another more justly than either ionic with the other six-time-unit feet. For each ionic is beaten to single and double—namely comparing two time-units to four. With these the molossus too agrees in this respect. But the rest are beaten to an equal amount; for in these three time-units are assigned to the raising and to the setting-down. Therefore, although all are lawfully struck—for those three by the principle of single and double, and the other four by equal parts—yet because this mixture makes an unequal beat, I rather think it may rightly be rejected; unless you have something against this.
deMus.2.11.20
Discipulus: Proclivior sum in istam sententiam. Nam inaequalis plausus quomodo sensum non offendat ignoro: si autem offendit, non utique id potest sine vitio huius permixtionis accidere.
Student: I incline rather to that view. For how an unequal beat does not offend the sense, I do not know; and if it does offend, this surely cannot happen without a fault in this mixture.
deMus.2.11.20
2. 11. 21. Magister: Atqui scias veteres miscendos iudicasse istos pedes, et horum mixtione versus compositos condidisse. Sed ne te auctoritate premere videar, accipe aliquid horum versuum, et vide utrum offendat auditum. Si enim non modo non offenderit, sed etiam delectaverit, nulla erit ratio huius mixtionis improbandae. Versus autem ii sunt quos advertas volo: At consona quae sunt, nisi vocalibus aptes, Pars dimidium vocis opus proferet ex se: Pars muta soni comprimet ora molientum: Illis sonus obscurior impeditiorque, Utcumque tamen promitur ore semicluso . Satis esse arbitror ad iudicandum id quod volo. Quare dic, quaeso, utrum nihil tuas aures numerus iste permulserit.
2. 11. 21. Teacher: But know that the ancients judged these feet were to be mixed, and composed verses by their mixture. Yet, lest I seem to press you with authority, receive some of these verses, and see whether they offend the hearing. For if they not only do not offend, but even delight, there will be no reason to disapprove this mixture. The verses I want you to attend to are these: At consona quae sunt, nisi vocalibus aptes, pars dimidium vocis opus proferet ex se; pars muta soni comprimet ora molientum; illis sonus obscurior impeditiorque, utcumque tamen promitur ore semicluso. I think this is enough for judging what I want. So tell me, I beg, whether this rhythm has at all charmed your ears.
deMus.2.11.21
Discipulus: Imo nihil mihi videtur currere ac sonare festivius.
Student: On the contrary, nothing seems to me to run and sound more festively.
deMus.2.11.21
Magister: Considera igitur pedes, invenies profecto cum sint quinque versus, duos primos solis ionicis currere, tres posteriores habere admixtum dichorium, cum omnes omnino sensum nostrum communi aequalitate delectent.
Teacher: Consider the feet, then; you will surely find that, since there are five verses, the first two run on ionics alone, while the latter three have a dichoree mixed in—though all together delight our sense by a common equality.
deMus.2.11.21
Discipulus: Iam hoc animadverti, et facilius te pronuntiante.
Student: I have already noticed this, and the more easily as you pronounced it.
deMus.2.11.21
Magister: Quid ergo dubitamus consentire veteribus non eorum auctoritate, sed ipsa iam ratione victi, qui censent eos pedes qui eiusdem temporis sunt rationabiliter posse misceri, si habeant legitimam, quamvis diversam percussionem?
Teacher: Why, then, do we hesitate to agree with the ancients—conquered not by their authority but now by reason itself—who judge that those feet which are of the same time can reasonably be mixed, if they have a lawful, though different, beat?
deMus.2.11.21
Discipulus: Cedo iam prorsus: nam me ille sonus quidquam contradicere non sinit.
Student: I yield now entirely; for that sound does not let me object anything.
deMus.2.11.21
2. 12. 22. Magister: Intende item in istos versus: Volo tandem tibi parcas, labor est in chartis, Et apertum ire per auras animum permittas. Placet hoc nam sapienter, remittere interdum Aciem rebus agendis decenter intentam.
2. 12. 22. Teacher: Attend likewise to these verses: Volo tandem tibi parcas, labor est in chartis, et apertum ire per auras animum permittas. Placet hoc nam sapienter, remittere interdum aciem rebus agendis decenter intentam.
deMus.2.12.22
Discipulus: Etiam hoc satis est.
Student: This too is enough.
deMus.2.12.22
Magister: Praesertim cum isti versus sint inconditi, quos necessitate ad tempus fabricatus sum. Verumtamen et in iis quatuor requiro iudicium sensus tui.
Teacher: Especially since these verses are crude, which I fashioned on the spot out of necessity. Nevertheless, in these four too I ask the judgment of your sense.
deMus.2.12.22
Discipulus: Quid aliud et hic possum dicere, quam pulchre illos congruenterque sonuisse?
Student: What else can I say here too than that they sounded beautifully and harmoniously?
deMus.2.12.22
Magister: Sentisne etiam duos superiores altero ionico constare qui dicitur a minore, duos autem posteriores diiambum habere permixtum?
Teacher: Do you perceive too that the first two consist of the other ionic, which is called "from the lesser," and that the latter two have a diiamb mixed in?
deMus.2.12.22
Discipulus: Et hoc te pronuntiando insinuante persensi.
Student: This too I perceived as you suggested it by pronouncing.
deMus.2.12.22
Magister: Quid? illud nonne te movet quod in illis Terentiani versibus ionico ei qui a maiore dicitur, dichorius; in iis autem nostris alteri ionico qui a minore nominatur, diiambus mixtus est? an nihil interesse arbitraris?
Teacher: And does it not move you that, in those verses of Terentianus, the dichoree is mixed with the ionic that is called "from the greater," while in these of ours the diiamb is mixed with the other ionic, named "from the lesser"? Or do you think it makes no difference?
deMus.2.12.22
Discipulus: Imo interest, et videor mihi rationem ipsam videre: nam quoniam ionicus a maiore a duabus incipit longis, eum sibi potius copulandum poscit, ubi longa prima est, id est dichorium. Diiambus vero quod incipit a brevi, congruentius alteri miscetur ionico a duabus brevibus incipienti.
Student: On the contrary, it does make a difference, and I seem to myself to see the very principle: for since the ionic from the greater begins with two longs, it demands rather to be coupled with one where the long is first—that is, the dichoree. But the diiamb, because it begins with a short, is more harmoniously mixed with the other ionic, which begins with two shorts.
deMus.2.12.22
2. 12. 23. Magister: Bene intellegis: quare hoc quoque tenendum est, istam etiam congruentiam, excepta aequalitate temporum, in pedibus miscendis aliquantum valere oportere: non enim plurimum, sed tamen nonnihil valet. Nam pro omni pede sex temporum, omnem pedem sex temporum poni posse, ita sensu interrogato iudices licet: primum molossi exemplum sit nobis, virtutes: ionici a minore, moderatas: choriambi, percipies: ionici a maiore, concedere: diiambi, benignitas: dichorii, civitasque: antispasti, volet iusta.
2. 12. 23. Teacher: You understand well; so this too must be held: that this agreement also, apart from the equality of time-units, ought to have some force in mixing feet—not the most force, yet some. For that any foot of six time-units can be put for any other foot of six time-units, you may judge by questioning your sense thus: let the molossus be our first example, virtutes; the ionic from the lesser, moderatas; the choriamb, percipies; the ionic from the greater, concedere; the diiamb, benignitas; the dichoree, civitasque; the antispast, volet iusta.
deMus.2.12.23
Discipulus: Habeo ista.
Student: I have these.
deMus.2.12.23
Magister: Contexe igitur ista omnia atque pronuntia, vel me potius pronuntiante accipe, quo ad iudicandum liberior sensus vacet. Nam ut continuati numeri aequalitatem sine ulla offensione aurium tibi insinuem, hoc totum contextum ter pro nuntiabo, quod satis esse non dubitaverim. Virtutes moderatas percipies, concedere benignitas civitasque volet iusta. Virtutes moderatas percipies, concedere benignitas civitasque volet iusta. Virtutes moderatas percipies, concedere benignitas civitasque volet iusta. Num forte aliquid in hoc pedum cursu aures tuas aequalitate aut suavitate fraudavit?
Teacher: Weave all these together, then, and pronounce them; or rather, receive them as I pronounce them, so that your sense may be freer to judge. For, that I may convey to you the equality of the continued rhythm without any offense to the ears, I will pronounce this whole text three times, which I do not doubt is enough: Virtutes moderatas percipies, concedere benignitas civitasque volet iusta. Virtutes moderatas percipies, concedere benignitas civitasque volet iusta. Virtutes moderatas percipies, concedere benignitas civitasque volet iusta. Has anything in this course of feet cheated your ears of equality or sweetness?
deMus.2.12.23
Discipulus: Nullo modo.
Student: In no way.
deMus.2.12.23
Magister: Delectavitne aliquid? quamquam hoc quidem consequens est in hoc genere, ut delectet omne quod non offenderit.
Teacher: Did anything delight you? Although this indeed follows in this kind, that everything delights which has not offended.
deMus.2.12.23
Discipulus: Non possum aliter me dicere affectum, quam videtur tibi.
Student: I cannot say that I was affected otherwise than seems so to you.
deMus.2.12.23
Magister: Probas ergo omnes istos pedes senum temporum recte sibi posse copulari atque misceri.
Teacher: You approve, then, that all these feet of six time-units can rightly be coupled and mixed with one another.
deMus.2.12.23
Discipulus: Probo.
Student: I approve.
deMus.2.12.23
2. 13. 24. Magister: Nihilne formidas, ne quis arbitretur tam aequaliter istos pedes hoc ordine collatos sonare potuisse; si autem ordinem permutes, non idem posse?
2. 13. 24. Teacher: Do you fear nothing—that someone might judge that these feet could sound so equally only when compared in this order, but that if you alter the order they cannot do the same?
deMus.2.13.24
Discipulus: Nonnihil quidem affert, sed experiri non est difficile.
Student: It does bring up something; but it is not hard to test.
deMus.2.13.24
Magister: Istud ergo facito cum vacabit: non aliter invenies quam sensum tuum multiformi varietate et una aequalitate mulceri.
Teacher: Do that, then, when you have leisure: you will find nothing other than that your sense is charmed by manifold variety and a single equality.
deMus.2.13.24
Discipulus: Faciam: quamquam hoc exemplo nemo est, qui non praevideat necessario id eventurum.
Student: I will; although by this example there is no one who does not foresee that this will necessarily happen.
deMus.2.13.24
Magister: Recte existimas: sed quod ad propositum pertinet, admoto plausu ista percurram, ut de hoc quoque diiudicare possis utrum aliquid, an nihil claudicet: atque ut simul aliquid experiaris de commutatione illius ordinis, quam nihil claudicationis illaturam esse praediximus; iam nunc ipsum ordinem muta, et ut libitum est, eosdem pedes collocatos aliter atque a me collocati sunt, personandos mihi plaudendosque permitte.
Teacher: You judge rightly; but, as concerns our purpose, I will run through these with the beat added, so that about this too you can decide whether something limps or nothing does; and that you may at the same time test something about that change of order which we said would bring no limping—now change the order itself, and let me sound out and beat the same feet set in another arrangement than I set them, as you please.
deMus.2.13.24
Discipulus: Primum volo esse ionicum a minore, secundum ionicum a maiore, tertium choriambum, quartum diiambum, quintum antispastum, sextum dichorium, septimum molossum.
Student: Let the first be the ionic from the lesser, the second the ionic from the greater, the third the choriamb, the fourth the diiamb, the fifth the antispast, the sixth the dichoree, the seventh the molossus.
deMus.2.13.24
Magister: Intende ergo et aurem in sonum, et in plausum oculos: non enim audiri, sed videri opus est plaudentem manum, et animadverti acriter quanta temporis mora in levatione, quanta in positione sit.
Teacher: Bend your ear, then, to the sound, and your eyes to the beat; for the beating hand must not be heard but seen, and one must note sharply how much delay of time is in the raising, how much in the setting-down.
deMus.2.13.24
Discipulus: Totus istic sum, quantum valeo.
Student: I am wholly here, as far as I am able.
deMus.2.13.24
Magister: Accipe igitur collocationem illam cum plausu tuam: Moderatas, concedere, percipies, benignitas, volet iusta, civitasque, virtutes.
Teacher: Receive, then, with the beat, that arrangement of yours: Moderatas, concedere, percipies, benignitas, volet iusta, civitasque, virtutes.
deMus.2.13.24
Discipulus: Sentio quidem nequaquam plausum istum claudicare, et tantum levare quantum ponere; sed vehementer admiror quomodo eo percuti potuerint illi pedes, quorum divisio simpli et dupli ratione constat, sicuti sunt ambo ionici et molossus.
Student: I do feel that this beat in no way limps, and raises as much as it sets down; but I greatly wonder how those feet could be beaten by it whose division consists of the principle of single and double, as both ionics and the molossus are.
deMus.2.13.24
Magister: Quid hic fieri tamen arbitraris, cum in his tria leventur tempora, totidemque ponantur?
Teacher: What do you nevertheless think happens here, when in these three time-units are raised and as many set down?
deMus.2.13.24
Discipulus: Nihil aliud hic prorsus video quam eam longam syllabam, quae in ionico a maiore et in molosso secunda, in ionico autem a minore tertia est, plausu ipso dividi; ut quoniam duo habet tempora, unum inde superiori parti, alterum posteriori tribuat, atque ita terna tempora levatio positioque sortiantur.
Student: I see nothing else here at all but that the long syllable—which in the ionic from the greater and in the molossus is the second, and in the ionic from the lesser the third—is divided by the beat itself; so that, since it has two time-units, it gives one of them to the prior part and the other to the latter, and thus the raising and the setting-down each obtain three time-units.
deMus.2.13.24
2. 13. 25. Magister: Nihil hic omnino aliud dici aut intellegi potest. Sed cur non etiam ille amphibrachus, quem ab ista numerositate penitus eiciebamus, hac conditione misceatur spondeo, dactylo, et anapaesto, vel per se ipse numerosum aliquid in musica continuatus efficiat? Potest enim simili ratione media quoque pedis eius syllaba, quae longa est, plausu dividi; ut cum singula tempora singulis lateribus dederit, non iam unum et tria, sed bina tempora levatio positioque sibi vindicent: nisi habes aliquid quod resistat.
2. 13. 25. Teacher: Nothing else at all can be said or understood here. But why should not that amphibrach too, which we were casting out entirely from this rhythm, be mixed on this condition with the spondee, dactyl, and anapest, or, continued by itself, produce something rhythmical in music? For by a similar principle the middle syllable of this foot too, which is long, can be divided by the beat, so that, when it has given single time-units to each side, the raising and the setting-down claim for themselves not now one and three, but two time-units each—unless you have something to object.
deMus.2.13.25
Discipulus: Nihil sane habeo quod dicam, nisi hunc etiam esse admittendum.
Student: I have nothing to say, except that this too is to be admitted.
deMus.2.13.25
Magister: Aliquid ergo plaudamus quaternorum temporum pedibus ordinatum atque contextum, quibus iste commixtus sit, et eodem modo sensu exploremus utrum nihil imparile offendat. Et ideo attende in hunc numerum propter iudicandi facilitatem cum plausu tertio repetitum. Sumas optima, facias honesta. Sumas optima, facias honesta, Sumas optima, facias honesta.
Teacher: Let us, then, beat something ordered and woven of feet of four time-units, with which it is mixed, and in the same way test by the sense whether anything unequal offends. And so attend to this rhythm, repeated three times with the beat for ease of judging: Sumas optima, facias honesta. Sumas optima, facias honesta. Sumas optima, facias honesta.
deMus.2.13.25
Discipulus: Iamiam, obsecro, parce auribus meis: nam etiam plausu non admoto, ipse per se horum pedum cursus in illo amphibracho vehementissime claudicat.
Student: Now, I beg, spare my ears; for even with the beat not added, by itself the course of these feet limps most violently at that amphibrach.
deMus.2.13.25
Magister: Quid igitur putandum est esse causae, ut in hoc fieri non possit quod in molosso et ionicis potuit? an quoniam in illis aequalia sunt medio latera? in numero enim pari, ubi sit medium suis aequale lateribus, primus senarius occurrit. Ergo illi senum temporum pedes quoniam duo tempora in medio possident, et bina in lateribus; libenter quodammodo illud medium cecidit in latera, quibus amicissima aequalitate coniungitur. Non autem idem fiet in amphibracho, ubi sunt imparia medio latera, siquidem in illis singula, in illo duo tempora sunt. Huc accedit quod in ionicis et molosso medio in latera soluto, terna fiunt tempora, in quibus rursum medio pari paria latera inveniuntur; quod item defit amphibracho.
Teacher: What, then, must we think is the cause that in this foot what was possible in the molossus and the ionics cannot happen? Is it because in those the sides are equal to the middle? For in an even number, where the middle is equal to its sides, six is the first to occur. Therefore those feet of six time-units, since they have two time-units in the middle and two each in the sides, willingly let that middle, in a way, fall into the sides, to which it is joined by a most amicable equality. But the same will not happen in the amphibrach, where the sides are unequal to the middle, since in those there are single time-units, in this two. To this is added that in the ionics and the molossus, when the middle is dissolved into the sides, three time-units each result, in which again, the middle being even, equal sides are found—which likewise fails in the amphibrach.
deMus.2.13.25
Discipulus: Ita res est ut dicis: nec immerito amphibrachus in illa serie offendit auditum, hi vero etiam delectant.
Student: The matter is as you say; and not without reason does the amphibrach offend the hearing in that series, while these even delight.
deMus.2.13.25
2. 14. 26. Magister: Age, nunc tu per te ab ipso exordire pyrrhichio, et secundum supra dictas rationes, quos pedes quibus misceri oporteat, quantum potes, breviter explica.
2. 14. 26. Teacher: Come, now, begin yourself from the pyrrhic itself, and, according to the principles stated above, explain as briefly as you can which feet ought to be mixed with which.
deMus.2.14.26
Discipulus: Nullus pyrrhichio: non enim alius invenitur totidem temporum. Iambo posset chorius; sed propter inaequalem plausum vitandum est, quod alter a simplo, a duplo alter incipit. Ergo tribrachus utrique accommodari potest. Spondeum et dactylum et anapaestum, et proceleumaticum amicos inter se atque copulabiles video: non enim tantum temporibus, sed plausu etiam sibi congruunt. Enimvero exclusus amphibrachus, nulla potuit ratione reduci, cui parilitas temporum auxiliari quid, divisione plausuque discordante, non potuit. Bacchio creticum, et paeones primum, secundum et quartum. Palimbacchio autem eumdem creticum, et paeones primum et tertium et quartum, et temporibus et plausu concordare manifestum est. Ergo cretico et paeonibus primo et quarto, quoniam et a duobus et a tribus temporibus eorum incipere divisio potest, caeteri omnes quinum temporum pedes possunt sine ulla claudicatione copulari. Iam illorum qui sex temporibus constant, omnium inter se miram quamdam esse concordiam, satis disputatum est. Quandoquidem illi quoque ab aliis in plaudendo non dissonant, quos aliter dividi cogit conditio syllabarum: tantam vim habet cum medio laterum aequalitas. Porro septenum temporum pedes cum sint quatuor, qui epitriti nominantur, primum et secundum invenio sibi posse copulari: amborum enim divisio incipit a tribus temporibus, idcirco nec spatio temporis nec plausu dissident. Rursus libenter sibi iunguntur tertius et quartus, quia uterque in dividendo incipit a quatuor temporibus, quare et metiuntur et plauduntur aequaliter. Restat octo temporum pes qui dispondeus vocatur, cui sicut pyrrhichio par nullus est. Habes a me quod poposcisti et facere potui. Perge ad reliqua.
Student: None with the pyrrhic; for no other is found of the same number of time-units. The choree could go with the iamb, but it must be avoided because of the unequal beat, since the one begins from single, the other from double. So the tribrach can be accommodated to either. The spondee, dactyl, anapest, and proceleusmatic I see are friendly to one another and capable of being coupled: for they agree not only in time-units but also in beat. But the amphibrach, once excluded, could by no principle be brought back, which the equality of time-units could not help, since its division and beat are discordant. With the bacchius go the cretic, and the first, second, and fourth paeons. With the palimbacchius, it is manifest that the same cretic, and the first, third, and fourth paeons, agree both in time-units and in beat. Therefore with the cretic and the first and fourth paeons—since their division can begin from both two and three time-units—all the other feet of five time-units can be coupled without any limping. Now, that among all those that consist of six time-units there is a certain wonderful concord with one another has been discussed enough; since even those do not sound discordantly in beating against the others which the condition of their syllables compels to be divided otherwise—so great is the force of equality with the middle of the sides. Further, since there are four feet of seven time-units, called epitrites, I find that the first and second can be coupled with each other: for the division of both begins from three time-units, and therefore they differ neither in span of time nor in beat. Again the third and fourth are willingly joined to each other, because each in dividing begins from four time-units, and so are both measured and beaten equally. There remains the foot of eight time-units called the dispondee, for which, as for the pyrrhic, there is no equal. You have from me what you asked and I could do. Go on to the rest.
deMus.2.14.26
Magister: Faciam: sed post tam longum sermonem respiremus aliquantulum; et illorum versuum meminerimus, quos mihi extemporales paulo ante ipsa lassitudo suggessit. Volo tandem tibi parcas, labor est in chartis, Et apertum ire per auras animum permittas. Placet hoc nam sapienter, remittere interdum Aciem rebus agendis decenter intentam.
Teacher: I will; but after so long a discussion let us breathe a little, and recall those verses which weariness itself a little while ago suggested to me on the spot: Volo tandem tibi parcas, labor est in chartis, et apertum ire per auras animum permittas. Placet hoc nam sapienter, remittere interdum aciem rebus agendis decenter intentam.
deMus.2.14.26
Discipulus: Placet sane, ac libenter obtempero.
Student: It pleases me indeed, and I willingly obey.
deMus.2.14.26
3. 1. 1. Magister: Tertius hic sermo postulat, ut quoniam de pedum amicitia quadam concordiaque satis dictum est, videamus quid ex his contextis continuatisque gignatur. Quare primum ex te quaero, utrum possint copulati sibi pedes, quos copulari oportet, perpetuum quemdam numerum creare, ubi nullus finis certus appareat: velut cum symphoniaci scabella et cymbala pedibus feriunt, certis quidem numeris et his qui sibi cum aurium voluptate iunguntur; sed tamen tenore perpetuo, ita ut si tibias non audias, nullo modo ibi notare possis quousque procurrat connexio pedum, et unde rursus ad caput redeatur. Velut si tu velis centum vel amplius, quousque libitum est, pyrrhichios vel alios qui inter se amici sunt pedes, continua connexione decurrere.
3. 1. 1. Teacher: This third discussion demands that, since enough has been said about a certain friendship and concord of feet, we see what is produced from these woven and continued together. So first I ask you whether feet coupled together—those that ought to be coupled—can create a certain perpetual rhythm, where no fixed end appears: as when musicians strike footboards and cymbals with their feet, in fixed rhythms indeed, and ones that are joined with pleasure to the ears, yet in a perpetual flow, so that, if you do not hear the flutes, you can in no way mark there how far the connection of feet runs on, and from where one returns again to the head—as if you wished to run through a hundred or more pyrrhics, or other feet that are friends to one another, in a continuous connection as far as you pleased.
deMus.3.1.1
Discipulus: Iam intellego, et fieri posse concedo quamdam pedum connexionem, in qua certum est usque ad quot pedes progrediendum sit, atque inde redeundum.
Student: Now I understand, and I concede that there can be a certain connection of feet in which it is fixed up to how many feet one must proceed, and from there return.
deMus.3.1.1
Magister: Num huius generis esse dubitas, (et hoc ab illo superiore distare concedis), cum certam faciendorum versuum disciplinam esse non neges, et qui versus te semper cum voluptate audisse confessus sis?
Teacher: Do you doubt that this is of that kind (and you concede that this differs from that earlier one), since you do not deny that there is a fixed discipline of making verses, and you have confessed that you have always heard verses with pleasure?
deMus.3.1.1
Discipulus: Manifestum est et hoc esse, et ab illo superiore genere distare.
Student: It is manifest both that this is so, and that it differs from that earlier kind.
deMus.3.1.1
3. 1. 2. Magister: Ergo quoniam oportet distingui etiam vocabulis ea quae re ab se distincta sunt, scias illud superius genus copulationis, rhythmum a Graecis; hoc autem alterum, metrum vocari: latine autem dici possent, illud numerus, hoc mensio vel mensura. Sed quoniam haec apud nos nomina late patent, et cavendum est ne ambigue loquamur, commodius utimur graecis. Vides tamen, ut opinor, quam recte utrumque nomen sit his rebus impositum. Nam quoniam illud pedibus certis provolvitur, peccaturque in eo si pedes dissoni misceantur, recte appellatus est rhythmus, id est numerus: sed quia ipsa provolutio non habet modum, nec statutum est in quoto pede finis aliquis emineat; propter nullam mensuram continuationis non debuit metrum vocari. Hoc autem utrumque habet: nam et certis pedibus currit, et certo terminatur modo. Itaque non solum metrum propter insignem finem, sed etiam rhythmus est, propter pedum rationabilem connexionem. Quocirca omne metrum rhythmus, non omnis rhythmus etiam metrum est. Rhythmi enim nomen in musica usque adeo late patet, ut haec tota pars eius quae ad diu et non diu pertinet, rhythmus nominata sit. Sed de nomine, cum res appareat, non esse satagendum, et doctis et sapientibus placuit. An aliquid contradicendum aut dubitandum putas de his quae a me dicta sunt?
3. 1. 2. Teacher: Since, then, things that are distinct in reality must be distinguished by terms as well, know that that earlier kind of coupling is called by the Greeks "rhythm," and this other "meter"; in Latin the former might be called "number" (numerus), the latter "measuring" or "measure" (mensio, mensura). But because these names among us have wide application, and we must be careful not to speak ambiguously, we more conveniently use the Greek ones. Yet you see, I think, how rightly each name is given to these things. For since the former rolls on by fixed feet, and one errs in it if discordant feet are mixed, it is rightly called "rhythm," that is "number"; but because the rolling itself has no limit, and it is not settled at which foot some end stands out, it ought not, for lack of any measure of the continuation, to be called "meter." But this other has both: for it runs on by fixed feet, and is terminated by a fixed limit. And so it is not only "meter," because of its marked end, but is also "rhythm," because of the rational connection of feet. Therefore every meter is rhythm, but not every rhythm is also meter. For the name "rhythm" in music has so wide an application that this whole part of it which pertains to "long" and "not long" is named rhythm. But that, when the thing is clear, one should not be busy about the name, has pleased both the learned and the wise. Do you think anything is to be objected or doubted about what I have said?
deMus.3.1.2
Discipulus: Imo prorsus assentior.
Student: On the contrary, I agree entirely.
deMus.3.1.2
3. 2. 3. Magister: Nunc ergo mecum illud considera, utrum sicut omnis versus metrum est, ita omne metrum etiam versus sit.
3. 2. 3. Teacher: Now then consider this with me: whether, just as every verse is a meter, so every meter is also a verse.
deMus.3.2.3
Discipulus: Considero quidem, sed quid respondeam non invenio.
Student: I do consider it, but I do not find what to answer.
deMus.3.2.3
Magister: Unde id tibi censes accidisse? an quia de vocabulis quaestio est? Non enim ut de rebus ad disciplinam pertinentibus, ita de nominibus possumus respondere interrogati: propterea quia res omnium mentibus communiter sunt insitae; nomina vero, ut cuique placuit, imposita, quorum vis auctoritate atque consuetudine maxime nititur: unde etiam esse linguarum diversitas potest, rerum autem in ipsa veritate constitutarum profecto non potest. A me igitur accipe quod ipse nullo pacto respondere posses: non versum solum, metrum veteres vocavere. Itaque quod ad te attinet, vide atque responde, non enim iam de nominibus agitur, utrum inter haec duo aliquid distet, quod quidam numerus pedum ita certo fine claudatur, ut nihil ad rem pertineat, ubi fiat quidam articulus antequam veniatur ad finem; alius autem non solum certo fine claudatur, sed etiam ante finem certo quodam loco quaedam eius partitio emineat, ut quasi membris conficiatur duobus.
Teacher: To what do you think this has happened to you? Is it because the question is about terms? For we cannot answer when questioned about names as about things belonging to a discipline, because things are implanted in common in the minds of all, whereas names are given as each one pleased, and their force rests chiefly on authority and custom—whence too there can be a diversity of languages, but there surely cannot be of things established in truth itself. From me, then, receive what you yourself could in no way answer: the ancients called meter not only verse. So, as far as concerns you, see and answer—for it is no longer about names—whether between these two there is some difference: that a certain number of feet is closed off by a fixed end in such a way that it matters nothing to the thing where some joint occurs before one comes to the end; while another is not only closed off by a fixed end, but also, before the end, in a certain fixed place, some division of it stands out, so that it is, as it were, made up of two members.
deMus.3.2.3
Discipulus: Non intellego.
Student: I do not understand.
deMus.3.2.3
Magister: Attende ergo in haec exempla: Ite igitur, Camoenae Fonticolae puellae, Quae canitis sub antris Mellifluos sonores Quae lavitis capillum Purpureum Hyppocrene Fonte, ubi fusus olim Spumea lavit almus Ora iubis aquosis Pegasus, in nitentem Pervolaturus aethram. Cernis profecto quinque superiores versiculos eodem loco partem orationis habere terminatam, id est in choriambo pede, cui subiungitur bacchius, ut versiculum compleat (namque hi undecim, choriambo et bacchio pedibus constant); caeteros vero excepto uno, scilicet Ora iubis aquosis, non eodem loco habere terminatam partem orationis.
Teacher: Attend, then, to these examples: Ite igitur, Camoenae fonticolae puellae, quae canitis sub antris mellifluos sonores, quae lavitis capillum purpureum Hippocrene fonte, ubi fusus olim spumea lavit almus ora iubis aquosis Pegasus, in nitentem pervolaturus aethram. You surely discern that the upper five little verses have the part of speech ended in the same place—that is, at the choriamb foot, to which a bacchius is joined to complete the little verse (for these eleven consist of the choriamb and bacchius feet); but the rest, except one, namely ora iubis aquosis, do not have the part of speech ended in the same place.
deMus.3.2.3
Discipulus: Cerno istud quidem, sed quo pertineat non video.
Student: I discern that indeed, but I do not see where it leads.
deMus.3.2.3
Magister: Eo scilicet ut intellegas, hoc metrum non quasi legitimum locum habere, ubi ante finem versus finiatur pars orationis: nam si ita esset, omnes eodem loco hunc haberent articulum, aut certe rarissime in his inveniretur qui non haberet: nunc vero cum sint undecim, sex ita sunt, quinque non ita.
Teacher: To this, of course: that you may understand that this meter does not have, as it were, a lawful place where the part of speech is ended before the end of the verse; for if it were so, all would have this joint in the same place, or at least most rarely among them would one be found that did not have it; but as it is, since there are eleven, six are so and five are not so.
deMus.3.2.3
Discipulus: Et hoc accipio, et adhuc quo ratio tendat exspecto.
Student: This too I accept, and I still await where the reasoning is tending.
deMus.3.2.3
Magister: Attende ergo etiam in ista pervulgatissima: Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primus ab oris. Et ne longum faciamus, quia carmen notissimum est, ab hoc versu usque ad quem volueris explora singulos; invenies finitam partem orationis in quinto semipede, id est, in duobus pedibus et semisse: nam hi versus constant pedibus quaternorum temporum: quare iste finis de quo agitur partis orationis, quasi legitimus in decimo tempore est.
Teacher: Attend, then, also to this most well-known line: Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primus ab oris. And, not to make it long, since the poem is most familiar, examine the lines one by one, from this verse up to whichever you wish; you will find the part of speech ended at the fifth half-foot—that is, at two feet and a half: for these verses consist of feet of four time-units; so this end of the part of speech of which we are treating is, as it were, lawfully at the tenth time-unit.
deMus.3.2.3
Discipulus: Manifestum est.
Student: It is manifest.
deMus.3.2.3
3. 2. 4. Magister: Iam ergo intellegis inter illa duo genera quae ante ista exempla proposueram, nonnihil distare: quod aliud scilicet metrum antequam claudatur, non habet certum et statutum aliquem articulum, sicut in illis undecim versiculis exploravimus: aliud vero habet, sicut in heroico metro quintus semipes satis indicat.
3. 2. 4. Teacher: Now then you understand that between those two kinds which I had set forth before these examples there is some difference: that one meter, before it is closed off, has no fixed and settled joint, as we examined in those eleven little verses; but another has one, as in the heroic meter the fifth half-foot sufficiently indicates.
deMus.3.2.4
Discipulus: Iam liquet quod dicis.
Student: Now what you say is clear.
deMus.3.2.4
Magister: Atqui scias oportet, a veteribus doctis, in quibus magna est auctoritas, illud superius genus non esse versum appellatum; sed nunc definitum et vocatum esse versum, qui duobus quasi membris constaret, certa mensura et ratione coniunctis. Sed tu non multum labores de nomine, quod nisi a me vel a quolibet alio tibi indicaretur, nullo modo de hoc interrogatus respondere posses. Sed quod ratio docet, in id praecipue et maxime animum intende, velut hoc ipsum quod nunc agimus: ratio enim docet inter haec duo genera distare aliquid, quibuslibet vocabulis nuncupentur: itaque hoc bene interrogatus posses dicere ipsa veritate confisus; illud autem nisi auctoritatem secutus, non posses.
Teacher: But you ought to know that by the learned ancients, in whom there is great authority, that earlier kind was not called a verse; rather, a verse has now been defined and named as that which consists of two members, as it were, joined by a fixed measure and principle. But do not trouble yourself much over the name, which, unless it were pointed out to you by me or anyone else, you could in no way answer if questioned about it. But to what reason teaches, direct your mind especially and above all—as to this very thing we are now treating: for reason teaches that between these two kinds there is some difference, by whatever terms they are named; and so this you could say if rightly questioned, trusting in truth itself, whereas that other you could not say except by following authority.
deMus.3.2.4
Discipulus: Apertissime iam ista cognovi, et quanti pendas hoc, de quo me tam crebro admones, iam existimo.
Student: I have now most plainly come to know these things, and I now reckon how highly you value this, of which you so often admonish me.
deMus.3.2.4
Magister: Haec ergo tria nomina, quibus disserendi causa necessario usuri sumus, memoriae mandes velim: rhythmum, metrum, versum. Quae sic distinguuntur, ut omne metrum etiam rhythmus sit, non omnis rhythmus etiam metrum. Item omnis versus etiam metrum sit, non omne metrum etiam versus. Ergo omnis versus est rhythmus et metrum: nam hoc, ut arbitror, esse consequens vides.
Teacher: These three names, then, which we will necessarily use for the sake of discussion, I would have you commit to memory: rhythm, meter, verse. They are distinguished thus: that every meter is also rhythm, but not every rhythm is also meter; likewise every verse is also meter, but not every meter is also verse. Therefore every verse is rhythm and meter; for this, I judge, you see follows.
deMus.3.2.4
Discipulus: Video sane: nam est luce clarius.
Student: I see it indeed; for it is clearer than light.
deMus.3.2.4
3. 3. 5. Magister: Prius igitur, si placet, de rhythmo in quo nullum metrum est, deinde de metro ubi versus non est, postremo de ipso versu, quantum possumus, disseramus.
3. 3. 5. Teacher: First, then, if you please, let us discuss rhythm in which there is no meter; then meter where there is no verse; finally the verse itself, as far as we can.
deMus.3.3.5
Discipulus: Placet vero.
Student: I agree indeed.
deMus.3.3.5
Magister: Sume ergo tibi ab ipso capite pedes pyrrhichios, et de his rhythmum contexe.
Teacher: Take, then, from the very head pyrrhic feet, and weave a rhythm from these.
deMus.3.3.5
Discipulus: Etiam si id possim facere, qui modus erit?
Student: Even if I could do this, what limit will there be?
deMus.3.3.5
Magister: Satis est, ut eum tendas (exempli enim gratia id facimus) usque ad decem pedes: nam usque ad hunc pedum numerum non progreditur versus, quod suo loco diligenter tractabitur.
Teacher: It is enough that you stretch it (for we do this for the sake of example) up to ten feet; for the verse does not proceed beyond this number of feet, which will be carefully treated in its place.
deMus.3.3.5
Discipulus: Bene quidem tu non multos pedes mihi proposuisti copulandos; sed videris mihi non recordari, iam te satis discrevisse, quid inter grammaticum et musicum intersit, cum ego tibi respondissem, syllabarum longarum et brevium cognitionem me non habere, quae a grammaticis traditur: nisi forte permittis, ut non verbis, sed aliquo plausu rhythmum istum exhibeam: nam iudicium aurium ad temporum momenta moderanda me posse habere non nego; quae vero syllaba producenda vel corripienda sit, quod in auctoritate situm est, omnino nescio.
Student: You have indeed proposed to me not many feet to couple; but you seem to me not to recall that you have already distinguished well enough what lies between the grammarian and the musician, when I answered you that I have no knowledge of long and short syllables, which is handed down by the grammarians—unless perhaps you permit me to present this rhythm not in words but by some beat: for I do not deny that I can have the judgment of the ears for regulating the measures of time; but which syllable should be lengthened or shortened, which rests on authority, I am wholly ignorant of.
deMus.3.3.5
Magister: Fateor nos ita, ut dicis, grammaticum a musico discrevisse, et in hoc te genere inscitiam tuam esse confessum. Quare a me accipe hoc exempli genus: Ago celeriter agile quod ago tibi quod anima velit.
Teacher: I admit that we have, as you say, distinguished the grammarian from the musician, and that in this kind you have confessed your ignorance. So receive from me this kind of example: Ago celeriter agile quod ago tibi quod anima velit.
deMus.3.3.5
Discipulus: Habeo istuc.
Student: I have it.
deMus.3.3.5
3. 3. 6. Magister: Hoc ergo quoties libet repetendo, efficies rhythmi huius longitudinem quantam voles, quamquam hi decem pedes ad exemplum sufficiant. Sed illud quaero, si tibi quispiam dicat, non pyrrhichiis, sed proceleumaticis pedibus hunc rhythmum constare, quid respondebis?
3. 3. 6. Teacher: By repeating this, then, as often as you please, you will make this rhythm as long as you wish, although these ten feet suffice for an example. But I ask this: if someone tells you that this rhythm consists not of pyrrhics but of proceleusmatic feet, what will you answer?
deMus.3.3.6
Discipulus: Prorsus ignoro: nam ubi decem pyrrhichii sunt, quinque proceleumaticos metior; et eo maior dubitatio est, quod de rhythmo consulimur, qui scilicet perpetuo fluit. Undecim enim pyrrhichii vel tredecim, et quolibet impari numero, non possunt habere integrum proceleumaticorum numerum. Si ergo esset certus finis in hoc de quo agitur rhythmo, ibi saltem dicere possemus pyrrhichio potius quam proceleumatico eum currere, ubi omnes integri proceleumatici non invenirentur: nunc vero et ipsum infinitum nobis conturbat iudicium, et si quando numerati quidem pedes, sed pari numero nobis proponuntur, sicut isti sunt decem.
Student: I am quite at a loss; for where there are ten pyrrhics, I measure five proceleusmatics; and the doubt is the greater because we are consulted about a rhythm, which of course flows perpetually. For eleven pyrrhics, or thirteen, and any odd number, cannot have a whole number of proceleusmatics. If, then, there were a fixed end in this rhythm of which we are treating, we could at least say there that it runs by the pyrrhic rather than the proceleusmatic, where all whole proceleusmatics would not be found; but as it is, both the infinite itself confounds our judgment, and so does it when feet are indeed counted but proposed to us in an even number, as these ten are.
deMus.3.3.6
Magister: Atqui nec de ipso impari numero pyrrhichiorum, quod tibi visum est, liquido visum est. Quid enim si undecim propositis pedibus pyrrhichiis dicatur rhythmus quinque habere proceleumaticos et semipedem? numquid resisti potest, cum multos inveniamus versus claudi semipede?
Teacher: But even about that odd number of pyrrhics, what seemed clear to you is not clearly seen. For what if, eleven pyrrhic feet being proposed, the rhythm be said to have five proceleusmatics and a half-foot? Can it be resisted, when we find many verses closed off by a half-foot?
deMus.3.3.6
Discipulus: Iam dixi me nescire quid de hac re dici possit.
Student: I have already said that I do not know what can be said about this matter.
deMus.3.3.6
Magister: Num etiam illud nescis, proceleumatico priorem esse pyrrhichium? siquidem duobus pyrrhichiis proceleumaticus confit; sicut prius est unum quam duo, et duo quam quatuor, ita proceleumatico prior est pyrrhichius.
Teacher: Do you not also know this, that the pyrrhic is prior to the proceleusmatic? Since a proceleusmatic is made of two pyrrhics; just as one is prior to two, and two to four, so the pyrrhic is prior to the proceleusmatic.
deMus.3.3.6
Discipulus: Verissimum est.
Student: It is most true.
deMus.3.3.6
Magister: Cum ergo in hanc ambiguitatem incidimus, ut possit in rhythmo et pyrrhichius metiri et proceleumaticus, cui principatum daturi sumus? priori, ex quo iste constat; an posteriori, ex quo ille non constat?
Teacher: When, then, we fall into this ambiguity, that in a rhythm both the pyrrhic and the proceleusmatic can be measured, to which shall we give the primacy: to the prior, of which the latter consists, or to the latter, of which the prior does not consist?
deMus.3.3.6
Discipulus: Nemo dubitabit priori esse dandum.
Student: No one will doubt that it must be given to the prior.
deMus.3.3.6
Magister: Quid ergo dubitas de hac re consultus respondere, pyrrhichium potius quam proceleumaticum istum rhythmum esse nuncupandum?
Teacher: Why, then, do you hesitate to answer, when consulted about this matter, that this rhythm should be named pyrrhic rather than proceleusmatic?
deMus.3.3.6
Discipulus: Iam omnino non dubito: pudet tam manifestam rationem non me cito animadvertisse.
Student: Now I do not hesitate at all: I am ashamed not to have quickly noticed so manifest a reason.
deMus.3.3.6
3. 4. 7. Magister: Videsne illud etiam ista ratione cogi, ut quidam pedes sint, qui rhythmum continuare non possint? Nam quod de proceleumatico inventum est, cui tollit pyrrhichius principatum, hoc et de diiambo et de dichorio et de dispondeo inventum puto: nisi tibi aliud videtur.
3. 4. 7. Teacher: Do you see that by this reasoning this too is established: that there are certain feet which cannot continue a rhythm? For what was found about the proceleusmatic, from which the pyrrhic takes the primacy, this I think is found about the diiamb and the dichoree and the dispondee too—unless it seems otherwise to you.
deMus.3.4.7
Discipulus: Quid mihi aliud videri potest, cum probata illa ratione hoc quod sequitur improbare non possim?
Student: What else can seem to me, when, that reason being proved, I cannot disprove what follows?
deMus.3.4.7
Magister: Vide etiam ista, et compara ac iudica. Nam videtur, cum tale incertum evenit, plausu potius debere discerni quo pede curratur: ut si pyrrhichio velis currere, unum tibi tempus levandum, unum ponendum sit; si proceleumatico, duo et duo: ita et pes apparebit, et nullus pedum erit a rhythmi continuatione seclusus.
Teacher: Look at these too, and compare and judge. For it seems that, when such uncertainty arises, the foot by which one runs ought rather to be distinguished by the beat: so that if you wish to run by the pyrrhic, you must raise one time-unit and set down one; if by the proceleusmatic, two and two. Thus both the foot will appear, and none of the feet will be shut out from the continuation of a rhythm.
deMus.3.4.7
Discipulus: Huic magis faveo sententiae, quae nullum pedem ab hac contextione esse immunem sinit.
Student: I favor this view more, which lets no foot be exempt from this weaving.
deMus.3.4.7
Magister: Recte facis, et quo magis hoc approbes, considera de tribracho pede quid respondere possimus, si nihilominus quisque contendat non pyrrhichio aut proceleumatico istum rhythmum, sed tribracho currere.
Teacher: You do rightly; and that you may approve this the more, consider what we can answer about the tribrach foot, if someone should nonetheless contend that this rhythm runs not by the pyrrhic or the proceleusmatic, but by the tribrach.
deMus.3.4.7
Discipulus: Video iudicium ad plausum illum esse revocandum, ut si unum tempus est in levatione, duo in positione, id est, una et duae syllabae; aut contra duae in levatione, una in positione; tribrachus rhythmus esse dicatur.
Student: I see that the judgment must be brought back to that beat: so that if there is one time-unit in the raising and two in the setting-down—that is, one and two syllables—or the contrary, two in the raising and one in the setting-down, the rhythm is said to be tribrach.
deMus.3.4.7
3. 4. 8. Magister: Recte intellegis. Quamobrem iam dic mihi utrum spondeus pes pyrrhichio rhythmo possit adiungi.
3. 4. 8. Teacher: You understand rightly. So now tell me whether the spondee foot can be joined to a pyrrhic rhythm.
deMus.3.4.8
Discipulus: Nullo modo: non enim continuabitur plausus aequalis; cum levatio et positio in pyrrhichio singula, in spondeo vero bina tempora teneant.
Student: In no way; for an equal beat will not be continued, since the raising and setting-down hold single time-units in the pyrrhic, but two each in the spondee.
deMus.3.4.8
Magister: Potest ergo proceleumatico adiungi.
Teacher: Then it can be joined to the proceleusmatic.
deMus.3.4.8
Discipulus: Potest.
Student: It can.
deMus.3.4.8
Magister: Quid cum ei adiungitur? interrogati utrum rhythmus proceleumaticus an spondiacus sit, quid respondebimus?
Teacher: And when it is joined to it—being asked whether the rhythm is proceleusmatic or spondaic, what shall we answer?
deMus.3.4.8
Discipulus: Quid censes, nisi spondeo dandum esse principatum? Cum enim plausu ista controversia non diiudicetur, nam in utroque bina levamus ac ponimus tempora; quid aliud restat, nisi ut ille regnet qui in ipso pedum ordine prior est?
Student: What do you think, except that the primacy must be given to the spondee? For since this dispute is not decided by the beat—for in both we raise and set down two time-units each—what else remains but that the one reign which is prior in the very order of feet?
deMus.3.4.8
Magister: Rationem te secutum esse satis approbo; et vides, ut arbitror, quid sequatur.
Teacher: I approve well enough that you have followed reason; and you see, I judge, what follows.
deMus.3.4.8
Discipulus: Quid tandem?
Student: What, in the end?
deMus.3.4.8
Magister: Quid putas, nisi proceleumatico rhythmo nullum alium pedem posse misceri? quoniam quisquis miscebitur totidem temporum, non enim aliter potest misceri, in eum rhythmi nomen transferatur necesse est. Omnes enim priores illo sunt, qui totidem temporibus constant. Et quoniam iis qui priores inventi fuerint, cogit nos ratio, quam vidisti principatum dare, id est, ex eo rhythmum nuncupare; non erit iam proceleumaticus rhythmus, aliquo alio quatuor temporum mixto, sed spondiacus aut dactylicus aut anapaesticus. Amphibrachum enim ab istorum copulatione numerorum recte remotum esse convenit.
Teacher: What do you think, except that no other foot can be mixed with a proceleusmatic rhythm? For whatever is mixed with it must be of the same number of time-units (for otherwise it cannot be mixed), and the name of the rhythm must be transferred to it. For all are prior to it that consist of the same number of time-units. And since reason compels us to give the primacy to those that are found prior—that is, to name the rhythm from it—it will no longer be a proceleusmatic rhythm, with some other four-time-unit foot mixed in, but spondaic or dactylic or anapestic. For the amphibrach is rightly removed from the coupling of these numbers.
deMus.3.4.8
Discipulus: Fateor ita esse.
Student: I admit it is so.
deMus.3.4.8
3. 4. 9. Magister: Nunc ergo ex ordine considera iambicum rhythmum, quoniam pyrrhichium et proceleumaticum, qui duplicato pyrrhichio gignitur, satis discussimus. Quare dicas velim huic quem censes admiscendum pedem, ut iambicus rhythmus suum nomen obtineat.
3. 4. 9. Teacher: Now then consider in order the iambic rhythm, since we have discussed enough the pyrrhic and the proceleusmatic, which is produced by doubling the pyrrhic. So I would have you say which foot you judge should be mixed with this, so that the iambic rhythm may keep its name.
deMus.3.4.9
Discipulus: Quem, nisi tribrachum, qui et temporibus et plausu congruit; et quia posterior est, regno pollere non potest? Nam chorius est quidem posterior, et totidem temporum, sed non eodem modo plauditur.
Student: Which, except the tribrach, which agrees both in time-units and in beat; and because it is later, cannot prevail in the reign? For the choree is indeed later, and of the same number of time-units, but is not beaten in the same way.
deMus.3.4.9
Magister: Age, iam vide rhythmum trochaicum, et ad eadem de hoc quoque responde.
Teacher: Come, now look at the trochaic rhythm, and answer the same about this too.
deMus.3.4.9
Discipulus: Idem respondeo: nam potest et huic non solum spatio temporis, sed plausu etiam concinere tribrachus. Cavendum autem iambum quis non videat? qui etiam si aequaliter plauderetur, principatum tamen mixtus auferret.
Student: I answer the same: for the tribrach can harmonize with this too not only in span of time but also in beat. And who does not see that the iamb must be avoided? Which, even if it were beaten equally, would still, when mixed, carry off the primacy.
deMus.3.4.9
Magister: Quid? spondiaco rhythmo quem tandem copulabimus pedem?
Teacher: And to a spondaic rhythm which foot, in the end, shall we couple?
deMus.3.4.9
Discipulus: Sane in hoc largissima copia est: nam et dactylum et anapaestum et proceleumaticum nulla imparilitate temporum, nulla claudicatione plausus, nulla principatus ademptione impediente, huic video misceri posse.
Student: Indeed in this there is the most ample supply: for I see that the dactyl and the anapest and the proceleusmatic can be mixed with it, with no inequality of time-units, no limping of the beat, no removal of primacy hindering.
deMus.3.4.9
3. 4. 10. Magister: Video iam te facile posse caetera ordine persequi: quocirca remota interrogatione mea, vel potius tamquam de omnibus interrogatus responde breviter, dilucideque quantum potes, quomodo singuli qui restant pedes, aliis legitime immixtis, obtineant suum nomen in rhythmo.
3. 4. 10. Teacher: I see now that you can easily pursue the rest in order; so, my questioning being set aside—or rather, as if questioned about all of them—answer briefly and as clearly as you can, how each of the remaining feet, with others lawfully mixed in, keeps its own name in the rhythm.
deMus.3.4.10
Discipulus: Faciam: neque enim ullius negotii est, tanta rationum luce praemissa. Nam tribracho nullus miscebitur; omnes enim priores sunt, qui ei sunt temporibus pares. Dactylo anapaestus potest; nam et est posterior, et tempore ac plausu currit aequaliter: utrique autem proceleumaticus eadem scilicet ratione copulatur. Iam bacchio creticus, et de paeonibus primus, secundus et quartus misceri possunt. Porro ipsi cretico, omnes qui post illum sunt quinque temporum pedes iure miscentur, sed non omnes eadem divisione. Alii namque ad duo et tria, alii ad tria et duo tempora dividuntur. Iste autem creticus utroque modo dividi potest, quia media brevis cuilibet parti tribuitur. Palimbacchius autem, quia eius divisio a duobus temporibus incipiens, in tria desinit, congruos et copulabiles habet paeones omnes, praeter secundum. Molossus de trisyllabis restat, a quo primo incipiunt sex temporum pedes, qui omnes eidem coniungi possunt, partim propter simpli duplique rationem; partim propter illam quam nobis plausus ostendit, partitionem longae syllabae, quae singula tempora parti utrique concedit, quia in senario numero par lateribus medium est. Ob quam causam et molossus, et ambo ionici non solum in simplum et duplum, sed etiam in aequas partes per terna tempora feriuntur. Hinc efficitur ut deinceps omnibus sex temporum pedibus, omnes totidem temporum posteriores copulari queant; solusque antispastus, qui nullum sibi velit misceri, remaneat. Hos consequuntur quatuor epitriti, quorum primus admittit secundum, secundus nullum, tertius quartum, quartus nullum. Restat dispondeus, rhythmum solus etiam ipse facturus, quia nec posteriorem quemquam invenit, nec aequalem. Itaque omnium pedum octo sunt, qui nullo alio mixto rhythmum faciunt: pyrrhichius, tribrachus, proceleumaticus, paeon quartus, antispastus, epitritus secundus, et quartus, et dispondeus: reliqui eos, qui se posteriores sunt, copulari sibi patiuntur, ita ut rhythmi nomen obtineant, etiamsi pauciores in ea serie numerentur. Hoc est, ut opinor, satis a me quod voluisti, explicatum atque digestum: tuum est iam videre quod restat.
Student: I will; for it is no trouble at all, so great a light of principles having gone before. With the tribrach none will be mixed; for all that are equal to it in time-units are prior. The anapest can go with the dactyl; for it is both later, and runs equally in time and beat; and the proceleusmatic is coupled with each by the same principle, of course. Now with the bacchius the cretic, and of the paeons the first, second, and fourth, can be mixed. Further, with the cretic itself all the five-time-unit feet that come after it are rightly mixed, but not all by the same division. For some are divided into two and three, others into three and two time-units. But this cretic can be divided either way, because the middle short is assigned to either part. The palimbacchius, however, since its division, beginning from two time-units, ends in three, has all the paeons harmonious and capable of being coupled, except the second. Of the trisyllables the molossus remains, from which first the six-time-unit feet begin, all of which can be joined to it, partly because of the principle of single and double, partly because of that division of the long syllable which the beat showed us, which grants single time-units to each part, because in the number six the middle is equal to the sides. For which cause both the molossus and both ionics are struck not only into single and double, but also into equal parts through three time-units each. Hence it comes about that to all the six-time-unit feet in turn all the later feet of the same number of time-units can be coupled; and the antispast alone, which would have none mixed with it, remains. These the four epitrites follow, of which the first admits the second, the second none, the third the fourth, the fourth none. There remains the dispondee, which will itself too make a rhythm alone, because it finds neither any later nor any equal. And so of all the feet there are eight that make a rhythm with no other mixed in: the pyrrhic, the tribrach, the proceleusmatic, the fourth paeon, the antispast, the second and fourth epitrite, and the dispondee; the rest allow those that are later than themselves to be coupled with them, so that they keep the name of the rhythm, even if fewer are counted in that series. This is, I think, enough unfolded and arranged by me as you wished; it is now yours to see what remains.
deMus.3.4.10
3. 5. 11. Magister: Imo mecum etiam tuum: ambo enim quaerimus. Sed quid tandem restare arbitraris, quod ad rhythmum attinet? Nonne illud considerandum est utrum aliqua dimensio pedis, quamvis octo tempora non excedat, quae dispondeus obtinet, excedat tamen numerum quatuor syllabarum?
3. 5. 11. Teacher: Nay, with me yours too; for we both inquire. But what, in the end, do you judge remains that pertains to rhythm? Is not this to be considered: whether some measure of a foot, although it does not exceed eight time-units, which the dispondee holds, nevertheless exceeds the number of four syllables?
deMus.3.5.11
Discipulus: Quare, quaeso?
Student: Why, I ask?
deMus.3.5.11
Magister: Imo tu, quare me potius quam teipsum rogas? An tibi non videtur sine ulla fraude vel offensione aurium, sive quod ad plausum ac divisionem pedum, sive quod ad spatium temporis pertinet, pro una longa syllaba duas posse poni breves?
Teacher: Nay, you—why do you ask me rather than yourself? Or does it not seem to you that, without any deception or offense to the ears, whether as concerns the beat and division of feet, or as concerns the span of time, two shorts can be put for one long syllable?
deMus.3.5.11
Discipulus: Quis hoc negaverit?
Student: Who would deny this?
deMus.3.5.11
Magister: Hinc ergo est, quod pro iambo vel chorio tribrachum ponimus, et pro spondeo dactylum vel anapaestum vel proceleumaticum, cum vel pro secunda eius, vel pro prima duas breves ponimus, vel quatuor pro utraque.
Teacher: From this, then, it comes that for an iamb or a choree we put a tribrach, and for a spondee a dactyl or anapest or proceleusmatic, when we put two shorts either for its second or for its first, or four for both.
deMus.3.5.11
Discipulus: Assentior.
Student: I agree.
deMus.3.5.11
Magister: Fac igitur hoc idem in ionico quolibet, vel alio quopiam quadrisyllabo sex temporum pede, et pro una eius quacumque longa duas breves constitue. Num quidquam mensurae deperit, aut plausui resistit?
Teacher: Do this same thing, then, in any ionic, or in some other four-syllable foot of six time-units, and set two shorts for any one of its longs. Does anything of the measure perish, or resist the beat?
deMus.3.5.11
Discipulus: Nihil omnino.
Student: Nothing at all.
deMus.3.5.11
Magister: Considera ergo quot syllabae fiunt.
Teacher: Consider, then, how many syllables there come to be.
deMus.3.5.11
Discipulus: Quinque fieri video.
Student: I see there come to be five.
deMus.3.5.11
Magister: Vides certe posse quatuor syllabarum numerum excedi.
Teacher: You surely see that the number of four syllables can be exceeded.
deMus.3.5.11
Discipulus: Video sane.
Student: I see it indeed.
deMus.3.5.11
Magister: Quid, si pro duabus, quae ibi sunt longae, quatuor breves posueris? nonne in uno pede sex syllabas necesse est metiri?
Teacher: And if for the two longs that are there you put four shorts, must not six syllables be measured in one foot?
deMus.3.5.11
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: It is so.
deMus.3.5.11
Magister: Quid, si cuiuslibet epitriti omnes longas solvas in breves? num etiam de septem syllabis dubitandum est?
Teacher: And if you dissolve all the longs of any epitrite into shorts, must we doubt even about seven syllables?
deMus.3.5.11
Discipulus: Nullo modo.
Student: In no way.
deMus.3.5.11
Magister: Quid ipse dispondeus? nonne octo efficit, cum pro omnibus longis binas breves locamus?
Teacher: And the dispondee itself? Does it not make eight, when we set two shorts for all the longs?
deMus.3.5.11
Discipulus: Verissimum est.
Student: It is most true.
deMus.3.5.11
3. 5. 12. Magister: Quae igitur ratio est, qua cogimur et tam multarum syllabarum metiri pedes, et pedem qui adhibetur ad numeros, non excedere quatuor syllabas, ante tractatis rationibus confitemur? nonne tibi videntur inter se ista pugnare?
3. 5. 12. Teacher: What, then, is the principle by which we are compelled both to measure feet of so many syllables, and yet, by the principles treated before, to confess that the foot which is applied to rhythms does not exceed four syllables? Do these not seem to you to be at war with each other?
deMus.3.5.12
Discipulus: Imo maxime, et quomodo istud pacari possit, ignoro.
Student: On the contrary, very much so; and how this can be reconciled I do not know.
deMus.3.5.12
Magister: Etiam hoc facile est, si te ipsum rursum interroges, utrum rationabiliter inter nos paulo ante constiterit, ideo pyrrhichium, et proceleumaticum plausu debere diiudicari atque discerni, ne sit ullus pes legitimae divisionis, qui rhythmum non faciat, id est, ut ex eo rhythmus nominetur.
Teacher: This too is easy, if you again question yourself whether it was reasonably agreed between us a little while ago that the pyrrhic and the proceleusmatic ought to be decided and distinguished by the beat, lest there be any foot of lawful division that does not make a rhythm—that is, that a rhythm be named from it.
deMus.3.5.12
Discipulus: Hoc vero memini, et non invenio cur mihi placuisse poeniteat: sed quorsum ista?
Student: I do remember this, and I do not find why I should regret that it pleased me; but where is this leading?
deMus.3.5.12
Magister: Quia scilicet hi omnes pedes quaternarum syllabarum, excepto amphibracho, rhythmum faciunt, id est, principatum in rhythmo tenent, eumque usu et nomine efficiunt: illi vero qui plures quam quatuor syllabas habent, multi quidem pro his poni possunt; sed ipsi per se rhythmum facere, ac rhythmi nomen obtinere non possunt: et ideo ne pedes quidem istos appellandos putaverim. Quamobrem repugnantia illa quae nos movebat, iam, ut opinor, composita est et sopita, quandoquidem licet et plures syllabas quam quatuor pro aliquo pede ponere, et pedem tamen non appellare, nisi eum quo rhythmus efficiatur. Oportebat enim pedi constitui aliquem modum progressionis in syllabis. Is autem modus constitui optime potuit, qui de ipsa numerorum ratione translatus in quaternario constitit. Itaque longarum syllabarum quatuor pes esse potuit. Cum autem pro eo breves octo constituimus, quoniam tantum spatii habent in tempore, pro altero poni possunt. Quia vero legitimam progressionem, id est quaternarium numerum excedunt, pro se ipsi poni, ac rhythmum gignere non sensu aurium, sed disciplinae lege prohibentur. Nisi contradicere aliquid paras.
Teacher: Because, of course, all these feet of four syllables, except the amphibrach, make a rhythm—that is, hold the primacy in a rhythm, and bring it about in use and name; but those that have more than four syllables can indeed, many of them, be put for these, yet cannot by themselves make a rhythm and keep the name of a rhythm; and therefore I would not think these should even be called feet. Therefore that contradiction which was troubling us is now, I think, composed and laid to rest, since one may both put more syllables than four for some foot, and yet not call a foot anything except that by which a rhythm is brought about. For some manner of progression in syllables had to be established for the foot. And that manner could best be established which, transferred from the very principle of numbers, settled on four. And so a foot could be of four long syllables. But when we set eight shorts for it, since they have as much span in time, they can be put for the other. But because they exceed the lawful progression—that is, the number four—they are forbidden to be put for themselves, and to produce a rhythm, not by the judgment of the ears, but by the law of the discipline. Unless you are preparing to object something.
deMus.3.5.12
3. 5. 13. Discipulus: Paro sane, et iam faciam. Nam quid impediebat usque ad octonarium numerum syllabarum progredi pedem, cum eumdem numerum ad rhythmum admitti posse videamus? Neque enim me movet, quod pro alio dicis admitti: imo hoc me magis admonet quaerere, vel potius queri, quod non etiam suo nomine admittitur qui pro alio potest.
3. 5. 13. Student: I am preparing indeed, and I will do it now. For what was preventing the foot from proceeding up to the number eight in syllables, since we see that the same number can be admitted to a rhythm? Nor does it move me that you say it is admitted for another; rather, this the more prompts me to ask—or rather to complain—that the one which can stand for another is not also admitted under its own name.
deMus.3.5.13
Magister: Non mirum est, quod hic falleris; sed facilis explicatio veri est. Nam ut omittam tanta quae pro quaternario numero iam ante disputata sunt, cur usque ad illum fieri debeat progressio syllabarum; fac me iam cessisse tibi et consensisse usque in octo syllabas pedis debere longitudinem porrigi: num resistere poteris esse iam posse octo longarum syllabarum pedem? Certe enim ad quem numerum syllabarum pervenit pes, non solus ad eum pervenit qui brevibus, sed etiam qui longis syllabis constat. Quo fit ut adhibita rursus ea lege, quae abrogari non potest, qua duas breves pro una longa poni licet, ad sexdecim syllabas pertendamus. Ubi si rursus pedis incrementum statuere volueris, in triginta duas breves proficiscimur: huc quoque ratio tua pedem te compellit adducere, et rursus lex illa duplum numerum brevium pro longis locare: atque ita nullus constituetur modus.
Teacher: It is no wonder that you are deceived here; but the explanation of the truth is easy. For—to pass over the many things already argued before on behalf of the number four, why the progression of syllables ought to be made up to it—suppose I have now yielded to you and consented that the length of a foot ought to be stretched up to eight syllables: can you resist that there can now be a foot of eight long syllables? For certainly, to whatever number of syllables a foot comes, not only the one that consists of shorts comes to it, but also the one that consists of longs. Whence it comes about that, applying again that law which cannot be abrogated, by which two shorts may be put for one long, we stretch on to sixteen syllables. And there, if you again wish to set the foot's increase, we set out into thirty-two shorts; here too your reasoning compels you to bring the foot, and again that law to set the double number of shorts for the longs; and so no limit will be established.
deMus.3.5.13
Discipulus: Iam cedo rationi, qua usque ad quaternarium syllabarum numerum promovemus pedem. Pro his autem legitimis pedibus poni oportere pedes plurium syllabarum, dum breves duae unius longae locum occupant non recuso.
Student: Now I yield to the reasoning by which we advance the foot up to the number of four syllables. But that for these lawful feet there ought to be put feet of more syllables, so long as two shorts occupy the place of one long, I do not refuse.
deMus.3.5.13
3. 6. 14. Magister: Facile est ergo te etiam illud videre atque concedere, alios pedes esse pro his, penes quos rhythmi est principatus, alios qui cum his collocantur. Nam ubi pro longis singulis geminantur breves, pro eo qui rhythmum obtinet, alium locamus; velut pro iambo vel trochaeo tribachum, aut pro spondeo dactylum aut anapaestum aut proceleumaticum. Ubi vero non idem fit, non pro eo, sed cum eo ponitur quisquis miscetur inferiorum; ut cum dactylo anapaestus, cum ionico vero utrolibet diiambus vel dichorius; et reliqui similiter suo iure cum caeteris. An parum tibi dilucidum, vel falsum videtur?
3. 6. 14. Teacher: It is easy, then, for you to see and concede this too: that some feet are put for those in whose hands is the primacy of a rhythm, and others that are set together with these. For where two shorts are doubled for single longs, we set another in place of the one that holds the rhythm—as a tribrach for an iamb or trochee, or a dactyl or anapest or proceleusmatic for a spondee. But where the same does not happen, whatever of the lower feet is mixed in is put not for it but with it—as the anapest with the dactyl, but the diiamb or dichoree with either ionic; and the rest likewise by their own right with the others. Or does it seem to you too little clear, or false?
deMus.3.6.14
Discipulus: Iam intellego.
Student: Now I understand.
deMus.3.6.14
Magister: Responde ergo utrum illi qui pro aliis ponuntur, possint etiam ipsi per se facere rhythmum.
Teacher: Answer, then, whether those that are put for others can also themselves by themselves make a rhythm.
deMus.3.6.14
Discipulus: Possunt.
Student: They can.
deMus.3.6.14
Magister: Omnesne?
Teacher: All of them?
deMus.3.6.14
Discipulus: Omnes.
Student: All.
deMus.3.6.14
Magister: Ergo et quinque syllabarum pes potest suo nomine rhythmum facere, quia pro bacchio vel cretico vel quolibet paeone poni potest.
Teacher: Then a foot of five syllables too can make a rhythm under its own name, because it can be put for a bacchius or cretic or any paeon.
deMus.3.6.14
Discipulus: Non potest quidem; sed iam istum non vocamus pedem, si progressionis illius usque ad quaternarium numerum satis memini. Ego autem cum omnes posse respondi, pedes utique posse respondi.
Student: It cannot, indeed; but we no longer call that a foot, if I remember well enough that progression up to the number four. But when I answered that all can, I answered, of course, that feet can.
deMus.3.6.14
Magister: Laudo etiam in nomine retinendo diligentiam et vigilantiam tuam. Sed scias multis visum esse etiam senarum syllabarum pedes nuncupandos; sed amplius, quod sciam, nemini placuit. Et illi quibus hoc placuit, negaverunt ad rhythmum, aut ad metrum per se gignendum tam longos pedes adhiberi oportere. Itaque ne nomina quidem his indiderunt. Quocirca verissimus est ille progressionis modus, qui usque ad quatuor syllabas pervenit; quandoquidem hi omnes pedes, quibus divisis duo fieri non possunt, coniuncti pedem facere potuerunt: et ita qui in sextam syllabam usque progressi sunt, nomen tantum pedis in eos, qui quartam excesserunt, transferre ausi sunt; ad principatum vero, qui est in rhythmis et metris, nullo modo eos aspirare siverunt. Sed cum pro longis breves duplicantur, etiam ad septimam atque octavam, ut iam ostendit ratio, syllabam pervenitur: ad quem numerum nemo tetendit pedem. Sed quoniam video constare inter nos quemlibet plurium quam quatuor syllabarum, cum pro longa duas breves ponimus, non cum his legitimis pedibus, sed pro his posse poni, neque per seipsos rhythmum creare, ne in infinitum eat quod ratione finiendum est, satisque iam inter nos de rhythmo existimo disputatum; transeamus ad metra, si placet.
Teacher: I praise too your diligence and vigilance in retaining the name. But know that to many it has seemed that even feet of six syllables should be named; but beyond that, so far as I know, it has pleased no one. And those to whom this pleased denied that such long feet ought to be applied to producing a rhythm or a meter by themselves. And so they did not even give them names. Therefore that manner of progression is most true which comes up to four syllables; since all these feet, which when divided cannot become two, when joined could make a foot. And so those who proceeded up to the sixth syllable dared to transfer only the name of "foot" to those that exceeded the fourth; but to the primacy that is in rhythms and meters they in no way allowed them to aspire. But when shorts are doubled for longs, one comes even to the seventh and eighth syllable, as reason has now shown; to which number no one has stretched a foot. But since I see it is agreed between us that any foot of more than four syllables, when we put two shorts for a long, can be put not with these lawful feet but for them, and cannot by themselves create a rhythm—lest what is to be ended by reason go on to infinity, and since I think enough has now been argued between us about rhythm—let us pass on to meters, if you please.
deMus.3.6.14
Discipulus: Placet vero.
Student: I agree indeed.
deMus.3.6.14
3. 7. 15. Magister: Dic igitur, metrumne arbitreris pedibus fieri, an pedes metro.
3. 7. 15. Teacher: Tell me, then, whether you judge that meter is made by feet, or feet by meter.
deMus.3.7.15
Discipulus: Non intellego.
Student: I do not understand.
deMus.3.7.15
Magister: Pedesne coniuncti metrum creant, an metris coniunctis pedes creantur?
Teacher: Do feet joined together create a meter, or are feet created when meters are joined?
deMus.3.7.15
Discipulus: Scio iam quid dicas, et coniunctis pedibus metrum fieri puto.
Student: Now I know what you mean, and I think that meter is made by feet joined together.
deMus.3.7.15
Magister: Cur tandem id putas?
Teacher: Why, in the end, do you think this?
deMus.3.7.15
Discipulus: Quia inter rhythmum et metrum hoc interesse dixisti, quod in rhythmo contextio pedum nullum certum habet finem, in metro vero habet: ita ista pedum contextio et rhythmi et metri esse intellegitur; sed ibi infinita, hic autem finita constat.
Student: Because you said that this lies between rhythm and meter: that in rhythm the weaving of feet has no fixed end, but in meter it has; so that this weaving of feet is understood to belong both to rhythm and to meter, but there it stands infinite, here finite.
deMus.3.7.15
Magister: Ergo unus pes metrum non est.
Teacher: Then one foot is not a meter.
deMus.3.7.15
Discipulus: Non utique.
Student: It is not.
deMus.3.7.15
Magister: Quid unus pes et semipes?
Teacher: And one foot and a half?
deMus.3.7.15
Discipulus: Ne hoc quidem.
Student: Not even this.
deMus.3.7.15
Magister: Quare? an quia metrum pedibus confit, nec utique possunt dici pedes, ubi minus quam duo sunt?
Teacher: Why? Is it because meter is made of feet, and there cannot be said to be feet where there are fewer than two?
deMus.3.7.15
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: It is so.
deMus.3.7.15
Magister: Inspiciamus igitur metra illa quae a me paulo ante commemorata sunt, et videamus quibus pedibus constent: non enim te in hoc genere animadvertendo rudem esse adhuc decet. Ea sunt autem: Ite igitur, Camoenae Fonticolae puellae, Quae canitis sub antris Mellifluos sonores. Satis haec esse ad id quod intendimus puto: tu iam metire ista, et quos habeant pedes renuntia.
Teacher: Let us, then, inspect those meters which I mentioned a little while ago, and see of what feet they consist; for it is not fitting that you should still be untrained in noticing this kind of thing. They are these: Ite igitur, Camoenae fonticolae puellae, quae canitis sub antris mellifluos sonores. I think these are enough for what we intend; now measure them, and report what feet they have.
deMus.3.7.15
Discipulus: Omnino non possum: eos enim metiendos puto, qui sibi legitime copulari queunt; nec valeo me hinc expedire. Si enim primum chorium fecero, sequitur iambus, qui temporibus par est, sed non similiter plauditur: si dactylum, non sequitur alius qui ei saltem temporibus coaequetur: si choriambum, eadem difficultas est; quod enim restat, nec temporibus cum eo, nec plausu convenit. Quare aut hoc metrum non est, aut falsum est quod inter nos de pedum copulatione dissertum est: nam quid aliud dicam non invenio.
Student: I cannot at all; for I think those are to be measured which can be lawfully coupled with one another, and I cannot extricate myself here. For if I make the first a choree, an iamb follows, which is equal in time-units but is not beaten alike; if a dactyl, no other follows that is equal to it even in time-units; if a choriamb, the same difficulty arises, for what remains agrees with it neither in time-units nor in beat. So either this is not a meter, or what was argued between us about the coupling of feet is false; for what else to say I do not find.
deMus.3.7.15
3. 7. 16. Magister: Metrum quidem esse et eo quod plus est quam pes, certumque finem habet, et ipsarum aurium iudicio convincitur. Non enim tam suavi sonaret aequalitate, aut motu tam concinno plauderetur, si non inesset in illo numerositas, quae profecto esse nisi in hac parte musicae non potest. Falsa vero esse, quae inter nos constiterunt, miror quod existimes: non enim aut numeris quidquam est certius, aut illa pedum commemoratione et collocatione ordinatius. Nam ex ipsa numerorum ratione, quae nullo modo fallit, expressum est quidquid in eis et ad mulcendas aures, et ad obtinendum in rhythmo principatum, valere perspeximus: sed vide potius cum saepe repeto: Quae canitis sub antris, demulceoque ista numerositate sensum tuum; quid distat inter hoc, et si adderem ad finem huius brevem aliquam syllabam, et item istud eodem modo repeterem: Quae canitis sub antrisve?
3. 7. 16. Teacher: That it is a meter—both because it is more than a foot and has a fixed end—is proved by the judgment of the ears themselves. For it would not sound with such sweet equality, nor be beaten with so harmonious a motion, if there were not in it that rhythm which surely can be only in this part of music. But that what we agreed on between us is false, I wonder that you should think; for nothing is more certain than numbers, nor more orderly than that mention and arrangement of feet. For from the very principle of numbers, which in no way deceives, was expressed whatever we have seen in them to avail both for charming the ears and for obtaining the primacy in a rhythm. But look rather, when I often repeat quae canitis sub antris, and charm your sense with that rhythm: what difference is there between this, and if I were to add at the end of it some short syllable, and likewise repeat it the same way: quae canitis sub antrisve?
deMus.3.7.16
Discipulus: Utrumque mihi iucunde illabitur auribus: hoc tamen posterius, cui syllabam addidisti brevem, plus tenere spatii ac temporis, siquidem longius factum est, cogor fateri.
Student: Each glides pleasantly into my ears; yet this latter one, to which you added a short syllable, I am compelled to admit holds more span and time, since it has been made longer.
deMus.3.7.16
Magister: Quid cum illud superius: Quae canitis sub antris, ita repeto, ut post finem nihil sileam? eademne ad te iucunditas pervenit?
Teacher: And when I repeat that earlier one, quae canitis sub antris, in such a way that after the end I am silent for nothing—does the same pleasantness reach you?
deMus.3.7.16
Discipulus: Immo nescio quid claudum me offendit, nisi forte illam ultimam plus quam caeteras longas produxeris.
Student: On the contrary, something halting, I know not what, offends me—unless perhaps you have drawn out that last syllable more than the other longs.
deMus.3.7.16
Magister: Ergo sive idipsum amplius quod producitur, sive quod siletur, censesne in tempore habere aliquid spatii?
Teacher: So whether it is the very thing that is drawn out longer, or the silence, do you judge that it has some span in time?
deMus.3.7.16
Discipulus: Qui aliter potest?
Student: How could it be otherwise?
deMus.3.7.16
3. 8. 17. Magister: Recte censes. Sed dic mihi etiam quantum spatium putas esse?
3. 8. 17. Teacher: You judge rightly. But tell me also how much span you think it is.
deMus.3.8.17
Discipulus: Metiri hoc omnino difficile est.
Student: It is altogether difficult to measure this.
deMus.3.8.17
Magister: Verum dicis: sed nonne tibi videtur brevis illa syllaba id metiri, quam cum addidimus, neque longae ultimae ultra solitum productionem, neque ullum silentium in eius metri repetitione sensus desideravit?
Teacher: You speak truly; but does it not seem to you that that short syllable measures it—the one which, when we added it, our sense desired neither any drawing-out of the last long beyond the usual, nor any silence, in the repetition of that meter?
deMus.3.8.17
Discipulus: Omnino assentior: nam et te illud superius pronuntiante atque repetente, hoc posterius ego apud me ipse repetebam pariter tecum: ita sensi idem spatium temporis ambobus occurrere, cum silentio tuo brevis mea ultima conveniret.
Student: I agree entirely; for as you pronounced and repeated that earlier one, I was repeating this latter one to myself, in step with you; and so I felt that the same span of time fell to both, since my final short agreed with your silence.
deMus.3.8.17
Magister: Teneas igitur oportet haec silentiorum spatia certa in metris esse. Quare cum inveneris aliquid deesse pedi legitimo, considerare te oportebit, utrum dimenso atque annumerato silentio compensetur.
Teacher: You ought, then, to hold that these spans of silence are fixed in meters. So when you find that something is lacking to a lawful foot, you must consider whether it is compensated by a measured and counted silence.
deMus.3.8.17
Discipulus: Teneo iam istud, persequere caetera.
Student: I hold this now; pursue the rest.
deMus.3.8.17
3. 8. 18. Magister: Video iam nos quaerere debere ipsius silentii modum: namque in hoc metro, ubi post choriambum bacchium comperimus, quia unum tempus deest ut sex temporum esset sicut choriambus, facillime id aures senserunt, et in repetitione tanti spatii silentium interponere coegerunt, quantum syllaba occuparet brevis: at si post choriambum locetur spondeus, duo nobis tempora cum silentio peragenda sunt ad caput redeuntibus, veluti hoc est: Quae canitis fontem. Nam te sentire iam credo silendum esse, ut cum redimus ad caput, plausus non claudicet. Sed ut experiri queas quanta silentii huius mensura sit, adde unam syllabam longam, ut fiat: Quae canitis fontem vos; atque hoc cum plausu repete: videbis tantum occupare temporis plausum, quantum in superiore occupabat, cum ibi duae longae post choriambum, hic tres sint locatae. Unde apparet duum ibi temporum interponi silentium. At si post choriambum iambus locetur, sicut hoc est: Quae canitis locos, tria tempora silere cogimur: quod ut exploretur, adduntur sive per alterum iambum, sive per chorium, sive per tribrachum ut sit ita: Quae canitis locos bonos: aut: Quae canitis locos monte: aut: Quae canitis locos nemore. His enim additis, cum sine silentio iucunda et aequabilis repetitio movet, et plausu adhibito tantum spatii haec tria singula tenere inveniuntur, quantum illud in quo silebamus, manifestum fit trium temporum ibi esse silentium. Potest post choriambum una syllaba longa constitui, ut quatuor tempora sileantur. Nam etiam sic choriambus dividi potest, ut simplo et duplo levatio sibi positioque conveniant. Huius metri exemplum est: Quae canitis res. Cui si addas vel duas longas, vel longam et duas breves, vel brevem et longam et brevem, vel duas breves et longam, vel quatuor breves, implebis sex temporum pedem, ut nullo desiderato silentio repetatur. Talia sunt: Quae canitis res pulchras, Quae canitis res in bona, Quae canitis res bonumve, Quae canitis res teneras, Quae canitis res modo bene. Quibus cognitis atque concessis, credo tibi iam satis apparere, nec minus uno tempore sileri posse, nec plus quatuor temporibus sileri oportere. Nam et ipsa est illa, de qua iam multa dicta sunt, moderata progressio; et in omnibus pedibus nulla levatio aut positio amplius quam quatuor occupat tempora.
3. 8. 18. Teacher: I see now that we ought to inquire into the measure of the silence itself; for in this meter, where after the choriamb we found a bacchius, because one time-unit was lacking for it to be of six time-units like the choriamb, the ears most easily perceived it, and in the repetition compelled us to interpose a silence of as great a span as a short syllable would take up. But if a spondee is set after the choriamb, two time-units must be passed by us, with silence, as we return to the head, as in this: quae canitis fontem. For I believe you now feel that one must be silent, so that, when we return to the head, the beat does not limp. But that you may be able to test how great the measure of this silence is, add one long syllable, so that it becomes quae canitis fontem vos; and repeat this with the beat: you will see that the beat takes up as much time as it took in the former, since there two longs were set after the choriamb, here three. Hence it appears that a silence of two time-units is interposed there. But if an iamb is set after the choriamb, as in this: quae canitis locos, we are compelled to be silent for three time-units; which, that it may be tested, are added either by another iamb, or by a choree, or by a tribrach, so that it becomes quae canitis locos bonos, or quae canitis locos monte, or quae canitis locos nemore. For when these are added, since the repetition moves us pleasantly and evenly without silence, and, the beat being applied, these three are found each to hold as much span as that one in which we were silent, it becomes manifest that the silence there is of three time-units. After the choriamb one long syllable can be set, so that four time-units are kept silent. For the choriamb can be divided in such a way too that the raising and setting-down agree by single and double. An example of this meter is quae canitis res. To which, if you add either two longs, or a long and two shorts, or a short and a long and a short, or two shorts and a long, or four shorts, you will fill out a foot of six time-units, so that it is repeated with no silence desired. Such are: quae canitis res pulchras, quae canitis res in bona, quae canitis res bonumve, quae canitis res teneras, quae canitis res modo bene. These being known and granted, I believe it now appears to you sufficiently that one cannot be silent for less than one time-unit, nor ought one to be silent for more than four. For this is that very moderate progression of which much has already been said; and in all feet no raising or setting-down takes up more than four time-units.
deMus.3.8.18
3. 8. 19. Discipulus: Cognovi et assentior.
3. 8. 19. Student: I have learned it and I agree.
deMus.3.8.19
Magister: Mihine credens, an per te ipse vera esse perspiciens?
Teacher: Trusting me, or seeing for yourself that these things are true?
deMus.3.8.19
Discipulus: Per me ipse sane, quamvis dicente te vera haec esse cognosco.
Student: For myself indeed, although it is as you say that I recognize these things to be true.
deMus.3.8.19
3. 9. 20. Magister: Age ergo nunc quoniam invenimus unde metrum esse incipiat, inveniamus etiam quousque procedat. Nam metrum incipit a duobus pedibus, sive ipso sono plenis, sive ad implendum quod deest annumerato silentio. Quare oportet te iam respicere ad illam quaternariam progressionem, mihique renuntiare usque ad quot pedes metrum tendere debeamus.
3. 9. 20. Teacher: Come, then, now that we have found from where meter begins, let us also find how far it proceeds. For meter begins from two feet, whether full of sound itself, or with a silence counted in to fill out what is lacking. So you must now look back to that fourfold progression, and report to me up to how many feet we ought to stretch a meter.
deMus.3.9.20
Discipulus: Facile istud quidem est. Nam octo pedes esse ratio satis docet.
Student: This indeed is easy. For reason teaches well enough that there are eight feet.
deMus.3.9.20
Magister: Quid? illud recordarisne, dixisse nos eum versum a doctis appellatum, qui duobus membris certa ratione dimensis copulatisque constaret?
Teacher: And do you recall that we said the learned called that a verse which consists of two members measured and coupled by a fixed principle?
deMus.3.9.20
Discipulus: Bene memini.
Student: I remember well.
deMus.3.9.20
Magister: Cum ergo non sit dictum duobus pedibus, sed duobus membris constare versum, cumque manifestum sit versum non unum pedem habere, sed plures; nonne ipsa res indicat longius membrum esse quam pedem?
Teacher: Since, then, it was said that a verse consists not of two feet but of two members, and since it is manifest that a verse has not one foot but several, does not the matter itself show that a member is longer than a foot?
deMus.3.9.20
Discipulus: Ita vero.
Student: It does indeed.
deMus.3.9.20
Magister: At si membra aequalia sint in versu, nonne praeposterari poterit, ut prima pars sine discrimine ultima, et ultima prima fiat?
Teacher: But if the members in a verse were equal, could they not be reversed, so that the first part might without distinction become the last, and the last the first?
deMus.3.9.20
Discipulus: Intellego.
Student: I understand.
deMus.3.9.20
Magister: Ergo ut hoc non accidat, satisque appareat discernaturque in versu aliud esse membrum quo incipit, aliud quo desinit; non possumus recusare inaequalia membra esse oportere.
Teacher: Then, that this may not happen, and that it may appear and be distinguished well enough in a verse that one member is that with which it begins, another that with which it ends, we cannot refuse that the members ought to be unequal.
deMus.3.9.20
Discipulus: Nullo modo.
Student: In no way.
deMus.3.9.20
Magister: Id ergo prius in pyrrhichio consideremus, si placet, in quo iam credo videri tibi minus tribus temporibus membrum esse non posse, quoniam id primum est plus quam pes.
Teacher: Let us consider this first in the pyrrhic, if you please, in which I believe it now seems to you that a member cannot be less than three time-units, since this is the first thing that is more than a foot.
deMus.3.9.20
Discipulus: Assentior.
Student: I agree.
deMus.3.9.20
Magister: Ergo minimus versus quot tempora possidebit?
Teacher: How many time-units, then, will the smallest verse possess?
deMus.3.9.20
Discipulus: Dicerem sex, nisi me illa praeposteratio revocaret. Septem ergo habebit: quia minus quam tria membrum habere non potest; plus autem habere, nondum prohibitum est.
Student: I would say six, did not that reversal call me back. So it will have seven: because a member cannot have less than three; but to have more is not yet forbidden.
deMus.3.9.20
Magister: Recte intellegis. Sed dic quot pedes pyrrhichios habeant septem tempora.
Teacher: You understand rightly. But tell me how many pyrrhic feet seven time-units have.
deMus.3.9.20
Discipulus: Tres et semis.
Student: Three and a half.
deMus.3.9.20
Magister: Debetur ergo unius temporis silentium, dum ad principium reditur, ut spatium pedis possit impleri.
Teacher: So a silence of one time-unit is owed, while one returns to the beginning, that the span of a foot may be filled out.
deMus.3.9.20
Discipulus: Debetur sane.
Student: It is owed indeed.
deMus.3.9.20
Magister: Hoc annumerato quot tempora erunt?
Teacher: With this counted in, how many time-units will there be?
deMus.3.9.20
Discipulus: Octo.
Student: Eight.
deMus.3.9.20
Magister: Ut ergo minimus, qui etiam primus est pes, minus quam duo; ita minimus qui primus est versus, minus habere quam octo tempora non potest.
Teacher: So, as the smallest foot, which is also the first, cannot have less than two, so the smallest verse, which is the first, cannot have less than eight time-units.
deMus.3.9.20
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: It is so.
deMus.3.9.20
Magister: Quid maximus versus, quo ampliorem esse non oporteat? quot tandem temporum esse debet? Nonne statim videbis, si ad illam progressionem retulerimus animum, de qua toties tam multa dicta sunt?
Teacher: And the largest verse, than which none ought to be larger—of how many time-units, in the end, ought it to be? Will you not see at once, if we turn our mind to that progression of which so much has so often been said?
deMus.3.9.20
Discipulus: Iam intellego ampliorem quam triginta duum temporum versum esse non posse.
Student: Now I understand that a verse cannot be larger than thirty-two time-units.
deMus.3.9.20
3. 9. 21. Magister: Quid de metri longitudine? censesne ampliorem esse debere quam versus, cum metrum id quod est minimum, tam minus sit quam minimus versus?
3. 9. 21. Teacher: And about the length of a meter? Do you judge that it ought to be larger than a verse, when meter, in what is its smallest, is just so much less than the smallest verse?
deMus.3.9.21
Discipulus: Non censeo.
Student: I do not judge so.
deMus.3.9.21
Magister: Cum ergo metrum incipiat a duobus pedibus, versus a quatuor; aut illud ab spatio duorum pedum, hoc a quatuor annumerato silentio; metrum autem octo pedes non excedat: nonne cum et versus metrum sit, necesse est eum pedes totidem non excedere?
Teacher: Since, then, meter begins from two feet, a verse from four—the one from the span of two feet, the other from four with a silence counted in—but meter does not exceed eight feet: since a verse too is a meter, must it not exceed not the same number of feet?
deMus.3.9.21
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: It is so.
deMus.3.9.21
Magister: Rursus cum versus non sit longior quam triginta duum temporum, et metrum sit etiam longitudo versus, si coniunctionem duorum membrorum talem non habeat qualis in versu praecipitur, sed tantum certo fine claudatur, neque debeat longius esse quam versus: nonne manifestum est ut versum pedes octo, ita metrum triginta duo tempora excedere non oportere?
Teacher: Again, since a verse is not longer than thirty-two time-units, and a meter too is the length of a verse—if it does not have such a coupling of two members as is prescribed in a verse, but is only closed off by a fixed end, and ought not to be longer than a verse—is it not manifest that, as a verse ought not to exceed eight feet, so a meter ought not to exceed thirty-two time-units?
deMus.3.9.21
Discipulus: Assentior.
Student: I agree.
deMus.3.9.21
Magister: Erit ergo idem spatium temporis, et idem numerus pedum et metro et versui, communisque quidam terminus, ultra quem progredi utrumque non debeat: quamvis metrum quadruplicatis pedibus, a quibus esse incipit; versus autem quadruplicatis temporibus, a quibus et ipse esse incipit, finiatur: ut crescendi scilicet modum quaternaria illa ratione servata metrum cum versu communicaverit in pedibus, versus cum metro in temporibus.
Teacher: There will then be the same span of time, and the same number of feet, for both meter and verse, and a certain common boundary beyond which neither ought to proceed—although meter is ended by quadrupling the feet from which it begins to be, and a verse by quadrupling the time-units from which it too begins to be; so that, the manner of growing being kept by that fourfold principle, meter shares with verse in feet, and verse with meter in time-units.
deMus.3.9.21
Discipulus: Intellego, et probo; atque ita se habere istam concordiam consensionemque delector.
Student: I understand and approve; and I am delighted that this concord and agreement holds so.
deMus.3.9.21
4. 1. 1. Magister: Redeamus ergo ad metri considerationem, propter cuius progressum ac longitudinem de versu tecum aliquid agere coactus sum, cuius tractandi postea nobis est constitutus locus. Sed primo illud quaero, utrum non repudies, quod ultimam syllabam, quae metrum terminat, seu longa seu brevis sit, poetae atque horum iudices grammatici nihil ad rem pertinere arbitrati sunt.
4. 1. 1. Teacher: Let us return, then, to the consideration of meter, on account of whose progression and length I was compelled to deal with you somewhat about the verse, whose treatment has been set for us in a place later on. But first I ask whether you would not reject this: that poets, and the grammarians who judge them, have held that the last syllable, which ends a meter—whether it is long or short—matters nothing to the thing.
deMus.4.1.1
Discipulus: Omnino repudio: non enim mihi videtur esse rationis.
Student: I reject it entirely; for it does not seem to me to be reasonable.
deMus.4.1.1
Magister: Dic mihi, obsecro, quod metrum sit in pyrrhichio minimum.
Teacher: Tell me, I beg, what is the smallest meter in the pyrrhic.
deMus.4.1.1
Discipulus: Tres breves.
Student: Three shorts.
deMus.4.1.1
Magister: Quantum ergo silendum est, dum repetitur?
Teacher: How much, then, must be kept silent while it is repeated?
deMus.4.1.1
Discipulus: Unum tempus, quod est unius brevis syllabae spatium.
Student: One time-unit, which is the span of one short syllable.
deMus.4.1.1
Magister: Age, iam percute hoc metrum, non voce, sed plausu.
Teacher: Come, now beat this meter, not with the voice but with a beat.
deMus.4.1.1
Discipulus: Feci.
Student: I have done it.
deMus.4.1.1
Magister: Percute etiam hoc modo anapaestum.
Teacher: Now beat an anapest in this way too.
deMus.4.1.1
Discipulus: Et hoc feci.
Student: This too I have done.
deMus.4.1.1
Magister: Quid tibi visum est interesse?
Teacher: What difference seemed to you to be between them?
deMus.4.1.1
Discipulus: Prorsus nihil.
Student: None at all.
deMus.4.1.1
Magister: Quid? causam, cur ita sit, potesne dicere?
Teacher: And can you say the cause why it is so?
deMus.4.1.1
Discipulus: Videtur mihi satis apparere: nam quod in illo ad silentium, hoc in isto ad productionem ultimae syllabae refertur; nam eodem modo ibi brevis ultima, ut hic longa, percutitur; et post tantumdem intervallum reditur ad caput. Sed ibi quiescitur donec spatium pyrrhichii pedis, hic donec longae syllabae impleatur. Ita in utroque par mora est, qua interposita remeamus.
Student: It seems to me to appear well enough: for what in the one is referred to silence, in the other is referred to the drawing-out of the last syllable; for the last short there is beaten in the same way as the long here, and after just as great an interval one returns to the head. But there one rests until the span of the pyrrhic foot is filled, here until the long syllable is filled. So in each the delay is equal, with which interposed we return.
deMus.4.1.1
Magister: Non igitur absurde illi ultimam syllabam metri, seu longa seu brevis sit, nihil ad rem pertinere voluerunt: ubi enim finis est, silentium sequitur, quantum ad ipsum metrum attinet quod finitur. An eos in hac causa repetitionem ullam vel reditum ad caput considerare debuisse existimas, ac non tantummodo quia finitur, quasi deinceps nihil dicendum sit?
Teacher: Not absurdly, then, did they hold that the last syllable of a meter, whether long or short, matters nothing to the thing: for where there is an end, silence follows, as far as concerns the meter itself which is ended. Or do you think that in this case they ought to have considered any repetition or return to the head, and not only that, because it ends, as if nothing were thereafter to be said?
deMus.4.1.1
Discipulus: Iam assentior, ultimam syllabam indifferenter esse accipiendam.
Student: Now I agree that the last syllable is to be taken indifferently.
deMus.4.1.1
Magister: Recte. Sed si hoc propter silentium fit, quoniam ita consideratus est finis, quasi deinceps nihil soniturus sit qui finierit, et ob hoc spatium temporis in ipsa quiete largissimum nihil distat quae ibi syllaba locetur; nonne illud est consequens, ut ipsa ultimae syllabae indifferentia, quae propter largum spatium conceditur, ad id proficiat, ut sive ibi brevis syllaba sive longa sit, eam sibi aures pro longa vindicent?
Teacher: Rightly. But if this comes about because of the silence, since the end is considered as if the one who has ended will thereafter sound nothing, and on this account, the span of time in the rest itself being most ample, it matters nothing what syllable is set there—does it not follow that the very indifference of the last syllable, which is granted because of the ample span, avails to this: that, whether there be a short syllable there or a long, the ears claim it for themselves as a long?
deMus.4.1.1
Discipulus: Video plane esse consequens.
Student: I see plainly that it follows.
deMus.4.1.1
4. 2. 2. Magister: Videsne etiam illud, cum dicimus minimum metrum esse pyrrhichium tres breves syllabas, ut unius brevis spatio sileatur, dum ad initium revertimur; nihil interesse, utrum hoc metrum, an pedes anapaestos repetamus?
4. 2. 2. Teacher: Do you see this too: that when we say the smallest pyrrhic meter is three short syllables, so that one is silent for the span of one short while we return to the beginning, it matters nothing whether we repeat this meter or anapest feet?
deMus.4.2.2
Discipulus: Iam hoc quidem paulo ante illa percussione percepi.
Student: I perceived this indeed a little while ago by that beating.
deMus.4.2.2
Magister: Nonne ergo quidquid hic est confusum, distinguendum aliqua ratione arbitraris?
Teacher: Do you not, then, think that whatever is confused here must be distinguished by some principle?
deMus.4.2.2
Discipulus: Omnino arbitror.
Student: I think so entirely.
deMus.4.2.2
Magister: Dic utrum aliam videas esse rationem, quae ista distinguat, nisi ut metrum pyrrhichium non illud sit minimum, quod tibi videbatur in tribus brevibus, sed in quinque. Post unum enim pedem ac semipedem silere mora semipedis eius qui debetur implendo pedi, atque ita redire ad initium, et hoc minimum metrum in pyrrhichio constituere non nos sinit anapaesti parilitas, ut iam demonstratum est: quare post duos pedes et semipedem silendum est illud unum tempus, si confusione carere volumus.
Teacher: Tell me whether you see any other principle that distinguishes these, except that the smallest pyrrhic meter is not the one that seemed to you to be in three shorts, but in five. For the equality of the anapest does not let us be silent, after one foot and a half, for the delay of the half-foot owed to filling out the foot, and so return to the beginning, and establish this as the smallest meter in the pyrrhic, as has now been shown; so after two feet and a half we must be silent that one time-unit, if we want to be free of confusion.
deMus.4.2.2
Discipulus: Cur enim non duo pyrrhichii sunt minimum metrum in pyrrhichio, et quatuor syllabae breves potius, post quas silere opus non sit, quam quinque post quas opus sit?
Student: For why are two pyrrhics not the smallest meter in the pyrrhic, and four short syllables rather—after which there is no need to be silent—than five, after which there is?
deMus.4.2.2
Magister: Vigilanter quidem, sed non caves ne ab hoc te ita proceleumaticus, ut ab illo anapaestus excludat.
Teacher: Watchfully indeed; but you do not guard against the proceleusmatic excluding you from this, as the anapest does from that.
deMus.4.2.2
Discipulus: Verum dicis.
Student: You speak truly.
deMus.4.2.2
Magister: Placet ergo hic modus in quinque brevibus, et silentio unius temporis?
Teacher: Does this manner, then, please you, in five shorts, with a silence of one time-unit?
deMus.4.2.2
Discipulus: Placet vero.
Student: It pleases me indeed.
deMus.4.2.2
Magister: Videtur mihi oblitum esse te, quemadmodum in rhythmo dixerimus posse discerni utrum pyrrhichio an proceleumatico curreretur.
Teacher: It seems to me you have forgotten how we said, in the case of rhythm, that one can distinguish whether one runs by the pyrrhic or the proceleusmatic.
deMus.4.2.2
Discipulus: Bene admones: nam plausu istos numeros ab invicem distinguendos comperimus: quare iam neque hic istum proceleumaticum metuo, quem plausu adhibito a pyrrhichio discernere potero.
Student: You remind me well; for we found that these rhythms are to be distinguished from one another by the beat; so now I no longer fear this proceleusmatic, which by applying the beat I shall be able to distinguish from the pyrrhic.
deMus.4.2.2
Magister: Cur igitur non eumdem plausum adhibendum vidisti, ut ab illis tribus brevibus, id est pyrrhichio et semipede, post quem oporteret unum tempus silere, discerneretur anapaestus?
Teacher: Why, then, did you not see that the same beat should be applied, so that the anapest might be distinguished from those three shorts—that is, a pyrrhic and a half-foot, after which one would have to be silent one time-unit?
deMus.4.2.2
Discipulus: Iam intellego, et in viam redeo, metrumque in pyrrhichio minimum tres syllabas breves, quae, annumerato silentio, duorum pyrrhichiorum tempus occupant, esse confirmo.
Student: Now I understand, and I return to the road, and I affirm that the smallest meter in the pyrrhic is three short syllables, which, with the silence counted in, take up the time of two pyrrhics.
deMus.4.2.2
Magister: Probant ergo aures tuae hoc genus numeri: Si aliqua, Bene vis, Bene dic, Bene fac, Animus, Si aliquid, Male vis, Male dic, Male fac, Animus, Medium est.
Teacher: Do your ears, then, approve this kind of rhythm: Si aliqua, bene vis, bene dic, bene fac, animus, si aliquid, male vis, male dic, male fac, animus, medium est.
deMus.4.2.2
Discipulus: Satis probant, praesertim cum iam recordatus sim quemadmodum eos plaudi oporteat, ne cum metro pyrrhichio anapaesti confundantur pedes.
Student: They approve it well enough, especially since I have now recalled how they ought to be beaten, lest the anapest feet be confused with the pyrrhic meter.
deMus.4.2.2
4. 2. 3. Magister: Vide et ista: Si aliquid es, Age bene, Male qui agit, Nihil agit, Et ideo, Miser erit.
4. 2. 3. Teacher: See these too: Si aliquid es, age bene, male qui agit, nihil agit, et ideo, miser erit.
deMus.4.2.3
Discipulus: Suaviter etiam ista se insinuant, nisi uno loco, ubi finis tertii cum initio quarti copulatur.
Student: These too insinuate themselves sweetly, except in one place, where the end of the third is coupled with the beginning of the fourth.
deMus.4.2.3
Magister: Idipsum omnino est, quod a tuis auribus desideravi. Non enim frustra sensus offenditur, cum omnium syllabarum nullo interposito silentio tempora singula exspectat: quam exspectationem profecto fraudat concursus duarum consonantium, t et n, quae praecedentem vocalem longam esse cogunt, et in duo tempora extendunt; quod genus grammatici positione longam syllabam vocant. Sed propter illam ultimae syllabae indifferentiam, nemo criminatur hoc metrum, cum id sincerae atque severae aures etiam sine accusatore condemnent. Nam vide, quaeso, quantum interest, si pro eo quod est, Male qui agit, Nihil agit: dicatur: Male qui agit, Homo perit.
Teacher: That is exactly what I desired from your ears. For not without reason is the sense offended, when it expects single time-units of all the syllables with no silence interposed; and this expectation the meeting of two consonants, "t" and "n," surely cheats, which compel the preceding vowel to be long and extend it into two time-units—the kind of syllable the grammarians call long by position. But because of that indifference of the last syllable, no one finds fault with this meter, though sincere and severe ears condemn it even without an accuser. For see, I beg, how great the difference is, if for what is male qui agit, nihil agit one says male qui agit, homo perit.
deMus.4.2.3
Discipulus: Hoc sane liquidum atque integrum est.
Student: This indeed is clear and whole.
deMus.4.2.3
Magister: Hoc ergo nos observemus propter musicae sinceritatem, quod poetae non observant propter facilitatem canendi: ut quoties, exempli causa, nobis necesse est aliqua metra interponere, in quibus nihil debetur pedi quod silentio compensetur, eas ponamus ultimas syllabas quas lex eiusdem numeri flagitat; ne cum aliqua offensione aurium et falsitate mensurae, a fine ad initium redeamus; concedentes tamen illis ut ita metra talia finiant, quasi deinceps nihil dicturi, et ideo extremam syllabam seu longam seu brevem impune constituant: nam in continuatione metrorum apertissime convincuntur aurium iudicio, non se debere ponere ultimam, nisi quae ipsius metri iure atque ratione ponenda est. Haec autem continuatio fit, cum pedi nihil debetur propter quod silere cogamur.
Teacher: Let us, then, observe this for the sake of the sincerity of music, which the poets do not observe for the ease of singing: that whenever, for example, it is necessary for us to interpose some meters in which nothing is owed to a foot to be compensated by silence, we set those last syllables which the law of that rhythm demands; lest, with some offense to the ears and falseness of measure, we return from the end to the beginning. We grant them, however, to end such meters as if they would thereafter say nothing, and therefore to set the last syllable, whether long or short, with impunity; for in a continuation of meters they are most plainly convicted by the judgment of the ears that they ought not to set as last any syllable except the one that is to be set by the very right and principle of the meter. And this continuation happens when nothing is owed to a foot on account of which we are compelled to be silent.
deMus.4.2.3
Discipulus: Intellego, et gratum habeo quod talia polliceris exempla, quibus nullam patiatur sensus iniuriam.
Student: I understand, and I am grateful that you promise such examples as the sense will suffer no injury from.
deMus.4.2.3
4. 3. 4. Magister: Age, nunc ordine de his quoque renuntia pyrrhichiis: Quid erit homo Qui amat hominem, Si amet in eo Fragile quod est? Amet igitur Animum hominis, Et erit homo Aliquid amans. Quid haec videntur?
4. 3. 4. Teacher: Come, now report in order about these pyrrhics too: Quid erit homo qui amat hominem, si amet in eo fragile quod est? Amet igitur animum hominis, et erit homo aliquid amans. How do these seem?
deMus.4.3.4
Discipulus: Quid nisi suavissime atque integerrime currere?
Student: What, except that they run most sweetly and most soundly?
deMus.4.3.4
Magister: Quid ista? Bonus erit amor, Anima bona sit: Amor inhabitat, Et anima domus. Ita bene habitat, Ubi bona domus; Ubi mala, male.
Teacher: And these? Bonus erit amor, anima bona sit; amor inhabitat, et anima domus. Ita bene habitat, ubi bona domus; ubi mala, male.
deMus.4.3.4
Discipulus: Etiam ista continuata suavissime accipio.
Student: These too, continued, I receive most sweetly.
deMus.4.3.4
Magister: Nunc tres semis pedes, vide: Animus hominis est Mala bonave agitans. Bona voluit, habet; Mala voluit, habet.
Teacher: Now look at three and a half feet: Animus hominis est mala bonave agitans. Bona voluit, habet; mala voluit, habet.
deMus.4.3.4
Discipulus: Haec quoque interposito unius temporis silentio, iucunda sunt.
Student: These too, with a silence of one time-unit interposed, are pleasant.
deMus.4.3.4
Magister: Sequuntur quatuor pleni pyrrhichii; hos accipe, et iudica: Animus hominis agit Ut habeat ea bona, Quibus inhabitet homo, Nihil ibi metuitur.
Teacher: Four full pyrrhics follow; receive these and judge: Animus hominis agit ut habeat ea bona, quibus inhabitet homo, nihil ibi metuitur.
deMus.4.3.4
Discipulus: In his quoque certa et iucunda mensura est.
Student: In these too there is a fixed and pleasant measure.
deMus.4.3.4
Magister: Audi iam nunc novem syllabas breves; audi et iudica: Homo malus amat et eget; Malus etenim ea bona amat, Nihil ubi satiat eum.
Teacher: Now hear nine short syllables; hear and judge: Homo malus amat et eget; malus etenim ea bona amat, nihil ubi satiat eum.
deMus.4.3.4
Discipulus: Prome nunc quinque pyrrhichios.
Student: Now bring forth five pyrrhics.
deMus.4.3.4
Magister: Levicula fragilia bona, Qui amat homo, similiter habet.
Teacher: Levicula fragilia bona, qui amat homo, similiter habet.
deMus.4.3.4
Discipulus: Iam hoc sat est, et probo; nunc adde semipedem.
Student: Now this is enough, and I approve; now add a half-foot.
deMus.4.3.4
Magister: Faciam: Vaga levia fragilia bona, Qui amat homo, similis erit eis.
Teacher: I will: Vaga levia fragilia bona, qui amat homo, similis erit eis.
deMus.4.3.4
Discipulus: Bene prorsus; ei sex iam exspecto pyrrhichios.
Student: Quite well; now I await six pyrrhics for it.
deMus.4.3.4
Magister: Et hos audi: Vaga levicula fragilia bona, Qui adamat homo, similis erit eis.
Teacher: Hear these too: Vaga levicula fragilia bona, qui adamat homo, similis erit eis.
deMus.4.3.4
Discipulus: Satis est; adde semipedem.
Student: It is enough; add a half-foot.
deMus.4.3.4
Magister: Fluida levicula fragilia bona Quae adamat anima, similis erit eis.
Teacher: Fluida levicula fragilia bona quae adamat anima, similis erit eis.
deMus.4.3.4
Discipulus: Sat est, et bene est; da iam septem pyrrhichios.
Student: It is enough, and it is well; now give seven pyrrhics.
deMus.4.3.4
Magister: Levicula fragilia gracilia bona, Quae adamat animula, similis erit eis.
Teacher: Levicula fragilia gracilia bona, quae adamat animula, similis erit eis.
deMus.4.3.4
Discipulus: Accedat his semipes; nam hoc eleganter se habet.
Student: Let a half-foot be added to these; for this stands elegantly.
deMus.4.3.4
Magister: Vaga fluida levicula fragilia bona, Quae adamat animula, fit ea similis eis.
Teacher: Vaga fluida levicula fragilia bona, quae adamat animula, fit ea similis eis.
deMus.4.3.4
Discipulus: Octo pedes iam restare video, ut iam istas minutias evadamus. Quamquam enim approbent aures naturali quadam dimensione quod sonas, nolim te tamen tot breves syllabas quaerere; quas, ni fallor, contextas invenire in coniunctione verborum difficilius est, quam si eis miscere longas liceret.
Student: I see that eight feet now remain, so that we may at last escape these tiny things. For although the ears approve by a certain natural measure what you sound, I would not have you seek so many short syllables, which, unless I am mistaken, woven together, are harder to find in the joining of words than if it were allowed to mix longs with them.
deMus.4.3.4
Magister: Nihil te fallit, et ut tibi probem gratulationem meam, quod hinc aliquando transire permittimur, metrum quod restat huius generis sententia feliciore componam: Solida bona bonus amat, et ea qui amat habet. Itaque nec eget amor, et ea bona Deus est.
Teacher: Nothing escapes you; and to prove to you my gladness that we are at last permitted to pass on from here, I will compose the meter that remains of this kind with a happier thought: Solida bona bonus amat, et ea qui amat habet. Itaque nec eget amor, et ea bona Deus est.
deMus.4.3.4
Discipulus: Habeo cumulatissime perfecta metra pyrrhichii. Sequuntur iambica, de quibus mihi singulis bina exempla sufficiunt, quae nulla interpellatione audire delectat.
Student: I have most fully the completed meters of the pyrrhic. The iambics follow, of which one or two examples for each suffice for me, which it is a delight to hear with no interruption.
deMus.4.3.4
4. 4. 5. Magister: Geram tibi morem. Sed ista quae iam peregimus quot sunt?
4. 4. 5. Teacher: I will indulge you. But these that we have now finished—how many are they?
deMus.4.4.5
Discipulus: Quatuordecim.
Student: Fourteen.
deMus.4.4.5
Magister: Quot etiam iambica fore credis?
Teacher: And how many do you believe the iambics will be?
deMus.4.4.5
Discipulus: Aeque quatuordecim.
Student: Likewise fourteen.
deMus.4.4.5
Magister: Quid, si in eis velim pro iambo tribrachum ponere, nonne multiformior varietas erit?
Teacher: And if in them I wished to put a tribrach for an iamb, would not the variety be more manifold?
deMus.4.4.5
Discipulus: Manifestum est quidem: sed ego exempla ista in solis iambis audire cupio, ne longum faciamus: pro quavis enim longa syllaba duas breves posse poni, facilis disciplina est.
Student: It is manifest indeed; but I desire to hear these examples in iambs alone, lest we make it long; for that two shorts can be put for any long syllable is an easy lesson.
deMus.4.4.5
Magister: Faciam quod vis, gratumque habeo quod intellegentia sequaci minuis laborem meum: sed aurem ad iambicum praebe.
Teacher: I will do what you wish, and I am grateful that you lessen my labor by a ready understanding; but lend your ear to the iambic.
deMus.4.4.5
Discipulus: Istic sum, incipe.
Student: I am here; begin.
deMus.4.4.5
Magister: Bonus vir beatus. Malus miser, sibi est malum. Bonus beatus, Deus bonum eius. Bonus beatus est, Deus bonum eius est. Bonus vir est beatus, videt Deum beate. Bonus vir et sapit bonum, videns Deum beatus est. Deum videre qui cupiscit, bonusque vivit, hic videbit. Bonum videre qui cupit diem, bonus sit hic, videbit et Deum. Bonum videre qui cupit diem illum, bonus sit hic, videbit et Deum illic. Beatus est bonus, fruens enim est Deo; malus miser, sed ipse poena fit sua. Beatus est videns Deum, nihil cupit plus; malus bonum foris requirit, hinc egestas. Beatus est videns Deum, nihil boni amplius; malus bonum foris requirit, hinc eget miser. Beatus est videns Deum, nihil boni amplius vult; malus foris bonum requirit, hinc egenus errat. Beatus est videns Deum, nihil boni amplius volet; malus foris bonum requirit, hinc eget miser bono.
Teacher: Bonus vir beatus. Malus miser, sibi est malum. Bonus beatus, Deus bonum eius. Bonus beatus est, Deus bonum eius est. Bonus vir est beatus, videt Deum beate. Bonus vir et sapit bonum, videns Deum beatus est. Deum videre qui cupiscit, bonusque vivit, hic videbit. Bonum videre qui cupit diem, bonus sit hic, videbit et Deum. Bonum videre qui cupit diem illum, bonus sit hic, videbit et Deum illic. Beatus est bonus, fruens enim est Deo; malus miser, sed ipse poena fit sua. Beatus est videns Deum, nihil cupit plus; malus bonum foris requirit, hinc egestas. Beatus est videns Deum, nihil boni amplius; malus bonum foris requirit, hinc eget miser. Beatus est videns Deum, nihil boni amplius vult; malus foris bonum requirit, hinc egenus errat. Beatus est videns Deum, nihil boni amplius volet; malus foris bonum requirit, hinc eget miser bono.
deMus.4.4.5
4. 5. 6. Discipulus: Trochaeus sequitur, prome trochaica: nam ista se habent optime.
4. 5. 6. Student: The trochee follows; bring forth the trochaics, for these stand excellently.
deMus.4.5.6
Magister: Faciam, et eodem modo quo iambica: Optimi non egent. Veritate, non egetur. Veritas sat est, semper haec manet. Veritas vocatur ars Dei supremi. Veritate factus est mundus iste quem vides. Veritate facta cuncta quaeque gignier videmus. Veritate facta cuncta sunt omniumque forma veritas. Veritate cuncta facta cerno. veritas manet, moventur ista. Veritate facta cernis omnia, veritas manet, moventur omnia. Veritate facta cernis ista cuncta, veritas tamen manet, moventur ista. Veritate facta cuncta cernis optime, veritas manet, moventur haec, sed ordine. Veritate facta cuncta cernis ordinata, veritas manet, novans movet quod innovatur. Veritate facta cuncta sunt, et ordinata sunt, veritas novat manens, moventur ut noventur haec. Veritate facta cuncta sunt, et ordinata cuncta, veritas manens novat, moventur ut noventur ista.
Teacher: I will, and in the same way as the iambics: Optimi non egent. Veritate, non egetur. Veritas sat est, semper haec manet. Veritas vocatur ars Dei supremi. Veritate factus est mundus iste quem vides. Veritate facta cuncta quaeque gignier videmus. Veritate facta cuncta sunt omniumque forma veritas. Veritate cuncta facta cerno; veritas manet, moventur ista. Veritate facta cernis omnia, veritas manet, moventur omnia. Veritate facta cernis ista cuncta, veritas tamen manet, moventur ista. Veritate facta cuncta cernis optime, veritas manet, moventur haec, sed ordine. Veritate facta cuncta cernis ordinata, veritas manet, novans movet quod innovatur. Veritate facta cuncta sunt, et ordinata sunt, veritas novat manens, moventur ut noventur haec. Veritate facta cuncta sunt, et ordinata cuncta, veritas manens novat, moventur ut noventur ista.
deMus.4.5.6
4. 6. 7. Discipulus: Spondeum sequi video: nam et trochaeus satis auribus fecit.
4. 6. 7. Student: I see the spondee follows; for the trochee too has satisfied the ears.
deMus.4.6.7
Magister: Haec sunt metra spondei: Magnorum est, libertas. Magnum est munus libertatis. Solus liber fit, qui errorem vincit. Solus liber vivit, qui errorem iam vicit. Solus liber vere fit qui erroris vinclum vicit. Solus liber vere vivit qui erroris vinclum iam vicit. Solus liber non falso vivit qui erroris vinclum iam devicit. Solus liber iure ac vere vivit qui erroris vinclum magnus devicit. Solus liber iure ac non falso vivit qui erroris vinclum funestum devicit. Solus liber iure ac vere magnus vivit qui erroris vinclum funestum iam devicit. Solus liber iure ac non falso magnus vivit qui erroris vinclum funestum prudens devicit. Solus liber iure ac non falso securus vivit qui erroris vinclum funestum prudens iam devicit. Solus liber iure ac non falso securus iam vivit qui erroris vinclum tetrum ac funestum prudens devicit Solus liber iure ac non falso securam vitam vivit qui erroris vinclum tetrum ac funestum [prudens iam devicit.
Teacher: These are the meters of the spondee: Magnorum est, libertas. Magnum est munus libertatis. Solus liber fit, qui errorem vincit. Solus liber vivit, qui errorem iam vicit. Solus liber vere fit qui erroris vinclum vicit. Solus liber vere vivit qui erroris vinclum iam vicit. Solus liber non falso vivit qui erroris vinclum iam devicit. Solus liber iure ac vere vivit qui erroris vinclum magnus devicit. Solus liber iure ac non falso vivit qui erroris vinclum funestum devicit. Solus liber iure ac vere magnus vivit qui erroris vinclum funestum iam devicit. Solus liber iure ac non falso magnus vivit qui erroris vinclum funestum prudens devicit. Solus liber iure ac non falso securus vivit qui erroris vinclum funestum prudens iam devicit. Solus liber iure ac non falso securus iam vivit qui erroris vinclum tetrum ac funestum prudens devicit. Solus liber iure ac non falso securam vitam vivit qui erroris vinclum tetrum ac funestum prudens iam devicit.
deMus.4.6.7
4. 7. 8. Discipulus: Nec de spondeo habeo quod requiram, veniamus ad tribrachum.
4. 7. 8. Student: I have nothing to ask about the spondee either; let us come to the tribrach.
deMus.4.7.8
Magister: Ita vero. Sed cum omnes quatuor superiores pedes, de quibus dictum est, quatuordena metra pepererint, quae fiunt simul sex et quinquaginta, plura sunt exspectanda de tribracho. In illis enim cum spatium semipedis in silentio est, plus una syllaba non siletur: in hoc autem cum silemus, num censes unius brevis syllabae spatio tantummodo sileri oportere, an et duarum brevium mora silentio contineri potest? quandoquidem nemo dubitaverit duplicem huius esse divisionem: namque aut ab una incipit, et finitur ad duas; aut contra incipiens a duabus, una terminatur. Quare hunc necesse est viginti et unum metra procreare.
Teacher: Indeed. But since all four of the earlier feet of which we have spoken have produced fourteen meters each, which together are fifty-six, more are to be expected from the tribrach. For in those, when the span of a half-foot is in silence, no more than one syllable is kept silent; but in this, when we are silent, do you judge that one ought to be silent only for the span of one short syllable, or can the delay of two shorts too be contained in the silence? Since no one would doubt that its division is twofold: for it either begins from one and ends at two, or, beginning from two on the contrary, is terminated by one. So this must produce twenty-one meters.
deMus.4.7.8
Discipulus: Verissimum est. Nam incipiunt a quatuor brevibus, ut duo tempora sileamus: deinde quinque sunt, ubi unum silemus: tertio sex, ubi nihil silendum est: quarto septem, ubi rursus duo tempora silenda sunt: inde octo, ubi unum: sexto novem, ubi nullum. Atque ita cum singulae adduntur, donec ad viginti quatuor syllabas veniatur, qui octo sunt tribrachi, viginti unum omnino metra complentur.
Student: It is most true. For they begin from four shorts, so that we are silent for two time-units; then there are five, where we are silent for one; third, six, where nothing is to be kept silent; fourth, seven, where again two time-units are to be kept silent; then eight, where one; sixth, nine, where none. And so, as single syllables are added, until one comes to twenty-four syllables, which are eight tribrachs, twenty-one meters in all are completed.
deMus.4.7.8
Magister: Expeditissime rationem secutus es: sed censesne ubique a nobis exempla esse promenda; an ea quae illis quatuor primis pedibus subiecimus, satis putandum est luminis caeteris esse praebitura?
Teacher: You have followed the reasoning most readily; but do you judge that examples are to be brought forth by us everywhere, or is it to be thought that those we set under those first four feet will give light enough to the rest?
deMus.4.7.8
Discipulus: Meo quidem iudicio satis.
Student: In my judgment, enough.
deMus.4.7.8
Magister: Nec ego nunc aliud requiro quam tuum. Verumtamen quoniam iam optime scis in pyrrhichiis metris mutato plausu posse tribrachos percuti; quaero, utrum pyrrhichii primum metrum possit etiam tribrachi metrum habere.
Teacher: Nor do I now require any judgment but yours. Nevertheless, since you now know excellently that in pyrrhic meters, the beat being changed, tribrachs can be beaten, I ask whether the first pyrrhic meter can also have the meter of the tribrach.
deMus.4.7.8
Discipulus: Non potest: maius enim metrum oportet esse quam pedem.
Student: It cannot; for a meter ought to be larger than a foot.
deMus.4.7.8
Magister: Quid, secundum?
Teacher: And the second?
deMus.4.7.8
Discipulus: Potest: nam breves quatuor pyrrhichii duo sunt, tribrachus unus et semipes, ita ut ibi nullum, hic duo tempora sileamus.
Student: It can: for the four shorts are two pyrrhics, one tribrach and a half-foot, so that there we are silent for no time-units, here for two.
deMus.4.7.8
Magister: Mutato igitur plausu habes in pyrrhichiis etiam tribrachi exempla usque ad sexdecim syllabas, id est usque ad quinque tribrachos et semipedem, quibus debes esse contentus: caetera enim potes vel voce vel aliquo plausu per te ipse contexere. Si tamen adhuc aurium sensu explorandos huiuscemodi numeros arbitraris.
Teacher: So, the beat being changed, you have in the pyrrhics examples of the tribrach too, up to sixteen syllables—that is, up to five tribrachs and a half-foot—with which you must be content; for the rest you can weave together yourself, whether by voice or by some beat, if indeed you still judge that rhythms of this kind are to be tested by the sense of the ears.
deMus.4.7.8
Discipulus: Faciam equidem quod videbitur: videamus quae restant.
Student: I will do what seems best; let us see what remains.
deMus.4.7.8
4. 8. 9. Magister: Dactylus sequitur, qui semel dividi potest. An aliter putas?
4. 8. 9. Teacher: The dactyl follows, which can be divided once. Or do you think otherwise?
deMus.4.8.9
Discipulus: Imo ita est.
Student: No, it is so.
deMus.4.8.9
Magister: Quota ergo eius pars potest esse in silentio?
Teacher: What fraction of it, then, can be in silence?
deMus.4.8.9
Discipulus: Dimidia scilicet.
Student: Half, of course.
deMus.4.8.9
Magister: Quid, si post dactylum trochaeo constituto, velit quispiam silere unum tempus, quod in brevi syllaba dactylo debetur implendo? quid respondebimus? Non enim possumus dicere minus quam spatium semipedis sileri non oportere. Ratio enim superius tractata non minus, sed amplius quam semipedis tempus silendum non esse persuaserat. Nam utique minus quam semipes siletur in choriambo, ubi post ipsum choriambum bacchius collocatur, cuius exemplum est: Fonticolae puellae. Unius enim brevis syllabae spatio hic nos silere cognoscis, quod sex temporibus debetur implendis.
Teacher: And if, a trochee being set after the dactyl, someone wished to be silent for one time-unit, which is owed in a short syllable to filling out the dactyl, what shall we answer? For we cannot say that one ought not to be silent for less than the span of a half-foot. For the reasoning treated above had persuaded us that one ought to be silent not for less but for more than the time of a half-foot. For surely less than a half-foot is kept silent in the choriamb, where a bacchius is set after the choriamb itself, of which the example is fonticolae puellae. For you recognize that here we are silent for the span of one short syllable, which is owed to filling out six time-units.
deMus.4.8.9
Discipulus: Verum dicis.
Student: You speak truly.
deMus.4.8.9
Magister: Constituto ergo trochaeo post dactylum, licebitne etiam unum tempus silere?
Teacher: A trochee being set, then, after the dactyl, will it be allowed to be silent even for one time-unit?
deMus.4.8.9
Discipulus: Ita cogor fateri.
Student: So I am compelled to admit.
deMus.4.8.9
Magister: Quis te tandem cogeret, si meminisses superiorum? Hoc enim tibi accidit, quod de indifferentia ultimae syllabae, et quomodo sibi ultimam longam vindicent aures, ubi restat spatium quo porrigatur, etiamsi brevis sit, quid demonstratum fuerit oblitus es.
Teacher: Who, in the end, would compel you, if you remembered the earlier points? For this has happened to you: that you have forgotten what was shown about the indifference of the last syllable, and how the ears claim the last as a long where there remains a span over which it may be stretched, even if it is short.
deMus.4.8.9
Discipulus: Iam intellego: nam utique si ultimam syllabam brevem, quando restat silentium, longam aures accipiunt, sicut superiore ratione exemplisque cognovimus; nihil intererit utrum post dactylum trochaeus, an spondeus locetur. Quamobrem cum repetitio distinguenda silentio est, unam longam syllabam oportet post dactylum ponere, ut duorum temporum spatio sileamus.
Student: Now I understand: for surely, if the ears take the last short syllable as long when a silence remains, as we have learned by the earlier reasoning and examples, it will matter nothing whether a trochee or a spondee is set after the dactyl. So when the repetition is to be distinguished by silence, one ought to put one long syllable after the dactyl, so that we are silent for the span of two time-units.
deMus.4.8.9
Magister: Quid si pyrrhichius ponatur post dactylum, rectene fieri putas?
Teacher: And if a pyrrhic is set after the dactyl, do you think it is rightly done?
deMus.4.8.9
Discipulus: Non recte: nam utrum idem sit, an iambus, nihil interest: siquidem pro iambo eum necesse est accipi propter ultimam, quam longam exigunt aures, quia restat silentium. Iambum autem non oportere poni post dactylum, propter diversitatem levationis et positionis, quarum neutram oportet in dactylo habere tria tempora, quis non intellegat?
Student: Not rightly: for it matters nothing whether it is the same or an iamb, since it must be taken for an iamb because of the last syllable, which the ears require to be long, because a silence remains. But that an iamb ought not to be set after a dactyl, because of the difference of raising and setting-down—neither of which ought in the dactyl to have three time-units—who would not understand?
deMus.4.8.9
4. 9. 10. Magister: Optime omnino atque sequaciter. Sed quid tibi tandem videtur de anapaesto? an eadem ratio est?
4. 9. 10. Teacher: Excellently and consistently throughout. But what, in the end, seems to you about the anapest? Is the reasoning the same?
deMus.4.9.10
Discipulus: Prorsus eadem.
Student: Quite the same.
deMus.4.9.10
Magister: Iam ergo bacchium consideremus, si placet, et dic mihi quod primum eius metrum est.
Teacher: Now then let us consider the bacchius, if you please, and tell me what its first meter is.
deMus.4.9.10
Discipulus: Quatuor syllabas puto esse, unam brevem, et tres longas, quarum duae ad bacchium pertinent, una vero ultima ad inchoationem eius pedis qui cum bacchio poni potest; ut id quod ei debetur, sit in silentio: in aliquo tamen exemplo vellem hoc auribus explorare.
Student: I think it is four syllables—one short and three longs, of which two belong to the bacchius, but the last one to the beginning of that foot which can be set with the bacchius, so that what is owed to it is in silence; yet in some example I would like to test this by the ears.
deMus.4.9.10
Magister: Facile quidem est exempla subicere, quibus tamen non te arbitror ita ut superioribus posse delectari: nam isti quinum temporum pedes, ut etiam septenum, non tam suaviter currunt, quam ii qui aut in aequas partes dividuntur, aut in simplam et duplam, vel in duplam et simplam; tantum interest inter sesquatos motus et aequales aut complicatos, de quibus satis in primo illo nostro sermone tractavimus. Itaque hos pedes, quinque ac septem scilicet temporum, uti aspernantius poetae, ita soluta libentius assumit oratio: quod videri facilius in exemplis quae postulasti, potest: nam ista sunt: Laborat magister docens tardos. Hoc revolve interposito trium temporum silentio, quod ut sentires facilius, ideo post tres pedes longam syllabam posui, quod est initium cretici, qui cum bacchio poni potest. Nec ad primum metrum exemplum dedi quod est quatuor syllabarum, ne unus pes non esset satis ad commonendum sensum tuum, quantum post illum atque unam longam silere deberes. Quod ecce nunc edam, atque ipse repetam, ut in meo silentio tria tempora sentias: Labor nullus, Amor magnus.
Teacher: It is easy indeed to add examples, by which, however, I do not think you can be delighted as by the earlier ones; for these feet of five time-units, like those of seven, do not run so sweetly as those that are divided either into equal parts, or into single and double, or into double and single—so great is the difference between sesquate motions and equal or multiplied ones, of which we treated enough in that first discussion of ours. And so these feet, namely of five and seven time-units, prose takes up the more willingly the more disdainfully the poets do; which can be seen more easily in the examples you asked for. For these are: Laborat magister docens tardos. Turn this over, with a silence of three time-units interposed, which, that you might more easily feel it, I therefore set a long syllable after three feet, which is the beginning of a cretic, which can be set with a bacchius. Nor did I give an example for the first meter, which is of four syllables, lest one foot should not be enough to remind your sense how much you ought to be silent after it and one long. This now, see, I will utter, and repeat myself, so that in my silence you may feel three time-units: Labor nullus, amor magnus.
deMus.4.9.10
Discipulus: Satis apparet solutae orationi hos esse congruentiores pedes, et nihil opus est exemplis caetera excurrere.
Student: It appears well enough that these feet are more harmonious for prose, and there is no need to run through the rest with examples.
deMus.4.9.10
Magister: Verum dicis: sed num tibi cum silendum est, una tantum longa videtur poni posse post bacchium?
Teacher: You speak truly; but does it seem to you that, when one must be silent, only one long can be set after the bacchius?
deMus.4.9.10
Discipulus: Non sane; sed etiam brevis et longa, qui eiusdem bacchii semipes primus est: nam si nobis inchoare creticum licuit, quia cum eodem bacchio poni potest; quanto magis id de ipso bacchio facere licebit, cum praesertim non totum de cretico posuerimus quod primae parti bacchii sit aequale temporibus?
Student: Not at all; but also a short and a long, which is the first half-foot of that same bacchius: for if we were allowed to begin a cretic, because it can be set with that same bacchius, how much more will it be allowed to do this with the bacchius itself—especially since we will not have set down the whole of the cretic that is equal in time-units to the first part of the bacchius?
deMus.4.9.10
4. 10. 11. Magister: Iam ergo, si placet, me audiente atque iudicante, tu ipse per caetera excurre, et quid ponatur post plenum pedem, quando silentio reliquum impletur in omnibus pedibus qui restant, exsequere.
4. 10. 11. Teacher: Now then, if you please, with me listening and judging, run through the rest yourself, and set forth what is put after a full foot, when the remainder is filled by silence, in all the feet that remain.
deMus.4.10.11
Discipulus: Brevissimum iam, opinor, atque facillimum est quod requiris: nam quod de bacchio dictum est, id etiam de secundo paeone dici potest. Post creticum autem et unam longam syllabam licet ponere, et iambum, et spondeum; ita ut aut tria tempora, aut duo, aut unum sileatur. Quod autem de hoc dictum est, id et in primum et in ultimum paeonem cadit [propter duas divisiones]. Iam post palimbacchium vel unam longam vel spondeum collocari decet, quocirca et in hoc metro aut tria tempora, aut unum silebitur. Eadem conditio est paeonis tertii. Sane ubicumque spondeus, ibi et anapaestus iure ponitur. Post molossum vero, quod ad eius attinet divisionem, aut unam longam ut quatuor, aut duas ponimus ut duo tempora sileamus. Sed quoniam et censu et ratione exploratum est, ordinari cum eo posse omnes senum temporum pedes, erit post eum locus et iambo, et tria tempora silenda remanebunt; erit et cretico, et unum tacebitur; hac conditione erit et bacchio. At si in duas breves primam cretici, et secundam bacchii solverimus, erit et paeoni quarto. Quod autem de molosso, id etiam de caeteris sex temporum pedibus dixerim. Iam proceleumaticum arbitror ad caeteros qui quatuor temporibus constant, esse referendum, nisi cum tres breves post eum locamus. Quod ita est ac si anapaestum locemus, propter ultimam syllabam quae cum silentio longa accipi solet. Primo vero epitrito iambus recte subiungitur, et bacchius et creticus et paeon quartus. Hoc dictum sit et de secundo, ut tempora sileantur aut quatuor, aut duo. Duos autem reliquos epitritos recte possunt consequi spondeus et molossus: ita ut primam spondei, et primam vel secundam molossi in duas breves solvere liceat. Ergo in his metris aut tria tempora, aut unum tacebitur. Dispondeus restat, post quem si posuerimus spondeum, quatuor tempora silenda erunt; si molossum, duo, manente licentia solvendi longam in duas breves, vel in spondeo, vel in molosso, excepta ultima. Habes quod me excurrere voluisti. Nisi aliquid forte emendabis.
Student: What you require is now, I think, most brief and most easy; for what was said of the bacchius can be said also of the second paeon. After the cretic one may put both a single long, and an iamb, and a spondee, so that either three time-units, or two, or one are kept silent. And what was said of this falls also on the first and last paeons [because of the two divisions]. Now after the palimbacchius it is fitting that either a single long or a spondee be set, so in this meter too either three time-units or one will be kept silent. The same is the condition of the third paeon. Indeed, wherever a spondee, there an anapest too is rightly set. But after the molossus, as concerns its division, we set either a single long, so that we are silent for four time-units, or two, so that we are silent for two. But since it has been tested both by reckoning and by reason that all six-time-unit feet can be ordered with it, there will be a place after it for an iamb too, and three time-units will remain to be kept silent; there will be one for a cretic, and one will be kept silent; on this condition there will be one for a bacchius too. But if we dissolve the first of the cretic and the second of the bacchius into two shorts, there will be one for the fourth paeon. And what I have said of the molossus, I would say of the other six-time-unit feet too. Now I judge the proceleusmatic is to be referred to the others that consist of four time-units, except when we set three shorts after it; which is as if we set an anapest, because of the last syllable, which with the silence is usually taken as a long. But to the first epitrite an iamb is rightly joined, and a bacchius and a cretic and a fourth paeon. Let this be said of the second too, so that either four or two time-units are kept silent. The two remaining epitrites the spondee and the molossus can rightly follow, so that one may dissolve the first of the spondee, and the first or second of the molossus, into two shorts. So in these meters either three time-units or one will be kept silent. There remains the dispondee, after which, if we set a spondee, four time-units must be kept silent; if a molossus, two, the license remaining of dissolving a long into two shorts, whether in the spondee or in the molossus, except the last. You have what you wished me to run through—unless perhaps you will correct something.
deMus.4.10.11
4. 11. 12. Magister: Imo non ego, sed tu, cum aurem ad iudicandum adhibueris: nam quaero a te, utrum cum dico et plaudo istud metrum: Verus optimus; et hoc: Verus optimorum; et hoc: Veritatis inops: tam iucunde hoc tertium quam illa superiora tuus sensus accipiat; quod ea repetendo, et cum debitis silentiis plaudendo facile iudicabit.
4. 11. 12. Teacher: Nay, not I, but you, when you have applied your ear to judging. For I ask you whether, when I say and beat this meter, Verus optimus, and this, Verus optimorum, and this, Veritatis inops—your sense receives this third as pleasantly as those earlier ones; which, by repeating them and beating them with the due silences, it will easily judge.
deMus.4.11.12
Discipulus: Manifestum est quod iucunde illa, hoc iniucunde accipiat.
Student: It is manifest that it receives those pleasantly, this unpleasantly.
deMus.4.11.12
Magister: Non ergo recte post dichorium iambus ponitur.
Teacher: Then an iamb is not rightly set after a dichoree.
deMus.4.11.12
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: It is so.
deMus.4.11.12
Magister: Recte autem poni posse post caeteros assentitur quisquis haec metra cum disciplina interponendorum silentiorum repetierit. Fallacem cave. Male castum cave. Multiloquium cave. Fallaciam cave. Et invidum cave. Et infirmum cave.
Teacher: But that it can rightly be set after the others, whoever repeats these meters with the discipline of interposing silences will agree: Fallacem cave. Male castum cave. Multiloquium cave. Fallaciam cave. Et invidum cave. Et infirmum cave.
deMus.4.11.12
Discipulus: Sentio quod dicis, et approbo.
Student: I feel what you say, and I approve.
deMus.4.11.12
Magister: Vide etiam utrum te nihil offendat, cum interposito duorum temporum silentio, hoc metrum repetitum inaequale pergit. Num enim ita sonet ut ista? Veraces regnant. Sapientes regnant. Veriloqui regnant. Prudentia regnat. Boni in bonis regnant. Pura cuncta regnant.
Teacher: See also whether nothing offends you when, a silence of two time-units interposed, this meter, repeated, goes on unequal. For does it sound as these do? Veraces regnant. Sapientes regnant. Veriloqui regnant. Prudentia regnat. Boni in bonis regnant. Pura cuncta regnant.
deMus.4.11.12
Discipulus: Imo haec aequaliter et suaviter, illud autem absurde.
Student: On the contrary, these are equal and sweet, but that one absurd.
deMus.4.11.12
Magister: Hoc ergo tenebimus in metris sex temporum pedum, dichorium iambo, antispastum spondeo male claudi.
Teacher: So we will hold this in the meters of six-time-unit feet: that the dichoree is badly closed by an iamb, and the antispast by a spondee.
deMus.4.11.12
Discipulus: Tenebimus sane.
Student: We will hold it indeed.
deMus.4.11.12
4. 11. 13. Magister: Quid? causam cur ita sit nonne approbabis, si animadverteris levatione ac positione in duas partes dividi pedem, ita ut si qua in eo syllaba media est, vel una vel duae, aut uni parti attribuantur priori vel posteriori, aut in utramque partiantur?
4. 11. 13. Teacher: And will you not approve the cause why it is so, if you notice that a foot is divided by raising and setting-down into two parts, so that, if there is some middle syllable in it, whether one or two, either it is assigned to one part, the prior or the latter, or it is divided between both?
deMus.4.11.13
Discipulus: Novi quidem istuc, et verum est: sed quid ad rem?
Student: I know that, and it is true; but what of it?
deMus.4.11.13
Magister: Hoc quoque attende quod dicam, tum videbis facilius quod requiris. Nam manifestum tibi esse arbitror, alios esse sine mediis syllabis pedes, ut pyrrhichius, et caeteri binarum syllabarum; alios in quibus medium aut primae parti, aut extremae, aut utrique, aut neutri, spatio conveniat: primae, ut in anapaesto, vel in palimbacchio, vel in paeone primo: extremae, ut in dactylo vel in bacchio, vel in paeone quarto: utrique, ut in tribracho, sive in molosso, sive in choriambo, sive in quolibet ionico: neutri, ut in cretico, sive in paeonibus secundo et tertio, sive in diiambo, dichorio, antispasto. Nam qui pedes in tres aequales partes dividi possunt, media pars in his convenit cum prima et extrema; qui autem non possunt, aut cum prima tantum, aut cum extrema, aut cum neutra.
Teacher: Attend to this too which I will say, and then you will see more easily what you ask. For I judge it is manifest to you that some feet are without middle syllables, as the pyrrhic and the rest of two syllables; others in which the middle agrees in span either with the prior part, or with the last, or with both, or with neither: with the prior, as in the anapest, or the palimbacchius, or the first paeon; with the last, as in the dactyl, or the bacchius, or the fourth paeon; with both, as in the tribrach, or the molossus, or the choriamb, or any ionic; with neither, as in the cretic, or the second and third paeons, or the diiamb, dichoree, antispast. For the feet that can be divided into three equal parts have their middle part agreeing with the first and the last; but those that cannot, either with the first only, or with the last, or with neither.
deMus.4.11.13
Discipulus: Et hoc aeque scio, et quo tendat exspecto.
Student: This too I know equally, and I await where it tends.
deMus.4.11.13
Magister: Quo tandem putas, nisi ut videas iambum post dichorium ideo male poni cum silentio, quia medium eius est, nec primae parti aequale nec extremae, et idcirco a levatione ac positione discordat? Hoc etiam de spondeo intellegitur, qui similiter post antispastum cum silentio non amat poni. An quidquam tibi adversum ista dicendum est?
Teacher: Where, in the end, do you think, except that you may see that an iamb is badly set with silence after a dichoree, because its middle is equal neither to the prior part nor to the last, and on that account discords from the raising and setting-down? This is understood of the spondee too, which likewise does not like to be set with silence after an antispast. Or is anything to be said by you against this?
deMus.4.11.13
Discipulus: Mihi vero nihil? nisi quod ista offensio quae fit auribus, cum ita hi pedes collocantur, in comparatione fit eius suavitatis, quae oblectat auditum, cum post caeteros senum temporum hi cum silentio ponuntur pedes. Nam si aliis tacitis me consuleres quemadmodum sonarent, exemplis subiectis, aut post dichorium iambus, aut post antispastum spondeus, cum silentio positi; dicam quod sentio, fortasse approbarem et laudarem.
Student: For my part nothing—except that this offense which is made to the ears, when these feet are so placed, is made in comparison with that sweetness which delights the hearing when these feet are set with silence after the other six-time-unit feet. For if, the others being kept silent, you consulted me how they sounded, examples being added, an iamb set after a dichoree, or a spondee after an antispast, with silence—I will say what I feel: perhaps I would approve and praise them.
deMus.4.11.13
Magister: Non equidem resisto tibi. Satis est mihi tamen, quod haec collocatio in comparatione talium numerorum, sed melius sonantium, sicut dicis, offendit: eo enim est improbanda, quod cum eiusdem generis etiam illi sint pedes, quos his semipedibus clausos labi iucundius confitemur, ab iis discrepare non debuit. Sed nonne tibi videtur secundum istam rationem, nec post epitritum secundum iambum cum silentio poni oportere? Nam et in hoc pede iambus ita medium locum tenet, ut nec prioris nec posterioris partis temporibus aequetur.
Teacher: I do not resist you indeed. Yet it is enough for me that this placement offends in comparison with such rhythms, but ones sounding better, as you say; for it is to be disapproved on this ground: that, since those feet too are of the same kind, which we confess glide more pleasantly closed by these half-feet, it ought not to have differed from them. But does it not seem to you, by this reasoning, that an iamb ought not to be set with silence after a second epitrite either? For in this foot too the iamb holds the middle place so that it is equal in time-units neither to the prior nor to the latter part.
deMus.4.11.13
Discipulus: Cogit me superior ratio concedere.
Student: The earlier reasoning compels me to concede it.
deMus.4.11.13
4. 12. 14. Magister: Age nunc, redde mihi omnium metrorum numerum, si placet, quae iam tractavimus; id est eorum quae a suis plenis pedibus incipiunt, clauduntur autem aut suis pedibus plenis, ita ut silentium, cum ad caput reditur, non interponamus; aut non plenis pedibus cum silentio, quos tamen eis congruere ratio docuit; incipiente numero a duobus non plenis usque ad octo plenos, ita tamen ut triginta duo tempora non excedantur.
4. 12. 14. Teacher: Come now, render me the number of all the meters, if you please, that we have now treated—that is, of those which begin from their full feet, and are closed off either by their full feet, so that we do not interpose silence when one returns to the head, or by feet not full, with silence, which yet reason taught to agree with them; the number beginning from two not-full up to eight full, yet so that thirty-two time-units are not exceeded.
deMus.4.12.14
Discipulus: Operosum quidem est quod imponis, est tamen operae pretium. Sed memini nos paulo ante iam pervenisse ad septuaginta septem metra a pyrrhichio usque ad tribrachum, cum illi binarum syllabarum pedes quatuordecim singuli crearent, quae fiunt simul quinquaginta et sex. Tribrachus autem viginti et unum, propter geminam divisionem. His igitur septuaginta et septem addimus quatuordecim dactyli, et anapaesti totidem: pleni enim si locentur nullo silentio, incipiente metro a duobus usque ad octo pedes, septena pariunt; additis vero semipedibus cum silentio, incipiente metro ab uno pede, et semipede perveniente ad septem et semis, alia septena. Et fiunt iam omnia centum et quinque. Bacchius vero non potest metrum suum ad octo pedes perducere, ne triginta duo tempora transeat, neque quisquam quinum temporum pes; sed possunt isti usque ad sex pervenire. Bacchius ergo et qui ei par est, non modo temporibus, sed etiam divisione paeon secundus, a duobus pedibus usque ad sex procedentes cum integri ordinantur sine silentio, quina metra pariunt; cum silentio autem incipientes ab uno semipede, et ad quinque semipedes pervenientes, alia quina cum una longa post eos ponitur, et item quina cum brevis et longa: quindena igitur creant, quae in summam redacta triginta sunt. Et fiunt iam metra omnia centum et triginta quinque. Creticus vero, et qui pariter dividuntur, paeones primus et quartus, quoniam post illos et unam longam, et iambum, et spondeum, et anapaestum licet ponere, ad septuaginta quinque perveniunt: cum enim tres sint pedes, quina creant sine silentio, cum silentio autem viginti, quae simul, ut dictum est, fiunt quinque et septuaginta, quibus additis superiori summae, decem et ducenta complentur. Palimbacchius et qui ei divisione concordat tertius paeon, quina pariunt integri sine silentio: cum silentio autem quina cum una longa, quina cum spondeo, quina cum anapaesto. Haec addimus ad maiorem summam, et habemus metra omnia ducenta quinquaginta.
Student: What you impose is laborious indeed, yet it is worth the labor. But I remember that a little while ago we had already come to seventy-seven meters from the pyrrhic up to the tribrach, since those feet of two syllables produced fourteen each, which together are fifty-six. But the tribrach produced twenty-one, because of its twofold division. To these seventy-seven, then, we add the fourteen of the dactyl and as many of the anapest: for if set full, with no silence, the meter beginning from two up to eight feet, they bear seven each; but with half-feet added, with silence, the meter beginning from one foot and a half-foot reaching to seven and a half, another seven each. And now all become a hundred and five. But the bacchius cannot carry its meter up to eight feet, lest it pass thirty-two time-units, nor can any foot of five time-units; but these can come up to six. The bacchius, then, and the second paeon, which is equal to it not only in time-units but also in division, proceeding from two feet up to six, when ordered whole without silence, bear five meters each; but with silence, beginning from one half-foot and reaching to five half-feet, another five each when one long is set after them, and likewise five when a short and a long; so they create fifteen each, which reduced to a sum are thirty. And now all the meters become a hundred and thirty-five. But the cretic, and those divided equally with it, the first and fourth paeons, since after them one may put both a single long, and an iamb, and a spondee, and an anapest, come to seventy-five: for since there are three feet, they create five each without silence, but twenty with silence, which together, as said, become seventy-five, which added to the previous sum complete two hundred and ten. The palimbacchius and the third paeon, which agrees with it in division, bear five whole without silence; but with silence, five with one long, five with a spondee, five with an anapest. These we add to the larger sum, and we have all the meters two hundred and fifty.
deMus.4.12.14
4. 12. 15. Molossus et caeteri sex temporum pedes, qui cum illo simul septem fiunt, quaterna creant integri: cum silentio autem quoniam et una longa post unumquemque eorum locari potest, et iambus, et spondeus, et anapaestus, et bacchius, et creticus, et paeon quartus; vicena et octona complent, quae simul fiunt centum nonaginta sex, quae ducta cum illis quaternis ducenta viginti quatuor complentur: sed hinc octo deducendi sunt, quia post dichorium iambus, et post antispastum spondeus male ordinantur. Reliqua sunt ducenta sexdecim, quae addita maiori summae, faciunt metra omnia quadringenta sexaginta sex. Proceleumatici ratio haberi non potuit cum his pedibus quibus congruit, propter semipedes qui post hunc plures ponuntur. Nam et una syllaba longa post eum poni potest cum silentio, sicut post dactylum et eius consortes ut duo, et tres breves ut unum tempus sileatur; quo efficitur ut ultima brevis pro longa accipiatur. Epitriti metra gignunt terna integri, incipiente metro a duobus pedibus, perveniente ad quatuor: si enim addas quintum, triginta duo tempora, quod non oportet, excedes. Cum silentio vero primus et secundus epitritus terna post locato iambo, terna bacchio, terna cretico, terna paeone quarto; quae fiunt cum illis ternis quae sunt sine silentio, triginta. Tertius vero et quartus epitriti tres ante silentium gignunt, cum spondeo terna, et terna cum anapaesto, terna cum molosso, terna cum ionico minore, terna cum choriambo; quae fiunt simul cum illis ternis, quae sine silentio genuerunt, triginta et sex. Ergo epitriti omnes sexaginta et sex metra pariunt: quae cum viginti et uno proceleumatici, superiori summae addita, faciunt quingenta quinquaginta tria. Dispondeus restat gignens et ipse tria integer; adhibito autem silentio cum spondeo tria, et tria cum anapaesto, tria cum molosso, tria cum ionico a minore, tria cum choriambo: quae in summam ducta cum illis tribus quae creat integer, fiunt decem et octo. Ita erunt metra omnia quingenta septuaginta et unum.
4. 12. 15. The molossus and the other six-time-unit feet, which with it make seven, create four each whole; but with silence, since after each of them can be set a single long, and an iamb, and a spondee, and an anapest, and a bacchius, and a cretic, and a fourth paeon, they complete twenty-eight each, which together become a hundred and ninety-six, which taken with those fours complete two hundred and twenty-four; but from this eight are to be deducted, because an iamb after a dichoree and a spondee after an antispast are badly ordered. There remain two hundred and sixteen, which added to the larger sum make all the meters four hundred and sixty-six. The proceleusmatic could not be reckoned with the feet to which it agrees, because of the half-feet that are set after it in greater number. For both one long syllable can be set after it with silence, as after the dactyl and its consorts, so that two time-units are kept silent, and three shorts so that one time-unit is kept silent; whereby it comes about that the last short is taken for a long. The epitrites produce three meters each whole, the meter beginning from two feet, reaching to four; for if you add a fifth, you will exceed thirty-two time-units, which one ought not. But with silence the first and second epitrites give three each, an iamb being set after, three with a bacchius, three with a cretic, three with a fourth paeon; which become, with those three that are without silence, thirty. But the third and fourth epitrites produce three before silence, three with a spondee, and three with an anapest, three with a molossus, three with an ionic from the lesser, three with a choriamb; which become, together with those three that they produced without silence, thirty-six. So all the epitrites bear sixty-six meters; which, with the twenty-one of the proceleusmatic, added to the previous sum, make five hundred and fifty-three. The dispondee remains, itself too producing three whole; but with silence applied, three with a spondee, and three with an anapest, three with a molossus, three with an ionic from the lesser, three with a choriamb; which taken in sum with those three that it creates whole, become eighteen. So all the meters will be five hundred and seventy-one.
deMus.4.12.15
4. 13. 16. Magister: Essent quidem, nisi tria detrahenda essent, quia post secundum epitritum dictum est iambum male poni. Sed hoc quidem bene se habet: quare iam dic mihi, quomodo tibi aurem tangat metrum hoc: Triplici vides, ut ortu Triviae rotetur ignis .
4. 13. 16. Teacher: They would be, were not three to be taken away, because after the second epitrite it was said that an iamb is badly set. But this stands well; so now tell me how this meter touches your ear: Triplici vides, ut ortu Triviae rotetur ignis.
deMus.4.13.16
Discipulus: Persuaviter.
Student: Most sweetly.
deMus.4.13.16
Magister: Potesne dicere quibus pedibus constet?
Teacher: Can you say of what feet it consists?
deMus.4.13.16
Discipulus: Non possum: neque enim invenio quomodo sibi congruant quos metior: sive enim pyrrhichium a capite constituam, sive anapaestum, sive paeonem tertium, non his conveniunt qui sequuntur: et invenio hic quidem creticum post tertium paeonem, ut reliqua sit longa syllaba, quam creticus post se non respuit collocari; sed his pedibus hoc metrum constare recte non posset, nisi interposito silentio trium temporum: nunc vero nihil siletur, cum hoc repetendo permulcet auditum.
Student: I cannot; for I do not find how those I measure agree with one another. For whether I set a pyrrhic at the head, or an anapest, or a third paeon, they do not agree with those that follow; and I find here indeed a cretic after the third paeon, so that a long syllable remains, which the cretic does not refuse to have set after it; but this meter could not rightly consist of these feet except with a silence of three time-units interposed; whereas now nothing is kept silent, when, repeating it, it charms the hearing.
deMus.4.13.16
Magister: Vide igitur, utrum incipere debeat a pyrrhichio, deinde metiamur dichorium, tum spondeum, qui complet tempora, quorum duo sunt in principio: potest item caput tenere anapaestus, deinde diiambus metiri, ut extrema longa collocata cum quatuor temporibus anapaesti perficiat sex tempora, quae cum diiambo conveniunt, ex quo intellegas licet, partes pedum non solum in fine poni, sed etiam in capite metrorum.
Teacher: See, then, whether it ought to begin from a pyrrhic, then let us measure a dichoree, then a spondee, which completes the time-units, of which two are at the beginning. The head can likewise be held by an anapest, then a diiamb be measured, so that the last long, set with the four time-units of the anapest, completes six time-units, which agree with the diiamb; from which you may understand that the parts of feet are set not only at the end but also at the head of meters.
deMus.4.13.16
Discipulus: Iam intellego.
Student: Now I understand.
deMus.4.13.16
4. 13. 17. Magister: Quid, si demam unam ultimam longam, ut tale sit metrum: Segetes meus labor: nonne animadvertis cum silentio duorum temporum repeti? Ex quo manifestum est, et aliquam partem pedis posse in principio metri poni, et aliquam in fine, et aliquam in silentio.
4. 13. 17. Teacher: And if I take away one last long, so that the meter is such: Segetes meus labor—do you not notice that it is repeated with a silence of two time-units? From which it is manifest both that some part of a foot can be set at the beginning of a meter, and some at the end, and some in silence.
deMus.4.13.17
Discipulus: Et hoc manifestum est.
Student: This too is manifest.
deMus.4.13.17
Magister: Sed hoc fieri si dichorium metiaris integrum in hoc metro; nam si diiambum, et a capite anapaestus ponatur, cernis patrem pedis in principio positam, quae habet iam quatuor tempora: duo autem quae debentur, silentur in fine. Ex quo discimus, posse metrum incipere a parte pedis, et desinere ad plenum pedem, sed numquam sine silentio.
Teacher: But this happens if you measure a whole dichoree in this meter; for if a diiamb, and an anapest is set at the head, you discern that a part of a foot is set at the beginning, which now has four time-units, while the two that are owed are kept silent at the end. From which we learn that a meter can begin from a part of a foot, and end at a full foot, but never without silence.
deMus.4.13.17
Discipulus: Et hoc perspicuum est.
Student: This too is clear.
deMus.4.13.17
4. 13. 18. Magister: Quid? hoc metrum potesne metiri et dicere quibus pedibus constet? Iam satis terris nivis, atque dirae Grandinis misit Pater, et rubente Dextera sacras iaculatus arces .
4. 13. 18. Teacher: And can you measure this meter, and say of what feet it consists? Iam satis terris nivis, atque dirae grandinis misit Pater, et rubente dextera sacras iaculatus arces.
deMus.4.13.18
Discipulus: Possum constituere in capite creticum, et duos metiri reliquos senum temporum pedes, unum ionicum a maiori, alterum dichorium, et silere unum tempus quod adiungitur cretico ut sex tempora compleantur.
Student: I can set a cretic at the head, and measure two remaining feet of six time-units, one an ionic from the greater, the other a dichoree, and be silent for one time-unit which is joined to the cretic so that six time-units are completed.
deMus.4.13.18
Magister: Nonnihil defuit considerationi tuae: nam cum dichorius est in fine, restante silentio, ultima eius quae brevis est, pro longa accipitur. An hoc negabis?
Teacher: Something was lacking to your consideration: for when the dichoree is at the end, a silence remaining, its last syllable, which is short, is taken for a long. Or will you deny this?
deMus.4.13.18
Discipulus: Imo fateor.
Student: On the contrary, I admit it.
deMus.4.13.18
Magister: Non ergo constitui decet in fine dichorium, nisi nullo in repetitione consequente silentio, ne non iam dichorius, sed epitritus secundus sentiatur.
Teacher: It is not fitting, then, to set a dichoree at the end, except when no silence follows in the repetition, lest now not a dichoree but a second epitrite be perceived.
deMus.4.13.18
Discipulus: Manifestum est. Quomodo ergo metiemur hoc metrum?
Student: It is manifest. How, then, shall we measure this meter?
deMus.4.13.18
Discipulus: Nescio.
Student: I do not know.
deMus.4.13.18
4. 14. 18. Magister: Attende ergo utrum bene sonet, cum ita pronuntio, ut post tres primas syllabas unum tempus sileam: ita enim in fine nihil debebitur, ut decenter ibi possit esse dichorius.
4. 14. 18. Teacher: Attend, then, whether it sounds well when I pronounce it so as to be silent for one time-unit after the first three syllables: for thus nothing will be owed at the end, so that a dichoree can fittingly be there.
deMus.4.14.18
Discipulus: Iucundissime sonat.
Student: It sounds most pleasantly.
deMus.4.14.18
4. 14. 19. Magister: Hoc quoque igitur adiungamus arti, ut non solum in fine, sed et ante finem cum oportet sileamus. Tunc autem oportet, cum id quod debetur implendis temporibus pedum, aut indecenter siletur in fine propter ultimam brevem, ut in hoc quod dictum est; aut cum duo constituuntur non pleni pedes, unus in capite, alter in fine, qualis iste est: Gentiles nostros inter oberrat equos . Sensisti enim, ut opinor, me post quinque syllabas longas, moram duorum temporum siluisse, et tantumdem in fine silendum est, dum reditur ad caput. Si enim hoc metrum ad legem sex temporum metiaris; erit tibi primus spondeus, secundus molossus, tertius choriambus, quartus anapaestus. Spondeo igitur debentur duo tempora ut sex temporum pedem impleat, et anapaesto: itaque duo silentur post molossum ante finem, et duo post anapaestum in fine. Si autem ad legem temporum quatuor; una longa erit in capite, deinde duos metimur spondeos, deinde duos dactylos, et post una longa concludet. Silemus itaque duo tempora post geminum spondeum ante finem, et duo in fine, ut ambo pedes impleantur, quorum dimidias partes in capite atque in extremo posuimus.
4. 14. 19. Teacher: Let us, then, add this too to the art: that we be silent, when we ought, not only at the end but also before the end. And we ought to do so when what is owed to filling out the time-units of feet is either unfittingly kept silent at the end because of a final short, as in the case mentioned; or when two not-full feet are set, one at the head, the other at the end, such as this: Gentiles nostros inter oberrat equos. For you felt, I think, that after five long syllables I was silent for a delay of two time-units, and just as much must be kept silent at the end, while one returns to the head. For if you measure this meter by the law of six time-units, the first will be a spondee, the second a molossus, the third a choriamb, the fourth an anapest. Two time-units, then, are owed to the spondee to fill out a six-time-unit foot, and to the anapest; so two are kept silent after the molossus before the end, and two after the anapest at the end. But if by the law of four time-units, there will be one long at the head, then we measure two spondees, then two dactyls, and after that one long will conclude. And so we are silent for two time-units after the double spondee before the end, and two at the end, so that both feet may be filled, whose halves we set at the head and at the extreme.
deMus.4.14.19
4. 14. 20. Nonnumquam tamen quod duobus non plenis pedibus debetur in principio ac fine collocatis, finali tantum silentio redditur; si tantum sit ut dimidii spatium pedis non excedat, qualia haec duo sunt: Silvae laborantes, geluque Flumina constiterint acuto . Horum enim prius incipit a palimbacchio, inde excurrit in molossum, et bacchio terminatur: silentur ergo duo tempora; quorum unum bacchio, alterum palimbacchio cum reddideris, sena ubique tempora implebuntur. Hoc autem posterius dactylo inchoatur, inde pergit in choriambum, clauditur bacchio: tria igitur tempora silere oportebit; hinc unum bacchio, duo dactylo redhibebimus, ut in omnibus sint sena tempora.
4. 14. 20. Sometimes, however, what is owed to two not-full feet set at the beginning and end is rendered by the final silence alone, if it is only so much that it does not exceed the span of a half-foot, such as these two: Silvae laborantes, geluque flumina constiterint acuto. For the former of these begins from a palimbacchius, then runs out into a molossus, and is terminated by a bacchius: so two time-units are kept silent; one of which, when you have rendered to the bacchius and the other to the palimbacchius, six time-units everywhere will be filled. But this latter is begun by a dactyl, then proceeds into a choriamb, is closed by a bacchius: so one must be silent for three time-units; one of which we will repay to the bacchius, two to the dactyl, so that in all there are six time-units.
deMus.4.14.20
4. 14. 21. Prius autem redditur quod debetur implendo extremo pedi, quam in principio constituto. Nec aliter omnino fieri aures sinunt. Nec mirum: id enim cum repetimus, adiungitur capiti quod prorsus extremum est. Itaque in hoc metro quod dictum est: Flumina constiterint acuto: cum tria tempora senis utique implendis debeantur, si ea non silentio velis, sed voce reddere, possintque reddi et per iambum, et per chorium, et per tribrachum, quia omnes terna tempora possident; nullo modo ea per chorium reddi sensus ipse permittit, in quo prior est longa syllaba, brevis posterior: id enim prius sonare debet, quod bacchio debetur extremo, id est brevis syllaba; non longa, quae dactylo primo. Licet hoc explorare his exemplis: Flumina constiterint acuto gelu. Flumina constiterint acute gelida. Flumina constiterint in alta nocte. Cui dubium est, duo illa suaviter repeti, hoc autem tertium nullo modo?
4. 14. 21. But what is owed to filling out the last foot is rendered before what is owed to the one set at the beginning. Nor do the ears allow it to be done otherwise at all. And no wonder: for when we repeat it, what is utterly last is joined to the head. So in this meter that was mentioned, flumina constiterint acuto, since three time-units are owed to filling out the six, if you wish to render them not by silence but by voice, and they can be rendered by an iamb, by a choree, or by a tribrach, since all hold three time-units—the sense itself in no way permits them to be rendered by a choree, in which the long syllable is prior and the short latter: for that ought to sound first which is owed to the last bacchius, that is, the short syllable, not the long, which is owed to the first dactyl. One may test this by these examples: Flumina constiterint acuto gelu. Flumina constiterint acute gelida. Flumina constiterint in alta nocte. Who doubts that those two are repeated sweetly, but this third in no way?
deMus.4.14.21
4. 14. 22. Item cum singula tempora singulis debentur pedibus minus plenis, si ea voce reddere velis, non sinit sensus in unam syllabam coarctari; mira omnino iustitia. Non enim convenit, quod separatim reddendum est, non etiam constitui separatim. Quocirca in illo metro: Silvae laborantes, geluque, si unam longam pro silentio fini addas, sicuti est: Silvae laborantes gelu duro, non probant aures; sicut probant cum dicimus: Silvae laborantes gelu et frigore. Quod satiatissime sentis, cum singula repetis.
4. 14. 22. Likewise, when single time-units are owed to single less-than-full feet, if you wish to render them by voice, the sense does not allow them to be compressed into one syllable—an altogether wonderful justice. For it is not fitting that what is to be rendered separately should not also be set down separately. Therefore in that meter Silvae laborantes, geluque, if you add one long for the silence at the end, as in Silvae laborantes gelu duro, the ears do not approve it, as they do approve when we say Silvae laborantes gelu et frigore. Which you feel most fully when you repeat each.
deMus.4.14.22
4. 14. 23. Item non oportet cum duo minus pleni pedes ponuntur, maiorem in principio quam in fine poni; nam et hoc condemnat auditus, tamquam si dicas: Optimum tempus adest tandem, ut primus pes sit creticus, secundus choriambus, tertius spondeus; ut tria tempora sileamus, quorum duo debentur ultimo spondeo ad sena implenda, et unum primo cretico. At si ita dicatur: Tandem tempus adest optimum, eadem interposita trium temporum mora in silentio, quis non sentiat iucundissime repeti? Quare aut tanti spatii decet esse in fine minus plenum pedem, quanti est in principio, ut illud: Silvae laborantes, geluque: aut minorem in principio, et in fine maiorem, veluti est: Flumina constiterint acuto. Neque iniuria, quia ubi est aequalitas, nulla discordia: ubi autem dispar est numerus, si a minore ad maiorem veniamus, ut in numerando solet, facit rursus ipse ordo concordiam.
4. 14. 23. Likewise, when two less-than-full feet are set, the larger ought not to be set at the beginning rather than at the end; for the hearing condemns this too, as if you say Optimum tempus adest tandem, so that the first foot is a cretic, the second a choriamb, the third a spondee, so that we are silent for three time-units, of which two are owed to the last spondee to fill out six, and one to the first cretic. But if it is said thus, Tandem tempus adest optimum, the same delay of three time-units being interposed in silence, who would not feel that it is repeated most pleasantly? So either the less-than-full foot at the end ought to be of as great a span as that at the beginning, as that Silvae laborantes, geluque; or the smaller at the beginning and the larger at the end, as is Flumina constiterint acuto. And not without reason, because where there is equality, there is no discord; but where the number is unequal, if we come from the smaller to the larger, as is usual in counting, the order itself again makes concord.
deMus.4.14.23
4. 14. 24. Ex quo illud est etiam consequens, ut cum ii de quibus agitur, minus pleni ponuntur pedes, si duobus locis interponitur silentium, id est ante finem et in fine; tantum ante finem sileatur quantum debetur extremo, tantum autem in fine quantum scilicet primo: quia medium tendit ad finem; a fine vero ad principium redeundum est. Si autem utrique tantumdem debetur, nulla controversia est quin tantum ante finem quantum in fine silendum sit. Sileri autem oportet non nisi ubi terminatur pars orationis. In iis autem numeris qui non verbis fiunt, sed aliquo pulsu vel flatu, vel ipsa etiam lingua, nullum in hac re discrimen est, post quam vocem percussionemve sileatur; modo ut legitimum secundum supradictas rationes intercedat silentium. Quamobrem et a duobus potest minus plenis pedibus metrum incipere, si tamen utriusque coniunctum spatium minus non sit, quam posset esse unius et dimidii pedis; nam supra diximus, tum recte poni duos minus plenos pedes, cum id quod debetur ambobus, non transit spatio pedem dimidium: exemplum est: Montes acuti; ut aut in fine tria tempora sileamus, aut unum tempus post spondeum, et duo in fine. Aliter enim hoc metrum convenienter metiri non potest.
4. 14. 24. From which this too follows: that when the less-than-full feet of which we are treating are set, if silence is interposed in two places—that is, before the end and at the end—just so much is kept silent before the end as is owed to the last, and just so much at the end as is owed to the first; because the middle tends toward the end, but from the end one must return to the beginning. But if the same is owed to each, there is no dispute that as much must be kept silent before the end as at the end. And one ought to be silent only where a part of speech is terminated. But in those rhythms which are made not by words but by some beat or breath, or even by the tongue itself, there is no distinction in this matter after what voice or beat one is silent, provided only that a lawful silence intervene according to the principles stated above. So a meter can begin from two less-than-full feet too, provided that the joined span of both is not less than that of one foot and a half could be; for we said above that two less-than-full feet are rightly set when what is owed to both does not pass the span of a half-foot. An example is Montes acuti; so that we are silent either for three time-units at the end, or one time-unit after the spondee and two at the end. For otherwise this meter cannot be conveniently measured.
deMus.4.14.24
4. 15. 25. Sit hoc etiam in disciplina, ut cum ante finem silemus, non ibi pars orationis brevi syllaba terminetur, ne secundum illam saepe commemoratam regulam, pro longa eam sensus accipiat, sequente silentio. Itaque in hoc metro: Montibus acutis, non possumus silere post dactylum tempus unum, quod post spondeum in superiore poteramus; ne non iam dactylus, sed creticus sentiatur: atque ita non duobus minus plenis pedibus, quod nunc demonstramus, sed pleno dichorio et ultimo spondeo metrum constare videatur, duum temporum silentio in fine reddendo.
4. 15. 25. Let this too be in the discipline: that when we are silent before the end, a part of speech should not be terminated there by a short syllable, lest, according to that often-mentioned rule, the sense take it for a long, a silence following. So in this meter Montibus acutis we cannot be silent for one time-unit after the dactyl, as we could in the earlier one after the spondee, lest now not a dactyl but a cretic be perceived; and so the meter would seem to consist not of two less-than-full feet, which we are now demonstrating, but of a full dichoree and a final spondee, with a silence of two time-units to be rendered at the end.
deMus.4.15.25
4. 15. 26. Sed illud notandum est, in principio posito minus pleno pedi, aut ibidem reddi debitum per silentium, sicuti est: Iam satis terris nivis atque dirae: aut in fine, velut: Segetes meus labor. Minus autem pleno pedi qui in fine ponitur, aut ibidem restitui silentio, quod debetur, ut in illo: Ite igitur Camoenae: aut in aliquo de mediis loco, veluti in hoc: Ver blandum viget arvis, adest hospes hirundo . Unum enim tempus quod debetur ultimo bacchio, vel post totum numerum sileri potest, vel post primum eius numeri pedem molossum, vel secundum ionicum a minore. Quod vero mediis forte minus plenis pedibus debiti est, non nisi ibidem reddi potest: ut est: Tuba terribilem sonitum dedit aere curvo . Si enim sic metiamur hoc metrum, ut primum faciamus anapaestum, secundum ionicum quemlibet in syllabis quinque, soluta scilicet longa vel prima vel ultima in duas breves, tertium choriambum, ultimum bacchium: tria erunt tempora in debito, unum extremo bacchio reddendum, et duo anapaesto primo, ut sena compleantur. Sed hoc totum spatium trium temporum in fine sileri potest. At si ab integro pede incipias, quinque syllabas primas pro quolibet ionico metitus, sequitur choriambus: inde iam pedem integrum non invenies: quocirca unius longae spatio silere oportebit: quo annumerato, choriambus alter implebitur; bacchio reliquo metrum clausuro, cui tempus unum debitum silebis in fine.
4. 15. 26. But this is to be noted: that for a less-than-full foot set at the beginning, what is owed is rendered by silence either in that same place, as is Iam satis terris nivis atque dirae, or at the end, as Segetes meus labor. But for a less-than-full foot set at the end, what is owed is restored by silence either in that same place, as in that Ite igitur Camoenae, or in some middle place, as in this: Ver blandum viget arvis, adest hospes hirundo. For the one time-unit owed to the last bacchius can be kept silent either after the whole rhythm, or after the first foot of that rhythm, the molossus, or after the second, the ionic from the lesser. But what is owed perhaps to less-than-full feet in the middle can be rendered only in that same place: as is Tuba terribilem sonitum dedit aere curvo. For if we measure this meter so as to make the first an anapest, the second any ionic in five syllables (the long, of course, whether first or last, being dissolved into two shorts), the third a choriamb, the last a bacchius—there will be three time-units owed, one to be rendered to the last bacchius, and two to the first anapest, so that six may be completed. But this whole span of three time-units can be kept silent at the end. But if you begin from a whole foot, the first five syllables being measured as any ionic, a choriamb follows; then you will no longer find a whole foot; therefore one must be silent for the span of one long; which counted in, the other choriamb will be filled; the remaining bacchius being about to close the meter, to which the one owed time-unit you will keep silent at the end.
deMus.4.15.26
4. 15. 27. Unde iam esse opinor perspicuum, cum in mediis siletur locis, aut ea restitui tempora quae in fine debentur, aut ea quae ibi debentur ubi siletur. Sed aliquando non est necesse ut sileatur in mediis, cum potest aliter metrum metiri, ut in eo quod paulo ante posuimus. Aliquando autem necesse est, ut in hoc: Vernat temperies, aurae tepent, sunt deliciae: nam manifestum est istum numerum, aut quaternorum temporum, aut senorum pedibus currere. Si quaternorum, silendum est unum tempus post syllabam octavam, et in fine duo; metiatur primo spondeus, secundo dactylus, tertio spondeus, quarto dactylus annumerato post longam silentio, quia post brevem non oportet, quinto spondeus, sexto dactylus, ultima longa qua numerus clauditur, cui duo tempora debita silentur in fine. Si autem senorum temporum hic metimur pedes, primus erit molossus, secundus ionicus a minore, tertius creticus qui fit dichorius adiuncto silentio unius temporis, quartus ionicus a maiore et longa ultima, post quam quatuor tempora silebuntur. Posset aliter, ut una longa in principio locaretur, quam sequeretur ionicus a maiore, deinde molossus, deinde bacchius, qui fieret antispastus adiuncto silentio unius temporis; ultimus choriambus metrum clauderet, ita ut quatuor temporum in fine silentium redderetur uni longae in principio constitutae. Sed aures istam dimensionem repudiant; quia pars pedis in principio collocata, nisi maior quam dimidia fuerit, non recte illi post plenum pedem finali silentio redditur ubi debetur: sed aliis interpositis pedibus, scimus quidem quantum debeatur; sed non comprehenditur sensu, ut tanto spatio sileatur, nisi minus debeatur in silentio quam positum est in sono: quia cum maiorem partem pedis vox peregerit, minor quae reliqua est, ubicumque facile occurrit.
4. 15. 27. Whence I think it is now clear that, when one is silent in the middle places, either those time-units are restored that are owed at the end, or those that are owed where one is silent. But sometimes it is not necessary to be silent in the middle, when the meter can be measured otherwise, as in the one we set down a little before. But sometimes it is necessary, as in this: Vernat temperies, aurae tepent, sunt deliciae. For it is manifest that this rhythm runs by feet either of four time-units or of six. If of four, one must be silent for one time-unit after the eighth syllable, and two at the end; let a spondee be measured first, a dactyl second, a spondee third, a dactyl fourth—a silence being counted in after the long, because not after a short—a spondee fifth, a dactyl sixth, the last long by which the rhythm is closed, to which the two owed time-units are kept silent at the end. But if we measure here feet of six time-units, the first will be a molossus, the second an ionic from the lesser, the third a cretic which becomes a dichoree with a silence of one time-unit joined, the fourth an ionic from the greater and the last long, after which four time-units will be kept silent. It could be otherwise, so that one long is set at the beginning, which an ionic from the greater follows, then a molossus, then a bacchius, which would become an antispast with a silence of one time-unit joined; the last choriamb would close the meter, so that a silence of four time-units at the end is rendered to the one long set at the beginning. But the ears reject this measuring; because a part of a foot set at the beginning, unless it has been greater than a half, is not rightly rendered to it, after a full foot, by a final silence where it is owed; but with other feet interposed, we know indeed how much is owed, yet it is not grasped by the sense to be silent for so great a span, unless less is owed in silence than was set in sound: because when the voice has finished the greater part of a foot, the smaller part that remains easily occurs wherever it may.
deMus.4.15.27
4. 15. 28. Quamobrem metri quod sub hoc exemplo posuimus: Vernat temperies, aurae tepent, sunt deliciae: cum sit una necessaria, quam diximus, dimensio, si post decimam eius syllabam tempus unum sileatur, et quatuor in fine; est alia voluntaria, si quis post sextam syllabam velit silere duo tempora, et unum post undecimam, et duo in fine: ut sit in principio spondeus, sequatur hunc choriambus, tertio spondeo silentium duum temporum annumeretur, ut vel molossus vel a minore ionicus fiat, quartus bacchius adiuncto itidem silentio unius temporis fiat antispastus, quinto choriambo numerus terminetur in voce, duobus temporibus in fine per silentium redditis in principio locato spondeo. Est item alia. Si enim velis, post sextam syllabam unum tempus silebis, et post decimam unum, post undecimam tantumdem, et duo in fine: ut sit primus spondeus, secundus choriambus, tertius palimbacchius fiat antispastus uno silentii tempore annumerato, quartus spondeus fiat dichorius unius temporis interiecto, et unius temporis consequente silentio, choriambus ultimus numerum claudat, ita ut sileamus duo tempora in fine, quae primo debentur spondeo. Est et tertia dimensio, si post primum spondeum tempus unum sileatur, et reliqua quae in proximo superiore serventur; nisi quod in huius fine unum tempus silebitur, quia spondeus ille qui solet in principio locari, consequente unius temporis silentio factus est palimbacchius, ut plus uno tempore nihil ei debeatur, quod in fine silendum est. Unde iam perspicis metris interponi silentia, quaedam necessaria, quaedam voluntaria: et necessaria quidem, cum aliquid pedibus debetur implendis; voluntaria vero, cum pleni sunt pedes atque integri.
4. 15. 28. Therefore, of the meter we set down under this example, Vernat temperies, aurae tepent, sunt deliciae: since there is one necessary measuring, which we have mentioned—if after its tenth syllable one time-unit is kept silent, and four at the end—there is another, voluntary, if one wishes after the sixth syllable to be silent for two time-units, and one after the eleventh, and two at the end: so that there is a spondee at the beginning, a choriamb follows it, a silence of two time-units is counted to the third spondee, so that it becomes either a molossus or an ionic from the lesser, the fourth bacchius, a silence of one time-unit likewise joined, becomes an antispast, the rhythm is terminated in the voice by the fifth choriamb, two time-units at the end being rendered by silence to the spondee set at the beginning. There is likewise another. For, if you wish, after the sixth syllable you will be silent one time-unit, and one after the tenth, as much after the eleventh, and two at the end: so that the first is a spondee, the second a choriamb, the third a palimbacchius becomes an antispast, one time-unit of silence being counted in, the fourth spondee becomes a dichoree, one time-unit being interposed and one time-unit of silence following, the last choriamb closes the rhythm, so that we are silent two time-units at the end, which are owed to the first spondee. There is a third measuring too, if after the first spondee one time-unit is kept silent, and the rest as kept in the one just above; except that in the end of this one one time-unit will be kept silent, because that spondee which is usually set at the beginning has, by a following silence of one time-unit, become a palimbacchius, so that nothing more than one time-unit is owed to it, to be kept silent at the end. Whence you now perceive that silences are interposed in meters—some necessary, some voluntary; necessary indeed, when something is owed to filling out feet; voluntary, when the feet are full and whole.
deMus.4.15.28
4. 15. 29. Quod autem superius dictum est, amplius quatuor temporibus silendum non esse, de necessariis silentiis dictum est, ubi debita tempora explentur. Nam in iis quae voluntaria silentia nominavimus, licet etiam pedem sonare, et pedem silere: quod si paribus intervallis fecerimus, non erit metrum, sed rhythmus, nullo certo fine apparente unde redeatur ad caput. Quamobrem si exempli gratia silentiis velis distinguere, ut post primum pedem alterius pedis tempora sileas, non hoc perpetuo servandum est. Licet autem varietate qualibet connumeratis silentiis usque ad legitima tempora metrum producere, velut in hoc: Nobis verum in promptu est, tu si verum dicis. Licet hic post primum spondeum quatuor tempora silere, et alia quatuor post sequentes duos: post tres autem finales nihil silebitur; iam enim triginta duo tempora terminata sunt. Sed multo est aptius, et quodammodo iustius, ut vel in fine tantum, vel etiam in medio et fine sileatur, quod subtracto uno pede fieri potest, ut ita sit: Nobis verum in promptu est, tu dic verum. Hoc et in metris caeterorum pedum tenendum est, scilicet necessariis silentiis, sive finalibus sive mediis reddi debita, ut pedes impleantur: non autem sileri oportere amplius quam pedis partem, quam levatio positiove occupant. Voluntariis autem silentiis et partes pedum et integros pedes silere conceditur, sicut exemplis supra editis monstravimus. Sed hactenus interponendorum silentiorum ratio tractata sit.
4. 15. 29. But what was said above, that one ought not be silent for more than four time-units, was said of the necessary silences, where owed time-units are filled out. For in those we have named voluntary silences, one may even sound a foot and be silent for a foot; which, if we do it at equal intervals, will not be a meter but a rhythm, no fixed end appearing from which to return to the head. So if, for example, you wish to distinguish by silences, so that after the first foot you are silent for the time-units of another foot, this is not to be kept up perpetually. But one may, with any variety of counted-in silences, draw out a meter up to the lawful time-units, as in this: Nobis verum in promptu est, tu si verum dicis. Here one may be silent for four time-units after the first spondee, and another four after the two following; but after the three final ones nothing will be kept silent, for now thirty-two time-units are terminated. But it is much more fitting, and in a way more just, that one be silent either only at the end, or also in the middle and at the end—which can be done by subtracting one foot, so that it is thus: Nobis verum in promptu est, tu dic verum. This too is to be held in the meters of the other feet: namely that by necessary silences, whether final or middle, what is owed is rendered, so that the feet may be filled; but that one ought not be silent for more than the part of a foot which the raising or setting-down takes up. But by voluntary silences both parts of feet and whole feet may be kept silent, as we have shown by the examples given above. But let the principle of interposing silences be treated thus far.
deMus.4.15.29
4. 16. 30. Nunc de pedum commixtione, et de ipsorum metrorum copulatione pauca dicamus: quoniam iam multa dicta sunt cum quaereremus, quos sibimet oporteat misceri pedes; et quod ad metrorum attinet copulationem, nonnulla dicenda sunt cum de versibus disserere coeperimus: iunguntur enim sibi pedes atque miscentur secundum regulas, quas in secundo sermone aperuimus. In hoc autem illud sciendum est, metri quaeque genera quae a poetis iam celebrata sunt, habuisse auctores et inventores suos, a quibus quasdam certas leges positas convellere prohibemur; non enim oportet, cum illi eas ratione fixerint aliquid ibi mutare quamvis secundum rationem sine aurium offensione possimus. Cuius rei cognitio non arte, sed historia traditur; unde creditur potius quam cognoscitur. Neque enim si Phaliscus, nescio qui, metra ita composuit, ut haec sonant: Quando flagella ligas, ita liga, Vitis et ulmus uti simul eant ; scire hoc possumus; sed tantummodo credere audiendo et legendo. Illud est disciplinae, quod ad nos pertinet; videre utrum hoc tribus dactylis constet et pyrrhichio ultimo, ut plerique musicae imperiti autumant; non enim sentiunt pyrrhichium poni non posse post dactylum: an ut ratio docet, primus pes sit in hoc metro choriambus, secundus ionicus longa syllaba in duas soluta breves, ultimus iambus, post quem tria tempora silebuntur: quod semidocti homines sentire possent, si a docto secundum utramque legem pronuntiaretur et plauderetur. Ita enim naturali et communi sensu iudicarent, quid disciplinae norma praescriberet.
4. 16. 30. Now let us say a few things about the mixing of feet, and about the coupling of the meters themselves; since much has already been said when we inquired which feet ought to be mixed with one another; and as concerns the coupling of meters, some things are to be said when we begin to discuss verses; for feet are joined and mixed with one another according to the rules we opened up in the second discussion. But in this it is to be known that each of the kinds of meter which have already been celebrated by the poets had its own authors and inventors, from whom we are forbidden to wrench away certain fixed laws they have set; for it is not fitting, when they have fixed them by reason, to change anything there, although according to reason we might do so without offense to the ears. The knowledge of this is handed down not by art but by record, whence it is believed rather than known. For if some Phaliscus, I know not who, composed meters so that they sound thus: Quando flagella ligas, ita liga, vitis et ulmus uti simul eant, we cannot know this, but only believe it by hearing and reading. That is a matter of the discipline which pertains to us: to see whether this consists of three dactyls and a final pyrrhic, as most who are unskilled in music claim—for they do not feel that a pyrrhic cannot be set after a dactyl—or whether, as reason teaches, the first foot in this meter is a choriamb, the second an ionic with the long syllable dissolved into two shorts, the last an iamb, after which three time-units will be kept silent: which half-learned men could feel, if it were pronounced and beaten by a learned man according to each law. For thus they would judge by natural and common sense what the standard of the discipline prescribed.
deMus.4.16.30
4. 16. 31. Verumtamen quod poeta ille hos numeros immobiles esse voluit, cum hoc metro utimur, custodiendum est: non enim fraudat auditum; quamquam aeque nihil fraudaret, si vel pro choriambo diiambum, vel ipsum ionicum nulla in breves facta solutione poneremus, et quidquid aliud congruisset. In hoc igitur metro nihil mutabitur; non ea ratione qua inaequalitatem vitamus, sed ea qua observamus auctoritatem. Docet sane ratio, alia institui metra immobilia, id est in quibus mutari nihil oportet, ut hoc ipsum est de quo satis locuti sumus; alia mobilia, in quibus locare pedes alios pro aliis licet, sicuti est: Troiae qui primus ab oris, arma virumque cano. Nam hic pro spondeo anapaestum quolibet loco licet ponere. Alia nec tota immobilia, nec tota mobilia, ut est: Pendeat ex humeris dulcis chelys, Et numeros edat varios, quibus Assonet omne virens late nemus, Et tortis errans qui flexibus . Vides hic enim ubique et spondeos et dactylos poni posse, praeter ultimum pedem, quem metri auctor semper esse dactylum voluit. Et in iis quidem generibus tribus nonnihil valere auctoritatem vides.
4. 16. 31. Nevertheless, that that poet wished these rhythms to be unchangeable must be kept when we use this meter: for it does not cheat the hearing—although it would equally cheat nothing if we set either a diiamb for the choriamb, or the ionic itself with no dissolution into shorts, or whatever else would agree. In this meter, then, nothing will be changed; not by that principle by which we avoid inequality, but by that by which we observe authority. Reason indeed teaches that some meters are established as unchangeable—that is, in which nothing ought to be changed, as is this very one of which we have spoken enough; others changeable, in which one may set some feet for others, as is Troiae qui primus ab oris, arma virumque cano. For here one may set an anapest for a spondee in any place. Others neither wholly unchangeable nor wholly changeable, as is Pendeat ex umeris dulcis chelys, et numeros edat varios, quibus assonet omne virens late nemus, et tortis errans qui flexibus. For you see that here spondees and dactyls can be set everywhere, except the last foot, which the author of the meter wished always to be a dactyl. And in these three kinds you see that authority has some force.
deMus.4.16.31
4. 16. 32. Quod autem in pedum commixtione ad rationem solam pertinet de iis rebus quae sentiuntur iudicantem; sciendum est eas partes pedum, quae post certos pedes silentio restante insuaviter locantur, ut iambus post dichorium atque secundum epitritum, et spondeus post antispastum, etiam post alios pedes male locari, quibus isti permixti fuerint: nam manifestum est iambum post molossum bene poni, sicut hoc exemplum indicat saepe repetitum cum silentio in fine temporum trium: Ver blandum viret floribus: at si pro molosso primum dichorium constituas, ut est: Vere terra viret floribus, respuit hoc auditus atque condemnat. Id etiam in caeteris sensu explorante facile est experiri. Ratio namque certissima est, cum sibi copulantur qui inter se sunt copulabiles pedes, eas partes debere in fine subiungi quae omnibus conveniunt in illa serie collocatis, ne inter socios quodammodo discordiae aliquid oriatur.
4. 16. 32. But as to what, in the mixing of feet, pertains to reason alone judging about the things that are perceived: it is to be known that those parts of feet which are set unpleasantly after certain feet, a silence remaining—as an iamb after a dichoree and a second epitrite, and a spondee after an antispast—are also badly set after other feet with which these have been mixed; for it is manifest that an iamb is well set after a molossus, as this example, often repeated with a silence of three time-units at the end, indicates: Ver blandum viret floribus; but if you set a dichoree first for the molossus, as is Vere terra viret floribus, the hearing rejects and condemns this. This too is easy to test in the rest, with the sense examining. For the principle is most certain, that when feet capable of being coupled are coupled with one another, those parts ought to be joined at the end which agree with all set in that series, lest among allies, in a way, some discord arise.
deMus.4.16.32
4. 16. 33. Illud magis mirandum est, quod cum spondeus et diiambum et dichorium suaviter claudat, tamen cum hi duo pedes sive soli, sive cum aliis copulabilibus quoquo modo mixtis in una serie fuerint, spondeus in fine, approbante sensu, poni non potest. Quis enim dubitet aures libenter accipere ista singula repetita: Timenda res non est: et item separatim: Iam timere noli? At si ita iungas: Timenda res, iam timere noli; nisi in soluta oratione audire nolim. Nec absurdum minus est, si quolibet loco alium connectas, veluti molossum hoc modo: Vir fortis, timenda res, iam timere noli. Vel ita: Timenda res, vir fortis, iam timere noli. Vel etiam ita: Timenda res, iam timere vir fortis noli. Cuius absurditatis causa est, quod pes diiambus etiam ad duplum et simplum plaudi potest, ut ad simplum et duplum dichorius: spondeus autem duplae parti eorum aequalis est; sed cum eum ille trahit ad primam, hic ad extremam, existit nonnulla discordia; et ita ratio tollit admirationem.
4. 16. 33. This is the more to be wondered at: that, although a spondee sweetly closes both a diiamb and a dichoree, yet when these two feet, whether alone or mixed in any way with others capable of being coupled, are in one series, a spondee cannot, with the sense approving, be set at the end. For who would doubt that the ears gladly receive these repeated singly: Timenda res non est, and likewise separately, Iam timere noli? But if you join them thus, Timenda res, iam timere noli, I would not wish to hear it except in prose. And it is no less absurd if you connect another in any place, such as a molossus in this way: Vir fortis, timenda res, iam timere noli; or thus, Timenda res, vir fortis, iam timere noli; or even thus, Timenda res, iam timere vir fortis noli. The cause of which absurdity is that the diiamb foot can also be beaten to double and single, as the dichoree to single and double; but the spondee is equal to the double part of these; but when the one draws it to the first, the other to the last, some discord arises; and so reason takes away the wonder.
deMus.4.16.33
4. 16. 34. Nec minus miraculum edit antispastus, cui si nullus alius pedum, aut certe solus diiambus misceatur, patitur iambo metrum claudi, cum aliis autem positus nullo modo; et cum dichorio quidem propter ipsum dichorium; itaque hoc minime miror. Cum caeteris vero senum temporum pedibus, cur memoratum trium temporum pedem in fine repudiet, nescio quae est causa secretior fortasse quam ut a nobis erui atque ostendi queat: sed hoc ita esse his exemplis probo. Nam ista duo metra: Potestate placet, potestate potentium placet, nemo ambigit suaviter singula repeti cum silentio trium temporum in fine. At ista insuaviter cum eodem silentio: Potestate praeclara placet. Potestate tibi multum placet. Potestate iam tibi sic placet. Potestate multum tibi placet. Potestatis magnitudo placet. Quod ad sensum attinet, peregit officium suum in hac quaestione, et quid acceperit, et quid exploserit indicavit: sed de causa cur ita sit, ratio consulenda est. Ac mea quidem in tanta obscuritate nihil aliud videt, nisi cum diiambo antispastum dimidiam partem priorem habere communem: nam uterque a brevi et longa incipit; posteriorem autem cum dichorio: longa enim et brevi ambo finiuntur. Itaque antispastus vel solus tamquam suam priorem dimidiam, vel cum diiambo cum quo eam communiter habet, collocatus, patitur in fine metri esse iambum; et cum dichorio pateretur, si eidem dichorio talis terminus conveniret: cum caeteris autem non patitur, quibus tali societate non iungitur.
4. 16. 34. No less a marvel does the antispast produce: with which, if no other of the feet, or at any rate only a diiamb, is mixed, it allows the meter to be closed by an iamb, but when set with others in no way; and with a dichoree indeed because of the dichoree itself, so this I do not wonder at. But with the other feet of six time-units, why it rejects the mentioned foot of three time-units at the end, I do not know—there is some cause more hidden, perhaps, than that it can be drawn out and shown by us; but that it is so I prove by these examples. For these two meters, Potestate placet, Potestate potentium placet, no one doubts are sweetly repeated singly with a silence of three time-units at the end. But these unpleasantly with the same silence: Potestate praeclara placet. Potestate tibi multum placet. Potestate iam tibi sic placet. Potestate multum tibi placet. Potestatis magnitudo placet. As concerns the sense, it has done its duty in this question, and has indicated both what it received and what it hissed off; but about the cause why it is so, reason must be consulted. And mine indeed, in such great obscurity, sees nothing else but that the antispast has its prior half in common with the diiamb—for each begins from a short and a long—but its latter half with the dichoree, for both are ended by a long and a short. And so the antispast, set either alone, as having its own prior half, or with the diiamb, with which it has it in common, allows there to be an iamb at the end of the meter; and with the dichoree it would allow it, if such a termination agreed with that same dichoree; but with the rest it does not allow it, with which it is not joined by such a fellowship.
deMus.4.16.34
4. 17. 35. Quod vero ad metrorum copulationem attinet, satis est in praesentia videre, posse sibi diversa metra copulari, quae tamen plausu, id est levatione ac positione conveniant. Diversa sunt autem vel quantitate, ut cum maiora copulantur minoribus, qualia ista sunt, videlicet: Iam satis terris nivis atque dirae Grandinis misit Pater, et rubente Dextera sacras iaculatus arces, Terruit urbem . Nam hoc quartum, quod uno choriambo et una in fine longa terminatur, quam parvum sit tribus superioribus inter se aequalibus subiectum vides. Vel pedibus sicuti haec Grato Pyrrha sub antro, Cui flavam religas comam . Cernis quippe horum duorum superius constare spondeo et choriambo, et longa ultima, quae ad sex tempora implenda spondeo debebatur: hoc autem posterius spondeo et choriambo, et duabus ultimis brevibus, quae item cum primo spondeo implent sex tempora. Paria sunt ergo ista temporibus, sed in pedibus nonnihil diversitatis tenent.
4. 17. 35. But as concerns the coupling of meters, it is enough for the present to see that diverse meters can be coupled with one another, which yet agree in beat, that is, in raising and setting-down. They are diverse either in quantity, as when larger are coupled with smaller, such as these, namely: Iam satis terris nivis atque dirae grandinis misit Pater, et rubente dextera sacras iaculatus arces, terruit urbem. For this fourth, which is terminated by one choriamb and one long at the end, you see how small it is, set under the three earlier ones equal to one another. Or in feet, as these: Grato Pyrrha sub antro, cui flavam religas comam. For you discern that the earlier of these two consists of a spondee and a choriamb, and a last long, which was owed to the spondee to fill out six time-units; but this latter of a spondee and a choriamb, and two last shorts, which likewise with the first spondee fill out six time-units. These are equal, then, in time-units, but in feet hold some diversity.
deMus.4.17.35
4. 17. 36. Est et alia differentia istarum copulationum, quod alia ita copulentur, ut nulla sibi silentia interponi velint, sicut haec duo recentissima; alia inter se sileri aliquid postulent, sicut haec: Vides ut alta stet nive candidum Soracte, nec iam sustineant onus Silvae laborantes, geluque Flumina constiterint acuto . Nam si haec singula repetantur, priora duo unum tempus in fine sileri flagitant, tertium duo, quartum tria. Copulata vero a primo ad secundum transeuntem, unum tempus silere cogunt; a secundo ad tertium duo, a tertio ad quartum tria. A quarto autem si ad primum redeas, tempus unum silebis. Sed quae est ratio est redeundi ad primum, eadem est ad aliam talem copulationem transeundi. Hoc genus copulationum recte nos appellamus circuitum, qui graece dicitur. Circuitus ergo minor esse non potest, quam qui duobus membris constat, id est duobus metris: nec esse maiorem voluerunt eo qui usque ad quatuor membra procedit. Licet igitur minimum bimembrem, medium trimembrem, et ultimum quadrimembrem vocare; hos enim Graeci , , vocant. De quo toto genere quoniam diligentius tractaturi sumus, ut dixi, in eo sermone qui nobis de versibus erit, nunc interim hoc satis sit.
4. 17. 36. There is also another difference of these couplings: that some are so coupled that they wish no silences interposed between them, as these two most recent; others demand that something be kept silent between them, as these: Vides ut alta stet nive candidum Soracte, nec iam sustineant onus silvae laborantes, geluque flumina constiterint acuto. For if these are repeated singly, the first two demand that one time-unit be kept silent at the end, the third two, the fourth three. But coupled, they compel one passing from the first to the second to be silent for one time-unit, from the second to the third two, from the third to the fourth three. But if from the fourth you return to the first, you will be silent for one time-unit. And the principle of returning to the first is the same as that of passing to another such coupling. This kind of coupling we rightly call a "circuit" (circuitus), which in Greek is called a "period." A circuit, then, cannot be less than one that consists of two members—that is, of two meters; nor did they wish it to be larger than one that proceeds up to four members. So one may call the smallest two-membered, the middle three-membered, and the last four-membered. Since we are going to treat of this whole kind more carefully, as I said, in that discussion which we will have about verses, for now let this in the meantime be enough.
deMus.4.17.36
4. 17. 37. Discipulus: Ita fiat.
4. 17. 37. Student: Let it be so.
deMus.4.17.37
5. 1. 1. Magister: Quid sit versus, inter doctos veteres non parva luctatione quaesitum est, nec fructus defuit. Nam inventa res est, et ad notitiam posterorum mandata litteris, gravi atque certa non tantum auctoritate, verum etiam ratione firmata est. Interesse igitur animadverterunt inter rhythmum et metrum aliquid, ut omne metrum rhythmus, non etiam omnis rhythmus metrum sit. Omnis enim legitima pedum connexio numerosa est; quam quoniam metrum habet, non esse numerus nullo modo potest, id est non esse rhythmus. Sed quoniam non est idem, quamvis legitimis pedibus, nullo tamen certo fine provolvi, et item legitimis progredi pedibus, sed certo fine coerceri; haec duo genera etiam vocabulis discernenda erant, ut illud superius rhythmus tantum proprio iam nomine, hoc autem alterum ita rhythmus ut metrum etiam vocaretur. Rursus, quoniam eorum numerorum qui certo fine clauduntur, id est metrorum, alia sunt in quibus non habetur ratio cuiusdam divisionis circa medium, alia in quibus sedulo habetur; erat etiam haec differentia notanda vocabulis. Quapropter illud, ubi non habetur haec ratio, rhythmi genus proprie metrum vocatum est: hoc autem ubi habetur, versum nominaverunt. Cuius appellationis originem fortasse progredientibus nobis ratio ipsa monstrabit. Neque hoc ita praescriptum putes, ut illa etiam metra versus vocare non liceat. Sed aliud est cum abutimur nomine, licentia cuiusdam vicinitatis; aliud, cum rem vocabulo suo enuntiamus. Sed nominum commemoratio hactenus facta sit; in quibus, ut iam didicimus, concessio interloquentium et vetustatis auctoritas totum valet. Caetera, si placet, more nostro investigemus sensu nuntio, indice ratione; ut illos etiam veteres auctores non instituisse ista quasi quae in natura rerum integra et perfecta non fuerint, sed ratiocinando invenisse, et appellando notasse cognoscas.
5. 1. 1. Teacher: What a verse is was inquired among the learned ancients with no small struggle, nor was the fruit lacking. For the thing was discovered, and committed to writing for the knowledge of posterity, made firm by a weighty and certain authority and also by reason. They noticed, then, that there is some difference between rhythm and meter, so that every meter is rhythm, but not every rhythm is also meter. For every lawful connection of feet is rhythmical; and since meter has this, it can in no way fail to be rhythm, that is, fail to be number. But because it is not the same thing to roll on with lawful feet but no fixed end, and likewise to proceed with lawful feet but be restrained by a fixed end, these two kinds had also to be distinguished by terms—so that the former is now called rhythm only, by its proper name, while this other is called rhythm in such a way that it is also called meter. Again, since of those rhythms that are closed off by a fixed end—that is, of meters—some are those in which no account is taken of a certain division about the middle, others in which it is carefully taken, this difference too had to be noted by terms. Therefore the kind of rhythm where this account is not taken was properly called "meter"; but where it is taken, they named it "verse." The origin of which name reason itself will perhaps show us as we proceed. Nor should you think this so prescribed that it is not also permitted to call those meters verses. But it is one thing when we misuse a name, by the license of a certain nearness, another when we state a thing by its proper word. But let the mention of names be made thus far; in which, as we have already learned, the agreement of those conversing and the authority of antiquity have full force. The rest, if you please, let us investigate in our manner, with sense reporting and reason judging; so that you may recognize that even those ancient authors did not establish these things as if they had not been whole and perfect in the nature of things, but discovered them by reasoning, and noted them by naming.
deMus.5.1.1
5. 2. 2. Discipulus: Iam hoc quidem mihi ante persuasum est atque compertum.
5. 2. 2. Student: This indeed has already been made clear and proved to me before.
deMus.5.2.2
Magister: Quid? metrum, quod manifestum est pedum collatione confici, num ex eo rerum genere esse arbitrandum est quod dividi non potest; cum omnino et nihil individuum per tempus tendi queat, et quod ex dividuis pedibus constat, absurdissime individuum putetur?
Teacher: And meter, which is manifestly made by the comparison of feet—must it be judged to be of that kind of thing which cannot be divided, when nothing indivisible can be stretched through time at all, and what consists of divisible feet would most absurdly be thought indivisible?
deMus.5.2.2
Discipulus: Nullo modo hoc genus divisionem recipere abnuerim.
Student: In no way would I refuse that this kind admits division.
deMus.5.2.2
Magister: At omnia quae recipiunt divisionem, nonne pulchriora sunt si eorum partes aliqua parilitate concordent, quam si discordes et dissonae sint?
Teacher: But all things that admit division—are they not more beautiful if their parts agree by some equality than if they are discordant and dissonant?
deMus.5.2.2
Discipulus: Nulli dubium est.
Student: There is no doubt for anyone.
deMus.5.2.2
Magister: Quid? ipsius parilis divisionis qui tandem numerus auctor est? an dualis?
Teacher: And what number, in the end, is the author of equal division itself? Is it two?
deMus.5.2.2
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: It is so.
deMus.5.2.2
Magister: Ut ergo in duas partes concinentes dividi pedem et eo ipso aurem delectare comperimus; si etiam metrum tale inveniamus, nonne caeteris non talibus iure anteponetur?
Teacher: As, then, we have found that a foot is divided into two harmonious parts, and by that very thing delights the ear, if we also find such a meter, will it not rightly be preferred to the others that are not such?
deMus.5.2.2
Discipulus: Assentior.
Student: I agree.
deMus.5.2.2
5. 3. 3. Magister: Recte sane. Quare iam illud responde, cum in omnibus quae aliqua temporis parte metimur, aliud praecedat, aliud subsequatur, aliud incipiat, aliud terminet; nihilne tibi videatur inter partem praecedentem atque incipientem, et illam quae subsequatur ac terminet, interesse oportere.
5. 3. 3. Teacher: Rightly indeed. So now answer this: since in all things that we measure by some part of time, one thing precedes, another follows, one begins, another ends, does it not seem to you that there ought to be some difference between the preceding and beginning part, and that which follows and ends?
deMus.5.3.3
Discipulus: Interesse arbitror.
Student: I judge that there ought to be.
deMus.5.3.3
Magister: Dic ergo quid intersit inter has duas partes versus, quarum una est: Cornua velatarum; altera vero est, vertimus antennarum . Non enim ut idem poeta, obvertimus, sed si ita versus enuntietur: Cornua velatarum vertimus antennarum; nonne saepius repetendo efficitur incertum, quae pars prior sit, quae posterior? Neque enim minus idem stat versus, cum ita profertur: Vertimus antennarum cornua velatarum.
Teacher: Tell me, then, what difference there is between these two parts of a verse, of which one is cornua velatarum, the other vertimus antennarum. For not as the same poet has it, obvertimus, but if the verse is uttered thus, cornua velatarum vertimus antennarum—is it not made uncertain, by repeating it more often, which part is prior and which latter? For the same verse stands no less when it is uttered thus: Vertimus antennarum cornua velatarum.
deMus.5.3.3
Discipulus: Plane incertum fieri video.
Student: I see plainly that it becomes uncertain.
deMus.5.3.3
Magister: Censesne vitandum?
Teacher: Do you judge it should be avoided?
deMus.5.3.3
Discipulus: Censeo.
Student: I do.
deMus.5.3.3
Magister: Vide igitur utrum hic satis vitatum sit. Una pars versus est et ea praecedens: Arma virumque cano; altera subsequens: Troiae qui primus ab oris; quae usque adeo inter se differunt, ut si ordinem vertas, et hoc modo pronunties: Troiae qui primus ab oris, arma virumque cano, alios pedes metiri necesse sit.
Teacher: See, then, whether it is sufficiently avoided here. One part of the verse, and that the preceding one, is arma virumque cano; the other, following, Troiae qui primus ab oris; which differ so far from each other that, if you reverse the order and pronounce it this way, Troiae qui primus ab oris, arma virumque cano, it is necessary to measure other feet.
deMus.5.3.3
Discipulus: Intellego.
Student: I understand.
deMus.5.3.3
Magister: At vide, utrum ista ratio in aliis servata sit. Nam cuius dimensionis est pars incipiens: Arma virumque cano, eiusdem esse agnoscis: Italiam fato. Littora multum ille et. Vi superum saevae. Multa quoque et bello. Inferretque deos. Albanique patres. Ne multa, persequere caeteros quantum voles, has priores partes versuum eiusdem dimensionis invenies, id est quinto semipede articulatas. Rarissime omnino si non hoc ita est; ita ut posteriores sint istae non minus inter se pariles: Troiae qui primus ab oris. Profugus Lavinaque venit. Terris iactatus et alto. Memorem Iunonis ob iram. Passus dum conderet urbem. Latio genus unde Latinum. Atque altae moenia Romae .
Teacher: But see whether this principle is kept in others. For of the same measure as the beginning part arma virumque cano you recognize is Italiam fato. Litora multum ille et. Vi superum saevae. Multa quoque et bello. Inferretque deos. Albanique patres. Not to be long, pursue the rest as far as you wish; you will find these prior parts of verses of the same measure—that is, articulated at the fifth half-foot. Most rarely indeed is this not so; so that the latter parts are no less equal to one another: Troiae qui primus ab oris. Profugus Lavinaque venit. Terris iactatus et alto. Memorem Iunonis ob iram. Passus dum conderet urbem. Latio genus unde Latinum. Atque altae moenia Romae.
deMus.5.3.3
Discipulus: Manifestissimum est.
Student: It is most manifest.
deMus.5.3.3
5. 3. 4. Magister: Quinque igitur et septem semipedes versum heroicum in duo membra partiuntur, quem sex pedibus quaternorum temporum constare notissimum est: et sine concinnitate quidem duorum membrorum, sive ista, sive aliqua alia, versus nullus est. In quibus omnibus hoc ratio demonstravit esse servandum, ut non possit pars prior in posteriore, et posterior in priore loco poni. Quod si aliter fuerit, non iam versus, nisi nominis abusione, dicetur: erit autem rhythmus et metrum, qualia rarissime longis carminibus interponere quae versibus contexuntur, non indecorum est: quale idem ipsum est quod paulo ante commemoravi: Cornua velatarum vertimus antennarum. Quamobrem non mihi versus ex eo appellatus videtur, ut nonnulli putant, quod a certo fine ad eiusdem numeri caput reditur, ut nomen ductum sit ab iis qui se vertunt dum via redeunt; nam hoc illi cum his etiam metris, quae versus non sunt, apparet esse commune: sed magis fortasse a contrario nomen invenit, ut quemadmodum grammatici deponens verbum quod r litteram non deponit, sicuti est, lucror, et, conqueror, appellaverunt; ita quod duobus membris confit, quorum neutrum in alterius loco salva lege numerorum constituitur, quia verti non potest, versus vocetur. Sed utramlibet harum originem vocabuli tu licet probes, vel utramque improbes, et aliam quaeras, aut contemnas mecum totum hoc quaestionis genus; nihil ad hoc tempus pertinet. Cum enim satis res ipsa quae hoc nomine significatur, appareat, non est de verbi stirpe laborandum. Nisi quid habes ad haec.
5. 3. 4. Teacher: Five and seven half-feet, then, divide the heroic verse into two members, which is most well known to consist of six feet of four time-units each; and without a harmony of two members—whether this or some other—there is no verse. In all of which reason has shown that this is to be kept: that the prior part cannot be set in the latter place, nor the latter in the prior. And if it is otherwise, it will no longer be called a verse, except by misuse of the name; it will be a rhythm and meter, such as it is not unbecoming most rarely to interpose in long poems that are woven of verses—such as that very one I mentioned a little before, cornua velatarum vertimus antennarum. Therefore a verse does not seem to me to be named, as some think, from the fact that from a fixed end one returns to the head of the same rhythm, so that the name is drawn from those who turn themselves while they return by the road; for this is seen to be common to them with those meters too which are not verses. But rather perhaps it found its name from the contrary, so that, as the grammarians called a verb that does not lay aside the letter "r" a deponent—as is "lucror" and "conqueror"—so that which is made of two members, neither of which can, the law of rhythms being saved, be set in the place of the other, because it cannot be turned, is called a "verse" (versus). But whichever of these origins of the term you may approve, or disapprove of both and seek another, or despise with me this whole kind of question, it matters nothing for the present. For since the thing signified by this name appears well enough, one need not labor over the root of the word. Unless you have something against this.
deMus.5.3.4
Discipulus: Ego vero nihil, sed perge ad caetera.
Student: For my part nothing; but go on to the rest.
deMus.5.3.4
5. 4. 5. Magister: Sequitur ut de versus termino requiramus. Nam et hunc aliqua differentia notatum atque insignitum esse voluerunt, vel potius ipsa ratio. An tu non arbitraris melius esse ut finis, quo provolutio numeri coercetur, non perturbata temporum aequalitate, tamen emineat; quam si cum caeteris partibus quae finem non faciunt, confundatur?
5. 4. 5. Teacher: It follows that we inquire about the end of the verse. For they wished this too to be marked and distinguished by some difference—or rather reason itself did. Or do you not judge it better that the end, by which the rolling-on of rhythm is restrained, should stand out—the equality of time-units not being disturbed—rather than be confused with the other parts that do not make an end?
deMus.5.4.5
Discipulus: Quis dubitat hoc esse melius, quod est evidentius?
Student: Who doubts that this is better, which is more evident?
deMus.5.4.5
Magister: Considera ergo, utrum recte insignem finem versus heroici spondeum pedem quidam esse voluerint. Nam in quinque aliis locis vel hunc vel dactylum licet ponere; in fine autem non nisi spondeum; nam quod trochaeum putant, propter indifferentiam fit ultimae syllabae, de qua in metris satis locuti sumus. Sed secundum hos iambicus senarius aut non erit versus, aut erit sine ista finis eminentia; utrumque autem absurdum est. Nam neque quisquam umquam, sive doctissimorum hominum, sive mediocriter, vel etiam tenuiter eruditorum versum esse dubitavit: Phaselus ille quem videtis hospites ; et quidquid in verbis est tali numerositate formatum: et gravissimi auctores eo quo peritissimi, nullum sine insigni fine versum putandum esse censuerunt.
Teacher: Consider, then, whether some have rightly wished the marked end of the heroic verse to be a spondee foot. For in five other places one may set either this or a dactyl; but at the end only a spondee; for as for the trochee they suppose, it comes from the indifference of the last syllable, of which we have spoken enough in the meters. But according to these the iambic senarius will either not be a verse, or be without that prominence of the end; and both are absurd. For no one ever, whether of the most learned men or of the moderately or even slightly educated, has doubted that this is a verse: Phaselus ille quem videtis hospites; and whatever in words is formed with such rhythm: and the gravest authors, in proportion as they are the most skilled, have judged that no verse is to be thought to be without a marked end.
deMus.5.4.5
5. 4. 6. Discipulus: Verum dicis. Quare aliam termini huius notam quaerendam esse autumo, non hanc quae in spondeo ponitur approbandam.
5. 4. 6. Student: You speak truly. So I claim that another mark of this end must be sought, and that this one which is set in the spondee is not to be approved.
deMus.5.4.6
Magister: Quid hoc? num dubitas, quaecumque ista sit, aut in pedis esse, aut in temporis differentia, aut in utroque?
Teacher: And this—do you doubt that, whatever it is, it is either in a difference of foot, or in a difference of time, or in both?
deMus.5.4.6
Discipulus: Qualiter potest?
Student: How can it be?
deMus.5.4.6
Magister: Quid tandem horum trium probas? Ego enim, quoniam idipsum finire versum ne longius quam oportet excurrat, non pertinet nisi ad temporis modum; non arbitror aliunde istam notam debere sumi quam ex tempore. An tibi aliud placet?
Teacher: Which, in the end, of these three do you approve? For I—since to end the verse itself, that it may not run out longer than it ought, pertains to nothing but the measure of time—do not judge that this mark ought to be taken from anything other than time. Or does something else please you?
deMus.5.4.6
Discipulus: Imo assentior.
Student: On the contrary, I agree.
deMus.5.4.6
Magister: Videsne etiam illud, cum tempus hic differentiam habere non possit, nisi quod aliud est longius, aliud brevius; quia cum versus finitur, id agitur ne pergat longius, in breviore tempore notam finis esse oportere?
Teacher: Do you see this too: since time here cannot have a difference except that one is longer and another shorter, because when a verse is ended it is brought about that it not go on longer, the mark of the end ought to be in the shorter time?
deMus.5.4.6
Discipulus: Video quidem: sed quo pertinet quod additum est, "hic"?
Student: I do see it; but to what does the added word "here" pertain?
deMus.5.4.6
Magister: Eo scilicet quod non ubique temporis differentiam in sola brevitate ac longitudine accipimus. An tu aestatis ac hiemis differentiam, aut esse temporis negas, aut in spatio potius breviore vel longiore, ac non in vi frigoris calorisque constituis, vel humoris et siccitatis, et si quid tale aliud?
Teacher: To this, of course: that we do not everywhere take a difference of time as lying only in shortness and length. Or do you deny that the difference between summer and winter is a difference of time, or set it rather in a shorter or longer span, and not in the force of cold and heat, or of moisture and dryness, and any such other thing?
deMus.5.4.6
Discipulus: Iam intellego, et hanc quam quaerimus termini notam, a temporis brevitate ducendam esse consentio.
Student: Now I understand, and I agree that this mark of the end which we seek is to be drawn from the shortness of time.
deMus.5.4.6
5. 4. 7. Magister: Attende igitur hunc versum: Roma, Roma, cerne quanta sit deum benignitas, qui trochaicus dicitur, et metire illum, atque responde quod inveneris de membris eius et numero pedum.
5. 4. 7. Teacher: Attend, then, to this verse, Roma, Roma, cerne quanta sit deum benignitas, which is called trochaic, and measure it, and answer what you find about its members and the number of feet.
deMus.5.4.7
Discipulus: De pedibus quidem facile responderim: liquet enim eos septem et semis esse. De membris autem non satis aperta res est; multis enim locis partem orationis finiri video: verumtamen opinor esse istam partitionem in octavo semipede, ut praecedens membrum sit: Roma, Roma, cerne quanta; subsequens autem, sit deum benignitas.
Student: About the feet I would answer easily: for it is clear that they are seven and a half. But about the members the matter is not quite plain, for I see a part of speech ended in many places; yet I think this division is at the eighth half-foot, so that the preceding member is Roma, Roma, cerne quanta, and the following sit deum benignitas.
deMus.5.4.7
Magister: Quot semipedes habet?
Teacher: How many half-feet has it?
deMus.5.4.7
Discipulus: Septem.
Student: Seven.
deMus.5.4.7
Magister: Ipsa ratio te duxit omnino. Cum enim nihil sit aequalitate melius, eamque in dividendo appetere oporteat; si minus potuerit obtineri, vicinitas eius quaerenda est, ne ab ea longius aberremus. Itaque cum hic versus omnes quindecim semipedes habeat, non potuit aequius quam in octo et septem dividi: nam eadem est in septem et octo vicinitas. Sed ita non servaretur nota finis in tempore breviore, ut eam servandam ratio ipsa praecipit: nam si talis versus esset: Roma cerne quanta sit tibi deum benignitas, ut inciperet membrum in his semipedibus septem: Roma cerne quanta sit, et in his octo alterum terminaretur, tibi deum benignitas; non posset versum semipes claudere: octo enim semipedes quatuor integros pedes faciunt. Simul incideret alia deformitas, ut non eosdem pedes in membro extremo quos in primo metiremur, et prius membrum potius finiretur nota brevioris temporis, id est semipede, quam posterius, cui hoc finis iure debetur. Nam in illo tres trochaei semis: Roma cerne quanta sit: in hoc quatuor iambi scanderentur, tibi deum benignitas. Nunc vero et trochaeos in utroque membro scandimus, et semipede versus clauditur, ut spatii brevioris notam terminus teneat. Nam sunt in priore quatuor: Roma, Roma cerne quanta; in posteriore autem tres semis, sit deum benignitas. An contradicere aliquid paras?
Teacher: Reason itself has led you entirely. For since nothing is better than equality, and one ought to seek it in dividing, if it cannot be obtained, its nearness must be sought, lest we stray too far from it. And so, since this verse has fifteen half-feet in all, it could not be divided more equally than into eight and seven; for the nearness in seven and eight is the same. But thus the mark of the end would not be kept in the shorter time, as reason itself prescribes it must be kept; for if the verse were such, Roma cerne quanta sit tibi deum benignitas, so that the member began in these seven half-feet, Roma cerne quanta sit, and the other were terminated in these eight, tibi deum benignitas, a half-foot could not close the verse: for eight half-feet make four whole feet. At the same time another deformity would befall: that we would measure not the same feet in the last member as in the first, and the prior member would rather be ended by the mark of the shorter time—that is, a half-foot—than the latter, to which this end is rightly owed. For in that, three trochees and a half, Roma cerne quanta sit; in this, four iambs would be scanned, tibi deum benignitas. But as it is, we both scan trochees in each member, and the verse is closed by a half-foot, so that the end holds the mark of the shorter span. For there are in the prior four, Roma, Roma cerne quanta; but in the latter three and a half, sit deum benignitas. Or are you preparing to object something?
deMus.5.4.7
Discipulus: Nihil omnino, et libenter assentior.
Student: Nothing at all, and I gladly agree.
deMus.5.4.7
5. 4. 8. Magister: Teneamus igitur has leges inconcussas, si placet, ut neque membrorum duorum tendens ad aequalitatem partitio versui desit, sicuti huic deest: Cornua velatarum obvertimus antennarum. Neque ipsa aequalitas membrorum conversibilem, ut ita dicam, faciat partitionem, ut in hoc facit: Cornua velatarum vertimus antennarum. Neque cum ista vitatur conversio, nimis a se membra discedant, sed quantum possunt proximis numeris prope aequentur, ne dicamus haec ita posse dividi, ut octo semipedes praecedant: Cornua velatarum vertimus; et quatuor subsequantur, id est, antennarum. Nec membrum posterius paris numeri semipedes habeat, sicuti est, tibi deum benignitas, ne pleno pede versus finitus non habeat terminum breviore tempore notatum.
5. 4. 8. Teacher: Let us, then, hold these laws unshaken, if you please: that neither should the division of two members tending toward equality be lacking to a verse, as it is lacking to this, cornua velatarum obvertimus antennarum; nor should the equality of the members itself make a reversible, so to speak, division, as it does in this, cornua velatarum vertimus antennarum; nor, when this reversal is avoided, should the members depart too far from each other, but be as nearly equal as they can by the nearest numbers—lest we say these can be divided so that eight half-feet precede, cornua velatarum vertimus, and four follow, that is, antennarum. Nor should the latter member have an even number of half-feet, as is tibi deum benignitas, lest the verse, ended by a full foot, should not have an end marked by a shorter time.
deMus.5.4.8
Discipulus: Habeo iam ista, et mando memoriae quantum valeo.
Student: I have these now, and I commit them to memory as far as I can.
deMus.5.4.8
5. 5. 9. Magister: Quoniam igitur iam tenemus, non debere versum finiri pleno pede, quomodo nobis heroicum versum metiendum putas, ut et membrorum lex illa servetur, et haec termini nota?
5. 5. 9. Teacher: Since, then, we now hold that a verse ought not to be ended by a full foot, how do you think the heroic verse is to be measured by us, so that both that law of members is kept and this mark of the end?
deMus.5.5.9
Discipulus: Video duodecim esse semipedes; et quia propter illam conversionem vitandam senos semipedes habere membra non possunt; neque a se longe oportet discedere ut sint tres et novem, aut novem et tres; neque paris numeri semipedes posteriori membro dandi sunt ut sint octo et quatuor, aut quatuor et octo, ne pleno pede versus finiatur: in quinque et septem, aut septem et quinque divisio facienda est. Nam et hi numeri sunt ambo impares proximi, et certe propinquius sibi accedunt membra quam in quaternario et octonario numeris accederent. Quod ut firmissimum teneam, video partem orationis in quinto semipede semper aut pene semper terminari, ut est in primo Virgilii versu: Arma virumque cano: et in secundo: Italiam fato: et in tertio: Littora multum ille et: in quarto item: Vi superum saevae: atque ita deinceps in toto pene carmine.
Student: I see that there are twelve half-feet; and because, to avoid that reversal, the members cannot have six half-feet each; and they ought not to depart far from each other, so as to be three and nine, or nine and three; nor should an even number of half-feet be given to the latter member, so as to be eight and four, or four and eight, lest the verse end by a full foot: the division must be made into five and seven, or seven and five. For both these numbers are the nearest odd ones, and the members certainly come closer to each other than they would in the numbers four and eight. And that I may hold this most firmly, I see that a part of speech is always or almost always terminated at the fifth half-foot, as in Virgil's first verse, arma virumque cano; and in the second, Italiam fato; and in the third, litora multum ille et; in the fourth likewise, vi superum saevae; and so on through almost the whole poem.
deMus.5.5.9
Magister: Verum dicis: sed videndum tibi est, quos pedes metiaris, ut nihil superiorum legum iam inconcusse constitutarum violare audeas.
Teacher: You speak truly; but you must see what feet you measure, so that you dare to violate none of the earlier laws now established unshaken.
deMus.5.5.9
Discipulus: Quamquam mihi satis ratio appareat, tamen novitate conturbor. Non enim solemus in hoc genere nisi spondeum pedem et dactylum scandere, quod nemo fere est tam indoctus quin audierit, etiamsi minus id facere possit. Hanc ergo pervulgatissimam consuetudinem, nunc si sequi voluero, lex illa termini est abroganda; praecedens enim membrum semipede clauderetur, posterius autem pleno pede; quod contra esse debuit. Sed quia illam legem iniquissimum est tollere, et in numeris iam didici posse fieri, ut a non pleno pede ordiamur; restat ut non hic dactylum cum spondeo, sed anapaestum locari iudicemus; ut incipiat versus a longa una syllaba, deinde duo pedes vel spondei vel anapaesti vel alterni membrum superius terminent; tum tres rursus alterum vel anapaesti vel quolibet loco spondeus, sive omnibus, et in fine una syllaba, qua versus legitime terminatur. Probasne et id?
Student: Although the reasoning is plain enough to me, yet I am confused by its novelty. For we are not accustomed in this kind to scan anything but the spondee foot and the dactyl, which there is almost no one so unlearned that he has not heard, even if he is less able to do it. So this most widespread custom, if I now wish to follow it, that law of the end must be abrogated; for the preceding member would be closed by a half-foot, but the latter by a full foot, which ought to have been the contrary. But because it is most unjust to do away with that law, and in numbers I have already learned that it can happen that we begin from a not-full foot, it remains that we judge not a dactyl with a spondee, but an anapest, to be set here; so that the verse begins from one long syllable, then two feet, either spondees or anapests or alternating, terminate the upper member; then again three—either anapests, or a spondee in any place, or in all—and at the end one syllable, by which the verse is lawfully terminated. Do you approve this too?
deMus.5.5.9
5. 5. 10. Magister: Ego quoque rectissimum esse iudico, sed non facile ista populo persuadentur. Tanta enim est vis consuetudinis, ut ea inveterata, si falsa opinione genita est, nihil sit inimicius veritati. Namque ad faciendum versum nihil interesse intellegis, utrum in hoc genere anapaestus cum spondeo, an dactylus collocetur: ad metiendum tamen rationabiliter, quod non aurium sed mentis est proprium, vera et certa ratione hoc, non irrationabili opinione discernitur: neque nunc a nobis primum inventa est, sed multo est hac inveterata consuetudine antiquius animadversa. Quare si eos legant qui vel in graeca vel in latina lingua disciplinae huius doctissimi fuerunt, non mirabuntur nimis qui forte hoc audierint: quamquam pudet imbecillitatis, cum rationi roborandae hominum auctoritas quaeritur, cum ipsius rationis ac veritatis auctoritate, quae profecto est omni homine melior, nihil deberet esse praestantius. Non enim ut in producenda corripiendave syllaba non nisi auctoritatem veterum hominum quaerimus, ut quemadmodum sunt usi verbis quibus nos quoque loquimur, ita et nos utamur; quia in huiuscemodi re et nullam observationem sequi desidiae est, et novam instituere licentiae: ita in metiendo versu inveterata voluntas hominum, ac non aeterna rerum ratio cogitanda est, cum et moderatam eius longitudinem prius naturaliter aure sentiamus, deinde approbemus rationabili consideratione numerorum, et eum insigni fine claudendum esse iudicet quisquis iudicat certius eum quam caetera metra esse finiendum, eumque finem in breviore tempore notandum esse manifestum sit; siquidem temporis longitudinem coercet et frenat quodammodo.
5. 5. 10. Teacher: I too judge it most right; but these things are not easily persuaded to the people. For so great is the force of custom that, once ingrained, if it is born of a false opinion, nothing is more hostile to truth. For you understand that for making a verse it matters nothing whether in this kind an anapest is set with a spondee or a dactyl; yet for measuring rationally—which belongs not to the ears but to the mind—this is discerned by a true and certain reason, not by an irrational opinion; nor has it now been first found by us, but it was observed much earlier than this ingrained custom. So if they read those who were most learned in this discipline, whether in the Greek or in the Latin tongue, those who happen to hear this will not wonder too much—although it is shameful weakness that, to strengthen reason, the authority of men is sought, when nothing ought to be more excellent than the authority of reason and truth itself, which is surely better than any man. For it is not as in lengthening or shortening a syllable, where we seek nothing but the authority of the ancient men, so that, as they used the words by which we too speak, so we too may use them—because in a matter of this kind both to follow no observation is sloth, and to establish a new one is license; so in measuring a verse the ingrained will of men, and not the eternal reason of things, is to be considered, since we both naturally feel its moderate length first by the ear, then approve it by a rational consideration of numbers, and whoever judges that it must be ended by a marked end judges that it must be ended more surely than the other meters, and it is manifest that this end must be marked in a shorter time, since it restrains and bridles, in a way, the length of time.
deMus.5.5.10
5. 6. 11. Discipulus: Membra quidem huius in quinque et septem semipedes video distributa, ut prius sit: Phaselus ille; posterius autem, quem videtis, hospites: pedes vero iambos cerno.
5. 6. 11. Student: I see the members of this one distributed into five and seven half-feet, so that the prior is Phaselus ille, the latter quem videtis, hospites; but I discern the feet to be iambs.
deMus.5.6.11
Magister: Quaero, nihilne caves pede pleno versum terminare?
Teacher: I ask, do you guard against nothing in terminating the verse with a full foot?
deMus.5.6.11
Discipulus: Verum dicis, et ubi fuerim nescio. Quis enim non videret sicut in heroico exordiendum esse a semipede? quod cum in hoc genere fit, non iam iambis, sed trochaeis versum metimur, ut eum legitime semipes claudat.
Student: You speak truly, and I do not know where I was. For who would not see that, as in the heroic, one must begin from a half-foot? Which, when it is done in this kind, we measure the verse not now by iambs but by trochees, so that a half-foot lawfully closes it.
deMus.5.6.11
5. 6. 12. Magister: Ita est ut dicis: sed vide quid tibi de hoc respondendum putes, quem asclepiadaeum vocant: Maecenas atavis edite regibus . Nam pars orationis in sexta syllaba terminatur, neque inconstanter, sed in omnibus fere huius generis versibus. Itaque eius primum est membrum: Maecenas atavis: secundum, edite regibus, quod quanam ratione fiat dubitari potest. Si enim metiaris in hoc pedes quaternorum temporum, erunt quinque in priore, in posteriore autem membro quatuor semipedes: lex autem vetat membrum posterius pari numero constare semipedum, ne pleno pede versus terminetur. Restat ut pedes consideremus senorum temporum, ex quo fit ut membrum utrumque ternis semipedibus constet. Nam ut integro pede praecedens membrum finiatur, a duabus longis incipiendum est: deinde totus choriambus versum dividit, ut sequente etiam alio choriambo membrum posterius inchoetur, claudente versum semipede in duabus brevibus syllabis: tot enim tempora cum spondeo in capite locato, implent sex temporum pedem. Nisi quid habes ad haec.
5. 6. 12. Teacher: It is as you say; but see what you think you should answer about this one, which they call asclepiadean: Maecenas atavis edite regibus. For a part of speech is terminated at the sixth syllable, and not inconsistently, but in almost all verses of this kind. So its first member is Maecenas atavis, the second edite regibus, which by what principle it comes about can be doubted. For if you measure feet of four time-units in it, there will be five in the prior, but in the latter member four half-feet; but the law forbids that the latter member consist of an even number of half-feet, lest the verse be terminated by a full foot. It remains that we consider feet of six time-units, whence it comes about that each member consists of three half-feet. For, that the preceding member may be ended by a whole foot, one must begin from two longs; then a whole choriamb divides the verse, so that, another choriamb following too, the latter member is begun, a half-foot closing the verse in two short syllables: for so many time-units, with a spondee set at the head, fill out a foot of six time-units. Unless you have something against this.
deMus.5.6.12
Discipulus: Nihil prorsus.
Student: Nothing at all.
deMus.5.6.12
Magister: Placet ergo, totidem semipedibus constare utrumque membrum.
Teacher: Does it please you, then, that each member consists of the same number of half-feet?
deMus.5.6.12
Discipulus: Cur non placeat? Neque enim metuenda est hic illa conversio, quia posito posteriore membro in praecedentis loco, ita ut quod est primum, secundum fiat, non eadem lex manebit pedum. Quapropter nulla causa est, cur idem semipedum numerus in hoc genere membris negetur; cum sine ullo conversionis vitio parilitas ista possit teneri, finis etiam insignioris lege servata, cum versus non pleno pede terminatur, quod constantissime servandum esse perplacet.
Student: Why should it not please me? For that reversal is not to be feared here, because, the latter member being set in the place of the preceding, so that what is first becomes second, the same law of feet will not remain. Therefore there is no cause why the same number of half-feet should be denied to the members in this kind, since this equality can be kept without any fault of reversal, the law of a more marked end being kept too, when the verse is not terminated by a full foot, which it pleases me well should most constantly be kept.
deMus.5.6.12
5. 7. 13. Magister: Rem ipsam omnino vidisti: quare iam quoniam comperit ratio versuum esse duo genera, unum in quo idem numerus semipedum, aliud in quo dispar in membris sit; diligenter consideremus, si placet, quonam modo ista imparilitas semipedum ad quamdam parilitatem referatur, obscuriore aliquantum, sed sane subtilissima ratione numerorum. Nam quaero ex te, cum duo et tria dicam, quot numeros dicam.
5. 7. 13. Teacher: You have seen the thing itself entirely; so now, since reason has found that there are two kinds of verse, one in which the number of half-feet in the members is the same, the other in which it is unequal, let us carefully consider, if you please, in what way this inequality of half-feet is referred to a certain equality—by a somewhat more obscure, but indeed most subtle, reasoning of numbers. For I ask you: when I say two and three, how many numbers do I say?
deMus.5.7.13
Discipulus: Duos scilicet.
Student: Two, of course.
deMus.5.7.13
Magister: Ergo et duo unus, et tria unus est numerus; et quemlibet alium dixerimus.
Teacher: So both two is one, and three is one number; and whatever other we may name.
deMus.5.7.13
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: It is so.
deMus.5.7.13
Magister: Nonne tibi ex hoc videtur unum cum quolibet numero non absurde posse conferri? Siquidem unum duo esse non possemus dicere; duo autem unum esse quodammodo: et item tria et quatuor unum esse, non falso dici potest.
Teacher: Does it not seem to you from this that one can not absurdly be compared with any number? Since we could not say that one is two, but that two is in a way one; and likewise it can be said, not falsely, that three and four are one.
deMus.5.7.13
Discipulus: Assentior.
Student: I agree.
deMus.5.7.13
Magister: Attende aliud: dic mihi, duo ter ducta, quid faciunt in summa?
Teacher: Attend to another thing: tell me, two taken three times, what do they make in sum?
deMus.5.7.13
Discipulus: Sex.
Student: Six.
deMus.5.7.13
Magister: Num sex et tria totidem sunt?
Teacher: Are six and three the same amount?
deMus.5.7.13
Discipulus: Nullo modo.
Student: In no way.
deMus.5.7.13
Magister: Nunc tria quater ducas velim, summamque respondeas:
Teacher: Now I would have you take three four times, and answer the sum.
deMus.5.7.13
Discipulus: Duodecim.
Student: Twelve.
deMus.5.7.13
Magister: Vides item duodecim plures esse quam quatuor.
Teacher: You see likewise that twelve is more than four.
deMus.5.7.13
Discipulus: Et longe sane.
Student: And far more indeed.
deMus.5.7.13
Magister: Iam ne immorer, figenda regula est: A duobus, et deinceps quoslibet numeros duos constitueris, minor per maiorem multiplicatus, eum excedat necesse est.
Teacher: Now, not to linger, the rule must be fixed: from two onward, whatever two numbers you set up, the lesser multiplied by the greater must necessarily exceed it.
deMus.5.7.13
Discipulus: Quis hoc dubitaverit? Quid enim tam parvum in plurali numero quam duo? quem tamen numerum si millies duxero, ita excedet mille, ut duplum fiat.
Student: Who would doubt this? For what is so small in the plural as two? Yet if I take this number a thousand times, it will so exceed a thousand that it becomes double.
deMus.5.7.13
Magister: Verum dicis: sed constitue unum, et quemlibet deinde maiorem numerum, et quemadmodum in illis faciebamus, minorem per maiorem multiplica, num eodem modo maior superabitur?
Teacher: You speak truly; but set up one, and then any greater number, and, as we were doing in those, multiply the lesser by the greater—will the greater be surpassed in the same way?
deMus.5.7.13
Discipulus: Non plane, sed maiori minor aequabitur. Nam unum bis, duo; et unum decies, decem; et unum millies, mille; et per quemlibet alium numerum multiplicavero, unum necesse est aequetur.
Student: Not at all; rather, the lesser will be made equal to the greater. For one twice is two; and one ten times, ten; and one a thousand times, a thousand; and by whatever other number I multiply, one must be made equal.
deMus.5.7.13
Magister: Habet ergo unum cum caeteris numeris ius quoddam aequalitatis; non modo quod quicumque numerus est, sed etiam quod toties ductus tantumdem facit.
Teacher: One, then, has a certain right of equality with the other numbers; not only that it is a number, whatever it is, but also that, taken so many times, it makes just as much.
deMus.5.7.13
Discipulus: Manifestissimum est.
Student: It is most manifest.
deMus.5.7.13
5. 7. 14. Magister: Age nunc, refer animum ad semipedum numeros, quibus in versu fiunt membra inaequalia, et miram quamdam aequalitatem ista quam tractavimus ratione reperies. Nam, ut opinor, versus minimus inaequali semipedum numero in membris est duobus, habens semipedes quatuor et tres, ut in hoc: Hospes ille quem vides; cuius primum membrum quod est: Hospes ille, secari aequaliter potest in duas partes binorum semipedum: secundum autem quod est, quem vides, ita dividitur, ut una pars duos semipedes habeat, altera unum; quod ita est, quasi duo et duo sint, iure illo aequalitatis, de quo satis egimus, quod habet unum cum omnibus numeris. Ex quo fit ut ista divisione tantum sit quodammodo superius membrum quantum posterius. Itaque ubi fuerint quatuor et quinque semipedes, sicut hoc est: Roma, Roma, cerne quanta sit; non ita probatur, et propterea metrum erit potius quam versus, quia ita sunt membra inaequalia ut ad nullam aequalitatis legem sectione aliqua possint referri. Cernis quippe, ut opinor, superioris membri quatuor semipedes: Roma, Roma, in binos posse discedere: quinque autem posteriores, cerne quanta sit, in duos et tres semipedes dividi; ubi nullo iure apparet aequalitas. Neque enim possunt aliquo modo tantum valere quinque semipedes propter duos et tres, quantum quatuor valent; quomodo invenimus superius in breviore versu tantum valere tres semipedes propter unum et duo, quantum quatuor valent. An aliquid non es assecutus, aut non placet?
5. 7. 14. Teacher: Come now, turn your mind to the numbers of half-feet by which the members in a verse are made unequal, and you will find, by this reasoning we have treated, a certain wonderful equality. For, I think, the smallest verse with an unequal number of half-feet in two members has four and three half-feet, as in this: Hospes ille quem vides; whose first member, which is Hospes ille, can be cut equally into two parts of two half-feet each; but the second, which is quem vides, is so divided that one part has two half-feet, the other one; which is as though they were two and two, by that right of equality of which we have treated enough, which one has with all numbers. From which it comes about that, by this division, the upper member is in a way just as much as the latter. And so where there are four and five half-feet, as in this, Roma, Roma, cerne quanta sit, it is not so approved, and therefore it will be a meter rather than a verse, because the members are so unequal that they can by no section be referred to any law of equality. For you discern, I think, that the four half-feet of the upper member, Roma, Roma, can be parted into two each; but the five latter ones, cerne quanta sit, are divided into two and three half-feet, where equality appears by no right. For the five half-feet cannot in any way be worth as much, on account of the two and three, as four are worth; in the way we found earlier in a shorter verse that three half-feet are worth as much, on account of the one and two, as four are worth. Or have you not followed something, or does it not please you?
deMus.5.7.14
Discipulus: Imo vero et manifesta omnia et rata sunt.
Student: On the contrary, all is manifest and settled.
deMus.5.7.14
5. 7. 15. Magister: Age, nunc quinque et tres semipedes consideremus, qualis est ille versiculus: Phaselus ille quem vides: et videamus quomodo ista inaequalitas aliquo aequalitatis iure teneatur: nam hoc genus non solum metrum, sed etiam versum esse, omnes consentiunt. Itaque cum primum membrum in semipedes duos et tres secueris, et secundum in duos et unum; coniungas particulas quas in utroque pares inveneris, quia et in primo membro habemus duo, et in secundo restant duae particulae, una in tribus semipedibus de priore membro, altera in uno de posteriore. Has ergo et sociabiliter iungimus, quia unum cum omnibus habet societatem; et in summa unum et tria, quatuor fiunt, quod est tantumdem quantum duo et duo. Per hanc igitur sectionem etiam quinque et tres semipedes ad concordiam rediguntur. Sed responde, utrum intellexeris.
5. 7. 15. Teacher: Come, now let us consider five and three half-feet, such as that little verse Phaselus ille quem vides; and let us see how this inequality is held by some right of equality: for all agree that this kind is not only a meter but also a verse. So when you have cut the first member into two and three half-feet, and the second into two and one, you join the little parts that you find equal in each, because we have two in the first member, and in the second there remain two little parts, one in the three half-feet of the prior member, the other in the one of the latter. These, then, we both join sociably, because one has fellowship with all, and in sum one and three make four, which is just as much as two and two. By this section, then, even five and three half-feet are brought to concord. But answer whether you have understood.
deMus.5.7.15
Discipulus: Ita vero, et admodum probo.
Student: Indeed, and I quite approve.
deMus.5.7.15
5. 8. 16. Magister: Sequitur ut de quinque et septem semipedibus disseramus, quales sunt versus duo illi nobilissimi, heroicus et quem iambicum vulgo vocant, etiam ipse senarius. Nam: Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primus ab oris, ita dividitur ut primum eius membrum sit: Arma virumque cano, qui sunt quinque; et secundum: Troiae qui primus ab oris, qui sunt septem semipedes. Et: Phaselus ille quem videtis, hospites, primum membrum habet: Phaselus ille, in semipedibus quinque; secundum in septem, quem videtis, hospites. Sed tanta illa nobilitas in lege ista aequalitatis laborat. Cum enim superiores quinque semipedes in duos et tres diviserimus, posteriores autem septem in tres et quatuor; congruent sibi quidem particulae ternorum semipedum: sed si duae reliquae ita convenirent, ut una earum constaret uno semipede, alia quinque; coniungerentur lege illa qua unum cum omnibus numeris coniungi potest, et in summa sex fierent, quod sunt etiam tres et tres: nunc vero quia duo et quatuor inveniuntur, summam quidem reddent senariam; sed nullo aequalitatis iure tantum valent duo quantum quatuor, ut in huiuscemodi quasi necessitudine copulentur. Nisi forte quis dixerit satis esse ad aliquam regulam parilitatis, quod ut tres et tres, ita duo et quatuor sex fiunt. Cui rationi repugnandum non arbitror: est enim et haec aliqua aequalitas. Sed illud nollem ut maiore congruentia quinque et tres quam quinque et septem semipedes convenirent. Non enim tantum nomen est illius versus quantum istorum; et vides in illo non modo tantam summam inventam collatis uno et tribus, quanta est in duobus et duobus; sed etiam multo concordiores partes esse, cum iunguntur unum et tria, propter illam unius cum caeteris omnibus numeris amicitiam, quam cum duo et quatuor copulantur, sicut in istis est. An tibi aliquid obscurum est?
5. 8. 16. Teacher: It follows that we discuss the five and seven half-feet, such as those two most famous verses, the heroic and the one commonly called iambic, the senarius itself. For Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primus ab oris is so divided that its first member is arma virumque cano, which is five, and the second Troiae qui primus ab oris, which is seven half-feet. And Phaselus ille quem videtis, hospites has its first member Phaselus ille in five half-feet, the second in seven, quem videtis, hospites. But that great fame labors under this law of equality. For when we have divided the upper five half-feet into two and three, but the latter seven into three and four, the little parts of three half-feet will indeed agree with each other; but if the two remaining ones so agreed that one of them consisted of one half-foot, the other of five, they would be joined by that law by which one can be joined with all numbers, and in sum would make six, which three and three also are; but as it is, because two and four are found, they will indeed yield a sum of six, but by no right of equality are two worth as much as four, so that they may be coupled in this kind of, so to speak, kinship. Unless perhaps someone says it is enough for some rule of equality that, as three and three, so two and four make six. Against which reasoning I do not think one should fight: for this too is some equality. But I would not wish that five and three half-feet should agree by greater harmony than five and seven. For the name of that verse is not so great as of these; and you see that in that one not only is there found, comparing one and three, as great a sum as is in two and two, but also that the parts are much more concordant when one and three are joined, because of that friendship of one with all the other numbers, than when two and four are coupled, as is the case in these. Or is anything obscure to you?
deMus.5.8.16
Discipulus: Nihil prorsus. Sed nescio quomodo me offendit, quod isti senarii cum sint celebratiores caeteris generibus, et principatum quemdam in versibus habere dicantur, aliquid in membrorum concordia minus habent, quam illi famae obscurioris versus.
Student: Nothing at all. But somehow it offends me that these senarii, though they are more celebrated than the other kinds, and are said to hold a certain primacy among verses, have something less in the concord of their members than those verses of more obscure fame.
deMus.5.8.16
Magister: Bono animo esto: nam ego tibi tantam in illis ostendam concordiam, quantam soli ex omnibus habere meruerunt, ut videas, non iniuria eos esse praelatos. Sed quia ipsa tractatio aliquanto est longior, quamvis omnino iucundior, restare nobis debet extrema, ut cum de caeteris, quantum satis videbitur, disputaverimus, iam omni cura liberati, ad horum scrutanda penetralia veniamus.
Teacher: Be of good cheer: for I will show you in them as great a concord as they alone of all have deserved to have, so that you may see they were not preferred without cause. But because the treatment itself is somewhat longer, though altogether more pleasant, it ought to remain for us as the last; so that when we have discussed the others as far as seems enough, then, freed from all care, we may come to scrutinize the inner shrines of these.
deMus.5.8.16
Discipulus: Mihi vero placet: sed iam vellem ut ista quae priora suscepimus, explicata essent, ut iam illud audirem commodius.
Student: It does please me; but now I would wish that those earlier things we undertook were explained, so that I might hear that more conveniently.
deMus.5.8.16
Magister: Istorum comparatione quae ante disseruimus, fiunt illa dulciora quae exspectas.
Teacher: By comparison with these that we discussed before, those things you await become sweeter.
deMus.5.8.16
5. 9. 17. Discipulus: Video primum membrum posse in partes distribui, quae habeant ternos semipedes, secundum in tres et quatuor. Quare iunctis aequalibus fiunt sex semipedes, tres vero et quatuor septem sunt, et non aequantur illi numero. Sed si duo et duo in ea parte ubi quatuor sunt, et duo et unum in ea parte ubi tres sunt, consideremus, iunctis partibus quae binos habent, fit summa quaternaria: iunctis autem illis quarum in una duo sunt, in alia unum, si etiam ista tamquam sint quatuor accipiamus, propter unius cum caeteris numeris concordiam, octo simul fiunt, magisque excedunt summam senariam, quam cum septem fuissent.
5. 9. 17. Student: I see that the first member can be distributed into parts that have three half-feet each, the second into three and four. So, the equal ones being joined, six half-feet come about; but three and four are seven, and are not made equal to that number. But if we consider two and two in that part where there are four, and two and one in that part where there are three, then, the parts that have two each being joined, the sum is four; but those of which one has two, the other one, being joined—if we take these too as though they were four, because of the concord of one with the other numbers—make eight together, and exceed the sum of six more than when they had been seven.
deMus.5.9.17
5. 9. 18. Magister: Ita est, ut dicis: et ideo isto genere copulationis a lege versuum separato, attende ut ordo postulat, in ea nunc membra, quorum primum habet octo semipedes, septem secundum. Ista vero copulatio habet quod quaerimus. Nam praecedentis membri partem dimidiam cum parte subsequentis maiore, quae dimidiae proxima est, iungens, quoniam quaterni semipedes sunt, octonarii numeri summam facio. Restant ergo quatuor semipedes de priore, tres de posteriore membro. Duo inde, et duo hinc copulati, fiunt quatuor. Duo rursus inde residui, et unus hinc, ad legem illius convenientiae copulati, qua unum reliquis par est, quodammodo sumuntur pro quatuor. Ita iam octonarius superiori octonario congruit.
5. 9. 18. Teacher: It is as you say; and therefore, this kind of coupling being separated from the law of verses, attend, as the order demands, now to those members of which the first has eight half-feet, the second seven. This coupling indeed has what we seek. For joining the half part of the preceding member with the larger part of the following, which is nearest to the half—since they are four half-feet each—I make the sum of the number eight. There remain, then, four half-feet of the prior, three of the latter member. Two from here and two from there, coupled, make four. Two again left over from here, and one from there, coupled by the law of that agreement by which one is equal to the rest, are in a way taken for four. So now eight agrees with the upper eight.
deMus.5.9.18
Discipulus: Sed cur huius exemplum non audio?
Student: But why do I not hear an example of this?
deMus.5.9.18
Magister: Quia saepe commemoratum est: tamen ne suo loco praetermissum putes, ipsum est: Roma, Roma, cerne quanta sit deum benignitas; vel hoc etiam: Optimus beatus ille qui procul negotio.
Teacher: Because it has been mentioned often; yet, lest you think it omitted in its place, it is this: Roma, Roma, cerne quanta sit deum benignitas; or this too: Optimus beatus ille qui procul negotio.
deMus.5.9.18
5. 9. 19. Discipulus: Facilis est cognitu ista congruentia: superius enim membrum in quatuor et quinque, posterius in tres et quatuor semipedes dividitur. Pars ergo superioris minor cum parte posterioris maiore coniuncta, octonarium numerum facit: et maior superioris cum minore posterioris, item octonarium: nam illa coniunctio est quatuor et quatuor, ista quinque et tres semipedes. Huc accedit, quod quinque in duo et tres semipedes, tres autem in duo et unum si diviseris, apparet alia convenientia duorum cum duobus, et unius cum tribus, quia unum cum omnibus numeris superius commemorata lege confertur. Sed nisi me ratio fallit, nihil restat ulterius quod de membrorum copulatione requiramus: iam enim ad octo perventum est pedes, quem numerum versui, sicut satis cognovimus, non fas est excedere. Quare iam age, illa senariorum versuum heroici et iambici vel trochaici, quo intentionem meam et excitasti et distulisti, pande secreta.
5. 9. 19. Student: This agreement is easy to recognize: for the upper member is divided into four and five half-feet, the latter into three and four. So the smaller part of the upper joined with the larger part of the latter makes the number eight; and the larger of the upper with the smaller of the latter, likewise eight: for that joining is four and four, this five and three half-feet. To this is added that, if you divide five into two and three half-feet, but three into two and one, another agreement appears, of two with two, and of one with three, because one is compared with all numbers by the law mentioned above. But unless reason deceives me, nothing further remains for us to inquire about the coupling of members: for now we have come to eight feet, which number, as we have learned well enough, it is not lawful for a verse to exceed. So now come, unfold the secrets of those senarii, the heroic and the iambic or trochaic, by which you have both stirred and deferred my eagerness.
deMus.5.9.19
5. 10. 20. Magister: Faciam, imo faciet ipsa ratio, quae mihi tibique communis est. Sed meministine, quaeso, cum ageremus de metris, dixisse nos et ipso sensu admodum probasse, illos pedes quorum partes ad sesqua conveniunt, sive in duobus et tribus, ut est creticus vel paeones, sive in tribus et quatuor, ut epitriti, exclusos a poetis propter minoris venustatis sonum, solutae orationis severitatem decorare congruentius, cum his clausulae colligantur?
5. 10. 20. Teacher: I will—or rather reason itself will, which is common to me and to you. But do you remember, I beg, that when we were treating of meters, we said, and proved well enough by the very sense, that those feet whose parts agree at the sesqui ratio—whether in two and three, as the cretic or the paeons, or in three and four, as the epitrites—being excluded by the poets because of their less graceful sound, more harmoniously adorn the gravity of prose, when clauses are bound up with them?
deMus.5.10.20
Discipulus: Memini: sed quorsum haec spectant?
Student: I remember; but to what do these things look?
deMus.5.10.20
Magister: Quoniam illud volo prius intellegamus, huiuscemodi pedibus a poetarum tractatione seiunctis, non remanere, nisi eos quibus ad tantumdem, ut spondeus est; aut eos quibus ad duplum, ut iambus; aut eos quibus ad utrumque partes conveniunt, ut choriambus.
Teacher: Because I want us first to understand this: that, these kinds of feet being set apart from the poets' treatment, there remain only those whose parts agree at an equal amount, as is the spondee; or those at double, as the iamb; or those at both, as the choriamb.
deMus.5.10.20
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: It is so.
deMus.5.10.20
Magister: At si haec est poetarum materies, et soluta oratio versibus inimica est, non versus ullus nisi ex hoc genere pedum faciendus est.
Teacher: But if this is the poets' material, and prose is hostile to verses, no verse is to be made except from this kind of feet.
deMus.5.10.20
Discipulus: Assentior. Video enim poemata versibus quam aliis lyricorum poetarum metris fieri grandiora, sed adhuc quo ratio ista tendat, ignoro.
Student: I agree. For I see that poems are made more grand by verses than by the other meters of the lyric poets; but still I do not know where this reasoning tends.
deMus.5.10.20
5. 10. 21. Magister: Ne propera: disputamus enim iam de senariorum versuum excellentia, et prius tibi cupio demonstrare, si potero, decentissimos senarios, nisi duorum istorum generum esse non posse, quae omnium etiam sunt celeberrima, quorum unum est heroicum, ut: Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primus ab oris, quod usus metitur spondeo et dactylo, subtilior autem ratio spondeo et anapaesto: alterum quod iambicum dicitur, et eadem ratione invenitur trochaicum. Nam credo tibi manifestum esse longis syllabis, nisi breves interponantur, obtundi quodam modo spatia sonorum; item nisi brevibus longae, nimis concisa et quasi tremula fieri; neutra esse temperata, quamvis temporum aequalitate aures impleant. Quamobrem nec illi versus qui sex pyrrhichios, et sex proceleumaticos habent, aspirant ad heroici dignitatem, nec illi ad trochaici qui sex tribrachos habent. Huc accedit, quia in istis quos caeteris ipsa ratio praeponit, si membra praeposteres, totum ita commutabitur, ut alios etiam pedes necessario metiamur. Itaque inconversibiliores, ut ita dicam, sunt quam illi qui aut omnibus brevibus, aut longis omnibus constant. Et ideo sive quinque et septem, sive septem et quinque semipedibus membra in his temperatioribus ordinentur, nihil interest: neutro enim horum ordine converti versus potest sine tanta commutatione, ut aliis pedibus currere videatur. In illis autem si carmen coeptum erit talibus versibus, quorum priora membra quinos semipedes habeant, non oporteat eos miscere in quibus septeni priores sunt, ne iam liceat omnes convertere: non enim a conversione revocat ulla pedum commutatio. Sed tamen heroicis conceditur spondeos omnes rarissime interponere, quod quidem posterior aetas haec nostra minime probavit. Trochaicis autem sive iambicis, cum pedem tribrachum quolibet loco interponere liceat, habere tamen in huiuscemodi carminibus versum solutum in omnes breves, turpissimum iudicatum est.
5. 10. 21. Teacher: Do not hurry: for we are now discussing the excellence of senarius verses, and I wish first to demonstrate to you, if I can, that the most fitting senarii can be only of those two kinds which are also the most celebrated of all—of which one is the heroic, as Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primus ab oris, which usage measures by a spondee and a dactyl, but the subtler reason by a spondee and an anapest; the other which is called iambic, and by the same reason is found trochaic. For I believe it is manifest to you that, by long syllables, unless shorts are interposed, the spans of sounds are in a way blunted; likewise, unless longs are interposed among shorts, they become too clipped and, as it were, tremulous; that neither is well tempered, although they fill the ears by the equality of time-units. Therefore neither those verses that have six pyrrhics and six proceleusmatics aspire to the dignity of the heroic, nor those that have six tribrachs aspire to that of the trochaic. To this is added that in these, which reason itself prefers to the rest, if you reverse the members, the whole will be so changed that we necessarily measure other feet too. And so they are, so to speak, more irreversible than those that consist either of all shorts or of all longs. And therefore, whether the members in these more temperate verses are ordered in five and seven, or seven and five half-feet, it matters nothing: for in neither of these orders can the verse be reversed without so great a change that it seems to run by other feet. But in those, if a poem has been begun with such verses whose prior members have five half-feet each, one ought not to mix in those in which the prior have seven, lest it now be allowed to reverse them all: for no change of feet calls back from reversal. But yet the heroics are allowed to interpose all spondees most rarely, which indeed this our later age has scarcely approved. But of the trochaics or iambics, although one may interpose a tribrach foot in any place, yet to have in poems of this kind a verse dissolved into all shorts has been judged most base.
deMus.5.10.21
5. 10. 22. Remotis igitur epitritis pedibus a lege versuum senaria, non solum quod solutae orationi sunt aptiores, verum etiam quod si sex fuerint, triginta et duo tempora excedunt, sicut dispondei; remotis etiam quinum temporum pedibus, quod sibi eos libentius ad clausulas vindicavit oratio; molossis item et aliis temporum senum, quamvis in poematis venustissime vigeant, ab hoc de quo nunc agimus numero temporum exclusis; restant versus omnium brevium syllabarum, qui vel pyrrhichios vel proceleumaticos vel tribrachos habent, et omnium longarum qui spondeos. Qui quamquam admittantur ad senarium modum, dignitati tamen et temperationi horum qui brevibus longisque variantur; et ob hoc multo minus converti possunt, cedant necesse est.
5. 10. 22. The epitrite feet, then, being removed from the law of senarius verses—not only because they are more fit for prose, but also because, if there be six of them, they exceed thirty-two time-units, as the dispondees do; the feet of five time-units being removed too, because prose has claimed them more willingly for its clauses; the molossi likewise, and the others of six time-units, although they flourish most gracefully in poems, being excluded from this number of time-units of which we now treat—there remain the verses of all short syllables, which have either pyrrhics or proceleusmatics or tribrachs, and those of all longs, which have spondees. Which, although they are admitted to the senarius measure, must yet yield to the dignity and good tempering of those that are varied by shorts and longs, and on that account can much less be reversed.
deMus.5.10.22
5. 11. 23. Sed quaeri potest cur meliores versus iudicati sint senarii, in quibus anapaestum subtilis illa ratio metitur, et ii in quibus trochaeum; quam si dactylum ibi, et hic iambum metiretur. Sine praeiudicio enim sententiae, quoniam nunc de numeris agimus, si versus ita esset: Troiae qui primus ab oris arma virumque cano, vel de illo genere: Qui procul malo pius beatus ille; uterque horum nec minus senarius esset, nec minus brevium longarumque syllabarum temperatione moderatus, nec magis converti poterat; et in utroque membra ita ordinata sunt, ut et in quinto et in septimo semipede pars orationis terminetur: cur ergo meliores istis putentur, si potius ita sint: Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primus ab oris. Beatus ille qui procul pius malo? In qua quaestione facilius et proclivius dixerim forte evenisse, ut isti prius animadverterentur et frequentarentur; aut si id non est fortuitum, melius credo visum fuisse, ut heroicus duabus longis, quam duabus brevibus et longa clauderetur, quod in longis aures commodius acquiescunt: ille autem alter in finali semipede longam syllabam potius haberet quam brevem. Res quidem sic se habet, ut quicumque horum priores eligerentur, necessario aliis auferrent locum, qui membris iisdem praeposteratis fieri possent. Quocirca si melior iudicatus est, cuius exemplum est: Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primus ab oris; inepte iam fieret isto converso aliud genus, sicuti est: Troiae qui primus ab oris, arma virumque cano. Quod etiam de trochaico genere intellegendum est. Nam si est honestior: Beatus ille qui procul negotio : quod genus isto praeposterato fieret, ut est: Qui procul negotio beatus ille, fieri profecto non oportet: tamen si quis audeat et faciat tales versus, manifestum est eum alia genera senariorum esse facturum, quibus sint ista meliora.
5. 11. 23. But it can be asked why those senarii were judged better in which that subtle reason measures an anapest, and those in which a trochee, than if it measured a dactyl there and an iamb here. For—without prejudice to the verdict, since we are now treating of numbers—if a verse were thus, Troiae qui primus ab oris arma virumque cano, or of that other kind, Qui procul malo pius beatus ille, each of these would be no less a senarius, no less moderated by the tempering of short and long syllables, nor more capable of being reversed; and in each the members are so ordered that a part of speech is terminated at both the fifth and the seventh half-foot. Why, then, should those be thought better, if they be rather thus: Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primus ab oris. Beatus ille qui procul pius malo? In which question I would more easily and readily say that it perhaps happened that these were noticed and frequented first; or, if that is not by chance, I believe it seemed better that the heroic be closed by two longs rather than by two shorts and a long, because the ears rest more conveniently on longs; but that other should have rather a long than a short syllable in its final half-foot. The matter indeed stands thus: that whichever of these were chosen first, would necessarily take away the place from the others, which could be made by reversing those same members. So if that was judged better whose example is Arma virumque cano, Troiae qui primus ab oris, then another kind would now be made ineptly by reversing it, as is Troiae qui primus ab oris, arma virumque cano. Which is to be understood of the trochaic kind too. For if Beatus ille qui procul negotio is more honorable, then the kind that would be made by reversing it, as is Qui procul negotio beatus ille, surely ought not to be made; yet if anyone dares and makes such verses, it is manifest that he will be making other kinds of senarii, than which these are better.
deMus.5.11.23
5. 11. 24. Discipulus: Prorsus assentior: et iam illam membrorum aequalitatem, cui me attentissimum paulo ante reddidisti, si vel nunc fas est, cognoscere vehementer exspecto.
5. 11. 24. Student: I agree entirely; and now that equality of members, to which you made me most attentive a little while ago, I eagerly await to learn, if it is now permitted.
deMus.5.11.24
5. 12. 25. Magister: Totus ergo adesto, atque responde, utrum tibi videatur quaelibet longitudo posse in quotlibet partes secari.
5. 12. 25. Teacher: Be wholly present, then, and answer whether it seems to you that any length can be cut into any number of parts.
deMus.5.12.25
Discipulus: Satis mihi ista persuasa sunt: nec dubitari posse arbitror, quin omnis longitudo quae linea dicitur, habeat dimidiam sui partem, ac per hoc in duas lineas decussatim secari queat: et quia ipsae duae lineae quae ista sectione fiunt, procul dubio lineae sunt, etiam in ipsis hoc fieri posse manifestum est. Itaque et quantulacumque longitudo in quotlibet partes secari potest.
Student: I am persuaded enough of this; nor do I think it can be doubted that every length, which is called a line, has its half, and through this can be cut crosswise into two lines; and because those two lines that are made by this section are without doubt lines, it is manifest that this can be done in them too. And so any length, however small, can be cut into any number of parts.
deMus.5.12.25
Magister: Expeditissime atque verissime. Quare nunc illud vide, utrum recte asseveretur, omnem longitudinem ad latitudinem porrigendam, quae ab ipsa oritur, tantum valere quantum latitudinis quadratum occupat. Si enim minus aut amplius in latum spatium proceditur quam longa est linea unde proceditur, quadratum non fit; sin tantum, nihil aliud quam quadratum fit.
Teacher: Most readily and most truly. So now see whether it is rightly asserted that every length, stretched out toward the breadth that arises from it, is worth as much as the square of the breadth occupies. For if one proceeds into a broad space less or more than the line from which one proceeds is long, no square is made; but if just as much, nothing else than a square is made.
deMus.5.12.25
Discipulus: Intellego et assentior: quid enim verius?
Student: I understand and agree: for what is truer?
deMus.5.12.25
Magister: Illud ergo iam sequi, ut opinor, vides, ut si pro linea in longum ordinati calculi pares ponantur, non perveniat illa longitudo ad quadratam formam, nisi per eumdem numerum multiplicati calculi fuerint: ut si verbi gratia duos calculos ponas, quadratum non facias, nisi aliis duobus ad latitudinem adiunctis: sin tres, sex adiungendi sunt, sed terni distributi ad duos ordines similiter in latitudinem: si enim ad longitudinem additi fuerint, nulla figura fit. Longitudo enim sine latitudine figura non est. Atque ita proportione licet considerare alios numeros: ut enim bis bina, et ter terna quadratas figuras in numeris faciunt, ita quater quaterna, quinquies quina, sexies sena, atque ita per infinitum in caeteris.
Teacher: Then this follows, I think, as you see: that if, for a line, equal pebbles ordered lengthwise are set, that length does not come to the square form unless the pebbles have been multiplied by the same number—so that if, for example, you set two pebbles, you do not make a square unless two others are added to the breadth; but if three, six must be added, but the three distributed into two rows likewise crosswise into the breadth: for if they are added lengthwise, no figure is made. For length without breadth is no figure. And so by proportion one may consider the other numbers: for as twice two, and three times three, make square figures in numbers, so four times four, five times five, six times six, and so on infinitely in the rest.
deMus.5.12.25
Discipulus: Etiam ista rata et manifesta sunt.
Student: These too are settled and manifest.
deMus.5.12.25
Magister: Attende nunc utrum sit aliqua temporis longitudo.
Teacher: Attend now whether there is any length of time.
deMus.5.12.25
Discipulus: Quis dubitaverit nullum esse tempus sine aliqua longitudine?
Student: Who would doubt that there is no time without some length?
deMus.5.12.25
Magister: Quid? versus potestne non obtinere aliquam temporis longitudinem?
Teacher: And a verse—can it fail to hold some length of time?
deMus.5.12.25
Discipulus: Imo necesse est obtineat.
Student: On the contrary, it must hold one.
deMus.5.12.25
Magister: Quid in ea longitudine pro calculis melius collocamus? pedesne, qui duas in partes, id est levationem et positionem necessario distribuuntur; an ipsos semipedes potius, qui singulas levationes positionesque obtinent?
Teacher: What do we better set, for pebbles, in that length? The feet, which are necessarily distributed into two parts, that is, raising and setting-down; or the half-feet themselves rather, which hold single raisings and settings-down?
deMus.5.12.25
Discipulus: Semipedes congruentius iudico pro illis calculis poni.
Student: I judge it more fitting that half-feet be set for those pebbles.
deMus.5.12.25
5. 12. 26. Magister: Age, nunc commemora membrum versus heroici brevius, quot semipedes habeat.
5. 12. 26. Teacher: Come, now mention how many half-feet the shorter member of the heroic verse has.
deMus.5.12.26
Discipulus: Quinque.
Student: Five.
deMus.5.12.26
Magister: Dic exemplum.
Teacher: Give an example.
deMus.5.12.26
Discipulus: Arma virumque cano.
Student: Arma virumque cano.
deMus.5.12.26
Magister: Num igitur aliud desideras, nisi ut alii septem semipedes cum istis quinque aliqua aequalitate conveniant?
Teacher: Do you, then, desire anything other than that the other seven half-feet agree with these five by some equality?
deMus.5.12.26
Discipulus: Nihil prorsus aliud.
Student: Nothing else at all.
deMus.5.12.26
Magister: Quid? septem semipedes possuntne aliquem versum complere per se?
Teacher: And can seven half-feet complete some verse by themselves?
deMus.5.12.26
Discipulus: Possunt vero: nam tot semipedes habet primus ac minimus versus, annumerato in fine silentio.
Student: They can indeed: for the first and smallest verse has so many half-feet, with a silence counted in at the end.
deMus.5.12.26
Magister: Recte dicis: sed ut versus esse possit, quomodo in duo membra dividitur?
Teacher: You speak rightly; but, that it may be able to be a verse, how is it divided into two members?
deMus.5.12.26
Discipulus: In quatuor scilicet, et tres semipedes.
Student: Into four and three half-feet, of course.
deMus.5.12.26
Magister: Duc ergo in legem quadrati has partes singulas, et vide quid faciant quatuor quater.
Teacher: Bring these single parts, then, to the law of the square, and see what four times four make.
deMus.5.12.26
Discipulus: Sexdecim.
Student: Sixteen.
deMus.5.12.26
Magister: Quid tria ter?
Teacher: And three times three?
deMus.5.12.26
Discipulus: Novem.
Student: Nine.
deMus.5.12.26
Magister: Quid totum simul?
Teacher: And the whole together?
deMus.5.12.26
Discipulus: Viginti quinque.
Student: Twenty-five.
deMus.5.12.26
Magister: Septem ergo semipedes quoniam possunt habere duo membra, singulis membris suis ad quadratorum rationem relatis, vigesimum quintum numerum in summa faciunt; et est una pars versus heroici.
Teacher: So seven half-feet, since they can have two members, each of their members being referred to the principle of squares, make in sum the number twenty-five; and this is one part of the heroic verse.
deMus.5.12.26
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: It is so.
deMus.5.12.26
Magister: Altera igitur pars quae habet quinque semipedes, quoniam non potest in duo membra dividi, et debet aliqua aequalitate concinere, nonne tota in quadratum ducenda est?
Teacher: The other part, then, which has five half-feet, since it cannot be divided into two members and ought to harmonize by some equality—is it not to be brought whole into a square?
deMus.5.12.26
Discipulus: Nihil aliud omnino censeo, et iam tandem agnosco aequalitatem mirabilem. Quinque enim quinquies ducta eadem viginti quinque consummant. Nec ergo immerito senarii versus caeteris celebratiores nobilioresque facti sunt: dici enim vix potest quantum inter illorum aequalitatem in membris imparibus, et aliorum omnium intersit.
Student: I judge nothing else at all, and now at last I recognize the wonderful equality. For five taken five times complete the same twenty-five. Not without reason, then, were the senarius verses made more celebrated and more noble than the rest: for it can scarcely be said how great the difference is between their equality in unequal members and that of all the others.
deMus.5.12.26
5. 13. 27. Magister: Non te ergo fefellit pollicitatio mea, vel potius ipsa nos, quam uterque nostrum sequitur, ratio. Quare ut istum iam sermonem concludamus aliquando, cernis certe cum sint metra pene innumerabilia, versum tamen esse non posse, nisi duobus membris sibimet concinnatis, aut totidem semipedibus, sed non conversibilibus terminatis, ut est: Maecenas atavis edite regibus; aut dispari numero etiam semipedum, sed tamen aliqua aequalitate coniunctis, ut sunt quatuor et tres, aut quinque et tres, vel quinque et septem, aut sex et septem, aut octo et septem, vel septem et novem. A pleno enim pede trochaicus, ut est: Optimus beatus ille qui procul negotio; et a non pleno potest versus exordiri, ut est: Vir optimus beatus ille qui procul negotio: terminari autem nisi non pleno prorsus non potest. Sed isti non pleni pedes, sive integros semipedes habeant, sicuti est iste quem nunc posui; sive minus quam dimidium pedem, sicut in illo choriambico duae ultimae breves: Maecenas atavis edite regibus; sive plus quam dimidium, ut in eius capite duae primae longae, aut in fine alterius choriambici bacchius, cuius exemplum est: Te domus Evandri, te sedes celsa Latini . Omnes ergo isti non pleni pedes semipedes nuncupantur.
5. 13. 27. Teacher: My promise, then, did not deceive you—or rather, reason itself, which each of us follows, did not. So, to conclude this discussion at last, you surely discern that, although the meters are almost innumerable, yet there cannot be a verse except one terminated by two members harmonized with each other, either by the same number of half-feet, but not reversible, as is Maecenas atavis edite regibus; or by an unequal number of half-feet too, but yet joined by some equality, as are four and three, or five and three, or five and seven, or six and seven, or eight and seven, or seven and nine. For a trochaic verse can begin from a full foot, as is Optimus beatus ille qui procul negotio, and from a not-full one, as is Vir optimus beatus ille qui procul negotio; but it can in no way be terminated except by a not-full one. But these not-full feet—whether they have whole half-feet, as is that one I just set down; or less than a half-foot, as in that choriambic the two last shorts of Maecenas atavis edite regibus; or more than a half-foot, as at its head the two first longs, or at the end of another choriambic the bacchius, whose example is Te domus Evandri, te sedes celsa Latini—all these not-full feet are called half-feet.
deMus.5.13.27
5. 13. 28. Iam vero non solum talia poemata versibus fiunt, ut in his unum genus teneatur, qualia Epicorum poetarum sunt, vel etiam Comicorum; sed illos quoque ambitus quos Graeci vocant, non tantum illis metris quae lege versuum non tenentur, Lyrici poetae faciunt, sed etiam versibus. Nam ille Flacci: Nox erat, et coelo fulgebat luna sereno Inter minora sidera . bimembris ambitus est, et versibus constans. Qui duo versus sibimet convenire non possunt, nisi uterque ad senorum temporum referatur pedes. Nam modus heroicus cum modo iambico vel trochaico non concinit, quia illi pedes ad tantumdem, hi ad duplum partiuntur. Fiunt ergo ambitus aut omnibus metris non cum versibus, ut illi sunt de quibus in superiori sermone disputatum est, cum de ipsis metris ageremus; aut tantum versibus, ut ii de quibus nunc dictum est; aut ut et versibus, et aliis metris temperentur, quale illud est: Diffugere nives, redeunt iam gramina campis, Arboribusque comae . Quo autem ordine locentur vel versus cum aliis metris, vel maiora membra cum minoribus, nihil interest ad aurium voluptatem, dummodo non brevior quam bimembris, non amplior quam quadrimembris sit ambitus. Sed iam si nihil habes quod contradicas, finis sit huius disputationis, ut deinceps quod ad hanc partem musicae attinet quae in numeris temporum est, ab his vestigiis eius sensibilibus, ad ipsa cubilia, ubi ab omni corpore aliena est, quanta valemus sagacitate veniamus.
5. 13. 28. But now not only are such poems made by verses, so that one kind is kept in them—such as those of the epic poets, or also of the comic poets; but the lyric poets make those circuits too, which the Greeks call "periods," not only by those meters which are not held by the law of verses, but also by verses. For that one of Flaccus, Nox erat, et caelo fulgebat luna sereno inter minora sidera, is a two-membered period, and consists of verses. These two verses cannot agree with each other unless each is referred to feet of six time-units. For the heroic measure does not harmonize with the iambic or trochaic measure, because the former feet are divided at an equal amount, the latter at double. Periods, then, are made either by all meters that are not verses, as those are which were discussed in the earlier discussion, when we treated of meters themselves; or by verses only, as those of which we have now spoken; or so that they are tempered both by verses and by other meters, such as that one: Diffugere nives, redeunt iam gramina campis, arboribusque comae. But in what order verses are set with other meters, or larger members with smaller, matters nothing to the pleasure of the ears, provided only that the period be not shorter than two-membered, not larger than four-membered. But now, if you have nothing to object, let there be an end of this discussion, so that hereafter, as concerns this part of music which is in the time-units of numbers, we may come, with all the sagacity we have, from these its sensible traces to the very resting-places where it is free from all body.
deMus.5.13.28
6. 1. 1. Magister: Satis diu pene atque adeo plane pueriliter per quinque libros in vestigiis numerorum ad moras temporum pertinentium morati sumus: quam nostram nugacitatem apud benevolos homines facile fortassis excuset officiosus labor; quem non ob aliud suscipiendum putavimus, nisi ut adolescentes, vel cuiuslibet aetatis homines, quos bono ingenio donavit Deus, non praepropere, sed quibusdam gradibus a sensibus carnis atque a carnalibus litteris, quibus eos non haerere difficile est, duce ratione avellerentur, atque uni Deo et Domino rerum omnium, qui humanis mentibus nulla natura interposita praesidet, incommutabilis veritatis amore adhaerescerent. Illos igitur libros qui leget, inveniet nos cum grammaticis et poeticis animis, non habitandi electione, sed itinerandi necessitate versatos. Ad hunc autem librum cum venerit, si, ut spero et supplex deprecor, Deus et Dominus noster propositum meum voluntatemque gubernaverit, et eo quo est intenta perduxerit, intelleget non vilis possessionis esse vilem viam, per quam nunc cum imbecillioribus, nec nos ipsi admodum fortes ambulare maluimus, quam minus pennatos per liberiores auras praecipitare. Ita nos, quantum arbitror, aut nihil aut non multum peccasse iudicabit, si tamen de numero spiritalium virorum iste fuerit. Nam turba caetera de scholis linguarum tumultuantium, et ad plaudentium strepitum vulgari levitate laetantium, si forte irruerit in has litteras, aut contemnet omnes, aut illos quinque libros sufficere sibi arbitrabitur: istum vero in quo fructus illorum est, vel abiciet quasi non necessarium, vel differet quasi post necessarium. Reliquos vero qui ad ista intellegenda eruditi non sunt, si sacramentis Christianae puritatis imbuti, in unum et verum Deum summa caritate nitentes, cuncta puerilia transvolaverunt, fraterne admoneo ne ad ista descendant, et cum hic laborare coeperint, de tarditate sua conquerantur, ignorantes itinera difficilia et molesta pedibus suis, volando se posse etiam ignorata transire. Si autem ii legunt qui et infirmis aut inexercitatis gressibus hac ambulare non possunt, et nullas pietatis alas habent, quibus ista neglecta praetervolent, non se inserant inconvenienti negotio; sed praeceptis saluberrimae religionis, et nido fidei Christianae pennas nutriant, quibus subvecti laborem ac pulverem huius itineris evadant, magis ipsius patriae quam viarum flexuosarum amore flagrantes. His enim haec scripta sunt, qui litteris saecularibus dediti, magnis implicantur erroribus, et bona ingenia in nugis conterunt, nescientes quid ibi delectet. Quod si animadverterent, viderent qua effugerent illa retia, et quisnam esset beatissimae securitatis locus.
6. 1. 1. Teacher: Long enough, and indeed quite childishly, have we lingered through five books in the footprints of numbers as they pertain to the delays of time. This triviality of ours an obliging labor may perhaps easily excuse among kindly people—a labor we thought should be undertaken for no other reason than that young men, or men of any age whom God has endowed with good talent, might, with reason as guide, be torn away—not precipitately but by certain steps—from the senses of the flesh and from carnal letters, to which it is hard for them not to cling, and might cleave, by love of unchangeable truth, to the one God and Lord of all things, who presides over human minds with no nature set between. Whoever, then, reads those books will find that I have busied myself with grammatical and poetical matters, not by choice of dwelling there but by the necessity of traveling. But when he comes to this book, then, if—as I hope and humbly pray—God our Lord guides my purpose and will, and brings it to where it is aimed, he will understand that the lowly road, by which we now preferred to walk along with the weaker, while we ourselves are not very strong, rather than to fling those of fewer feathers headlong through freer airs, is the road of no lowly possession. So, as I judge, he will reckon that we have erred either not at all or not much, if indeed he is of the number of spiritual men. For the rest of the crowd—from the schools of clamoring tongues, rejoicing with vulgar lightness at the noise of applauders—if perchance they rush into these writings, will either despise them all, or will judge those five books enough for them; but this one, in which the fruit of those lies, they will either cast away as unnecessary, or put off as coming after the necessary. But as for the rest, who are not learned enough to understand these things—if, steeped in the sacraments of Christian purity, striving by the highest love toward the one and true God, they have flown over all childish things—I fraternally admonish them not to come down to these matters, and, when they have begun to labor here, not to complain of their slowness, not knowing that the journeys are hard and troublesome to their feet, while by flying they could pass over even what they have not learned. But if those read who can walk this road neither with weak nor with unexercised steps, and have no wings of piety by which to fly past these matters as neglected, let them not thrust themselves into an unsuitable business; but let them nourish, by the precepts of the most healthful religion and in the nest of Christian faith, the feathers by which, borne up, they may escape the labor and dust of this journey, burning rather with love of their homeland itself than of the winding roads. For these things have been written for those who, given over to secular letters, are entangled in great errors, and waste good talents on trifles, not knowing what delights them there. And if they noticed it, they would see by what they might escape those nets, and what the place of most blessed security is.
deMus.6.1.1
6. 2. 2. Magister: Quamobrem tu cum quo mihi nunc ratio est, familiaris meus, ut a corporeis ad incorporea transeamus, responde, si videtur, cum istum versum pronuntiamus: Deus creator omnium , istos quatuor iambos quibus constat, et tempora duodecim ubinam esse arbitreris, id est, in sono tantum qui auditur, an etiam in sensu audientis qui ad aures pertinet, an in actu etiam pronuntiantis, an quia notus versus est, in memoria quoque nostra hos numeros esse fatendum est?
6. 2. 2. Teacher: Therefore you, with whom I now reason, my familiar friend, that we may pass from corporeal to incorporeal things, answer, if it seems good: when we pronounce this verse, Deus creator omnium, where do you judge those four iambs of which it consists, and the twelve time-units, to be? That is, in the sound only that is heard, or also in the sense of the hearer that belongs to the ears, or in the act too of the one pronouncing, or—because the verse is known—must we admit that these numbers are in our memory as well?
deMus.6.2.2
Discipulus: In his omnibus puto.
Student: In all of these, I think.
deMus.6.2.2
Magister: Nusquamne amplius?
Teacher: Nowhere more?
deMus.6.2.2
Discipulus: Quid aliud restet non video, nisi forte interior et superior aliqua vis sit unde ista procedunt.
Student: I do not see what else remains, unless perhaps there is some interior and higher power from which these proceed.
deMus.6.2.2
Magister: Non ego quaero quid suspicandum sit: quare si haec quatuor genera ita tibi apparent, ut nullum aliud videas quod aeque manifestum sit, discernamus ea, si placet, ab invicem, et videamus utrum singula esse sine invicem possint. Nam credo non te esse negaturum fieri posse, ut in aliquo loco aliquis sonus existat huiuscemodi morulis et dimensionibus verberans aerem vel stillicidio vel aliquo alio pulsu corporum, ubi nullus adsit auditor. Quod cum fit, num praeter illud primum genus, cum ipse sonus hos numeros habet, ullum horum quatuor reperitur?
Teacher: I do not ask what is to be suspected; so, if these four kinds appear to you in such a way that you see no other equally manifest, let us, if you please, distinguish them from one another, and see whether they can each exist without one another. For I believe you will not deny that it can happen that in some place some sound of this kind exists, striking the air with such little delays and measures, whether by a dripping or by some other striking of bodies, where no hearer is present. And when this happens, is any of these four found besides that first kind, when the sound itself has these numbers?
deMus.6.2.2
Discipulus: Nullum aliud video.
Student: I see no other.
deMus.6.2.2
6. 2. 3. Magister: Quid iste alter, qui est in sensu audientis? potestne esse si nihil sonet? Non enim quaero utrum habeant illae aures vim percipiendi si quidquam sonuerit, qua utique non carent si desit sonus: non enim et cum silentium est, nihil a surdis differunt; sed quaero utrum ipsos numeros habeant, etiamsi nihil sonet. Siquidem aliud est habere numeros, aliud posse sentire numerosum sonum. Nam et si sentientem corporis locum digito tangas, quotieslibet tangitur, toties sentitur tactu ille numerus: et cum sentitur, non eo caret sentiens: sed utrum insit etiam tangente nullo, non sensus ille, sed numerus, similiter quaeritur.
6. 2. 3. Teacher: What of that other, which is in the sense of the hearer? Can it exist if nothing sounds? For I do not ask whether those ears have the power of perceiving if anything sounds, which they surely do not lack if a sound is absent—for not even when there is silence do they differ in nothing from the deaf; but I ask whether they have the numbers themselves, even if nothing sounds. For it is one thing to have numbers, another to be able to perceive a rhythmical sound. For even if you touch a sentient part of the body with a finger, as often as it is touched, that number is felt by the touch; and when it is felt, the one feeling does not lack it; but whether—no one touching—not the sensation, but the number is present, is the same question.
deMus.6.2.3
Discipulus: Non facile dixerim, carere sensum numeris talibus in se constitutis, etiam antequam aliquid sonet: non enim aliter aut eorum mulceretur concinnitate, aut absurditate offenderetur. Idipsum ergo quidquid est, quo aut annuimus aut abhorremus, non ratione sed natura, cum aliquid sonat, ipsius sensus numerum voco. Non enim tunc fit in auribus meis, cum sonum audio, haec vis approbandi et improbandi. Aures quippe non aliter bonis sonis quam malis patent.
Student: I could not easily say that the sense lacks such numbers established in itself, even before anything sounds; for it would not otherwise be either soothed by their harmony or offended by their absurdity. This very thing, then, whatever it is, by which we either assent or recoil, not by reason but by nature, when something sounds, I call the number of the sense itself. For this power of approving and disapproving does not then come to be in my ears when I hear a sound; for the ears lie open no otherwise to good sounds than to bad.
deMus.6.2.3
Magister: Vide potius ne ista duo sint minime confundenda. Nam si versus quilibet modo correptius, modo productius pronuntietur, spatium temporis non idem teneat necesse est, quamvis eadem pedum ratione servata. Ut ergo ipso suo genere aures mulceat, illa vis facit qua concinna adsciscimus, et absurda respuimus. Ut autem breviore tempore sentiatur cum celerius, quam cum tardius promitur, non interest aliquid nisi quamdiu aures tangantur sono. Affectio ergo haec aurium cum tanguntur sono, nullo modo talis est ac si non tangantur. Ut enim differt audire ab eo quod est non audire, ita differt hanc vocem audire ab eo quod est alteram audire. Haec igitur affectio nec ultra porrigitur, nec infra cohibetur; quoniam est mensura eius soni qui facit eam. Altera est ergo in iambo, altera in tribracho; productior in productiore iambo, correptior in correptiore; nulla in silentio. Quae si numerosa voce fit, etiam ipsa numerosa sit necesse est. Neque esse potest, nisi cum adest effector eius sonus: similis est enim vestigio in aqua impresso, quod neque ante formatur quam corpus impresseris, neque remanet cum detraxeris. Naturalis vero illa vis quasi iudiciaria, quae auribus adest, non desinit esse in silentio, nec nobis eam sonus infert, sed ab ea potius, sive probandus, sive improbandus excipitur. Quare ista duo, nisi fallor, distinguenda sunt; et fatendum numeros, qui sunt in ipsa passione aurium, cum aliquid auditur, sono inferri, auferri silentio. Ex quo colligitur numeros qui sunt in ipso sono, posse esse sine istis qui sunt in eo quod est audire, cum hi sine illis esse non possint.
Teacher: See rather that these two are by no means to be confused. For if any verse is pronounced now more shortly, now more drawn out, it must hold not the same span of time, although the same principle of feet is kept. So, that it may charm the ears by its very kind, that power does it by which we adopt the harmonious and reject the absurd. But that it is perceived in a shorter time when it is uttered more quickly than when more slowly, makes no difference except how long the ears are touched by the sound. This affection of the ears, then, when they are touched by sound, is in no way the same as if they are not touched. For as to hear differs from not to hear, so to hear this sound differs from hearing another. This affection, then, is neither stretched beyond nor held within, since the measure of it is the sound that makes it. So there is one in an iamb, another in a tribrach; more drawn out in a more drawn-out iamb, shorter in a shorter; none in silence. And if it comes about by a rhythmical voice, it too must be rhythmical. Nor can it exist except when the sound that effects it is present: for it is like a footprint impressed in water, which is neither formed before you have pressed the body in, nor remains when you have drawn it out. But that natural power, a judicial one as it were, which is present in the ears, does not cease to be in silence, nor does the sound bring it to us, but is rather received by it, whether to be approved or disapproved. So these two, unless I am mistaken, are to be distinguished; and it must be admitted that the numbers which are in the very passion of the ears, when something is heard, are brought in by the sound and taken away by silence. From which it is gathered that the numbers which are in the sound itself can exist without these which are in the act of hearing, while these cannot exist without those.
deMus.6.2.3
6. 3. 4. Discipulus: Assentior.
6. 3. 4. Student: I agree.
deMus.6.3.4
Magister: Attende igitur hoc tertium genus, quod est in ipso usu et operatione pronuntiantis; et vide utrum possint esse hi numeri sine illis qui sunt in memoria. Nam et taciti apud nosmetipsos possumus aliquos numeros cogitando peragere ea mora temporis, qua etiam voce peragerentur. Hos in quadam operatione animi esse manifestum est, quae quoniam nullum edit sonum, nihilque passionis infert auribus, ostendit hoc genus sine illis duobus esse posse, quorum unum in sono est, alterum in audiente, quando audit. Sed utrum existeret, nisi adiuvante memoria, quaerimus. Quamquam si anima hos numeros agit, quos in venarum pulsu invenimus, soluta quaestio est: nam et in operatione hos esse manifestum est. et nihil ad eos adiuvamur memoria. Quod si de his incertum est, utrum operantis animae sint; de istis certe quos reciproco spiritu agimus, nulli dubium est, quin et temporum intervallis numeri sint, et eos sic anima operetur, ut etiam voluntate adhibita multis modis variari queant: nec tamen ut agantur, ulla opus est memoria.
Teacher: Attend, then, to this third kind, which is in the very use and activity of the one pronouncing; and see whether these numbers can exist without those that are in the memory. For even silently, within ourselves, we can run through some numbers by thinking, in the same delay of time in which they would be run through by voice as well. That these are in a certain activity of the mind is manifest; which, since it gives off no sound and brings no passion to the ears, shows that this kind can exist without those two, one of which is in the sound, the other in the hearer when he hears. But whether it would exist without the help of memory, we ask. Although, if the soul produces these numbers which we find in the beating of the veins, the question is solved: for it is manifest both that these are in an activity, and that we are helped toward them by no memory. But if it is uncertain about these, whether they belong to the acting soul, about those which we produce by the to-and-fro of the breath there is no doubt that there are numbers in intervals of time, and that the soul so produces them that, the will being applied too, they can be varied in many ways; and yet, that they may be produced, there is no need of any memory.
deMus.6.3.4
Discipulus: Videtur mihi hoc genus sine tribus caeteris esse posse. Quamvis enim pro temperatione corporum varios venarum pulsus, et respirationis intervalla fieri non ambigam; tamen operante anima fieri, negare quis audeat? Qui cursus et si pro diversitate corporum aliis celerior est, aliis tardior; nisi tamen adsit anima quae id agat, nullus est.
Student: It seems to me that this kind can exist without the other three. For, although I do not doubt that the various beatings of the veins and the intervals of breathing come about according to the temperament of bodies, yet who would dare to deny that they come about by the soul's acting? For this course, even if for the diversity of bodies it is quicker in some, slower in others, is nevertheless none unless the soul is present to do it.
deMus.6.3.4
Magister: Considera igitur et quartum genus, eorum scilicet numerorum qui sunt in memoria: nam si eos recordatione depromimus, et cum in alias cogitationes deferimur, hos rursum relinquimus velut in suis secretis reconditos, non, opinor, occultum est eos esse posse sine caeteris.
Teacher: Consider, then, the fourth kind too, namely of those numbers that are in the memory: for if we draw them out by recollection, and, when we are carried off into other thoughts, leave them again as it were hidden away in their own secret places, it is not, I think, obscure that they can exist without the others.
deMus.6.3.4
Discipulus: Non dubito eos esse sine caeteris; sed tamen nisi auditi, vel cogitati, non mandarentur memoriae: et ideo quamquam illis desinentibus maneant, iisdem tamen praecedentibus imprimuntur.
Student: I do not doubt that they exist without the others; but yet, unless heard or thought, they would not be committed to memory; and therefore, although they remain when those cease, they are nevertheless impressed by those same ones going before.
deMus.6.3.4
6. 4. 5. Magister: Non resisto tibi, et vellem iam quaerere, quod tandem horum quatuor generum praestantissimum iudices: nisi arbitrarer dum illa tractamus, nescio unde apparuisse nobis quintum genus, quod est in ipso naturali iudicio sentiendi, cum delectamur parilitate numerorum, vel cum in eis peccatur, offendimur. Non enim contemno quod tibi visum est, sine quibusdam numeris in eo latentibus, hoc sensum nostrum nullo modo agere potuisse. An forte ad istorum quatuor aliquod genus hanc tantam vim pertinere arbitraris?
6. 4. 5. Teacher: I do not resist you, and I would now ask which of these four kinds you at last judge most excellent—did I not think that, while we treat those, a fifth kind has appeared to us, from I know not where, which is in the very natural judgment of perceiving, when we are delighted by the equality of numbers, or, when they are erred in, are offended. For I do not despise what seemed to you: that without certain numbers lying hidden in it, our sense could in no way have done this. Or do you perhaps judge that this so great power belongs to some one of those four kinds?
deMus.6.4.5
Discipulus: Ego vero ab illis omnibus hoc genus distinguendum puto. Siquidem aliud est sonare, quod corpori tribuitur, aliud audire, quod in corpore anima de sonis patitur, aliud operari numeros vel productius vel correptius, aliud ista meminisse, aliud de his omnibus vel annuendo vel abhorrendo quasi quodam naturali iure ferre sententiam.
Student: I think this kind is to be distinguished from all those. For it is one thing to sound, which is attributed to the body; another to hear, which the soul undergoes in the body from sounds; another to produce numbers, whether more drawn out or shorter; another to remember these; another to pass sentence on all these, whether by assenting or recoiling, as it were by a certain natural right.
deMus.6.4.5
6. 4. 6. Magister: Age, nunc dic mihi quinque horum quod maxime excellat.
6. 4. 6. Teacher: Come, now tell me which of these five most excels.
deMus.6.4.6
Discipulus: Hoc quintum puto.
Student: This fifth, I think.
deMus.6.4.6
Magister: Recte putas: non enim de illis posset, nisi excelleret, iudicare. Sed rursus quaero, caeterorum quatuor quod maxime probes.
Teacher: You think rightly: for it could not judge about those unless it excelled. But again I ask, of the other four which do you most approve?
deMus.6.4.6
Discipulus: Illud profecto quod est in memoria; quia video ibi diuturniores esse numeros, quam cum sonant, vel cum audiuntur, vel cum aguntur.
Student: That one, surely, which is in the memory; for I see that the numbers are there more lasting than when they sound, or are heard, or are produced.
deMus.6.4.6
Magister: Praeponis ergo factos facientibus: nam istos qui sunt in memoria, ab illis aliis imprimi paulo ante dixisti.
Teacher: So you prefer the made to the making: for those that are in the memory, you said a little before, are impressed by those others.
deMus.6.4.6
Discipulus: Nollem praeponere: sed rursus quomodo non praeponam diuturniora minus diuturnis, non video.
Student: I would not wish to prefer them; but again, how I am not to prefer the more lasting to the less lasting, I do not see.
deMus.6.4.6
Magister: Non te istuc moveat. Non enim sicut aeterna temporalibus, ita ea quae diutius abolentur, iis quae breviore tempore transeunt, praeferenda sunt. Quia et sanitas unius diei profecto est melior, quam multorum dierum imbecillitas. Et si optanda optandis comparemus, melior est unius diei lectio, quam plurium scriptio, si eadem res uno die legatur, quae pluribus scribitur. Ita numeri qui sunt in memoria, etsi diutius manent quam illi a quibus imprimuntur, non eos tamen anteponere oportet eis quos agimus, non in corpore, sed in anima: utrique enim praetereunt, alii cessatione, alii oblivione. Sed illi quos operamur, etiam nondum cessantibus nobis successione sequentium videntur auferri, dum primi secundis, et secundi tertiis, atque ita deinceps priores posterioribus praetereundo concedunt locum, donec ultimos perimat ipsa cessatio. Oblivione vero plures simul numeri, quamvis paulatim, absterguntur: nam nec ipsi aliquandiu manent integri. Quod enim post annum, verbi gratia, in memoria non invenitur, etiam post unum diem iam minus est: sed non sentitur ista diminutio: non tamen falso ex eo conicitur, quia non utique pridie quam compleatur annus repente totum evolat: unde intellegi datur, ab illo tempore quo inhaeret memoriae, incipere labi. Hinc est illud quod plerumque dicimus, Tenuiter memini, cum aliquid post tempus recordando repetimus, antequam plane totum excidat. Quapropter utrumque hoc numerorum genus mortale est. Verumtamen facientes factis iure anteponuntur.
Teacher: Let that not move you. For things are not to be preferred to one another as the eternal to the temporal, just because they are abolished more slowly than those that pass in a shorter time. For the health of one day is surely better than the weakness of many days. And if we compare things to be chosen with things to be chosen, the reading of one day is better than the writing of many, if the same thing is read in one day that is written in several. So the numbers that are in the memory, although they last longer than those by which they are impressed, ought not to be preferred to those we produce, not in the body but in the soul; for both pass away, the one by ceasing, the other by forgetting. But those we produce seem to be taken away, even while we have not yet ceased, by the succession of those following, while the first yield place to the second, and the second to the third, and so on the earlier yield by passing to the later, until the ceasing itself destroys the last. But by forgetting many numbers at once are wiped away, though little by little; for not even do they themselves remain whole for any time. For what is not found in the memory after a year, for example, is already less even after one day; but this diminution is not felt; yet it is not falsely inferred from this, since surely it does not suddenly fly away whole the day before the year is completed; whence it is given to understand that from the time when it clings to the memory it begins to slip away. Hence is that which we often say, "I remember faintly," when after a time we seek to recall something by recollection, before it has wholly fallen away. Therefore each of these two kinds of numbers is mortal. Nevertheless the making are rightly preferred to the made.
deMus.6.4.6
Discipulus: Accipio, et probo.
Student: I accept and approve.
deMus.6.4.6
6. 4. 7. Magister: Iam ergo tria reliqua intuere, et eorum quoque quod sit optimum et caeteris praeferendum, edissere.
6. 4. 7. Teacher: Now then look at the three remaining, and set forth which of them too is best and to be preferred to the rest.
deMus.6.4.7
Discipulus: Non est hoc facile. Nam ex illa regula qua factis facientes oportet anteferre, cogor sonantibus numeris palmam dare: hos enim sentimus audientes, et cum hos sentimus, hos patimur. Hi ergo faciunt eos qui sunt in aurium passione cum audimus: hi autem rursus quos sentiendo habemus, faciunt alios in memoria, quibus a se factis recte praeferuntur. Sed hic quia et sentire et meminisse animae est, non moveor, si aliquid quod in anima fit, alicui quod item in ea fit anteponam. Illud me conturbat, quomodo sonantes numeri, qui certe corporei sunt, vel quoquo modo in corpore, magis laudandi sint quam illi, qui, cum sentimus, in anima esse reperiuntur. Sed rursus conturbat quomodo non magis laudandi sint, cum hi faciant, illi ab his fiant.
Student: This is not easy. For by that rule by which the making ought to be preferred to the made, I am compelled to give the palm to the sounding numbers: for these we feel when hearing, and when we feel these, these we undergo. These, then, make those that are in the passion of the ears when we hear; and these again, which we have by feeling, make others in the memory, to which, as made by them, they are rightly preferred. But here, because both to feel and to remember belong to the soul, I am not moved if I prefer something that comes about in the soul to something that likewise comes about in it. This confounds me: how sounding numbers, which are certainly corporeal, or in some way in the body, are to be praised more than those which, when we feel, are found to be in the soul. But again it confounds me how they are not to be praised more, since these make and those are made by these.
deMus.6.4.7
Magister: Mirare potius quod facere aliquid in anima corpus potest. Hoc enim fortasse non posset, si non peccato primo corpus illud quod nulla molestia et summa facilitate animabat et gubernabat, in deterius commutatum, et corruptioni subiaceret et morti: quod tamen habet sui generis pulchritudinem, et eo ipso dignitatem animae satis commendat, cuius nec plaga, nec morbus sine honore alicuius decoris meruit esse. Quam plagam summa Dei Sapientia, mirabili et ineffabili sacramento dignata est assumere, cum hominem sine peccato, non sine peccatoris conditione suscepit. Nam et nasci humanitus, et pati et mori voluit. Nihil horum merito, sed excellentissima bonitate; ut nos caveremus magis superbiam, qua dignissime in ista cecidimus, quam contumelias quas indignus excepit; et animo aequo mortem debitam solveremus, si propter nos potuit etiam indebitam sustinere; et quidquid secretius atque purgatius in tali sacramento a sanctis et melioribus intellegi potest. Ergo animam in carne mortali operantem, passionem corporum sentire non mirum est. Nec quia ipsa est corpore melior, melius putandum est omne quod in ea fit, quam omne quod fit in corpore. Credo enim tibi videri verum falso esse praeponendum.
Teacher: Wonder rather that a body can do anything in the soul. For this perhaps it could not do, had not that body, which by the first sin was changed for the worse—which body it used to animate and govern with no trouble and with the highest ease—come to lie subject to corruption and death; which body yet has a beauty of its own kind, and by that very thing sufficiently commends the dignity of the soul, whose neither wound nor sickness has deserved to be without the honor of some comeliness. Which wound the highest Wisdom of God deigned to take on by a wonderful and ineffable mystery, when he took up man without sin, but not without the condition of a sinner. For he willed both to be born in human fashion, and to suffer and to die. None of these by desert, but by his most excellent goodness; so that we might beware rather of the pride by which we most deservedly fell into these things than of the insults which he, undeserving, received; and might with even mind pay the death we owe, if for our sake he was able to bear even one not owed; and whatever more hidden and more purified can be understood in such a mystery by the holy and the better. So it is no wonder that the soul, working in mortal flesh, feels the passion of bodies. Nor, because the soul itself is better than the body, must everything that comes about in it be thought better than everything that comes about in the body. For I believe it seems to you that the true is to be preferred to the false.
deMus.6.4.7
Discipulus: Quis dubitaverit?
Student: Who would doubt it?
deMus.6.4.7
Magister: Num vero est arbor, quam videmus in somnis?
Teacher: But is there a tree that we see in dreams?
deMus.6.4.7
Discipulus: Nullo modo.
Student: In no way.
deMus.6.4.7
Magister: At eius forma in anima fit, huius autem, quam nunc videmus, in corpore facta est. Quare cum et verum falso, et anima corpore melior sit, verum in corpore melius est quam falsum in anima. Sed ut hoc in quantum verum, non in quantum in corpore fit, melius est; ita illud in quantum falsum, non in quantum in anima fit, fortasse est deterius. Nisi quid habes ad haec.
Teacher: But its form comes about in the soul, whereas the form of this one which we now see has come about in the body. So, since both the true is better than the false and the soul better than the body, the true in the body is better than the false in the soul. But as this is better insofar as it is true, not insofar as it comes about in the body, so that other is perhaps worse insofar as it is false, not insofar as it comes about in the soul. Unless you have something against this.
deMus.6.4.7
Discipulus: Nihil equidem.
Student: Nothing indeed.
deMus.6.4.7
Magister: Audi aliud quod sit, ut puto, vicinius quam melius. Neque enim negabis, quod decet esse melius, quam id quod non decet.
Teacher: Hear another point, which is, I think, nearer than better. For you will not deny that what is becoming is better than what is unbecoming.
deMus.6.4.7
Discipulus: Imo fateor.
Student: On the contrary, I admit it.
deMus.6.4.7
Magister: At in qua veste decens est mulier, in eadem virum indecentem esse posse, quis ambigat?
Teacher: But who would doubt that in the same garment in which a woman is becoming, a man can be unbecoming?
deMus.6.4.7
Discipulus: Et hoc manifestum est.
Student: This too is manifest.
deMus.6.4.7
Magister: Quid si ergo forma ista numerorum decet in sonis, qui allabuntur auribus, et dedecet in anima, cum eos sentiendo ac patiendo habet, num magnopere mirandum est?
Teacher: What, then, if this form of numbers is becoming in sounds, which glide into the ears, and unbecoming in the soul, when it has them by feeling and undergoing—is it greatly to be wondered at?
deMus.6.4.7
Discipulus: Non opinor.
Student: I think not.
deMus.6.4.7
Magister: Quid ergo dubitamus sonantes numeros atque corporeos praeponere iis qui ab ipsis fiunt, quamvis in anima fiant, quae corpore est melior? quia numeros numeris, efficientes factis, non corpus animae praeponimus. Corpora enim tanto meliora sunt, quanto numerosiora talibus numeris. Anima vero istis quae per corpus accipit, carendo fit melior, cum sese avertit a carnalibus sensibus, et divinis sapientiae numeris reformatur. Ita quippe in Scripturis sanctis dicitur: Circumivi ego, ut scirem et considerarem et quaererem sapientiam et numerum . Quod nullo modo arbitrandum est de his numeris dictum, quibus etiam flagitiosa theatra personant: sed de illis, credo, quos non a corpore accipit anima, sed acceptos a summo Deo ipsa potius imprimit corpori. Quod quale sit, non hoc loco est considerandum.
Teacher: Why, then, do we hesitate to prefer the sounding and corporeal numbers to those that are made from them, although they are made in the soul, which is better than the body? Because we prefer numbers to numbers, the effecting to the made, not body to soul. For bodies are the better the more rhythmical they are by such numbers. But the soul becomes better by lacking those which it receives through the body, when it turns itself away from the carnal senses and is reformed by the divine numbers of wisdom. For thus it is said in the holy Scriptures: I turned about, that I might know and consider and seek wisdom and number (See Eccl 7:25) Which must in no way be thought said of these numbers by which even shameful theaters resound; but of those, I believe, which the soul receives not from the body, but, having received them from the highest God, itself rather impresses on the body. Of what kind this is, is not to be considered in this place.
deMus.6.4.7
6. 5. 8. Discipulus: Quid est ergo quod in audiente contingit?
6. 5. 8. Student: What, then, is it that takes place in the hearer?
deMus.6.5.8
Magister: Quidquid illud sit quod fortasse invenire aut explicare non possumus, num ad hoc valebit, ut animam corpore meliorem esse dubitemus? Aut cum hoc fatemur, poterimusne operanti corpori et numeros imponenti eam subdere; ut illud sit fabricans, haec autem materies de qua et in qua numerosum aliquid fabricetur? Quod si credimus, deteriorem illam credamus necesse est. Quo quid miserius, quid detestabilius credi potest? Quae cum ita sint, conabor equidem, quantum Deus adiuvare dignabitur, quidnam ibi lateat coniectare atque disserere. Sed si hoc propter utriusque aut alterius nostrum infirmitatem minus pro voluntate successerit, vel nos ipsi alias sereniores id investigabimus, vel intellegentioribus investiganda deferemus, vel aequo animo latere patiemur: non tamen ideo ista certiora de manibus debemus amittere.
Teacher: Whatever that may be, which perhaps we cannot find out or explain—will it avail to make us doubt that the soul is better than the body? Or, when we admit this, will we be able to subject it to the body that works and imposes numbers, so that the body is the fashioner, and the soul the material from which and in which something rhythmical is fashioned? And if we believe this, we must necessarily believe the soul worse. Than which what more wretched, what more detestable, can be believed? Since these things are so, I will indeed try, as far as God deigns to help, to conjecture and discuss what lies hidden there. But if, because of the weakness of both or one of us, this turns out less according to my wish, either we ourselves at another, calmer time will investigate it, or we will leave it to be investigated by the more intelligent, or we will with even mind allow it to lie hidden; yet we ought not on that account to let these more certain things slip from our hands.
deMus.6.5.8
Discipulus: Tenebo istud inconcussum si potero, et tamen latebram istam non esse impenetrabilem nobis velim.
Student: I will hold this unshaken if I can; and yet I could wish that this hidden thing were not impenetrable to us.
deMus.6.5.8
6. 5. 9. Magister: Cito dicam quid sentio: tu vero aut sequere, aut etiam praecede, si valebis, ubi me cunctari et haesitare animadverteris. Ego enim ab anima hoc corpus animari non puto, nisi intentione facientis. Nec ab isto quidquam illam pati arbitror, sed facere de illo et in illo tamquam subiecto divinitus dominationi suae: aliquando tamen cum facilitate, aliquando cum difficultate operari, quanto pro eius meritis magis minusve illi cedit natura corporea. Corporalia ergo quaecumque huic corpori ingeruntur aut obiciuntur extrinsecus, non in anima, sed in ipso corpore aliquid faciunt, quod operi eius aut adversetur, aut congruat. Ideoque cum renititur adversanti, et materiam sibi subiectam in operis sui vias difficulter impingit, fit attentior ex difficultate in actionem; quae difficultas propter attentionem, cum eam non latet, sentire dicitur, et hoc vocatur dolor aut labor. Cum autem congruit quod infertur, aut adiacet, facile totum id vel ex eo quantum opus est, in sui operis itinera traducit. Et ista eius actio qua suum corpus convenienti extrinsecus corpori adiungit, quoniam propter quiddam adventitium attentius agitur, non latet; sed propter convenientiam, cum voluptate sentitur. At cum desunt ea quibus corporis detrimenta reficiat, egestas consequitur; et hac actionis difficultate cum fit attentior, et talis eius operatio non eam latet, fames aut sitis, aut tale aliquid appellatur. Cum autem supersunt ingesta, et ex eorum onere nascitur difficultas operandi, neque hoc sine attentione fit; et cum talis actio non latet, cruditas sentitur: attente etiam operatur cum eicit superfluum, si leniter, cum voluptate; si aspere, cum dolore. Morbidam quoque perturbationem corporis attente agit, succurrere appetens labenti atque diffluenti; et hac actione non latente morbos et aegrotationes sentire dicitur.
6. 5. 9. Teacher: I will quickly say what I feel; but do you either follow, or even go ahead, if you can, where you notice me delaying and hesitating. For I do not think this body is animated by the soul except by the intention of the one acting. Nor do I judge that the soul undergoes anything from the body, but acts upon it and in it as upon something divinely subjected to its dominion; yet sometimes it works with ease, sometimes with difficulty, according as, for its merits, corporeal nature yields to it more or less. So whatever corporeal things are forced upon this body or set against it from without do something not in the soul but in the body itself, which either opposes or agrees with its work. And so, when it strives against what opposes, and with difficulty drives the matter subjected to it into the ways of its work, it becomes, from the difficulty, more attentive in its action; which difficulty, because of the attention, when it does not lie hidden from it, is said to be felt, and this is called pain or labor. But when what is brought in agrees, or lies near, it easily leads the whole, or as much of it as is needed, into the paths of its work. And this its action, by which it joins its body to a fitting body from without, because it is done more attentively on account of something newly arrived, does not lie hidden; but because of the agreement, it is felt with pleasure. But when those things are lacking by which it might repair the body's losses, want follows; and when, by this difficulty of action, it becomes more attentive, and such activity of its does not lie hidden from it, it is called hunger or thirst, or some such thing. But when what has been brought in is in excess, and from their burden arises difficulty of working, neither does this happen without attention; and when such action does not lie hidden, indigestion is felt; it also works attentively when it casts out the superfluous—if gently, with pleasure; if harshly, with pain. The diseased disturbance of the body too it works attentively at, seeking to come to the aid of what is failing and dissolving; and by this action not lying hidden it is said to feel diseases and sicknesses.
deMus.6.5.9
6. 5. 10. Et ne longum faciam, videtur mihi anima cum sentit in corpore, non ab illo aliquid pati, sed in eius passionibus attentius agere, et has actiones sive faciles propter convenientiam, sive difficiles propter inconvenientiam, non eam latere: et hoc totum est quod sentire dicitur. Sed iste sensus, qui etiam dum nihil sentimus, inest tamen, instrumentum est corporis, quod ea temperatione agitur ab anima, ut in eo sit ad passiones corporis cum attentione agendas paratior, similia similibus ut adiungat, repellatque quod noxium est. Agit porro, ut opinor, luminosum aliquid in oculis, aerium serenissimum et mobilissimum in auribus, caliginosum in naribus, in ore humidum, in tactu terrenum et quasi lutulentum. Sed sive hac sive alia distributione ista coniciantur; agit haec anima cum quiete, si ea quae insunt in unitate valetudinis, quasi familiari quadam consensione cesserunt. Cum autem adhibentur ea quae nonnulla, ut ita dicam, alteritate corpus afficiunt; exserit attentiores actiones, suis quibusque locis atque instrumentis accommodatas: tunc videre, vel audire, vel olfacere, vel gustare, vel tangendo sentire dicitur; quibus actionibus congrua libenter associat, et moleste obsistit incongruis. Has operationes passionibus corporis puto animam exhibere cum sentit, non easdem passiones recipere.
6. 5. 10. And, not to make it long, it seems to me that the soul, when it feels in the body, undergoes nothing from it, but acts more attentively in its passions, and that these actions—whether easy because of agreement, or difficult because of disagreement—do not lie hidden from it; and this whole is what is said to be feeling. But this sense, which is present even while we feel nothing, is an instrument of the body, worked by the soul with such a temperament that in it the soul is the more ready to act, with attention, upon the passions of the body, so as to join like to like and repel what is harmful. Further, it works, I think, something luminous in the eyes, something airy, most serene and most mobile, in the ears, something misty in the nostrils, something moist in the mouth, something earthy and as it were muddy in touch. But whether these things be conjectured by this distribution or another, the soul works these with quiet, if those things that are present have yielded, in the unity of health, by a certain familiar consent, as it were. But when those things are applied which affect the body with a certain otherness, so to speak, it puts forth more attentive actions, accommodated to their several places and instruments: then it is said to see, or hear, or smell, or taste, or feel by touching; with which actions it gladly associates the agreeable, and troublesomely resists the disagreeable. These activities, I think, the soul presents to the passions of the body when it feels, not that it receives those same passions.
deMus.6.5.10
6. 5. 11. Discipulus: Nihil minus.
6. 5. 11. Student: Nothing less.
deMus.6.5.11
Magister: Quid? easdem aures animatum membrum esse nonne concedis?
Teacher: And do you not grant that these same ears are an animated member?
deMus.6.5.11
Discipulus: Concedo.
Student: I grant it.
deMus.6.5.11
Magister: Cum ergo id quod in eo membro simile est aeri, moveatur aere percusso; animam illam quae ante istum sonum vitali motu in silentio corpus aurium vegetabat, num putamus aut cessare posse ab opere movendi quod animat, aut eodem modo movere commotum extrinsecus aerem auris suae, quo movebat antequam ille illaberetur sonus?
Teacher: Since, then, that which in this member is like air is moved when the air is struck, do we think that the soul, which before this sound was quickening the body of the ears in silence by a vital motion, can either cease from the work of moving what it animates, or move the air of its ear, stirred from without, in the same way as it moved it before that sound glided in?
deMus.6.5.11
Discipulus: Non videtur nisi aliter.
Student: It does not seem so, except otherwise.
deMus.6.5.11
Magister: Hoc ergo aliter movere, nonne fatendum est facere esse, non pati?
Teacher: This moving otherwise, then—must it not be admitted to be acting, not undergoing?
deMus.6.5.11
Discipulus: Ita est.
Student: It is so.
deMus.6.5.11
Magister: Non igitur absurde credimus motus suos animam, vel actiones, vel operationes, vel si quo alio nomine commodius significari possunt, non latere cum sentit.
Teacher: So not absurdly do we believe that the soul's own motions, or actions, or activities—or by whatever other name they can more conveniently be signified—do not lie hidden from it when it feels.
deMus.6.5.11
6. 5. 12. Hae autem operationes, vel praecedentibus corporum passionibus adhibentur; ut sunt cum illae oculorum nostrorum lucem formae interpellant, aut in aures influit sonus, aut naribus exhalationes, palato sapores, caetero corpori quaelibet solida et corpulenta admoventur extrinsecus, vel in ipso corpore de loco in locum migrat aliquid sive transit, vel totum ipsum corpus suo alienove pondere movetur: hae sunt operationes quas adhibet anima praecedentibus passionibus corporis; quae delectant eam associantem, offendunt resistentem. Cum autem ab eisdem suis operationibus aliquid patitur, a seipsa patitur, non a corpore; sed plane cum se accommodat corpori: et ideo apud seipsam minus est, quia corpus semper minus quam ipsa est.
6. 5. 12. But these activities are applied either to preceding passions of bodies—as they are when those passions of the light interrupt the form of our eyes, or sound flows into the ears, or exhalations into the nostrils, flavors to the palate, and any solid and bulky things are set against the rest of the body from without, or something migrates or passes from place to place in the body itself, or the whole body itself is moved by its own or another's weight: these are the activities which the soul applies to preceding passions of the body, which delight it when it associates with them and offend it when it resists. But when it undergoes something from these its own activities, it undergoes it from itself, not from the body—though plainly when it accommodates itself to the body; and therefore it is less in itself, because the body is always less than itself.
deMus.6.5.12
6. 5. 13. Conversa ergo a Domino suo ad servum suum, necessario deficit: conversa item a servo suo ad Dominum suum, necessario proficit, et praebet eidem servo facillimam vitam, et propterea minime operosam et negotiosam, ad quam propter summam quietem nulla detorqueatur attentio; sicut est affectio corporis quae sanitas dicitur: nulla quippe attentione nostra opus habet, non quia nihil tunc agit anima in corpore, sed quia nihil facilius agit. Nam in omnibus operibus nostris tanto quidquam attentius, quanto difficilius operamur. Haec autem sanitas tunc firmissima erit atque certissima, cum pristinae stabilitati, certo suo tempore atque ordine, hoc corpus fuerit restitutum, quae resurrectio eius antequam plenissime intellegatur, salubriter creditur. Oportet enim animam et regi a superiore, et regere inferiorem. Superior illa solus Deus est, inferius illa solum corpus, si ad omnem et totam animam intendas. Ut ergo tota esse sine Domino, sic excellere sine servo non potest. Ut autem Dominus eius magis est quam ipsa, ita servus minus. Quare intenta in Dominum intellegit aeterna eius, et magis est, magisque est etiam ipse servus in suo genere per illam. Neglecto autem Domino intenta in servum carnali qua ducitur concupiscentia, sentit motus suos quos illi exhibet, et minus est: nec tamen tantum minus, quantum ipse servus, etiam cum maxime est in natura propria. Hoc autem delicto dominae multo minus est quam erat, cum illa ante delictum magis esset.
6. 5. 13. Turned, then, from its Lord to its servant, it necessarily fails; turned likewise from its servant to its Lord, it necessarily advances, and grants to that same servant a most easy life, and therefore one not laborious and busy, to which, because of the highest quiet, no attention is bent aside—such as is that affection of the body which is called health: for it has need of no attention of ours, not because the soul then does nothing in the body, but because it does nothing more easily. For in all our works we work the more attentively the more difficultly. But this health will then be most firm and most certain when this body has been restored, at its own fixed time and order, to its former stability; which resurrection of it, before it is most fully understood, is healthfully believed. For the soul ought both to be ruled by a superior and to rule an inferior. That superior is God alone, that inferior the body alone, if you regard the whole and entire soul. So, as it cannot be entire without its Lord, so it cannot excel without its servant. But as its Lord is more than it, so its servant is less. So, intent on its Lord, it understands his eternal things, and is the more; and the servant too is the more, in its own kind, through it. But, the Lord being neglected, intent on the servant by the carnal desire by which it is led, it feels its own motions which it presents to it, and is the less; yet not so much less as the servant itself, even when it is most fully in its own nature. But by this fault of the mistress it is much less than it was, when, before the fault, it was more.
deMus.6.5.13
6. 5. 14. Quocirca mortali iam et fragili, cum magna difficultate atque attentione dominatur. Hinc illi error incurrit, ut voluptatem corporis, quia eius attentioni cedit materies, pluris aestimet quam ipsam sanitatem, cui attentione nulla opus est. Nec mirum, si aerumnis implicatur, praeponens curam securitati. Convertenti se autem ad Dominum, maior cura oritur, ne avertatur; donec carnalium negotiorum requiescat impetus, effrenatus consuetudine diuturna, et tumultuosis recordationibus conversioni eius sese inserens: ita sedatis motibus suis quibus in exteriora provehebatur, agit otium intrinsecus liberum, quod significatur sabbato; sic cognoscit solum Deum esse Dominum suum, cui uni summa libertate servitur. Non autem illos carnales motus, ut cum libet exserit, ita etiam cum libet exstinguit. Non enim sicut peccatum in eius potestate est, ita etiam poena peccati. Magna quippe res est ipsa anima, nec ad opprimendos lascivos motus suos idonea sibi remanet. Valentior enim peccat, et post peccatum divina lege facta imbecillior, minus potens est auferre quod fecit. Infelix ego homo, quis me liberabit de corpore mortis huius? Gratia Dei per Iesum Christum Dominum nostrum . Motus igitur animae servans impetum suum, et nondum exstinctus, in memoria esse dicitur: et cum in aliud intenditur animus, quasi non inest animo pristinus motus, et revera minor fit, nisi antequam intercidat, quadam similium vicinitate renovetur.
6. 5. 14. Therefore it now lords it over what is mortal and frail with great difficulty and attention. Hence error befalls it, so that it esteems the pleasure of the body, because the material yields to its attention, more than health itself, which has need of no attention. And no wonder that it is entangled in hardships, preferring care to security. But for the soul turning itself to its Lord, a greater care arises, lest it be turned away; until the onrush of carnal businesses, unbridled by long habit and thrusting itself into its conversion with tumultuous recollections, settles down: thus, its own motions by which it was carried out into external things being calmed, it keeps within a free leisure, which is signified by the sabbath; and so it knows that God alone is its Lord, whom alone it serves with the highest freedom. But it does not extinguish those carnal motions when it pleases, as it puts them forth when it pleases. For the penalty of sin is not in its power as sin is. For the soul itself is a great thing, and does not remain fit by itself to suppress its own wanton motions. For it is stronger when it sins, and after the sin, made weaker by the divine law, is less able to take away what it has done. Wretched man that I am! who will deliver me from the body of this death? The grace of God through Jesus Christ our Lord. (Rom 7:24–25) The motion of the soul, then, keeping its own onrush, and not yet extinguished, is said to be in the memory; and when the mind is intent on something else, the former motion is as though not present in the mind, and truly becomes less, unless, before it perishes, it is renewed by a certain nearness of like things.
deMus.6.5.14
6. 5. 15. Discipulus: Probabiliter mihi dicere videris, nec ausim resistere.
6. 5. 15. Student: You seem to me to speak plausibly, and I would not dare to resist.
deMus.6.5.15
Magister: Cum igitur ipsum sentire movere sit corpus adversus illum motum qui in eo factus est, nonne existimas ideo nos non sentire cum ossa et ungues et capilli secantur, non quia ista in nobis omnino non vivunt, non enim aliter aut continerentur aut nutrirentur aut crescerent, aut etiam vim suam in serenda prole monstrarent; sed quia minus libero aere penetrantur, mobili scilicet elemento, quam ut motus ibi possit ab anima fieri tam celer, quam est ille adversus quem fit cum sentire dicitur. Talis quaedam vita cum in arboribus atque stirpibus caeteris esse intellegatur, nullo modo eam non solum nostrae quae ratione etiam praepollet, sed ne ipsi quidem belluinae decet praeponere. Aliud est enim summa stoliditate, aliud summa sanitate corporis nihil sentire. Nam in altero instrumenta desunt, quae adversus passiones corporis moveantur, in altero ipsae passiones.
Teacher: Since, then, feeling itself is to move the body against that motion which has been made in it, do you not judge that we therefore do not feel when bones and nails and hair are cut—not because these things do not live at all in us (for otherwise they would not be held together or nourished or grow, or even show their power in begetting offspring), but because they are penetrated by air, that mobile element, too little freely for so swift a motion to be made there by the soul as is that against which it is made when feeling is said to occur? Since some such life is understood to be in trees and the other plants, it is in no way fitting to prefer it not only to our own life, which even excels by reason, but not even to that of the beasts. For it is one thing to feel nothing by the highest dullness, another by the highest health of body. For in the one the instruments are lacking, which might be moved against the passions of the body; in the other, the passions themselves.
deMus.6.5.15
Discipulus: Probo et assentior.
Student: I approve and agree.
deMus.6.5.15
6. 6. 16. Magister: Redi ergo mecum ad propositum, atque responde de tribus illis generibus numerorum, quorum alterum in memoria est, alterum in sentiendo, alterum in sono, quodnam tibi videatur excellere.
6. 6. 16. Teacher: Return, then, with me to our purpose, and answer about those three kinds of numbers—one of which is in the memory, another in feeling, another in the sound—which seems to you to excel.
deMus.6.6.16
Discipulus: Sonum duobus illis postpono quae in anima sunt et vivunt quodammodo: sed horum duorum quod praestantius iudicem, incertus sum, nisi forte quoniam illos qui sunt in actione, non ob aliud praeponendos iis qui sunt in memoria dixeramus, nisi quod illi facientes sunt, isti ab his facti; eadem ratione istos etiam qui dum audimus insunt in anima, oportet iis anteponere qui ab iisdem in memoria fiunt, sicuti et dudum mihi videbatur.
Student: I set the sound after those two which are in the soul and live in a way; but which of these two I should judge the more excellent I am uncertain—unless perhaps, since we had said that those in action are to be preferred to those in the memory for no other reason than that the former are making and the latter made by them, by the same reasoning these too, which are in the soul while we hear, ought to be preferred to those that are made by them in the memory, as indeed seemed to me a little while ago.
deMus.6.6.16
Magister: Non puto absurdam responsionem tuam: sed quoniam disputatum est, hos etiam qui sunt in sentiendo numeros operationes esse animae; quomodo eos ab illis discernis, quos in actu esse animadvertimus, etiam cum in silentio non recordans agit aliquid anima per temporalia spatia numerosum? an quod illi sunt moventis sese animae ad corpus suum, hi vero in audiendo moventis sese animae adversus passiones corporis sui?
Teacher: I do not think your answer absurd; but since it has been argued that these numbers which are in feeling too are activities of the soul, how do you distinguish them from those that we notice to be in act, even when in silence the soul, not recollecting, does something rhythmical through spans of time? Is it that the latter belong to the soul moving itself toward its body, but these, in hearing, to the soul moving itself against the passions of its body?
deMus.6.6.16
Discipulus: Accipio istam differentiam.
Student: I accept that difference.
deMus.6.6.16
Magister: Quid? in sententia manendumne arbitraris, ut praestantiores illi iudicentur qui sunt ad corpus, quam illi qui sunt adversus passiones corporis?
Teacher: And do you think one should abide by the view that those toward the body are judged more excellent than those against the passions of the body?
deMus.6.6.16
Discipulus: Liberiores mihi videntur illi qui sunt in silentio, quam ii qui non solum ad corpus, sed ad passiones etiam corporis exseruntur.
Student: Those that are in silence seem to me freer than those that are put forth not only toward the body but also against the passions of the body.
deMus.6.6.16
Magister: Distincta a nobis, et quibusdam meritorum gradibus ordinata video quinque genera numerorum, quibus, si placet, imponamus congrua vocabula, ne in reliquo sermone pluribus verbis quam rebus uti necesse sit.
Teacher: I see five kinds of numbers distinguished by us and ordered by certain grades of merit; on which, if you please, let us impose fitting terms, lest in the rest of the discussion we be forced to use more words than things.
deMus.6.6.16
Discipulus: Placet vero.
Student: I agree indeed.
deMus.6.6.16
Magister: Vocentur ergo primi iudiciales, secundi progressores, tertii occursores, quarti recordabiles, quinti sonantes.
Teacher: Let the first, then, be called judging (iudiciales), the second advancing (progressores), the third encountering (occursores), the fourth recalling (recordabiles), the fifth sounding (sonantes).
deMus.6.6.16
Discipulus: Teneo, et his nominibus utar libentius.
Student: I have it, and I will use these names gladly.
deMus.6.6.16
6. 7. 17. Magister: Attende igitur deinceps, et dic mihi, quinam istorum immortales tibi videantur, an omnes suis temporibus labi atque occidere existimes.
6. 7. 17. Teacher: Attend, then, in turn, and tell me which of these seem to you immortal, or whether you judge that all fail and fall in their own times.
deMus.6.7.17
Discipulus: Iudiciales solos immortales puto; caeteros video vel transire cum fiunt, vel de memoria oblivione deleri.
Student: The judging numbers alone I think immortal; the rest I see either pass away as they come about, or are erased from the memory by forgetting.
deMus.6.7.17
Magister: Tam certus es de istorum immortalitate, quam de interitu caeterorum; an diligentius, utrum vere hi immortales sint, oportet quaerere?
Teacher: Are you as certain of the immortality of these as of the perishing of the rest, or must one inquire more carefully whether these are truly immortal?
deMus.6.7.17
Discipulus: Quaeramus sane.
Student: Let us inquire indeed.
deMus.6.7.17
Magister: Dic ergo, cum aliquanto correptius sive productius, dum serviam temporum legi qua simplo ad duplum pedes conveniunt, versum pronuntio, num offendo ulla fraude iudicium sensus tui?
Teacher: Tell me, then: when I pronounce a verse somewhat more shortly or more drawn out, while I keep the law of time-units by which feet agree at single to double, do I offend the judgment of your sense by any deception?
deMus.6.7.17
Discipulus: Non omnino.
Student: Not at all.
deMus.6.7.17
Magister: Quid? sonus ille qui correptioribus et quasi fugacioribus syllabis editur, num potest plus temporis occupare quam sonat?
Teacher: And that sound which is uttered with shorter and, as it were, more fleeting syllables—can it take up more time than it sounds?
deMus.6.7.17
Discipulus: Qui potest?
Student: How can it?
deMus.6.7.17
Magister: Iudiciales ergo illi numeri si vinculo temporis in tanto spatio tenerentur, quanto isti sonantes digesti sunt; possentne ad eorum sonantium qui paulo productius eadem iambica lege funduntur, aspirare iudicium?
Teacher: If, then, those judging numbers were held by the bond of time within as great a span as these sounding ones are arranged in, could they aspire to the judgment of those sounding ones that are poured forth a little more drawn out by the same iambic law?
deMus.6.7.17
Discipulus: Nullo modo.
Student: In no way.
deMus.6.7.17
Magister: Igitur apparet hos mora temporum, qui iudicando praesident, non teneri.
Teacher: So it appears that these, which preside over judging, are not held by the delay of time-units.
deMus.6.7.17
Discipulus: Prorsus apparet.
Student: It appears so entirely.
deMus.6.7.17
6. 7. 18. Magister: Recte annuis. Sed si nulla tenerentur, quantolibet productius, legitimis intervallis iambicos proferrem sonos, nihilominus ad iudicandum adhiberentur: nunc vero si ederem unam syllabam quanta mora peraguntur (ne multum dicam) tres passus incedentis, et aliam duplo, atque ita deinceps tam longos iambos ordinarem; simpli et dupli lex illa nihilosecius servaretur: nec tamen naturale illud iudicium his dimensionibus approbandis adhibere possemus. An tibi non videtur?
6. 7. 18. Teacher: You assent rightly. But if they were held by none, however much more drawn out I uttered iambic sounds at lawful intervals, they would nonetheless be applied to judging; but as it is, if I gave one syllable in as much delay as (not to say much) three paces of a walker are made, and another in double, and so arranged iambs so long, that law of single and double would nonetheless be kept; yet we could not apply that natural judgment to approving these measures. Or does it not seem so to you?
deMus.6.7.18
Discipulus: Negare non possum ita videri: nam mea quidem sententia res in aperto est.
Student: I cannot deny that it seems so: for in my view, at least, the matter is in the open.
deMus.6.7.18
Magister: Tenentur ergo et hi iudiciales nonnullis finibus temporalium spatiorum, quos in iudicando excedere nequeunt, et quidquid excedit haec spatia, non assequuntur ut iudicent: atque ita si tenentur, quomodo sint immortales non video.
Teacher: So these judging numbers too are held by certain bounds of temporal spans, which they cannot exceed in judging, and whatever exceeds these spans they do not reach to judge; and so, if they are held, how they are immortal I do not see.
deMus.6.7.18
Discipulus: Nec ego video quid respondeam. Sed quamquam de immortalitate horum iam minus praesumam, non tamen quo pacto hinc mortales convincantur intellego. Fieri enim potest, ut quantacumque spatia iudicare possunt, semper id possint, quoniam non sicut caeteros, aut oblivione aboleri possum dicere, aut tamdiu esse vel in tantum extendi, quamdiu sonus appellitur et in quantum extenduntur occursores illi, aut quamdiu aguntur vel quantum producuntur quos progressores vocavimus; nam utrique cum ipso tempore operationis suae transeunt: hi autem iudiciales, utrum et in anima nescio, in ipsa certe hominis natura manent, iudicaturi de oblatis, quamquam a certa brevitate usque ad certam longitudinem varientur, approbando in his numerosa, et perturbata damnando.
Student: Nor do I see what to answer. But although I now presume less about their immortality, I yet do not understand by what means they are convicted of being mortal. For it can happen that whatever spans they can judge, they always can, since I cannot say, as of the rest, either that they can be abolished by forgetting, or that they exist or are extended only so long and so far as the sound is driven and the encountering numbers are extended, or so long as the numbers we called advancing are produced or drawn out; for both of these pass away with the very time of their activity. But these judging numbers—whether they are in the soul I do not know, but in the very nature of man at least they remain, to judge about what is offered, although they vary from a fixed brevity up to a fixed length, approving the rhythmical in these and condemning the disturbed.
deMus.6.7.18
6. 7. 19. Magister: Saltem illud concedis, alios homines citius offendi claudicantibus numeris, alios tardius, et plerosque nonnisi ex comparatione integrorum iudicare vitiosos, cum et illos congruos et illos incongruos audierint.
6. 7. 19. Teacher: At least you grant this: that some men are offended more quickly by limping numbers, others more slowly, and that most judge them faulty only by comparison with whole ones, when they have heard both the harmonious and the unharmonious.
deMus.6.7.19
Discipulus: Concedo.
Student: I grant it.
deMus.6.7.19
Magister: Unde tandem hanc differentiam putas existere, nisi aut natura, aut exercitatione, aut utroque?
Teacher: Whence, in the end, do you think this difference arises, except either from nature, or from exercise, or from both?
deMus.6.7.19
Discipulus: Sic arbitror.
Student: So I judge.
deMus.6.7.19
Magister: Quaero igitur utrum possit aliquis aliquando productiora intervalla iudicare et approbare, quae alius non possit.
Teacher: I ask, then, whether someone can at some time judge and approve more drawn-out intervals which another cannot.
deMus.6.7.19
Discipulus: Credo esse posse.
Student: I believe it can be.
deMus.6.7.19
Magister: Quid? ille qui non potest, si se exerceat congruenter, nec adeo tardus sit, nonne poterit?
Teacher: And he who cannot, if he exercises himself fittingly and is not too slow, will he not be able to?
deMus.6.7.19
Discipulus: Poterit vero.
Student: He will indeed.
deMus.6.7.19
Magister: Num in tantum possunt isti proficere ad productiora iudicanda, ut horarum, vel dierum, vel etiam mensium annorumve dupla et simpla spatia, cum saltem somno interpediantur, sensu illo iudiciario possint comprehendere, et tamquam illos iambos motionis nutibus approbare?
Teacher: Can these advance so far in judging more drawn-out things that they can grasp, by that judicial sense, the double and single spans of hours, or days, or even months and years—when they are at least interrupted by sleep—and approve them, as it were like those iambs, by the nods of motion?
deMus.6.7.19
Discipulus: Non possunt.
Student: They cannot.
deMus.6.7.19
Magister: Quid ita non possunt, nisi quia unicuique animanti in genere proprio, proportione universitatis, sensus locorum temporumque tributus est; ut quomodo corpus eius proportione universi corporis tantum est, cuius pars est, et aetas eius proportione universi saeculi tanta est, cuius pars est; ita sensus eius actioni eius congruat, quam proportione agit universi motus, cuius haec pars est? Sic habendo omnia magnus est hic mundus, qui saepe in Scripturis divinis coeli et terrae nomine nuncupatur, cuius omnes partes si proportione minuantur, tantus est; et si proportione augeantur, nihilominus tantus est: quia nihil in spatiis locorum et temporum per seipsum magnum est, sed ad aliquid brevius; et nihil rursus in his per seipsum breve est, sed ad aliquid maius. Quapropter si humanae naturae ad carnalis vitae actiones talis sensus tributus est, quo maiora temporum spatia iudicare non possit, quam intervalla postulant ad talis vitae usum pertinentia; quoniam talis hominis natura mortalis est, etiam talem sensum mortalem puto. Non enim frustra consuetudo quasi secunda, et quasi affabricata natura dicitur. Videmus autem velut quosdam sensus novos in iudicandis cuiuscemodi rebus corporeis consuetudine affectos, alia consuetudine deperire.
Teacher: Why can they not, except that to each living thing, in its own kind, by the proportion of the universe, a sense of places and times has been granted; so that, as its body, by the proportion of the universal body of which it is a part, is just so great, and its age, by the proportion of the whole age of which it is a part, is just so long, so its sense agrees with its action, which it does by the proportion of the universal motion of which it is a part? Having all things thus, this world is great—which is often named in the divine Scriptures by the name of heaven and earth—of which, if all the parts be diminished by proportion, it is just so great; and if increased by proportion, it is nonetheless just so great: because nothing in the spans of places and times is great by itself, but in relation to something shorter; and nothing again in these is short by itself, but in relation to something greater. Therefore, if to human nature, for the actions of carnal life, such a sense has been granted that it cannot judge greater spans of time than the intervals belonging to the use of such a life demand—since the nature of such a man is mortal, I think such a sense too mortal. For not without reason is habit called, as it were, a second and, as it were, an added nature. And we see that certain senses, as it were new, in judging corporeal things of every kind, are affected by habit, and decay by another habit.
deMus.6.7.19
6. 8. 20. Sed quoquo modo se habeant hi numeri iudiciales, eo certe praestant quod dubitamus, vel difficile pervestigamus utrum mortales sint. De caeteris autem quatuor generibus nec quaestio est quin mortales sint; quorum etsi quosdam non comprehendunt, quia ultra ipsorum iura porrecti sunt, genera tamen ipsa suo examini vindicant. Nam et illi progressores cum aliquam in corpore numerosam operationem appetunt, latente istorum iudicialium nutu modificantur. Quod enim nos vel ambulantes ab imparibus passibus, vel percutientes ab imparibus intervallis plagarum, vel edentes vel bibentes ab imparibus malarum motibus, scalpentes denique ab imparibus unguium ductibus; et ne per multas alias operationes percurram, quod nos in qualibet attentione agendi aliquid per corporis membra ab imparibus motibus refrenat et cohibet, et quamdam parilitatem tacite imperat; idipsum est iudiciale nescio quid, quod conditorem animalis insinuat Deum: quem certe decet credere auctorem omnis convenientiae atque concordiae.
6. 8. 20. But however these judging numbers stand, they certainly excel in this: that we doubt, or investigate with difficulty, whether they are mortal. But about the other four kinds there is no question that they are mortal; of which, even though they do not grasp certain ones, because these are stretched beyond their own rights, they yet claim the kinds themselves for their own examination. For those advancing numbers too, when they seek some rhythmical activity in the body, are regulated by the hidden nod of these judging ones. For that we—whether walking are restrained from uneven steps, or striking from uneven intervals of blows, or eating or drinking from uneven motions of the jaws, or scratching from uneven strokes of the nails; and, not to run through many other activities, that we, in any attentive doing of something through the members of the body, are checked and held back from uneven motions, and a certain equality is silently commanded—this very thing is some judging power, I know not what, which intimates God the Founder of the living being: whom it surely befits to believe the author of all agreement and concord.
deMus.6.8.20
6. 8. 21. Et illi occursores numeri, qui certe non pro suo nutu, sed pro passionibus corporis aguntur, in quantum eorum intervalla potest memoria custodire, in tantum his iudicialibus iudicandi offeruntur atque iudicantur. Numerus namque iste qui intervallis temporum constat, nisi adiuvemur in eo memoria, iudicari a nobis nullo pacto potest. Quamlibet enim brevis syllaba, cum et incipiat, et desinat, alio tempore initium eius, et alio finis sonat. Tenditur ergo et ipsa quantulocumque temporis intervallo, et ab initio suo per medium suum tendit ad finem. Ita ratio invenit tam localia quam temporalia spatia infinitam divisionem recipere; et idcirco nullius syllabae cum initio finis auditur. In audienda itaque vel brevissima syllaba, nisi memoria nos adiuvet, ut eo momento temporis quo iam non initium, sed finis syllabae sonat, maneat ille motus in animo, qui factus est cum initium ipsum sonuit; nihil nos audisse possumus dicere. Hinc est illud quod plerumque alia cogitatione occupati, coram loquentes non nobis videmur audisse: non quia occursores illos numeros non agit tunc anima, cum sine dubio sonus ad aures perveniat, et illa in passione corporis sui cessare non possit, nec possit nisi aliter moveri quam si illa non fieret; sed quia intentione in aliud subinde exstinguitur motionis impetus, qui si maneret, in memoria utique maneret, ut nos et inveniremus et sentiremus audisse. Quod si de una syllaba brevi minus sequitur mens tardior quod invenit ratio, de duabus certe nemo dubitat, quin eas simul nulla anima possit audire. Non enim sonat secunda, nisi prima destiterit: quod autem simul sonare non potest, simul audiri qui potest? Ut igitur nos ad capienda spatia locorum diffusio radiorum iuvat, qui e brevibus pupulis in aperta emicant, et adeo sunt nostri corporis, ut quamquam in procul positis rebus quas videmus, a nostra anima vegetentur; ut ergo eorum effusione adiuvamur ad capienda spatia locorum: ita memoria, quod quasi lumen est temporalium spatiorum, quantum in suo genere quodammodo extrudi potest, tantum eorumdem spatiorum capit. Cum autem diutius aures pulsat sonus nullis distinctus articulis, et ab aliquo tandem fine coniunctus alter duplo, aut etiam tanto editur spatio; attentione in succedentem perpetuo sonum motus ille animi, qui attentione ad praeteritum et elapsum sonum cum transibat est factus, reprimitur, id est non ita remanet in memoria. Quapropter iudiciales illi numeri, qui numeros in intervallis temporum sitos, exceptis progressoribus quibus etiam ipsum progressum modificant, iudicare non possunt nisi quos eis tamquam ministra memoria obtulerit; nonne ipsi existimandi sunt per certum spatium temporis tendi? Sed interest quibus temporum spatiis vel excidat nobis, vel meminerimus quod iudicant. Siquidem nec in ipsis corporum formis quae ad oculos pertinent, possumus rotunda vel quadra, vel quaecumque alia solida et determinata iudicare, et omnino sentire, nisi ea ob oculos versemus: cum autem alia pars aspicitur, si exciderit quod est aspectum in alia, frustratur omnino iudicantis intentio, quia et hoc aliqua mora temporis fit; cui variatae opus est invigilare memoriam.
6. 8. 21. And those encountering numbers, which surely are produced not by their own nod but for the passions of the body, are offered for judging and judged by these judging ones just so far as the memory can guard their intervals. For this number, which consists of intervals of time, unless we are helped in it by memory, can in no way be judged by us. For however short a syllable, since it both begins and ends, its beginning sounds at one time and its end at another. So it too is stretched over some interval, however small, of time, and from its beginning, through its middle, stretches to its end. So reason finds that local as well as temporal spans admit infinite division; and therefore the end of no syllable is heard together with its beginning. And so, in hearing even the shortest syllable, unless memory helps us, so that at the moment of time when now not the beginning but the end of the syllable sounds, that motion remains in the mind which was made when the beginning itself sounded, we cannot say that we have heard anything. Hence is that which often, occupied by another thought, we seem not to ourselves to have heard those speaking before us: not because the soul does not then produce those encountering numbers, since without doubt the sound reaches the ears, and it cannot cease in the passion of its body, nor can it but be moved otherwise than if that passion did not occur; but because, by the intention upon something else, the onrush of the motion is presently extinguished, which, if it remained, would surely remain in the memory, so that we both found and felt that we had heard. And if the slower mind follows less, about one short syllable, what reason finds, about two at least no one doubts that no soul can hear them together. For the second does not sound unless the first has ceased; but what cannot sound together, how can it be heard together? As, then, the diffusion of rays helps us to grasp the spans of places—rays that flash out from the little pupils into open spaces, and so belong to our body that, although in things set far off which we see, they are quickened by our soul; as, then, we are helped by their outpouring to grasp the spans of places, so memory, which is as it were the light of temporal spans, grasps just so much of those same spans as it can in its own kind, in a way, be thrust out. But when a sound, distinguished by no joints, strikes the ears longer, and at last, joined from some end, another is uttered in double, or even in just so great a span, then, by the attention upon the perpetually succeeding sound, that motion of the mind which was made by the attention as it passed to the past and elapsed sound is repressed—that is, does not so remain in the memory. Therefore those judging numbers, which cannot judge numbers set in intervals of time (except the advancing ones, by which they also regulate the advance itself) unless memory, as a handmaid, offers them—are they not themselves to be reckoned as stretched through a fixed span of time? But it matters in what spans of time either it slips from us, or we remember, what they judge. Since not even in the very forms of bodies that pertain to the eyes can we judge round or square, or any other solid and determinate things, and feel them at all, unless we turn them before our eyes; but when one part is looked at, if what was looked at in another part has slipped away, the intention of the one judging is altogether frustrated, because this too is done in some delay of time, for whose variation it is needful that memory keep watch.
deMus.6.8.21
6. 8. 22. Recordabiles vero numeros multo evidentius est, quod eadem ipsa offerente memoria, iudicamus his iudicialibus. Nam si occursores, quantum ab ea offeruntur, tantum iudicantur; multo magis ii, ad quos tamquam repositos post alias intentiones revocamur recordatione, in ipsa memoria vivere inveniuntur. Quid enim aliud agimus cum revocamus nos in memoriam, nisi quodammodo quod reposuimus quaerimus? Recurrit autem in cogitationem occasione similium motus animi non exstinctus, et haec est quae dicitur recordatio. Sic agimus numeros, vel in sola cogitatione, vel etiam in membrorum motu, quos iam egimus aliquando. Inde autem scimus non venisse, sed redisse illos in cogitationem, quia cum memoriae mandarentur, cum difficultate repetebantur, et indigebamus aliqua praemonstratione ut sequeremur: qua difficultate dempta, cum sese ipsi accommodate voluntati offerunt, consequenter temporibus atque ordine suo, tam facile ut qui vehementius inhaeserunt, etiam aliunde cogitantibus nobis, iam quasi proprio nutu peragantur, non eos utique novos esse sentimus. Est etiam aliud unde nos sentire arbitror praesentem motum animi aliquando iam fuisse, quod est recognoscere, dum recentes motus eius actionis in qua sumus cum recordamur, qui certe vivaciores sunt, cum recordabilibus iam sedatioribus quodam interiore lumine comparamus: et talis agnitio, recognitio est et recordatio. Iudicantur ergo et recordabiles numeri ab his iudicialibus, numquam soli, sed adiunctis activis, aut occursoribus, aut utrisque, qui eos tamquam e latebris suis in manifestum producant, et quasi redintegratos qui iam abolebantur, rursum recordantur. Ita cum occursores in tantum iudicentur, in quantum eos memoria iudicantibus admoverit, possunt vicissim et recordabiles qui sunt in memoria occursoribus eos exhibentibus iudicari: ut hoc intersit, quod occursores ut iudicentur, quasi recentia eorum fugientium vestigia offert memoria; recordabiles autem quando eos audiendo iudicamus, quasi eadem vestigia occursoribus transeuntibus revirescunt. Iam porro de sonantibus numeris quid opus est dicere, cum in occursoribus iudicentur, si audiantur? Si vero ibi sonant ubi non audiuntur, quis dubitet eos a nobis non posse iudicari? Sane ut in sonis per instrumentum aurium, ita in saltationibus caeterisque visibilibus motibus, quod ad temporales numeros attinet, eadem adiuvante memoria iisdem numeris iudicialibus diiudicamus.
6. 8. 22. But that we judge the recalling numbers by these judging ones, the memory itself offering them, is much more evident. For if the encountering ones are judged just so far as they are offered by it, much more those to which we are called back by recollection, as if laid up after other intentions, are found to live in the memory itself. For what else do we do when we call ourselves back into memory, than in a way seek what we have laid up? But there recurs into the thought, on the occasion of like things, a motion of the mind not extinguished, and this is what is called recollection. So we produce numbers, whether in thought alone or also in the motion of the members, which we have already at some time produced. But we know that they have not come, but returned, into the thought, because, when they were committed to memory, they were repeated with difficulty, and we needed some prompting to follow; and when this difficulty is removed, when they offer themselves suitably to the will, consequently in their times and order—so easily that those which have clung more strongly are now performed as if by their own nod, even while we are thinking of something else—we surely do not feel them to be new. There is also another thing whence, I think, we feel that a present motion of the mind has already at some time existed, which is to recognize, when we compare, by a certain inner light, the recent motions of that action in which we are when we recollect (which are surely more lively) with the recalling numbers, now more settled: and such acknowledgment is recognition and recollection. So the recalling numbers too are judged by these judging ones, never alone, but with the active, or the encountering, or both joined, which bring them as it were out of their hiding places into the open, and which, as if restored when they were already being abolished, are recalled again. So, since the encountering numbers are judged just so far as memory has brought them to the ones judging, the recalling numbers too, which are in the memory, can in turn be judged when the encountering ones present them: with this difference, that, that the encountering ones may be judged, memory offers, as it were, the fresh traces of those fleeing; but the recalling ones, when we judge them by hearing, their same traces, as it were, grow green again as the encountering ones pass by. And now, indeed, what need is there to speak of the sounding numbers, since they are judged among the encountering ones, if they are heard? But if they sound where they are not heard, who doubts that they cannot be judged by us? Of course, as in sounds through the instrument of the ears, so in dances and the other visible motions, as concerns the temporal numbers, by the same memory helping we judge by these same judging numbers.
deMus.6.8.22
6. 9. 23. Discipulus: Movet me plurimum istorum iudicialium vis atque potentia: ipsi enim mihi videntur esse ad quos omnium sensuum ministeria referuntur. Itaque his excellentius utrum quidquam in numeris inveniri possit, ignoro.
6. 9. 23. Student: The force and power of these judging numbers moves me greatly: for they themselves seem to me to be those to which the ministries of all the senses are referred. And so whether anything more excellent than these can be found among numbers, I do not know.
deMus.6.9.23
Magister: Nihil deperit quod diligentius quaerimus. Aut enim inveniemus superiores in anima humana, aut hos in ea summos esse firmabimus, si tamen illud claruerit, nullos in ea esse praestantiores. Aliud est enim non esse, aliud non posse inveniri, sive ab ullo homine, sive a nobis. Sed ego puto cum ille a nobis propositus versus canitur: Deus creator omnium; nos eum et occursoribus illis numeris audire, et recordabilibus recognoscere, et progressoribus pronuntiare, et his iudicialibus delectari, et nescio quibus aliis aestimare, et de ista delectatione quae quasi sententia est iudicialium istorum, aliam secundum hos latentiores certiorem ferre sententiam. An tibi unum atque idem videtur delectari sensu, et aestimare ratione?
Teacher: Nothing is lost by our inquiring more carefully. For either we will find higher ones in the human soul, or we will affirm that these are the highest in it, if indeed it has become clear that none are more excellent in it. For it is one thing not to be, another not to be able to be found, whether by any man or by us. But I think that when that verse proposed by us is sung, Deus creator omnium, we both hear it by those encountering numbers, and recognize it by the recalling ones, and pronounce it by the advancing ones, and are delighted by these judging ones, and estimate it by some others I know not, and, about that delight—which is, as it were, the verdict of these judging numbers—pass another, more certain verdict according to these more hidden ones. Or does it seem to you one and the same thing to be delighted by sense and to estimate by reason?
deMus.6.9.23
Discipulus: Diversa esse fateor. Sed primo ipso moveor vocabulo, cur non potius isti vocentur iudiciales quibus inest ratio, quam isti quibus inest delectatio. Deinde vereor ne nihil sit aliud aestimatio ista rationis, quam eorum de seipsis quaedam diligentior iudicatio: ut non alii sint numeri in delectatione, alii in ratione; sed uni atque iidem alias iudicent de iis quae aguntur in corpore, cum eos, ut supra demonstratum est, offert memoria; alias de seipsis remotius a corpore atque sincerius.
Student: I admit they are diverse. But first I am moved by the very term: why should not those rather be called judging in which reason resides, than those in which delight resides? Then I fear that this estimation of reason may be nothing else than a certain more careful judgment of those numbers about themselves: so that there are not some numbers in delight, others in reason, but one and the same now judge about the things done in the body, when memory offers them, as was shown above; now about themselves, more removed from the body and more sincerely.
deMus.6.9.23
6. 9. 24. Magister: De vocabulis quidem nihil satagas; res in potestate est: placito enim, non natura imponuntur. Quod autem eosdem esse arbitraris, nec duo genera numerorum haec vis accipere; illud, ni fallor, te rapit, quod eadem anima utrumque agit. Sed animadvertere te opus est, et in progressoribus eamdem animam corpus movere vel ad corpus moveri; et in occursoribus hanc eamdem passionibus eius ire obviam; et in recordabilibus istam ipsam, donec quodammodo detumescant, ipsis quasi fluctuare motionibus. Nos ergo in istis generibus numerandis et distinguendis unius naturae, id est, animae motus affectionesque dispicimus. Quare si ut aliud est ad ea quae corpus patitur moveri, quod fit in sentiendo; aliud movere se ad corpus, quod fit in operando; aliud quod ex his motibus in anima factum est continere, quod est meminisse; ita est aliud annuere, vel renuere his motibus, aut cum primitus exseruntur, aut cum recordatione resuscitantur, quod fit in delectatione convenientiae, et offensione absurditatis talium motionum sive affectionum; et aliud est aestimare utrum recte an secus ista delectent, quod fit ratiocinando: necesse est fateamur ita haec esse duo genera, ut illa sunt trio. Et si recte nobis visum est, nisi quibusdam numeris esset ipse delectationis sensus imbutus, nullo modo eum potuisse annuere paribus intervallis, et perturbata respuere: recte etiam videri potest ratio, quae huic delectationi superimponitur, nullo modo sine quibusdam numeris vivacioribus, de numeris quos infra se habet posse iudicare. Quae si vera sunt, apparet inventa esse in anima quinque genera numerorum, quibus cum addideris corporales illos quos sonantes vocavimus, sex genera numerorum disposita et ordinata cognosces. Iam nunc, si placet, illi qui nobis subrepserant ad principatum obtinendum, sensuales nominentur, et iudicialium nomen, quoniam est honoratius, hi accipiant qui excellentiores comperti sunt: quamquam et sonantium nomen mutandum putem, quoniam si corporales vocentur, manifestius significabunt etiam illos qui sunt in saltatione, et in caetero motu visibili. Si tamen ea quae dicta sunt probas.
6. 9. 24. Teacher: About the terms, busy yourself not at all; the thing is in our power, for they are imposed by agreement, not by nature. But that you judge them the same, and that this force does not admit these as two kinds of numbers, this, unless I am mistaken, carries you away: that the same soul produces both. But you need to notice that in the advancing numbers too the same soul moves the body, or is moved toward the body; and in the encountering ones this same soul goes to meet its passions; and in the recalling ones this very soul, until they in a way subside, fluctuates, as it were, with those motions. So we, in numbering and distinguishing these kinds, are discerning the motions and affections of one nature, that is, of the soul. Therefore, just as it is one thing to be moved toward what the body undergoes, which happens in feeling; another to move oneself toward the body, which happens in working; another to retain what has been made in the soul from these motions, which is to remember; so it is one thing to assent to or refuse these motions, whether when they are first put forth or when they are roused again by recollection (which happens in the delight at the agreement, and offense at the absurdity, of such motions or affections); and another to estimate whether these rightly or otherwise delight, which happens by reasoning: we must necessarily admit that these are two kinds, as those are three. And if it rightly seemed to us that, unless the very sense of delight were imbued with certain numbers, it could in no way assent to equal intervals and reject disturbed ones, it can rightly seem too that reason, which is set over this delight, can in no way, without certain more lively numbers, judge about the numbers it has below it. And if these things are true, it appears that five kinds of numbers have been found in the soul; to which, when you have added those corporeal ones which we called sounding, you will recognize six kinds of numbers set out and ordered. Now then, if you please, let those that had crept up on us to obtain the primacy be named sensual, and let the name of judging, since it is more honorable, be taken by those that have been found more excellent; although I think the name of the sounding ones too should be changed, since, if they are called corporeal, they will more clearly signify those too that are in dance, and in the rest of visible motion. If, however, you approve what has been said.
deMus.6.9.24
Discipulus: Probo sane: nam et vera et manifesta mihi videntur. Horum etiam emendationem vocabulorum libenter accipio.
Student: I approve indeed: for these things seem to me both true and manifest. I gladly accept too the correction of these terms.
deMus.6.9.24
6. 10. 25. Magister: Age, nunc aspice in vim potentiamque rationis, quantum ex operibus eius aspicere possumus. Ipsa enim, ut id potissimum dicam quod ad huius operis susceptionem attinet, primo quid sit ipsa bona modulatio consideravit, et eam in quodam motu libero, et ad suae pulchritudinis finem converso esse perspexit. Deinde vidit in motibus corporum aliud esse quod brevitate et productione temporis variaretur, in quantum magis esset minusve diuturnum, aliud localium spatiorum percussione in quibusdam gradibus celeritatis et tarditatis: qua divisione facta, illud quod in temporis mora esset, modestis intervallis, et humano sensui accommodatis articulatim varios efficeret numeros, eorumque genera et ordinem usque ad modulos versuum persecuta est. Postremo attendit quid in his moderandis, operandis, sentiendis, retinendis ageret anima, cuius caput ipsa esset: hosque omnes animales numeros a corporalibus separavit: seque ipsam haec omnia neque animadvertere, neque distinguere, neque recte numerare sine quibusdam suis numeris potuisse cognovit, eosque caeteris inferioris ordinis iudiciaria quadam aestimatione praeposuit.
6. 10. 25. Teacher: Come, now look at the force and power of reason, as far as we can look at it from its works. For it itself—to say chiefly what pertains to the undertaking of this work—first considered what good measuring itself is, and saw that it lies in a certain free motion, turned toward the end of its own beauty. Then it saw that in the motions of bodies one thing is what varies by the shortness and length of time, insofar as it is more or less lasting, another by the striking of local spaces, in certain degrees of swiftness and slowness; and, this division being made, that which lay in the delay of time, by moderate intervals accommodated to human sense, made various numbers articulately, and pursued their kinds and order up to the measures of verses. Finally it attended to what the soul, whose head it itself was, did in regulating, working, feeling, and retaining these; and it separated all these animate numbers from the corporeal; and it recognized that it could itself neither notice, nor distinguish, nor rightly number all these without certain numbers of its own, and it preferred these, by a certain judicial estimation, to the rest of a lower order.
deMus.6.10.25
6. 10. 26. Et nunc cum ipsa sua delectatione, quae in temporum momenta perpendit, et talibus numeris modificandis nutus suos exhibet, sic agit; quid est quod in sensibili numerositate diligimus? Num aliud praeter parilitatem quamdam et aequaliter dimensa intervalla? An ille pyrrhichius pes, sive spondeus, sive anapaestus, sive dactylus, sive proceleumaticus, sive dispondeus nos aliter delectaret; nisi partem suam parti alteri aequali divisione conferret? Quid vero iambus, trochaeus, tribrachus pulchritudinis habent, nisi quod minore sua parte maiorem suam partem in tantas duas aequaliter dividunt? Iam porro sex temporum pedes, num aliunde blandius sonant atque festivius, nisi quod utraque lege partiuntur; scilicet aut in duas aequales partes terna tempora possidentes, aut in unam simplam ex aequalibus partem, et alteram duplam, id est, ut maior habeat bis minorem, et eo modo ab illa dividatur aequaliter, duobus temporibus quatuor tempora in bina demetiente ac secante? Quid illi quinum septenumque temporum pedes? unde solutae orationi, quam versibus videntur aptiores, nisi quod eorum pars minor in partes aequales maiorem non dividit? Et hi tamen ipsi unde admittuntur in sui generis ordine ad temporum numerositatem, nisi quia et in quinque temporibus tantas duas particulas habet pars minor, quantas maior tres; et in septem tantas tres minor, quantas maior quatuor? Ita in omnibus pedibus nulla pars minima est alicuius dimensionis articulo notata, cui non caeterae quanta possunt aequalitate consentiant.
6. 10. 26. And now, with that delight of its own which weighs the moments of time and presents its nods for regulating such numbers, it acts thus: what is it that we love in sensible rhythm? Is it anything but a certain equality and equally measured intervals? Or would that pyrrhic foot, or spondee, or anapest, or dactyl, or proceleusmatic, or dispondee delight us otherwise than because it compares its part to the other part by an equal division? And what beauty do the iamb, trochee, tribrach have, except that they divide their larger part equally into just so many parts by their smaller? And further, the feet of six time-units—do they sound more pleasantly and festively from any other source than that they are divided by either law: namely either into two equal parts holding three time-units each, or into one single part of equal time-units and another double—that is, so that the larger has the smaller twice, and in that way is divided equally by it, the two time-units measuring out and cutting the four time-units into two each? What of those feet of five and seven time-units? Whence are they more fit for prose, which they seem to be than for verses, except that their smaller part does not divide the larger into equal parts? And yet these very ones, whence are they admitted, in the order of their kind, to temporal rhythm, except because both in five time-units the smaller part has just so many little parts as the larger three, and in seven the smaller just so many as the larger four? So in all feet no smallest part marked by some joint of division is without the rest agreeing with it in as great an equality as they can.
deMus.6.10.26
6. 10. 27. Age, in coniunctis pedibus sive libera perpetuitate porrigatur ista coniunctio, sicut in rhythmis; sive ab aliquo certo fine revocetur, sicut in metris; sive etiam in duo membra quadam lege sibimet congruentia tribuatur, sicut in versibus; qua tandem alia re, nisi aequalitate pes pedi amicus est? Unde molossi, et ionicorum syllaba media quae longa est, non sectione, sed nutu ipso pronuntiantis atque plaudentis in duo paria momenta distribui potest; ut etiam ad terna tempora pes totus conveniat, quando caeteris qui eodem modo dividuntur, adiungitur; cur nisi aequalitatis iure dominante, quod scilicet aequalis est lateribus suis, quae binorum temporum sunt, cum et ipsa sit duum temporum? Cur idem fieri in amphibracho non potest, quando caeteris quatuor temporum adiungitur, nisi quia tanta ibi non invenitur aequalitas duplo medio, lateribus simplis? Cur in silentiorum intervallis nulla fraude sensus offenditur, nisi quia eidem iuri aequalitatis, etiamsi non sono, spatio tamen temporis quod debetur, exsolvitur? Cur sequente silentio etiam brevis syllaba pro longa accipitur, non instituto, sed ipso naturali examine quod auribus praesidet; nisi quia in spatio temporis longiore sonum coarctare in angustias eadem illa aequalitatis lege prohibemur? Itaque syllabam ultra duo tempora producere, ut etiam sono impleatur quod silentio impleri potest, admittit natura audiendi et tacendi: ut autem minus quam duo tempora occupet syllaba, dum restat spatium tacitis nutibus, quaedam fraus aequalitatis est, quia minus quam in duobus esse aequalitas non potest. Iam vero in ipsa aequalitate membrorum qua variantur illi ambitus, quos Graeci vocant, versusque figurantur, quomodo ad eamdem aequalitatem secretius reditur; nisi ut in ambitu brevius membrum maiori aequalibus pedibus ad plausum conveniat, et in versu occultiore consideratione numerorum, ea quae inaequalia membra iunguntur, vim aequalitatis habere inveniantur?
6. 10. 27. Come, in joined feet—whether this joining is stretched in free perpetuity, as in rhythms; or recalled from some fixed end, as in meters; or even distributed into two members agreeing with each other by some law, as in verses—by what, in the end, is foot friendly to foot, except by equality? Whence the middle syllable of the molossus and the ionics, which is long, can be distributed into two equal moments, not by section but by the very nod of the one pronouncing and beating, so that the whole foot agrees even to three time-units each when it is joined to others that are divided in the same way; why, except by the right of equality holding sway—namely that it is equal to its sides, which are of two time-units each, since it too is of two time-units? Why can the same not be done in the amphibrach, when it is joined to others of four time-units, except because there so great an equality is not found, the middle being double, the sides single? Why, in the intervals of silences, is the sense offended by no deception, except because what is owed is paid to that same right of equality, if not in sound, yet in span of time? Why, a silence following, is even a short syllable taken for a long—not by institution, but by that very natural judgment which presides over the ears—except because in a longer span of time we are forbidden, by that same law of equality, to compress the sound into narrow bounds? And so, to draw out a syllable beyond two time-units, so that what can be filled by silence is filled by sound too, the nature of hearing and of being silent admits; but that a syllable should take up less than two time-units, while a span remains for silent nods, is a certain deception of equality, because there cannot be equality in less than two. But now, in that very equality of members by which those periods are varied which the Greeks call so, and verses are figured, how is one led back more secretly to the same equality, except that in a period the shorter member agrees with the larger by equal feet to the beat, and in a verse, by a more hidden consideration of numbers, those unequal members that are joined are found to have the force of equality?
deMus.6.10.27
6. 10. 28. Quaerit ergo ratio, et carnalem animae delectationem, quae iudiciales partes sibi vindicabat, interrogat, cum eam in spatiorum temporalium numeri aequalitas mulceat, utrum duae syllabae breves quascumque audierit vere sint aequales; an fieri possit, ut una earum edatur productius, non usque ad longae syllabae modum, sed infra quantumlibet, quo tamen excedat sociam suam. Num negari potest, fieri posse, cum haec delectatio ista non sentiat, et inaequalibus velut aequalibus gaudeat? quo errore et inaequalitate quid turpius? Ex quo admonemur ab his avertere gaudium, quae imitantur aequalitatem, et utrum impleant, comprehendere non possumus: imo quod non impleant fortasse comprehendimus; et tamen in quantum imitantur, pulchra esse in suo genere et ordine suo, negare non possumus.
6. 10. 28. Reason, then, inquires, and questions the carnal delight of the soul—which claimed the judging part for itself, when the equality of number in temporal spans charms it—whether two short syllables, whichever it hears, are truly equal; or whether it can happen that one of them is uttered more drawn out, not up to the measure of a long syllable, but below it by however little, by which yet it exceeds its fellow. Can it be denied that this can happen, when this delight does not perceive it, and rejoices in unequal things as if equal? Than which error and inequality what is more base? Whence we are admonished to turn delight away from those things that imitate equality, and whether they fulfill it we cannot grasp; nay, that they do not fulfill it we perhaps grasp; and yet, insofar as they imitate it, that they are beautiful in their own kind and in their own order, we cannot deny.
deMus.6.10.28
6. 11. 29. Non ergo invideamus inferioribus quam nos sumus, nosque ipsos inter illa quae infra nos sunt, et illa quae supra nos sunt, ita Deo et Domino nostro opitulante ordinemus, ut inferioribus non offendamur, solis autem superioribus delectemur. Delectatio quippe quasi pondus est animae. Delectatio ergo ordinat animam. Ubi enim erit thesaurus tuus, ibi erit et cor tuum : ubi delectatio, ibi thesaurus: ubi autem cor, ibi beatitudo aut miseria. Quae vero superiora sunt, nisi illa in quibus summa, inconcussa, incommutabilis, aeterna manet aequalitas? Ubi nullum est tempus, quia nulla mutabilitas est; et unde tempora fabricantur et ordinantur et modificantur aeternitatem imitantia, dum coeli conversio ad idem redit, et coelestia corpora ad idem revocat, diebusque et mensibus et annis et lustris, caeterisque siderum orbibus, legibus aequalitatis et unitatis et ordinationis obtemperat. Ita coelestibus terrena subiecta, orbes temporum suorum numerosa successione quasi carmini universitatis associant.
6. 11. 29. Let us not, then, envy things lower than we are, and let us so order ourselves, by the help of God our Lord, among those things that are below us and those that are above us, that we be not offended by the lower, but delighted only by the higher. For delight is, as it were, the weight of the soul. Delight, then, orders the soul. For where your treasure is, there will your heart be also (Matt 6:21): where the delight, there the treasure; but where the heart, there blessedness or misery. But what are the higher things, except those in which the highest, unshaken, unchangeable, eternal equality abides? Where there is no time, because there is no changeableness; and whence times are fashioned and ordered and regulated, imitating eternity, while the turning of the heaven returns to the same point, and recalls the heavenly bodies to the same point, and, by days and months and years and lustra, and the other circlings of the stars, obeys the laws of equality and unity and ordering. So earthly things, subjected to the heavenly, associate the circlings of their own times, by a rhythmical succession, as it were to the song of the universe.
deMus.6.11.29
6. 11. 30. In quibus multa nobis videntur inordinata et perturbata, quia eorum ordini pro nostris meritis assuti sumus, nescientes quid de nobis divina providentia pulchrum gerat. Quoniam si quis, verbi gratia, in amplissimarum pulcherrimarumque aedium uno aliquo angulo tamquam statua collocetur, pulchritudinem illius fabricae sentire non poterit, cuius et ipse pars erit. Nec universi exercitus ordinem miles in acie valet intueri. Et in quolibet poemate si quanto spatio syllabae sonant, tanto viverent atque sentirent, nullo modo illa numerositas et contexti operis pulchritudo eis placeret, quam totam perspicere atque approbare non possent, cum de ipsis singulis praetereuntibus fabricata esset atque perfecta. Ita peccantem hominem ordinavit Deus turpem, non turpiter. Turpis enim factus est voluntate, universum amittendo quod Dei praeceptis obtemperans possidebat, et ordinatus in parte est, ut qui legem agere noluit, a lege agatur. Quidquid autem legitime, utique iuste; et quidquid iuste, non utique turpiter agitur: quia et in malis operibus nostris Dei opera bona sunt. Homo namque in quantum homo est, aliquod bonum est; adulterium autem in quantum adulterium est, malum opus est: plerumque autem de adulterio nascitur homo, de malo scilicet hominis opere bonum opus Dei.
6. 11. 30. Among these things many seem to us disordered and disturbed, because we have been sewn to their order according to our deserts, not knowing what beautiful thing the divine providence works concerning us. Since if anyone, for example, were set like a statue in some one corner of a most spacious and most beautiful building, he could not perceive the beauty of that structure of which he himself would be a part. Nor can a soldier in the line behold the order of the whole army. And in any poem, if the syllables lived and felt for as long a span as they sound, that rhythm and the beauty of the woven work would in no way please them, which they could not behold and approve as a whole, since it would be fashioned and completed out of those very single ones passing away. So God ordered the sinning man as base, not basely. For he was made base by his will, losing the whole which, obeying God's precepts, he possessed, and he was ordered in a part, so that he who would not act by the law might be acted upon by the law. But whatever is done lawfully is surely done justly; and whatever is done justly is surely not done basely: because even in our bad works God's works are good. For a man, insofar as he is a man, is some good; but adultery, insofar as it is adultery, is a bad work: yet often a man is born of adultery—from a bad work of man, that is, a good work of God.
deMus.6.11.30
6. 11. 31. Quamobrem ut nos ad propositum, propter quod haec sunt dicta, referamus, hi numeri rationis pulchritudine praeminent, a quibus si prorsus abscinderemur, cum inclinamur ad corpus, progressores numeros sensuales non modificarent: qui rursus movendis corporibus agunt sensibiles temporum pulchritudines: atque ita sonantibus obvii etiam occursores numeri fabricantur; quos omnes impetus suos eadem anima excipiens, quasi multiplicat in seipsa, et recordabiles facit: quae vis eius memoria dicitur, magnum quoddam adiutorium in huius vitae negotiosissimis actibus.
6. 11. 31. Therefore, to bring ourselves back to the purpose for which these things have been said, these numbers of reason excel in beauty; and if we were wholly cut off from them, when we incline toward the body, they would not regulate the sensual advancing numbers; which in turn, in moving bodies, produce the sensible beauties of times; and so the encountering numbers too are fashioned, meeting the sounding ones; all of which the same soul, receiving their onrushes, in a way multiplies in itself, and makes recalling; which power of it is called memory, a certain great help in the most busy acts of this life.
deMus.6.11.31
6. 11. 32. Haec igitur memoria quaecumque de motibus animi tenet, qui adversus passiones corporis acti sunt, graece vocantur; nec invenio quid eas latine malim vocare: quas pro cognitis habere atque pro perceptis opinabilis vita est, constituta in ipso erroris introitu. Sed cum sibi isti motus occursant, et tamquam diversis et repugnantibus intentionis flatibus aestuant, alios ex aliis motus pariunt; non iam eos qui tenentur ex occursionibus passionum corporis impressi de sensibus, similes tamen tamquam imaginum imagines, quae phantasmata dici placuit. Aliter enim cogito patrem meum quem saepe vidi, aliter avum quem numquam vidi. Horum primum phantasia est, alterum phantasma. Illud in memoria invenio, hoc in eo motu animi, qui ex iis ortus est quos habet memoria. Quomodo autem oriantur haec, et invenire et explicare difficile est. Arbitror tamen, quod si numquam humana corpora vidissem, nullo modo ea possem visibili specie cogitando figurare. Quod autem ex eo quod vidi facio, memoria facio: et tamen aliud est in memoria invenire phantasiam, aliud de memoria facere phantasma. Quae omnia vis animae potest. Sed vera etiam phantasmata habere pro cognitis, summus error est. Quamquam sit in utroque genere quod nos non absurde scire dicamus, id est, sensisse nos talia, vel imaginari nos talia. Patrem denique me habuisse et avum, non temere possum dicere: ipsos autem esse quos animus meus in phantasia vel in phantasmate tenet, dementissime dixerim. Sequuntur autem nonnulli phantasmata sua tam praecipites, ut nulla sit alia materies omnium falsarum opinionum, quam habere phantasias vel phantasmata pro cognitis, quae cognoscuntur per sensum. Quare his potissimum resistamus, nec eis ita mentem accommodemus, ut dum in his est cogitatio, intellegentia ea cerni arbitremur.
6. 11. 32. This memory, then—whatever it holds of the motions of the mind that have been produced against the passions of the body—is called in Greek by a name for which I do not find what I would rather call it in Latin; to hold these for known and for perceived is the opinionative life, set at the very entrance of error. But when these motions meet one another, and seethe, as it were, with diverse and conflicting blasts of intention, they bring forth other motions from others—now not those that are held, impressed from the senses by the encounters of the body's passions, but yet like them, as it were images of images, which it has pleased to call "phantasms." For I think of my father, whom I often saw, in one way, of my grandfather, whom I never saw, in another. The first of these is a phantasy, the other a phantasm. The one I find in the memory, the other in that motion of the mind which has arisen from those things the memory holds. But how these arise is hard both to find and to explain. Yet I judge that, if I had never seen human bodies, I could in no way figure them by thinking in a visible appearance. But what I make from what I have seen, I make by memory; and yet it is one thing to find a phantasy in the memory, another to make a phantasm from the memory. All which the power of the soul can do. But to hold even true phantasms for known is the highest error. Although there is in each kind that which we not absurdly say we know—that is, that we have felt such things, or that we imagine such things. That I had a father and a grandfather, in fine, I can say without rashness; but that they are the ones whom my mind holds in a phantasy or in a phantasm, I would most madly say. But some follow their phantasms so headlong that there is no other material of all false opinions than to hold for known the phantasies or phantasms which are known through the senses. Therefore let us resist these most of all, nor so accommodate our mind to them that, while our thought is in them, we judge that we discern them by the understanding.
deMus.6.11.32
6. 11. 33. Cur autem si huiusmodi numeri qui fiunt in anima rebus temporalibus dedita, habent sui generis pulchritudinem, quamvis eam transeundo actitent, invideat huic pulchritudini divina providentia, quae de nostra poenali mortalitate formatur, quam iustissima Dei lege meruimus: in qua tamen nos non ita deseruit, ut non valeamus recurrere, et a carnalium sensuum delectatione, misericordia eius manum porrigente, revocari. Talis enim delectatio vehementer infigit memoriae quod trahit a lubricis sensibus. Haec autem animae consuetudo facta cum carne, propter carnalem affectionem, in Scripturis divinis caro nominatur. Haec menti obluctatur, cum iam dici potest apostolicum illud: Mente servio legi Dei, carne autem legi peccat . Sed in spiritalia mente suspensa atque ibi fixa et manente, etiam huius consuetudinis impetus frangitur, et paulatim repressus exstinguitur. Maior enim erat cum sequeremur; non tamen omnino nullus, sed certe minor est cum eum refrenamus, atque ita certis regressibus ab omni lasciviente motu, in quo defectus essentiae est animae, delectatione in rationis numeros restituta ad Deum tota vita nostra convertitur, dans corpori numeros sanitatis, non accipiens inde laetitiam; quod corrupto exteriore homine, et eius in melius commutatione continget.
6. 11. 33. But why, if numbers of this kind that come about in the soul given over to temporal things have a beauty of their own kind, although they keep producing it by passing away, should the divine providence envy this beauty, which is formed from our penal mortality, which we have deserved by the most just law of God—in which, however, he has not so deserted us that we cannot run back, and, by his mercy stretching out a hand, be called back from the delight of the carnal senses? For such delight fixes firmly in the memory what it draws from the slippery senses. But this habit of the soul, made with the flesh, is named in the divine Scriptures, because of the carnal affection, "flesh." This struggles against the mind, when that apostolic word can now be said: With the mind I serve the law of God, but with the flesh the law of sin. (Rom 7:25) But, the mind being suspended in spiritual things and there fixed and remaining, the onrush of this habit too is broken, and, gradually repressed, is extinguished. For it was greater when we followed it; yet not wholly none, but certainly less, when we curb it; and so, by certain returns from every wanton motion, in which is the soul's defect of essence, delight being restored to the numbers of reason, our whole life is turned toward God, giving to the body the numbers of health, not receiving gladness thence; which will come to pass when the outer man is corrupted and changed for the better.
deMus.6.11.33
6. 12. 34. Discipulus: Ibi puto quod est corporibus excellentius; sed utrum in ipsa anima, an etiam supra animam nescio.
6. 12. 34. Student: There, I think, is what is more excellent than bodies; but whether in the soul itself, or even above the soul, I do not know.
deMus.6.12.34
6. 12. 35. Magister: Si ergo quaeramus artem istam rhythmicam vel metricam, qua utuntur qui versus faciunt, purasne habere aliquos numeros, secundum quos fabricant versus?
6. 12. 35. Teacher: If, then, we ask whether that rhythmic or metrical art, which those who make verses use, has any pure numbers according to which they fashion verses?
deMus.6.12.35
Discipulus: Nihil aliud possum existimare.
Student: I can think nothing else.
deMus.6.12.35
Magister: Quicumque isti sunt numeri, praeterire tibi videntur cum versibus, an manere?
Teacher: Whatever these numbers are, do they seem to you to pass away with the verses, or to remain?
deMus.6.12.35
Discipulus: Manere sane.
Student: To remain indeed.
deMus.6.12.35
Magister: Consentiendum est ergo, ab aliquibus manentibus numeris praetereuntes aliquos fabricari?
Teacher: We must agree, then, that some passing numbers are fashioned from some remaining ones?
deMus.6.12.35
Discipulus: Cogit me ratio consentire.
Student: Reason compels me to agree.
deMus.6.12.35
Magister: Quid? hanc artem num aliud putas quam affectionem quamdam esse animi artificis?
Teacher: And this art—do you think it anything other than a certain affection of the craftsman's mind?
deMus.6.12.35
Discipulus: ita credo.
Student: So I believe.
deMus.6.12.35
Magister: Credisne hanc affectionem etiam esse in eo, qui huius artis imperitus est?
Teacher: Do you believe this affection is also in one who is unskilled in this art?
deMus.6.12.35
Discipulus: Nullo modo.
Student: In no way.
deMus.6.12.35
Magister: Quid? in illo qui oblitus est eam?
Teacher: And in one who has forgotten it?
deMus.6.12.35
Discipulus: Nec in illo quidem, quia et ipse imperitus est, etiamsi fuit peritus aliquando.
Student: Not in him either, because he too is unskilled, even if he was skilled at some time.
deMus.6.12.35
Magister: Quid? si eum quisquam interrogando commemoret? remigrare ad eum putas illos numeros ab eo ipso qui interrogat; an illum intrinsecus apud mentem suam movere se ad aliquid, unde sibi quod amiserat redhibeatur?
Teacher: And if someone reminds him by questioning—do you think those numbers migrate back to him from the very one who questions, or that he moves himself inwardly, within his own mind, toward something whence what he had lost may be repaid to him?
deMus.6.12.35
Discipulus: Apud semetipsum puto id agere.
Student: I think he does it within himself.
deMus.6.12.35
Magister: Num etiam quae corripiatur syllaba, quaeve producatur si penitus excidit, commoneri eum interrogando arbitraris; cum hominum prisco placito et consuetudine, aliis minor, aliis maior mora syllabis data sit? Nam profecto si natura vel disciplina id fixum esset ac stabile, non recentioris temporis docti homines nonnullas produxissent quas corripuerunt antiqui, vel corripuissent quas produxerunt.
Teacher: And do you judge that he is reminded by questioning even which syllable is to be shortened, or which lengthened, if it has utterly slipped away—since, by the ancient agreement and custom of men, a smaller delay has been given to some syllables, a greater to others? For surely, if it were fixed and stable by nature or by discipline, learned men of a more recent time would not have lengthened some that the ancients shortened, or shortened some that they lengthened.
deMus.6.12.35
Discipulus: Puto et hoc posse, quoniam quantumvis quidque excidat, potest interrogatione commemorante redire in memoriam.
Student: I think this too is possible, since however much anything slips away, it can return into the memory by a reminding question.
deMus.6.12.35
Magister: Mirum si opinaris, quovis interrogante posse te recordari quid ante annum coenaveris.
Teacher: It would be a wonder if you supposed that, with anyone questioning, you could recollect what you dined on a year ago.
deMus.6.12.35
Discipulus: Fateor me non posse, nec illum iam existimo de syllabis posse, quarum spatia penitus oblitus est, interrogando admoneri.
Student: I admit I cannot; nor do I now think that he can be reminded by questioning about syllables whose spans he has utterly forgotten.
deMus.6.12.35
Magister: Cur ita, nisi quia in hoc nomine quod Italia dicitur, prima syllaba pro voluntate quorumdam hominum corripiebatur, et nunc pro aliorum voluntate producitur? Ut autem unum et duo non sint tria, et ut duo uni non duplo respondeant, nullus mortuorum potuit, nullus vivorum potest, nullus posterorum poterit facere.
Teacher: Why so, except because in this name which is "Italia" the first syllable was shortened according to the will of certain men, and now is lengthened according to the will of others? But that one and two are not three, and that two does not answer to one in double, no one of the dead has been able, no one of the living is able, no one of those to come will be able, to make.
deMus.6.12.35
Discipulus: Nihil manifestius.
Student: Nothing is more manifest.
deMus.6.12.35
Magister: Quid si ergo isto modo quo de uno et de duobus apertissime quaesivimus, caetera omnia, quae ad illos numeros pertinent et ille interrogetur, qui non obliviscendo, sed quia numquam didicit, imperitus est? nonne eum censes similiter hanc artem exceptis syllabis posse cognoscere?
Teacher: What, then, if in that way in which we inquired most plainly about one and two, all the other things that pertain to those numbers were asked also of him who is unskilled not by forgetting, but because he never learned? Do you not judge that he can likewise come to know this art, the syllables excepted?
deMus.6.12.35
Discipulus: Quis dubitaverit?
Student: Who would doubt it?
deMus.6.12.35
Magister: Quo igitur se etiam istum moturum putas, ut menti eius imprimantur hi numeri, et illam faciant affectionem quae ars dicitur? an huic saltem ille interrogator eos dabit?
Teacher: Toward what, then, do you think this man too will move himself, so that these numbers may be impressed on his mind and make that affection which is called art? Or will that questioner at least give them to him?
deMus.6.12.35
Discipulus: Eo modo etiam istum arbitror apud semetipsum agere, ut ea quae interrogantur, vera esse intellegat atque respondeat.
Student: In that way I judge that this man too acts within himself, so that he understands and answers that the things asked are true.
deMus.6.12.35
6. 12. 36. Magister: Age, nunc dic mihi utrum hi numeri de quibus sic quaeritur, commutabiles esse tibi videantur.
6. 12. 36. Teacher: Come, now tell me whether these numbers, about which it is thus inquired, seem to you changeable.
deMus.6.12.36
Discipulus: Nullo modo.
Student: In no way.
deMus.6.12.36
Magister: Ergo aeternos esse non negas.
Teacher: So you do not deny that they are eternal.
deMus.6.12.36
Discipulus: Imo fateor.
Student: On the contrary, I admit it.
deMus.6.12.36
Magister: Quid? metus ille non sub erit, ne aliqua nos in eis inaequalitas fallat?
Teacher: And will not that fear be present, lest some inequality in them deceive us?
deMus.6.12.36
Discipulus: Nihil me omnino est de istorum aequalitate securius.
Student: Nothing makes me more secure than the equality of these.
deMus.6.12.36
Magister: Unde ergo credendum est animae tribui quod aeternum est et incommutabile, nisi ab uno aeterno et incommutabili Deo?
Teacher: Whence, then, must we believe that what is eternal and unchangeable is granted to the soul, except by the one eternal and unchangeable God?
deMus.6.12.36
Discipulus: Non video quid aliud credi oporteat.
Student: I do not see what else ought to be believed.
deMus.6.12.36
Magister: Quid tandem? illud nonne manifestum est, eum qui alio interrogante sese intus ad Deum movet, ut verum incommutabile intellegat; nisi eumdem motum suum memoria teneat, non posse ad intuendum illud verum, nullo extrinsecus admonente revocari?
Teacher: And is not this manifest: that he who, with another questioning, moves himself within toward God, so that he may understand the unchangeable truth, cannot—unless he holds that same motion of his by memory—be recalled to behold that truth, with no one admonishing from without?
deMus.6.12.36
Discipulus: Manifestum est.
Student: It is manifest.
deMus.6.12.36
6. 13. 37. Magister: Quaero ergo quonam iste ab huiuscemodi rerum contemplatione discedat, ut illum ad eam necesse sit memoria revocari. An forte in aliud intentus animus tali reditu indigere putandus est?
6. 13. 37. Teacher: I ask, then, whither this man departs from the contemplation of things of this kind, so that it is necessary for him to be recalled to it by memory. Or is the mind, intent perhaps on something else, to be thought to need such a return?
deMus.6.13.37
Discipulus: Sic existimo.
Student: So I judge.
deMus.6.13.37
Magister: Videamus, si placet, quid tantum illud sit quo possit intendi, ut ab incommutabilis et summae aequalitatis contemplatione avertatur. Nam tribus generibus amplius nihil video. Aut enim ad aliquid par atque ad eiusmodi aliud se intendit animus, cum hinc avertitur, aut ad superius, aut ad inferius.
Teacher: Let us see, if you please, what so great a thing that is toward which it can be intent, so as to be turned away from the contemplation of the unchangeable and highest equality. For beyond three kinds I see nothing more. For the mind, when it is turned away from here, is intent either on something equal and on another of the same kind, or on something higher, or on something lower.
deMus.6.13.37
Discipulus: De caeteris duobus quaerendum est: nam quid sit superius aeterna aequalitate non video.
Student: We must inquire about the other two; for what is higher than the eternal equality I do not see.
deMus.6.13.37
Magister: Videsne illud, obsecro, quidnam ei par esse possit, quod tamen aliud sit?
Teacher: Do you see, I beg, what could be equal to it, that yet would be another?
deMus.6.13.37
Discipulus: Ne id quidem video.
Student: Not even that do I see.
deMus.6.13.37
Magister: Restat ergo ut quaeramus, quid sit inferius. Sed nonne tibi prius ipsa anima occurrit, quae certe aequalitatem illam incommutabilem esse confitetur, se autem agnoscit mutari eo ipso quod alias hanc, alias aliud intuetur; et hoc modo aliud atque aliud sequens varietatem temporis operatur, quae in aeternis et incommutabilibus nulla est?
Teacher: It remains, then, that we inquire what is lower. But does not the soul itself occur to you first, which surely confesses that equality to be unchangeable, but acknowledges that it itself is changed by this very thing, that now it beholds this, now something else; and in this way, pursuing one thing and another, produces the variety of time, which in eternal and unchangeable things is none?
deMus.6.13.37
Discipulus: Assentior.
Student: I agree.
deMus.6.13.37
Magister: Haec igitur affectio animae vel motus, quo intellegit aeterna, et his inferiora esse temporalia, etiam in seipsa; et haec appetenda potius quae superiora sunt, quam illa quae inferiora sunt novit: nonne tibi prudentia videtur?
Teacher: This affection, then, of the soul, or motion, by which it understands that eternal things are, and that temporal things are lower than these, even in itself; and knows that these higher things are to be sought rather than those lower ones—does it not seem to you prudence?
deMus.6.13.37
Discipulus: Nihil aliud videtur.
Student: It seems nothing else.
deMus.6.13.37
6. 13. 38. Magister: Quid illud? num minus considerandum putas quod nondum in ea simul est aeternis inhaerere, cum iam in ea sit nosse his esse inhaerendum?
6. 13. 38. Teacher: And this—do you think it is to be considered any less, that it is not yet in the soul to cling to eternal things at the same time, although it is already in it to know that it must cling to these?
deMus.6.13.38
Discipulus: Imo maxime ut id consideremus peto, et unde accidat scire cupio.
Student: On the contrary, I ask most of all that we consider this, and I desire to know whence it comes about.
deMus.6.13.38
Magister: Facile id videbis, si animadverteris quibus rebus maxime animum soleamus intendere, et magnam curam exhibere: nam eas opinor esse quas multum amamus: an tu alias opinaris?
Teacher: You will easily see it, if you notice to what things we are accustomed to direct the mind most, and to show great care; for those, I think, are the ones we love much. Or do you think otherwise?
deMus.6.13.38
Discipulus: Nullas equidem alias.
Student: No others indeed.
deMus.6.13.38
Magister: Dic, oro te, num possumus amare nisi pulchra? Nam etsi quidam videntur amare deformia, quos vulgo Graeci vocant, interest tamen quanto minus pulchra sint quam illa quae pluribus placent. Nam ea neminem amare manifestum est, quorum foeditate sensus offenditur.
Teacher: Tell me, I beg you, can we love anything but the beautiful? For although some seem to love the unshapely—those whom the Greeks commonly call lovers of the ugly—yet it matters how much less beautiful they are than those that please more people. For it is manifest that no one loves those things whose foulness offends the sense.
deMus.6.13.38
Discipulus: Ita est, ut dicis.
Student: It is as you say.
deMus.6.13.38
Magister: Haec igitur pulchra numero placent, in quo iam ostendimus aequalitatem appeti. Non enim hoc tantum in ea pulchritudine quae ad aures pertinet, atque in motu corporum est, invenitur, sed in ipsis etiam visibilibus formis, in quibus iam usitatius dicitur pulchritudo. An aliud quam aequalitatem numerosam esse arbitraris, cum paria paribus bina membra respondent: quae autem singula sunt, medium locum tenent, ut ad ea de utraque parte paria intervalla serventur?
Teacher: These beautiful things, then, please by number, in which we have already shown that equality is sought. For this is found not only in that beauty which belongs to the ears and is in the motion of bodies, but also in the very visible forms, in which beauty is now more usually spoken of. Or do you judge it anything other than rhythmical equality, when two members, equal to equal, answer in pairs—but those that are single hold the middle place, so that toward them equal intervals are kept on each side?
deMus.6.13.38
Discipulus: Non aliter puto.
Student: I think not otherwise.
deMus.6.13.38
Magister: Quid in ipsa luce visibili quae omnium colorum habet principatum, nam et color nos delectat in corporum formis; quid ergo aliud in luce et coloribus, nisi quod nostris oculis congruit, appetimus? Etenim a nimio fulgore aversamur, et nimis obscura nolumus cernere, sicut etiam in sonis et a nimium sonantibus abhorremus, et quasi susurrantia non amamus. Quod non in temporum intervallis est, sed in ipso sono, qui quasi lux est talium numerorum, cui sic est contrarium silentium, ut coloribus tenebrae. In his ergo cum appetimus convenientia pro naturae nostrae modo, et inconvenientia respuimus, quae aliis tamen animalibus convenire sentimus, nonne hic etiam quodam aequalitatis iure laetamur, cum occultioribus modis paria paribus tributa esse cognoscimus? Hoc in odoribus et in saporibus, et in tangendi sensu animadvertere licet, quae longum est enucleatius persequi, sed explorare facillimum: nihil enim est horum sensibilium, quod nobis non aequalitate aut similitudine placeat. Ubi autem aequalitas aut similitudo, ibi numerositas; nihil est quippe tam aequale aut simile quam unum et unum: nisi quid habes ad haec.
Teacher: And in the very visible light, which holds the primacy of all colors—for color too delights us in the forms of bodies—what else, then, do we seek in light and colors, except what agrees with our eyes? For we turn away from too great a brilliance, and we are unwilling to look at things too dark, just as in sounds too we shrink from things sounding too loud, and do not love things as it were whispering. Which is not in the intervals of time, but in the sound itself, which is, as it were, the light of such numbers, to which silence is contrary as darkness is to colors. In these, then, when we seek the agreeable according to the measure of our nature, and reject the disagreeable—which we yet perceive to be agreeable to other animals—do we not here too rejoice by a certain right of equality, when we recognize, by more hidden ways, that equals have been assigned to equals? This may be noticed in odors and flavors, and in the sense of touch, which it would be long to pursue more thoroughly, but most easy to test: for there is none of these sensible things that does not please us by equality or likeness. But where there is equality or likeness, there is rhythm; for nothing is so equal or so like as one and one. Unless you have something against this.
deMus.6.13.38
Discipulus: Omnino assentior.
Student: I agree entirely.
deMus.6.13.38
6. 13. 39. Magister: Quid? superior illa tractatio nonne persuasit nobis agere haec animam in corporibus, non a corporibus pati?
6. 13. 39. Teacher: And did not that earlier discussion persuade us that the soul does these things in bodies, and does not undergo them from bodies?
deMus.6.13.39
Discipulus: Persuasit sane.
Student: It did persuade us indeed.
deMus.6.13.39
Magister: Amor igitur agendi adversus succedentes passiones corporis sui, avertit animam a contemplatione aeternorum, sensibilis voluptatis cura eius avocans intentionem: hoc autem agit occursoribus numeris. Avertit etiam amor de corporibus operandi, et inquietam facit: hoc autem agit progressoribus numeris. Avertunt phantasiae atque phantasmata: et haec agit recordabilibus numeris. Avertit denique amor vanissimae cognitionis talium rerum: et hoc agit sensualibus numeris, quibus insunt quasi regulae quaedam artis imitatione gaudentes: et ex his curiositas nascitur ipso curae nomine inimica securitati, et vanitate impos veritatis.
Teacher: The love, then, of acting against the succeeding passions of its body turns the soul away from the contemplation of eternal things, the care of sensible pleasure calling off its intention: and this it does by the encountering numbers. The love of working upon bodies turns it away too, and makes it restless: and this it does by the advancing numbers. Phantasies and phantasms turn it away: and these it does by the recalling numbers. Finally, the love of the most empty knowledge of such things turns it away: and this it does by the sensual numbers, in which there are, as it were, certain rules of the art rejoicing in imitation; and from these is born curiosity, by the very name of care hostile to security, and, by its emptiness, having no command of truth.
deMus.6.13.39
6. 13. 40. Generalis vero amor actionis, quae avertit a vero, a superbia proficiscitur, quo vitio Deum imitari, quam Deo servire anima maluit. Recte itaque scriptum est in sanctis Libris: Initium superbiae hominis apostatare a Deo ; et: Initium omnis peccati superbia . Non potuit autem melius demonstrari quid sit superbia, quam in eo quod ibi dictum est: Quid superbit terra et cinis, quoniam in vita sua proiecit intima sua? Cum enim anima per seipsam nihil sit; non enim aliter esset commutabilis, et pateretur defectum ab essentia: cum ergo ipsa per se nihil sit, quidquid autem illi esse est, a Deo sit; in ordine suo manens, ipsius Dei praesentia vegetatur in mente atque conscientia. Itaque hoc bonum habet intimum. Quare superbia intumescere, hoc illi est in extima progredi, et ut ita dicam, inanescere, quod est minus minusque esse. Progredi autem in extima, quid est aliud quam intima proicere; id est, longe a se facere Deum, non locorum spatio, sed mentis affectu?
6. 13. 40. But the general love of action, which turns away from the true, proceeds from pride, by which fault the soul preferred to imitate God rather than to serve God. And so it is rightly written in the holy books: The beginning of man's pride is to depart from God (Sir 10:12); and Pride is the beginning of all sin. (Sir 10:13) But what pride is could not be better shown than in what was said there: Why is earth and ashes proud, since in his life he has cast away his inmost parts? (See Sir 10:9–10) For since the soul through itself is nothing—for otherwise it would not be changeable, and would not suffer defect from its essence—since, then, it is itself through itself nothing, but whatever being it has is from God, then, remaining in its own order, it is quickened in mind and conscience by the presence of God himself. And so it has this good as its inmost good. Therefore to swell with pride is for it to advance into the outermost things, and, so to speak, to become empty, which is to be less and less. But to advance into the outermost things—what else is it than to cast away the inmost things, that is, to put God far from oneself, not by a span of places, but by an affection of mind?
deMus.6.13.40
6. 13. 41. Iste autem animae appetitus est sub se habere alias animas; non pecorum, quas divino iure concessum est, sed rationales, id est, proximas suas, et sub eadem lege socias atque consortes. De his autem appetit operari anima superba, et tanto excellentior videtur haec actio quam illa de corporibus, quanto anima omnis omni corpore est melior. Sed operari de animis rationalibus, non per corpus, sed per seipsum, solus Deus potest. Peccatorum tamen conditione fit, ut permittantur animae de animis aliquid agere, significando eas moventes per alterutra corpora, vel naturalibus signis, sicut est vultus vel nutus, vel placitis, sicut sunt verba. Nam et iubentes et suadentes signis agunt, et si quid est aliud praeter iussionem et suasionem, quo animae de animis vel cum animis aliquid agunt. Iure autem secutum est, ut quae superbia caeteris excellere cupierunt, nec suis partibus atque corporibus sine difficultate et doloribus imperent, partim stultae in se, partim mortalibus membris aggravatae. Et his igitur numeris et motibus quibus animae ad animas agunt, honores laudesque appetendo avertuntur a perspectione purae illius et sincerae veritatis. Solus enim honorat Deus animam beatam faciens in occulto coram se iuste et pie viventem.
6. 13. 41. But this is an appetite of the soul: to have other souls under itself—not of cattle, which is granted by divine right, but rational ones, that is, its neighbors, and its fellows and companions under the same law. Upon these the proud soul desires to work, and this action seems the more excellent than that upon bodies, by as much as every soul is better than every body. But to work upon rational souls, not through the body but through itself, God alone can do. Yet by the condition of sinners it comes about that souls are permitted to do something upon souls, moving them by signifying through their respective bodies, whether by natural signs, such as the face or a nod, or by agreed ones, such as words. For both those commanding and those persuading act by signs, and whatever else there is besides command and persuasion, by which souls do something upon souls or with souls. But it has rightly followed that those which by pride desired to excel the rest neither command their own parts and bodies without difficulty and pains, being partly foolish in themselves, partly weighed down by mortal members. And so by these numbers and motions too, by which souls act upon souls, by seeking honors and praises they are turned away from the perception of that pure and sincere truth. For God alone honors, making blessed in secret, before himself, the soul that lives justly and piously.
deMus.6.13.41
6. 13. 42. Discipulus: Nihil est quod contradicere audeam.
6. 13. 42. Student: There is nothing I would dare to object.
deMus.6.13.42
6. 14. 43. Magister: Quid ergo restat? An ut, quoniam sicut potuimus inquinationem et aggravationem animae consideravimus, videamus quaenam illi actio divinitus imperetur, qua purgata atque exonerata revolet ad quietem, et intret in gaudium Domini sui?
6. 14. 43. Teacher: What, then, remains? Is it that, since we have considered, as well as we could, the defilement and the weighing-down of the soul, we see what action is divinely commanded to it, by which, purified and unburdened, it may fly back to rest, and enter into the joy of its Lord?
deMus.6.14.43
Discipulus: Ita fiat.
Student: Let it be so.
deMus.6.14.43
Magister: Quid me putas hinc diutius debere dicere, cum divinae Scripturae tot voluminibus et tanta auctoritate et sanctitate praeditis, nihil nobiscum aliud agant, nisi ut diligamus Deum et Dominum nostrum ex toto corde, ex tota anima, et ex tota mente; et diligamus proximum nostrum tamquam nosmetipsos ? Ad hunc igitur finem si omnes illos humanae actionis motus, numerosque referamus, sine dubitatione mundabimur. An aliud existimas?
Teacher: Why do you think I ought to say more about this, when the divine Scriptures, endowed with so many volumes and with so great authority and holiness, do nothing else with us than that we love God our Lord with our whole heart, with our whole soul, and with our whole mind, and love our neighbor as ourselves? (See Matt 22:37–39) If, then, we refer all those motions and numbers of human action to this end, we will without doubt be cleansed. Or do you think otherwise?
deMus.6.14.43
Discipulus: Nihil equidem aliud. Sed quam hoc auditu breve est, tam factu difficile atque arduum.
Student: Nothing else indeed. But as brief as this is to hear, so hard and arduous it is to do.
deMus.6.14.43
6. 14. 44. Magister: Quid ergo facile est? an amare colores, et voces, et placentas, et rosas, et corpora leniter mollia? haeccine amare facile est animae, in quibus nihil nisi aequalitatem ac similitudinem appetit, et paulo diligentius considerans, vix eius extremam umbram vestigiumque cognoscit; et Deum amare difficile est, quem in quantum potest, adhuc saucia et sordida cogitans, nihil in eo inaequale, nihil sui dissimile, nihil disclusum locis, nihil variatum tempore suspicatur? An exstruere moles aedificiorum, et huiuscemodi operibus delectat extendi, in quibus si numeri placent (non enim aliud invenio) quid in his aequale ac simile dicitur, quod non derideat ratio disciplinae? Quod si ita est, cur ab illa verissima aequalitatis arce ad ista delabitur, et ruinis suis terrenas machinas erigit? Non hoc promissum est ab illo qui fallere ignorat. Iugum enim meum, inquit, leve est . Laboriosior est huius mundi amor. Quod enim in illo anima quaerit, constantiam scilicet aeternitatemque, non invenit: quoniam rerum transitu completur infima pulchritudo, et quod in illa imitatur constantiam, a summo Deo per animam traicitur: quoniam prior est species tantummodo tempore commutabilis, quam ea quae et tempore et locis. Sicut itaque praeceptum est animis a Domino quid diligant, ita per Ioannem apostolum quid non diligant. Nolite, inquit, diligere mundum: quia omnia quae in mundo sunt, concupiscentia carnis est, et concupiscentia oculorum, et ambitio saeculi .
6. 14. 44. Teacher: What, then, is easy? To love colors, and voices, and cakes, and roses, and bodies softly smooth? Is it easy for the soul to love these, in which it seeks nothing but equality and likeness, and, considering a little more carefully, scarcely recognizes their farthest shadow and trace; and is it hard to love God, in whom, thinking of him as far as it can—still wounded and soiled—it suspects nothing unequal, nothing unlike itself, nothing shut off by places, nothing varied by time? Or does it delight to pile up masses of buildings, and to be stretched out in works of this kind—in which, if numbers please (for I find nothing else), what equal and like is named in them that the principle of the discipline does not mock? And if this is so, why does it slip down from that most true citadel of equality to these things, and by its own ruins erect earthly machines? This was not promised by him who knows not how to deceive. For my yoke, he says, is light. (See Matt 11:30) The love of this world is more laborious. For what the soul seeks in it—constancy, that is, and eternity—it does not find: since the lowest beauty is completed by the passing-away of things, and what in it imitates constancy is passed through it from the highest God by the soul: since a form changeable only by time is prior to one changeable both by time and by places. So, as it has been commanded to souls by the Lord what they should love, so through the apostle John what they should not love. Do not love the world, he says, for all that is in the world is the desire of the flesh, and the desire of the eyes, and the ambition of the age. (See 1 John 2:15–16)
deMus.6.14.44
6. 14. 45. Discipulus: Magnum quemdam virum et vere humanissimum praedicas.
6. 14. 45. Student: You proclaim a certain great man, and truly most humane.
deMus.6.14.45
6. 14. 46. Magister: Non igitur, numeri qui sunt infra rationem et in suo genere pulchri sunt, sed amor inferioris pulchritudinis animam polluit: quae cum in illa non modo aequalitatem, de qua pro suscepto opere satis dictum est, sed etiam ordinem diligat, amisit ipsa ordinem suum; nec tamen excessit ordinem rerum, quandoquidem ibi est, et ita est, ubi esse, et quomodo esse tales, ordinatissimum est. Aliud enim est tenere ordinem, aliud ordine teneri. Tenet ordinem, seipsa tota diligens quod supra se est, id est Deum, socias autem animas tamquam seipsam. Hac quippe dilectionis virtute inferiora ordinat, nec ab inferioribus sordidatur. Quod autem illam sordidat, non est malum, quia etiam corpus creatura Dei est, et specie sua quamvis infima decoratur, sed prae animae dignitate contemnitur; sicuti auri dignitas, etiam purgatissimi argenti commixtione sordescit. Quapropter quicumque de nostra quoque poenali mortalitate numeri facti sunt, non eos abdicemus a fabricatione divinae providentiae, cum sint in genere suo pulchri. Neque amemus eos, ut quasi perfruendo talibus beati efficiamur. His etenim, quoniam temporales sunt, tamquam tabula in fluctibus, neque abiciendo quasi onerosos, neque amplectendo quasi fundatos, sed bene utendo carebimus. A dilectione autem proximi tanta quanta praecipitur, certissimus gradus fit nobis, ut inhaereamus Deo, et non teneamur tantum ordinatione illius, sed nostrum etiam ordinem inconcussum certumque teneamus.
6. 14. 46. Teacher: It is not, then, the numbers that are below reason and are beautiful in their own kind, but the love of the lower beauty, that defiles the soul: which, while it loves in that beauty not only equality—of which enough has been said for the work undertaken—but also order, has itself lost its own order; yet it has not gone beyond the order of things, since it is there, and is so, where to be, and in what way to be such, is most fully ordered. For it is one thing to keep order, another to be kept by order. The soul keeps order, loving with its whole self what is above it, that is, God, and its fellow souls as itself. For by this power of love it orders the lower things, and is not soiled by the lower things. But what soils it is not evil, because the body too is a creation of God, and is adorned by its own appearance, however lowest, but is despised before the dignity of the soul; just as the dignity of gold is soiled even by mixture with the most purified silver. Therefore whatever numbers have been made even from our penal mortality, let us not reject them from the fashioning of the divine providence, since they are beautiful in their own kind. Nor let us love them, as if by enjoying such things we were made blessed. For from these, since they are temporal, as from a plank in the waves, neither casting them away as burdensome, nor embracing them as if firmly grounded, but using them well, we shall be free of them. But from the love of neighbor, as great as is commanded, a most sure step is made for us, that we may cling to God, and not only be held by his ordering, but also keep our own order unshaken and sure.
deMus.6.14.46
6. 14. 47. An fortasse ordinem non diligit anima illis etiam numeris sensualibus attestantibus? Unde ergo primus pes est pyrrhichius, secundus iambus, tertius trochaeus, et deinceps caeteri? Sed iure hoc dixeris rationem potius secutam esse, non sensum. Quid itaque, illud nonne sensualibus numeris dandum est, quod cum tantum temporis occupent, verbi gratia, octo longae syllabae, quantum sexdecim breves, in eodem tamen spatio breves longis potius misceri exspectant? De quo sensu cum ratio iudicat, et ei proceleumatici pedes esse aequales spondeis pedibus renuntiantur, nihil aliud hic valere invenit, quam ordinationis potentiam, quia nec longae syllabae nisi brevium comparatione longae sunt, nec breves rursum breves sunt nisi comparatione longarum: ideoque iambicus versus quamlibet productius pronuntiatus, non amissa regula simpli et dupli, nec nomen amittit: at ille versus qui pyrrhichiis pedibus constat, paulatim addita pronuntiandi mora, fit repente spondiacus, si non grammaticam, sed musicam consulas. At vero si dactylicus aut anapaesticus sit, quoniam longae mixtarum brevium comparatione sentiuntur, qualibet mora pronuntietur, servat nomen suum. Quid additamenta semipedum non eadem lege in capite qua in fine servanda, nec omnia quamvis ad eumdem plausum coaptentur, adhibenda? quid duarum aliquando brevium potius, quam unius longae in fine positio? nonne ipso sensu modificantur? Nec in his aequalitatis numerus, cui nihil deperit, sive illud sive aliud sit, sed ordinis vinculum reperitur. Longum est percurrere caetera ad eamdem vim pertinentia in numeris temporum. Sed nempe etiam formas visibiles sensus ipse aspernatur, aut pronas contra quam decet, aut capite deorsum, et similia, in quibus non inaequalitas, manente partium parilitate, sed perversitas improbatur. Postremo in omnibus sensibus et operibus nostris, cum insolita pleraque, et ob hoc iniucunda quibusdam gradibus appetitui nostro conciliamus, et ea primo tolerabiliter, deinde libenter accipimus; nonne ordine conteximus voluptatem, et nisi priora mediis, et media postremis concorditer nexa sint, abhorremus?
6. 14. 47. Or does the soul perhaps not love order, those sensual numbers too bearing witness? Whence, then, is the first foot a pyrrhic, the second an iamb, the third a trochee, and so on the rest? But you may rightly say that this followed reason rather than sense. What, then—is not this to be granted to the sensual numbers: that, when, for example, eight long syllables take up as much time as sixteen shorts, yet in the same span the shorts rather expect to be mixed with longs? And when reason judges about this sense, and it is reported to it that proceleusmatic feet are equal to spondee feet, it finds that nothing else holds force here than the power of ordering, because neither are long syllables long except by comparison with shorts, nor again are shorts short except by comparison with longs; and therefore an iambic verse, however drawn out it is pronounced, the rule of single and double not being lost, does not lose its name; but that verse which consists of pyrrhic feet, the delay of pronouncing being added little by little, suddenly becomes spondaic, if you consult not grammar but music. But if it is dactylic or anapestic, since the longs are perceived by comparison with the shorts mixed in, it keeps its own name in whatever delay it is pronounced. Why are additions of half-feet not to be kept by the same law at the head as at the end, nor all to be applied, although they are fitted to the same beat? Why the setting sometimes of two shorts rather than of one long at the end? Are they not regulated by the very sense? Nor in these is the number of equality found, to which nothing is lost, whether it be this or another, but the bond of order. It would be long to run through the rest pertaining to the same force in the numbers of time. But surely the very sense too spurns visible forms, either bent contrary to what is becoming, or with the head downward, and the like, in which not inequality—the equality of the parts remaining—but perversity is disapproved. Finally, in all our senses and works, when we reconcile to our appetite, by certain steps, things mostly unusual and on that account unpleasant, and accept them first tolerably, then gladly—do we not weave the pleasure by order, and, unless the first are joined harmoniously to the middle, and the middle to the last, shrink from it?
deMus.6.14.47
6. 14. 48. Quamobrem neque in voluptate carnali, neque in honoribus et laudibus hominum, neque in eorum exploratione quae forinsecus corpus attingunt, nostra gaudia collocemus, habentes in intimo Deum, ubi certum est et incommutabile omne quod amamus. Ita fit, ut et cum adsunt haec temporalia, non tamen eis implicemur, et sine sensu doloris quae extra corpus sunt, absint: ipsum autem corpus, aut nullo, aut non gravi sensu doloris adimatur, et reformandum naturae suae morte reddatur. Attentio namque animae ad corporis partem inquieta negotia contrahit, et universali lege neglecta privati cuiusdam operis amor, quod ipsum tamen ab universitate quam Deus regit non potest alienari. Itaque subditur legibus qui non amat leges.
6. 14. 48. Therefore let us place our joys neither in carnal pleasure, nor in the honors and praises of men, nor in the probing of those things that touch the body from without, having within us God, where all that we love is fixed and unchangeable. So it comes about both that, when these temporal things are present, we are nevertheless not entangled in them, and that, without the sense of pain, those that are outside the body may be absent; and the body itself may be taken away with no sense of pain, or none grievous, and be given back, to be reformed to its own nature, by death. For the attention of the soul to a part of the body draws together restless businesses, and, the universal law being neglected, there is a love of some private work—which yet cannot itself be estranged from the universe that God rules. And so he is subjected to the laws who does not love the laws.
deMus.6.14.48
6. 15. 49. Sed si de rebus incorporeis et eodem modo se semper habentibus, plerumque attentissime cogitantes, si quos forte illo tempore agimus numeros temporales in quolibet corporis motu, facili sane atque usitatissimo, sive deambulantes, sive psallentes, prorsus nobis ignorantibus transeunt, quamvis nobis non agentibus nulli essent: si denique in ipsis nostris inanibus phantasmatibus cum occupati sumus, similiter ista praetereunt agentibus nec sentientibus nobis quanto magis quantoque constantius, cum corruptibile hoc induerit incorruptionem, et mortale hoc induerit immortalitatem , id est, ut hoc idem planius eloquar, cum Deus vivificaverit mortalia corpora nostra, sicut Apostolus dicit, propter spiritum manentem in nobis : quanto ergo tunc magis in unum Deum et perspicuam intenti veritatem, ut dictum est, facie ad faciem , numeros quibus agimus corpora, nulla inquietudine sentiemus, et gaudebimus? Nisi forte credendum est, animam cum de iis quae per ipsam bona sunt, gaudere possit, de iis ex quibus ipsa bona est, non posse gaudere.
6. 15. 49. But if, when for the most part we are thinking most attentively about incorporeal things that hold themselves always in the same way, whatever temporal numbers we happen at that time to produce in any motion of the body—an easy and most usual one indeed, whether walking or singing psalms—pass by while we are wholly unaware of them, although without our producing them they would be none; if, finally, even in our own empty phantasms, when we are occupied, these likewise pass by while we produce and yet do not perceive them: how much more, and how much more constantly, when this corruptible shall have put on incorruption, and this mortal shall have put on immortality (1 Cor 15:53)—that is, to say this very thing more plainly, when God shall have given life to our mortal bodies, as the Apostle says, because of his Spirit that dwells in us (See Rom 8:11)—how much more, then, shall we, intent upon the one God and the clearly seen truth, as has been said, face to face (1 Cor 13:12), perceive with no restlessness the numbers by which we move bodies, and shall rejoice? Unless perhaps it is to be believed that the soul, while it can rejoice over those things that are good through it, cannot rejoice over those from which it itself is good.
deMus.6.15.49
6. 15. 50. Discipulus: Agnosco et intellego.
6. 15. 50. Student: I acknowledge and understand.
deMus.6.15.50
Magister: Quid porro? cum in hoc itinere proficit, iam aeterna gaudia praesentientem ac pene prehendentem, num amissio rerum temporalium, aut mors ulla deterret iam valentem dicere inferioribus sociis: Bonum est mihi dissolvi, et esse cum Christo: manere autem in carne, necessarium propter vos ?
Teacher: What further? When the soul advances on this road, already foretasting and almost grasping eternal joys, does the loss of temporal things, or any death, frighten one now able to say to his lower companions: It is good for me to be dissolved and to be with Christ; but to remain in the flesh is necessary for your sake (See Phil 1:23–24)?
deMus.6.15.50
Discipulus: Sic existimo.
Student: So I judge.
deMus.6.15.50
Magister: At ista eius affectio qua nullas adversitates mortemve formidat, quid aliud quam fortitudo dicenda est?
Teacher: But this affection of his, by which it dreads no adversities or death—what else is it to be called than fortitude?
deMus.6.15.50
Discipulus: Et hoc agnosco.
Student: This too I acknowledge.
deMus.6.15.50
Magister: Iamvero ipsa eius ordinatio qua nulli servit nisi uni Deo, nulli coaequari nisi purissimis animis, nulli dominari appetit nisi naturae bestiali atque corporeae, quae tandem virtus tibi esse videtur?
Teacher: And that very ordering of it, by which it serves none but the one God, seeks to be made equal to none but the purest souls, seeks to lord it over none but the bestial and corporeal nature—what virtue, in the end, does it seem to you to be?
deMus.6.15.50
Discipulus: Quis non intellegat hanc esse iustitiam?
Student: Who would not understand that this is justice?
deMus.6.15.50
Magister: Recte intellegis.
Teacher: You understand rightly.
deMus.6.15.50
6. 16. 51. Discipulus: Non video, cum adversa praeterierint, quibus obluctatur, quomodo aut prudentia ibi esse possit, quae non eligit quid sequatur nisi in adversis; aut temperantia, quae amorem non avertit nisi ab adversis; aut fortitudo, quae non tolerat nisi adversa; aut iustitia, quae non appetit aequari beatissimis animis, et inferiori naturae dominari, nisi in adversis, id est, nondum assecuta idipsum quod appetit.
6. 16. 51. Student: I do not see, when the adversities against which it struggles have passed away, how either prudence can be there, which chooses what to follow only amid adversities; or temperance, which turns love away only from adversities; or fortitude, which endures only adversities; or justice, which seeks to be made equal to the most blessed souls, and to lord it over a lower nature, only amid adversities—that is, not yet having attained the very thing it seeks.
deMus.6.16.51
6. 16. 52. Magister: Non usquequaque absurda est responsio tua; et quibusdam doctis visum hoc esse, non nego. Sed ego consulens Libros, quos nulla antecellit auctoritas, ita invenio dictum esse: Gustate et videte, quoniam suavis est Dominus . Quod apostolus etiam Petrus sic interposuit: Si tamen gustastis, quoniam suavis est Dominus Hoc esse arbitror quod agitur in his virtutibus quae ipsa conversione animam purgant. Non enim amor temporalium rerum expugnaretur, nisi aliqua suavitate aeternarum. Ubi autem ventum fuerit ad illud quod canitur: Filii autem hominum sub tegmine alarum tuarum sperabunt; inebriabuntur ab ubertate domus tuae, et torrente voluptatis tuae potabis eos; quoniam apud te est fons vitae : non iam gustatu suavem fore Dominum dicit; sed vides quae inundatio et affluentia praedicetur fontis aeterni; quam etiam ebrietas quaedam consequitur: quo nomine mihi videtur mirabiliter significari oblivio illa saecularium vanitatum atque phantasmatum. Contexit deinde caetera, et dicit: In lumine tuo videbimus lumen. Praetende misericordiam tuam scientibus te . In lumine, scilicet in Christo accipiendum, qui Sapientia Dei est, et lumen toties appellatur. Ubi ergo dicitur: Videbimus, et, scientibus te, negari non potest futuram ibi esse prudentiam. An videri verum bonum animae et sciri potest, ubi nulla prudentia est?
6. 16. 52. Teacher: Your answer is not altogether absurd; and that this has seemed so to certain learned men I do not deny. But I, consulting the books which no authority surpasses, find it thus said: Taste and see that the Lord is sweet. (Ps 34:8 (33:9)) Which the apostle Peter too interposed thus: If indeed you have tasted that the Lord is sweet. (See 1 Pet 2:3) This, I judge, is what takes place in those virtues which, by the very conversion, purify the soul. For the love of temporal things would not be conquered, except by some sweetness of eternal things. But when one has come to that which is sung, The sons of men will hope under the covering of your wings; they will be inebriated by the abundance of your house, and you will give them to drink of the torrent of your pleasure; for with you is the fountain of life (See Ps 36:7–9 (35:8–10)), he no longer says that the Lord will be sweet to the taste; but you see what inundation and affluence of the eternal fountain is proclaimed; which a certain inebriation also follows: by which name there seems to me to be wonderfully signified that forgetfulness of worldly vanities and phantasms. He then weaves the rest, and says, In your light we shall see light. Stretch forth your mercy to those who know you. (See Ps 36:9–10 (35:10–11)) "In light"—to be taken, namely, in Christ, who is the Wisdom of God, and is so often called light. Where, then, it is said we shall see, and to those who know you, it cannot be denied that prudence will be there. Or can the true good of the soul be seen and known where there is no prudence?
deMus.6.16.52
Discipulus: Iam intellego.
Student: Now I understand.
deMus.6.16.52
6. 16. 53. Magister: Quid? recti corde possunt esse sine iustitia?
6. 16. 53. Teacher: And can the upright in heart be without justice?
deMus.6.16.53
Discipulus: Recognosco isto nomine crebrius significari iustitiam.
Student: I recognize that by this name justice is more often signified.
deMus.6.16.53
Magister: Quid ergo admonet aliud propheta idem consequenter, cum canit: Et iustitiam tuam iis qui recto sunt corde ?
Teacher: What else, then, does the same prophet admonish consequently, when he sings: And your justice to those who are upright in heart (See Ps 36:10 (35:11))?
deMus.6.16.53
Discipulus: Manifestum est.
Student: It is manifest.
deMus.6.16.53
Magister: Age deinceps, recordare, si placet, satis nos superius tractasse, superbia labi animam ad actiones quasdam potestatis suae, et universali lege neglecta in agenda quaedam privata cecidisse, quod dicitur apostatare a Deo.
Teacher: Come on, recall, if you please, that we treated enough above how by pride the soul slips down to certain actions of its own power, and, the universal law being neglected, falls into the doing of certain private things—which is called departing from God.
deMus.6.16.53
Discipulus: Memini vero.
Student: I remember indeed.
deMus.6.16.53
Magister: Cum ergo id agit ne ulterius id delectet aliquando, nonne tibi videtur amorem suum figere in Deo, et ab omni inquinamento temperatissime et castissime et securissime vivere?
Teacher: When, then, it acts so that this no longer delights it at any time, does it not seem to you to fix its love in God, and to live most temperately and most chastely and most securely, free of all defilement?
deMus.6.16.53
Discipulus: Videtur sane.
Student: It seems so indeed.
deMus.6.16.53
Magister: Vide etiam quemadmodum id quoque adiungat propheta, dicens: Non veniat mihi pes superbiae . Pedem enim appellans discessum ipsum lapsumve significat, a quo anima temperando, inhaerens Deo vivit in aeternum.
Teacher: See also how the prophet adds this too, saying: Let not the foot of pride come to me. (See Ps 36:11 (35:12)) For by calling it a "foot" he signifies that very departure or fall, from which the soul, by being temperate, clinging to God, lives forever.
deMus.6.16.53
Discipulus: Accipio et sequor.
Student: I accept and follow.
deMus.6.16.53
6. 16. 54. Magister: Restat igitur fortitudo. Sed ut temperantia contra lapsum qui est in libera voluntate; sic fortitudo contra vim valet, qua etiam cogi quis potest si minus fortis sit ad ea quibus evertatur, et miserrimus iaceat. Haec autem vis decenter in Scripturis manus nomine significari solet. Qui porro hanc vim, nisi peccatores conantur inferre? Quod tunc per idipsum communitur anima, et custoditur firmamento Dei, ut hoc illi nullo modo undecumque possit accidere; potentiam quamdam stabilem, et, ut ita dicam, impassibilem gerit, quae, nisi quid tibi displicet, recte fortitudo nominatur, et eam dici arbitror cum adiungitur: Neque manus peccatorum dimoveat me .
6. 16. 54. Teacher: Fortitude, then, remains. But as temperance avails against the fall that is in free will, so fortitude avails against force, by which one can even be compelled, if he is less strong, to those things by which he may be overturned and lie most wretched. But this force is fittingly wont to be signified in the Scriptures by the name of "hand." And who, indeed, but sinners try to bring this force to bear? When, then, by this very thing the soul is fortified and guarded by the firmament of God, so that this can in no way befall it from anywhere, it bears a certain stable and, so to speak, impassible power, which—unless something displeases you—is rightly named fortitude; and I judge it is so called when there is added: And let not the hand of sinners move me. (See Ps 36:11 (35:12))
deMus.6.16.54
6. 16. 55. Discipulus: Imo aliter eam perfectissimam et beatissimam esse posse non video.
6. 16. 55. Student: On the contrary, I do not see how it could be otherwise most perfect and most blessed.
deMus.6.16.55
Magister: Haec ergo contemplatio, sanctificatio, impassibilitas, ordinatio eius, aut illae sunt quatuor virtutes perfectae atque consummatae; aut ne de nominibus cum res conveniant, frustra laboremus, pro istis virtutibus, quibus constituta in laboribus utitur anima, tales quaedam potentiae in aeterna ei vita sperandae sunt.
Teacher: This contemplation, then, sanctification, impassibility, and ordering of it, either are those four perfect and consummated virtues; or—lest we labor in vain about names when the things agree—in place of these virtues, which the soul uses while set amid labors, certain such powers are to be hoped for it in the eternal life.
deMus.6.16.55
6. 17. 56. Nos tantum meminerimus, quod ad susceptam praesentem disputationem maxime pertinet, id agi per providentiam Dei, per quam cuncta creavit et regit, ut etiam peccatrix et aerumnosa anima numeris agatur, et numeros agat usque ad infimam carnis corruptionem: qui certe numeri minus minusque pulchri esse possunt, penitus vero carere pulchritudine non possunt. Deus autem summe bonus, et summe iustus, nulli invidet pulchritudini, quae sive damnatione animae, sive regressione, sive permansione fabricatur. Numerus autem et ab uno incipit, et aequalitate ac similitudine pulcher est, et ordine copulatur. Quamobrem quisquis fatetur nullam esse naturam, quae non ut sit quidquid est, appetat unitatem, suique similis in quantum potest esse conetur, atque ordinem proprium vel locis vel temporibus, vel in corpore quodam libramento salutem suam teneat: debet fateri ab uno principio per aequalem illi ac similem speciem divitiis bonitatis eius, qua inter se unum et de uno unum carissima, ut ita dicam, caritate iunguntur, omnia facta esse atque condita quaecumque sunt, in quantumcumque sunt.
6. 17. 56. Let us only remember—what pertains most to the present discussion undertaken—that it comes about through the providence of God, by which he created and rules all things, that even the sinful and wretched soul is acted by numbers, and produces numbers, down to the lowest corruption of the flesh: which numbers can certainly be less and less beautiful, but cannot be wholly without beauty. But God, supremely good and supremely just, envies no beauty, which is fashioned whether by the damnation, or the regression, or the perseverance of the soul. Now number both begins from one, and is beautiful by equality and likeness, and is coupled by order. Therefore whoever admits that there is no nature which, in order to be whatever it is, does not seek unity, and try to be like itself as far as it can, and hold its own order, whether in places or in times, or by a certain balance in some body, its own welfare—he must admit that, from one principle, through a form equal and like to it, by the riches of his goodness, by which the One and the One-from-One are joined to each other in a love most dear, so to speak, all things have been made and founded, whatsoever they are, insofar as they are.
deMus.6.17.56
6. 17. 57. Quare ille versus a nobis propositus: Deus creator omnium, non solum auribus sono numeroso, sed multo magis est animae sententiae sanitate et veritate gratissimus. Nisi forte movet te tarditas eorum, ut mitius loquar, qui negant de nihilo fieri posse aliquid, cum id omnipotens Deus fecisse dicatur . An vero faber potest rationabilibus numeris qui sunt in arte eius, sensuales numeros qui sunt in consuetudine eius operari; et sensualibus numeris progressores illos quibus membra in operando movet, ad quos iam intervalla temporum pertinent, et his rursus formas visibiles de ligno fabricari, locorum intervallis numerosas: et rerum natura Dei nutibus serviens, ipsum lignum de terra et caeteris elementis facere non potest; et ipsa extrema non poterat de nullo? Imo et arboris locales numeros, temporales numeri antecedant necesse est. Nullum est enim stirpium genus quod non certis pro suo semine dimensionibus temporum et coalescat, et germinet, et in auras emicet, et folia explicet, et roboretur, et sive fructum, sive ipsius ligni occultissimis numeris vim rursus seminis referat: quanto magis animalium corpora, in quibus intervalla membrorum numerosam parilitatem multo magis aspectibus offerunt? An ista de elementis fieri possunt, et ipsa elementa non potuerunt fieri de nihilo? Quasi vero quidquam sit in eis vilius et abiectius quam terra est. Quae primo generalem speciem corporis habet, in qua unitas quaedam et numeri et ordo esse convincitur. Namque ab aliqua impertili nota in longitudinem necesse est porrigatur quaelibet eius quantumvis parva particula, tertiam latitudinem sumat, et quartam altitudinem qua corpus impletur. Unde ergo iste a primo usque ad quartum progressionis modus? Unde et aequalitas quoque partium, quae in longitudine et latitudine et altitudine reperitur? Unde corrationalitas quaedam (ita enim malui analogiam vocare), ut quam rationem habet longitudo ad impertilem notam, eamdem latitudo ad longitudinem, et ad latitudinem habeat altitudo? Unde, quaeso, ista, nisi ab illo summo atque aeterno principatu numerorum et similitudinis et aequalitatis et ordinis veniunt? Atqui haec si terrae ademeris, nihil erit. Quocirca omnipotens Deus terram fecit, et de nihilo terra facta est.
6. 17. 57. Therefore that verse proposed by us, Deus creator omnium, is most pleasing not only to the ears by its rhythmical sound, but much more to the soul by the soundness and truth of its meaning. Unless perhaps the slowness moves you—to speak more mildly—of those who deny that anything can be made from nothing, when almighty God is said to have done this. Or can a craftsman, by the rational numbers that are in his art, produce the sensual numbers that are in his practice, and, by the sensual numbers, those advancing ones by which he moves his members in working, to which now intervals of time belong, and by these again can visible forms, rhythmical in intervals of place, be fashioned from wood—and yet can the nature of things, serving the nods of God, not make the wood itself from earth and the other elements; and could those very elements not be made from nothing? Nay, even the local numbers of a tree must necessarily be preceded by temporal numbers. For there is no kind of plant which does not, by fixed measures of time proper to its own seed, both take root, and germinate, and shoot forth into the air, and unfold its leaves, and grow strong, and bear back, by the most hidden numbers of either the fruit or of the wood itself, the power of seed again: how much more the bodies of animals, in which the intervals of the members offer a rhythmical equality much more to the sight? Or can these things be made from the elements, and the elements themselves could not be made from nothing? As if, indeed, there were anything in them cheaper and more abject than earth is. Which first has the general appearance of a body, in which a certain unity and number and order is shown to be. For from some indivisible point any particle of it, however small, must be stretched out into length, take on a third dimension, breadth, and a fourth, height, by which a body is filled. Whence, then, this manner of progression from the first up to the fourth? Whence too the equality of parts, which is found in length and breadth and height? Whence a certain co-rationality (for so I have preferred to call analogy), so that the ratio which length has to the indivisible point, the same breadth has to length, and height to breadth? Whence, I ask, do these things come, except from that highest and eternal sovereignty of numbers and of likeness and equality and order? And yet, if you take these away from earth, it will be nothing. Therefore almighty God made earth, and earth was made from nothing.
deMus.6.17.57
6. 17. 58. Quid porro? ipsa species qua item a caeteris elementis terra discernitur, nonne et unum aliquid quantum accepit ostentat, et nulla pars eius a toto est dissimilis, et earumdem partium connexione atque concordia suo genere saluberrimam sedem infimam tenet? Cui superfunditur aquarum natura, nitens et ipsa ad unitatem, speciosior et perlucidior propter maiorem similitudinem partium, et custodiens locum ordinis et salutis suae. Quid de aeris natura dicam, multo faciliore complexu ad unitatem nitente, et tanto speciosiore aquis, quam illae terris sunt, tantoque superiore ad salutem? Quid de coeli supremo ambitu, quo tota universitas visibilium corporum terminatur, et summa in hoc genere species, ac saluberrima loci excellentia? Ista certe omnia quae carnalis sensus ministerio numeramus, et quaecumque in eis sunt, locales numeros qui videntur esse in aliquo statu, nisi praecedentibus intimis et in silentio temporalibus numeris qui sunt in motu, nec accipere illos possunt, nec habere. Illos itidem temporum intervallis agiles praecedit et modificat vitalis motus, serviens Domino rerum omnium, non temporalia habens digesta intervalla numerorum suorum, sed tempora ministrante potentia; supra quam rationales et intellectuales numeri beatarum animarum atque sanctarum, legem ipsam Dei, sine qua folium de arbore non cadit, et cui nostri capilli numerati sunt , nulla interposita natura excipientes, usque ad terrena et inferna iura transmittunt.
6. 17. 58. What further? That very appearance by which earth is distinguished from the other elements—does it not both display some one thing, in the measure it has received, and is no part of it unlike the whole, and, by the connection and concord of those same parts, hold, in its own kind, the lowest and most healthful seat? Over which is poured out the nature of the waters, itself too striving toward unity, more beautiful and more transparent because of the greater likeness of its parts, and keeping the place of its order and welfare. What shall I say of the nature of air, striving toward unity by a much easier embrace, and as much more beautiful than the waters as they are than the lands, and so much higher toward welfare? What of the supreme circuit of heaven, by which the whole universe of visible bodies is bounded, and the highest appearance in this kind, and the most healthful excellence of place? All these things, surely, which we number by the ministry of the carnal sense, and whatsoever are in them, can neither receive nor have the local numbers which seem to be in some fixed state, unless there precede the inmost and silent temporal numbers which are in motion. These same, agile in the intervals of times, a vital motion precedes and regulates, serving the Lord of all things, having not the temporal intervals of its numbers set in order, but a power supplying times; above which the rational and intellectual numbers of the blessed and holy souls transmit the very law of God—without which a leaf does not fall from a tree, and by whom our hairs are numbered (See Matt 10:29–30)—receiving it with no nature set between, all the way down to earthly and infernal rights.
deMus.6.17.58
6. 17. 59. Quae potui et sicut potui de tantis tantillus tecum contuli. Sermonem autem hunc nostrum mandatum litteris si qui legunt, sciant multo infirmioribus haec esse scripta, quam sunt illi qui unius summi Dei consubstantialem et incommutabilem Trinitatem, ex quo omnia, per quem omnia, in quo omnia duorum Testamentorum auctoritatem secuti venerantur et colunt eam credendo, sperando et diligendo. Hi enim non scintillantibus humanis ratiocinationibus, sed validissimo et flagrantissimo caritatis igne purgantur. Nos autem dum neglegendos esse non existimamus quos haeretici rationis et scientiae fallaci pollicitatione decipiunt; tardius incedimus, consideratione ipsarum viarum, quam sancti viri qui eas volando non dignantur attendere. Quod tamen facere non auderemus, nisi multos pios Ecclesiae catholicae matris optimae filios, qui puerilibus studiis loquendi ac disserendi facultatem quantum satis est consecuti essent, eadem refellendorum haereticorum necessitate fecisse videremus.
6. 17. 59. These things, so far as I could and as I could, I, so little, have considered with you about so great matters. But if any read this our discussion committed to writing, let them know that these things have been written for those far weaker than are those who, following the authority of the two Testaments, venerate and worship the consubstantial and unchangeable Trinity of the one highest God—from whom are all things, through whom are all things, in whom are all things (See Rom 11:36)—by believing, hoping, and loving it. For these are purified not by glittering human reasonings, but by the strongest and most flaming fire of love. But we, while we do not think that those should be neglected whom heretics deceive by a deceitful promise of reason and knowledge, walk more slowly, by the consideration of the very roads, than holy men who do not deign to attend to them, since they fly over them. Which yet we would not dare to do, did we not see that many pious sons of the catholic Church, our best mother—who in childhood studies had attained as much faculty of speaking and discussing as is enough—had done the same, by the same necessity of refuting heretics.
deMus.6.17.59

Notebook

Full View